Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Contents
Page 5-i
Contents
5.7
Contents
Appendix 5.6-A2-1
Appendix 5.6-A2-2
Appendix 5.6-A2-3
Appendix 5.6-A3-1
Appendix 5.6-A3-2
Appendix 5.6-A3-3
Appendix 5.6-A3-4
Appendix 5.6-A3-5
Appendix 5.6-A3-6
Appendix 5.6-A3-7
Appendix 5.6-A3-8
Appendix 5.6-A3-9
Appendix 5.6-A3-10
Appendix 5.6-A4-1
Appendix 5.6-A4-2
Appendix 5.6-A4-3
Appendix 5.6-A4-4
Appendix 5.6-A4-5
Appendix 5.6-A4-6
Appendix 5.6-A4-7
Appendix 5.6-A4-8
Appendix 5.6-A4-9
Appendix 5.6-A4-10
Appendix 5.6-A4-11
Appendix 5.6-A4-12
Appendix 5.6-A5-1
Appendix 5.6-A5-2
Appendix 5.6-A5-3
Appendix 5.6-A5-4
Appendix 5.6-A5-5
Appendix 5.6-A5-6
Appendix 5.6-A5-7
Appendix 5.6-A5-8
Appendix 5.6-A5-9
Appendix 5.6-A5-10
Appendix 5.6-A6-1
Appendix 5.6-A6-2
Appendix 5.6-A6-3
Appendix 5.6-A6-4
Appendix 5.6-A6-5
Appendix 5.6-A6-6
Appendix 5.6-A6-7
Appendix 5.6-A6-8
Appendix 5.6-A7-1
Appendix 5.6-A7-2
Appendix 5.6-A7-3
Appendix 5.6-A8-1
Appendix 5.6-A8-2
Appendix 5.6-A8-3
Appendix 5.6-A8-4
Appendix 5.6-A8-5
Appendix 5.6-A8-6
Appendix 5.6-A9-1
Appendix 5.6-A9-2
Appendix 5.6-A9-3
Appendix 5.6-A9-4
Page 5-iii
Contents
Appendix 5.6-A9-5
Appendix 5.6-A9-6
Appendix 5.6-A9-7
Appendix 5.6-A9-8
Appendix 5.6-A9-9
Appendix 5.6-A10-1
Appendix 5.9-A1-1
Appendix 5.9-A1-2
Appendix 5.9-A1-3
Appendix 5.9-A1-4
Appendix 5.9-A1-5
Appendix 5.9-A2-1
Appendix 5.9-A2-2
Appendix 5.9-A2-4
Appendix 5.9-A3-1
Appendix 5.9-A3-2
Appendix 5.9-A3-4
Appendix 5.9-A4-1
Appendix 5.9-A4-2
Appendix 5.9-A4-3
Appendix 5.9-A4-4
Appendix 5.9-A4-5
Appendix 5.9-A4-6
Appendix 5.9-A4-7
Appendix 5.9-A4-8
Appendix 5.9-A5-1
Appendix 5.9-A5-2
Appendix 5.9-A5-3
Appendix 5.9-A5-4
Appendix 5.9-A5-5
Appendix 5.9-A5-6
Appendix 5.9-A5-7
Appendix 5-B1
Appendix 5-B2
Appendix 5-B3
Appendix 5-B4
Appendix 5-B5
Appendix 5-B6
Appendix 5-B7
Appendix 5-B8
Appendix 5-B9
Appendix 5-B10
Appendix 5-B11
Appendix 5-B12
Appendix 5-B13
Appendix 5-B14
Appendix 5-B15
Page 5-iv
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
5.0General
The provisions in this section apply to the design of cast-in-place (CIP) and precast
concrete structures.
Design of concrete structures shall be based on the requirements and guidance cited
herein and in thecurrent AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, AASHTO
Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design, Special Provisions and the
Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction M41-10.
Page 5.0-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5.0-2
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
5.1Materials
5.1.1Concrete
A. Strength of Concrete Pacific NW aggregates have consistently resulted in
excellent concrete strengths, which may exceed 10,000 psi in 28 days. Specified
concrete strengths should be rounded tothe next highest 100 psi.
1. CIP Concrete Bridges Since conditions for placing and curing concrete
for CIP components are not as controlled as they are for precast bridge
components, Class 4000 concrete is typically used. Where significant economy
can be gained or structural requirements dictate, Class 5000 concrete may be
used with the approval of the Bridge Design Engineer, Bridge Construction
Office, and MaterialsLab.
2. Prestressed Concrete Girders Nominal 28-day concrete strength ('c) for
prestressed concrete girders is 7.0 ksi. Where higher strengths would eliminate
a line of girders, a maximum of 10.0 ksi canbe specified.
The minimum concrete compressive strength at release ('ci) for each prestressed
concrete girder shall be shown in the plans. For high strength concrete, the
compressive strength at release shall belimited to7.5ksi. Release strengths of up
to8.5 ksi can be achieved with extended curingfor special circumstances.
B. Classes of Concrete
1. Class 3000 Used in large sections with light to nominal reinforcement, mass
pours, sidewalks, curbs, gutters, and nonstructural concrete guardrail anchors,
luminaire bases.
2. Class 4000 Used in CIP post-tensioned or conventionally reinforced concrete
box girders, slabs, traffic and pedestrian barriers, approach slabs, footings, box
culverts, wing walls, curtain walls, retaining walls, columns, andcrossbeams.
3. Class 4000A Used for bridge approach slabs.
4. Class 4000D Used for CIP bridge decks.
5. Class 4000P Used for CIP pile and shaft.
6. Class 4000W Used underwater in seals.
7. Class 5000 or Higher Used in CIP post-tensioned concrete box girder
construction or in other special structural applications if significant economy
can be gained or structural requirements dictate. Class 5000 concrete is
available within a 30-mile radius of Seattle, Spokane, and Vancouver. Outside
this 30-mile radius, concrete suppliers may not have the quality control
procedures and expertise to supply Class 5000 concrete.
Page 5.1-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
The 28-day compressive design strengths ('c) are shown in Table 5.1.1-1.
Classes of Concrete
c (psi)
COMMERCIAL
2300
3000
3000
4000
4000W
2400*
4000P
3400**
5000
5000
6000
6000
Let x = relative strength to determine the age at which the concrete will reach
the design strength
100
110
64
70
(5.1.1-1)
Page 5.1-2
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Age
Relative Class
Strength 5000
Class
4000
Class
3000
Age
Relative Class
Strength 5000
Class
4000
Class
3000
Days
ksi
ksi
ksi
Days
ksi
ksi
ksi
35
1.75
1.40
1.05
20
91
4.55
3.64
2.73
43
2.15
1.72
1.29
21
93
4.65
3.72
2.79
50
2.50
2.00
1.50
22
94
4.70
3.76
2.82
55
2.75
2.20
1.65
23
95
4.75
3.80
2.85
59
2.95
2.36
1.77
24
96
4.80
3.84
2.88
63
3.15
2.52
1.89
25
97
4.85
3.88
2.91
67
3.35
2.68
2.01
26
98
4.90
3.92
2.94
10
70
3.5
2.80
2.10
27
99
4.95
3.96
2.97
11
73
3.65
2.92
2.19
28
100
5.00
4.00
3.00
12
75
3.75
3.00
2.25
30
102
5.10
4.08
3.06
13
77
3.85
3.08
2.31
40
110
5.50
4.40
3.30
14
79
3.95
3.16
2.37
50
115
5.75
4.60
3.45
15
81
4.05
3.24
2.43
60
120
6.00
4.80
3.60
16
83
4.15
3.32
2.49
70
125
6.25
5.00
3.75
17
85
4.25
3.34
2.55
80
129
6.45
5.16
3.87
18
87
4.35
3.48
2.61
90
131
6.55
5.24
3.93
19
89
4.45
3.56
2.67
100
133
6.70
5.40
4.00
5.1.11
11
associated with given
loadsshown by the equation
below.
5.1.12 1
(5.1.1-2)
Figure 5.1.1-1
provides creep coefficients for a range of typical initial concrete
5.1.31 12 .
strength values, ci, as a function of time from initial seven day steam cure
(ti=7days). The figure uses a volume-to-surface,
5.1.32humidity,
to 75 percent.
5 .1 .3-3
5 .1 .3-4
Page 5.1-3
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
( t , 7day , 5ksi)
( t , 7day , 6ksi)
( t , 7day , 7ksi)
( t , 7day , 8ksi)
( t , 7day , 9ksi)
0.75
( t , 7day , 10ksi)
( t , 7day , 11ksi)
0.5
( t , 7day , 12ksi)
0.25
3
500
110
1.5 10
2 10
t
(days)
CreepCoefficientPlot.xmcd
7/16/2010 2:50 PM
p. 1 / 1
Figure 5.1.1-1
JLBeaver/BSA
Page 5.1-4
Concrete placements with least dimension greater than 6feet should be considered
mass concrete, although smaller placements with least dimension greater than
3feet may also have problems with heat generation effects. Shafts need not be
considered mass concrete.
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
The temperature of mass concrete shall not exceed 160F. The temperature
difference between the geometric center of the concrete and the center of nearby
exterior surfaces shall not exceed 35F.
Concrete mix design optimization, such as using low-heat cement, fly ash or
slag cement, low-water/cement ratio, low cementitious materials content, larger
aggregate, etc. is acceptable as long as the concrete mix meets the requirements of
the Standard Specifications for the specified concrete class.
The ACI Manual of Concrete Practice Publication 207 and specifications used for
the Tacoma Narrows Bridge Project suspension cable anchorages (2003-2006) can
be used as references.
SCC may be specified for cast-in-place applications where the use of conventional
concrete could be challenging and problematic. Examples are where new concrete
is being cast up against an existing soffit, or in members with very dense/
congested reinforcing steel. Use of SCC for primary structural components such
as columns, crossbeams, slabs, etc. requires the approval of the WSDOT Bridge
DesignEngineer.
Page 5.1-5
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Page 5.1-6
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
ASTM A706 Grade 80 reinforcing steel shall not be used for oversized shafts
where in-ground plastic hinging is considered as a part of the EarthquakeResisting System (ERS).
ASTM A706 Grade 80 reinforcing steel shall not be used for transverse and
confinement reinforcement.
B. Sizes Reinforcing bars are referred to in the contract plans and specifications
by number and vary in size from #3 to #18. For bars up to and including #8, the
number of the bar coincides with the bar diameter in eighths of an inch. The #9,
#10, and #11 bars have diameters that provide areas equal to 1 1 square bars,
1 1 square bars and 1 1 square bars respectively. Similarly, the
#14 and #18 bars correspond to 1 1 and 2 2 square bars, respectively.
Appendix5.1-A3 shows the sizes, number, and various properties ofthe types of
bars used in Washington State.
C. Development
1. Tension Development Length Development length or anchorage of
reinforcement is required on both sides of a point of maximum stress at any
section of a reinforced concrete member. Development of reinforcement in
tension shall be per AASHTO LRFD 5.11.2.1.
Appendix 5.1-A4 shows the tension development length for both uncoated and
epoxy coated Grade 60 bars for normal weight concrete with specified strengths
of 4.0 to 6.0 ksi.
Page 5.1-7
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Lap splices, for either tension or compression bars, shall not be less than 2-0.
1. Tension Lap Splices Many of the same factors which affect development
length affect splices. Consequently, tension lap splices are a function of the
bars development length, ld. There are two classes of tension lap splices: Class
A and B. Designers are encouraged to splice bars atpoints of minimum stress
and to stagger lap splices along the length of the bars.
Appendix 5.1-A7 shows tension lap splices for both uncoated and epoxy coated
Grade 60 bars fornormal weight concrete with specified strengths of 4.0 to
6.0ksi.
Page 5.1-8
Spirals of bar sizes #4 through #6 are available on 5,000 lb coils. Spirals should be
limited to amaximum bar size of #6.
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
2. Compression
For compression members, the area of longitudinal reinforcement shall meet
the
1. T-Joint
The forces form a tension crack at 45 in the joint. Reinforcement
requirements ofas
AASHTO
LRFD
5.7.4.2
and AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic
shown in Figure5.1.2-1 ismore than twice as effective in developing the
Bridge Design 8.8. Additional lateral reinforcement requirements are given in AASHTO LRFD
strength of the corner than if the reinforcement was turned 180.
5.7.4 and the AASHTO Guide Specifications for LRFD Seismic Bridge Design.
I.
2. Normal Right Corners Corners subjected to bending as shown in Figure 5.1.2-2 will crack
Figure 5.1.2-3 tend to crack at the reentrant corner and fail in tension across the
radially in the corner outside of the main reinforcing steel. Smaller size reinforcing steel shall be
corner. If not properly reinforced, the resisting corner moment may be less than
provided in the corner to distribute the radial cracking.
3. Right or Obtuse Angle Corners Corners subjected to bending as shown in Figure 5.1.2-3 tend
Reinforced as shown in Figure 5.1.2-3, but without the diagonal reinforcing
to crack at the reentrant corner and fail in tension across the corner. If not properly reinforced, the
steel across the corner, the section will develop 85 percent of the ultimate
resisting corner moment may be less than the applied moment.
moment capacity of the wall. If the bends were rotated 180, only 30 percent of
Reinforced as shown in Figure 5.1.2-3, but without the diagonal reinforcing steel across the
the wall capacity would be developed.
corner, the section will develop 85% of the ultimate moment capacity of the wall. If the bends
were rotated 180, only 30% of the wall capacity would be developed.
Adding diagonal reinforcing steel across the corner, approximately equal to 50
percent of the main reinforcing steel, will develop the corner strength to fully
Adding diagonal reinforcing steel across the corner, approximately equal to 50% of the main
resist the applied moment. Extend the diagonal reinforcement past the corner
reinforcing steel, will develop the corner strength to fully resist the applied moment. Extend the
each direction for anchorage. Since this bar arrangement will fully develop the
diagonal reinforcement past the corner each direction for anchorage. Since this bar arrangement
resisting moment, a fillet in the corner is normally unnecessary.
will fully develop the resisting moment, a fillet in the corner is normally unnecessary.
NormalRight
RightCorner
Corner
Normal
ReinforcingDetails
Reinforcing
Details
Figure
5.1.2-2
Figure
5.1.2-2
Right
Rightor
orObtuse
ObtuseAngle
AngleCorner
CornerReinforcingDetails
Reinforcing Details
Figure
5.1.2-3
Figure
5.1.2-3
J. Welded Wire Reinforcement in Precast Prestressed Girders Welded wire reinforcement can be
used to replace mild steel reinforcement in precast prestressed girders. Welded wire reinforcement
shall meet all AASHTO requirements (see AASHTO LRFD 5.4.3, 5.8.2.6, 5.8.2.8, C.5.8.2.8, 5.10.6.3,
5.10.7, 5.10.8, 5.11.2.6.3, etc.).
WSDOT
Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.14
Page 5.1-9
The yield strength shall be greater than or equal to 60 ksi. The design yield strength shall be 60 ksi.
April Welded wire reinforcement shall be deformed. Welded wire reinforcement shall have the same area
2015
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Welded wire reinforcement shall meet all AASHTO requirements (see AASHTO
LRFD 5.8.2.6, 5.8.2.8, 5.10.3, 5.10.6.3, 5.10.7, 5.10.8, 5.10.10, 5.11.2.5, 5.11.2.6.3,
5.11.6, etc.).
Welded wire reinforcement shall be deformed. The yield strength shall be limited
to a maximum of 75 ksi.
Longitudinal wires and welds shall be excluded from regions with high shear
demands, including girder webs, and are limited to the flange areas as described
in AASHTO LRFD 5.8.2.8. Longitudinal wires for anchorage of welded wire
reinforcement shall have an area of 40 percent or more of the area of the wire being
anchored as described in ASTM A497 but shall not be less than D4.
Epoxy-coated wire and welded wire reinforcement shall conform to Std. Spec.
Section 9-07.3 with the exception that ASTM A884 Class A Type I shall be used
instead of ASTM A775.
Page 5.1-10
All WSDOT designs are based on low relaxation strands using either 0.5 or 0.6
diameter strands for girders, and or 7/16 diameter strands for stay-in-place
precast deck panels. Properties of uncoated and epoxy-coated prestressing stands
are shown in Appendix 5.1-A8. 0.62 and 0.7 diameter strands may be used for
top temporary strands in prestressed concrete girders.
Provide adequate concrete cover and consider use of epoxy coated prestressing
reinforcement in coastal areas or where members are directly exposed to salt water.
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.14
April 2015
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
There are practical limitations to how close the centroid of harped strands
can be to the bottom of a girder. The minimum design value for this shall be
determined using the following guide: Up to 12 harped strands are placed in a
single bundle with the centroid 4 above the bottom of the girder. Additional
strands are placed in twelve-strand bundles with centroids at 3 spacing
vertically upwards.
At the girder ends, the strands are splayed to a normal pattern. The centroid of
strands at both the girder end and the harping point may be varied to suit girder
stress requirements.
The slope of any individual harped strands shall not be steeper than 8 horizontal
to 1 vertical for 0.6 diameter strands, and 6 horizontal to 1 vertical for 0.5
diameter strands.
The harped strand exit location at the girder ends shall be held as low as
possible while maintaining the concrete stresses within allowable limits.
The development length of bonded uncoated & coated prestressing strands are
shown in Appendix5.1-A8.
Page 5.1-11
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Extended strands must be developed in the short distance within the diaphragm
(between two girder ends at intermediate piers). This is normally accomplished
by requiring strand chucks and anchors as shown in Figure 5.1.3-1. Strand
anchors are normally installed at 1-9 from the girder ends.
The designer shall calculate the number of extended straight strands needed to
develop the required capacity at the end of the girder. The number of extended
strands shall not be less than four.
For fixed intermediate piers at the Extreme Event I limit state, the total number
of extended strands for each girder end shall not be less than:
1
(5.1.3-1)
Where:
Msei
= Moment due to overstrength plastic moment capacity of the column
and associated overstrength plastic shear, either within or outside
the effective width, per girder, kip-ft
MSIDL = Moment due to superimposed dead loads (traffic barrier, sidewalk,
etc.) per girder, kip-ft
K = Span moment distribution factor as shown in Figure 5.1.3-2
(use maximum of K1 and K2)
Aps
= Area of each extended strand, in2
py = Yield strength of prestressing steel specified in AASHTO LRFD
Table 5.4.4.1-1, ksi
d
= Distance from top of deck slab to c.g. of extended strands, in
Flexural resistance factor, 1.0
5.1.11
= 11
5.1.11
11
The
plastic
hinging
moment at the c.g. of the superstructure is calculated using
1
5.1.12
1
5.1.12 the
following:
5.1.31
5.1.31
5.1.32
5.1.32
12
12 .
(5.1.3-2)
Where:
= Plastic overstrength moment at top of column, kip-ft
Lc
Column
clearwidth
height used to determine overstrength
For
5 .1 .3-3
girders=
within
the effective
shear associated with the overstrength moments, ft
5.1.32WhereA
5.1.32WhereA
5 .1 .3-4
5 .1 .3-4
5.1.35
5.1.35
5.1.36
5.1.36
5.1.37
5.1.37
5.1.41:
5.1.41:
Page 5.1-12
5.1.42:
5.1.42:
For girders outside the effective width
If
then
If
then
then
If
then
If
h
Lc
Therefore, x 110%
Chapter 5
5.1.11
70Therefore,
xx110%
5.1.11
Therefore,
110%
64
7070 6464
70
64
For precast,
prestressed
girders
with1
cast-in-place deck slabs,
where some girders are outside the
t,cast-in-place
ti
1elastic
5.1.12
1
x
100
t,
t
5.1.12
total
t,
5.1.12
For
prestressed
concrete
girders
slabs,
where
some
total
elastic
iwith
total
elastic
total
elastic
iti for
effective
widths
and
the
effective
widths
each column do notdeck
overlap,
two-thirds
of the
plastic
11
Therefore, x 110%
70
64
x
100
hinging
moment
at
the
c.g.
of the superstructure shall be resisted by girders within the effective
girders
are
outside
the
effective
widths
and
the
effective
widths
for
each
Therefore, x 110%
70
64
12
width.5.1.31
The
remaining
one-third shall be resisted by girders outside the effective width. The plastic
overlap,
12
12
5.1.31
column
do
not
two-thirds
of
the
plastic
hinging
5.1.31
12total elastic 1 t, ti
For
girders
within
effectiveoutside
width
bythe
remaining
one-third
shall
be
resisted
girders
the effective width. The
5.1.32
5.1.32
31 12 .
5.1.32
(5 .1 .3-3)
plastic
hinging
moment
per
girder
is
calculated
using
the
following:
12
32
For
Forgirderswithintheeffectivewidth
5 .1 .3-35.1.33
girders
withinthe
theeffective
effective
width
5 .1 .3-3
For
girders
within
width
5.1.33
For
girders
outside
the
effective
width
Forgirderswithintheeffectivewidth
(5.1.3-3)
(5 .1 .3-4)
5 .1 .3-45.1.34
5 .1 .3-4
the effective width
girders
outside
Forgirdersoutsidetheeffectivewidth
(5.1.3-4)
Forgirderswithintheeffectivewidth
33
For
5.1.34
Forgirdersoutsidetheeffectivewidth
If
then
Forgirderswithintheeffectivewidth
(5 .1 .3-5)
5.1.355.1.35
If
then
5.1.35
If
then
then
If
(5.1.3-5)
then
5.1.35
If
Forgirdersoutsidetheeffectivewidth
34
Forgirdersoutsidetheeffectivewidth
If
then
then
5.1.36
If
then
5.1.36
If
then
5.1.36
If
(5 .1 .3-6)
(5.1.3-6)
then
5.1.36
If
then
35 If
then
If
Where:
Where:
36
If then
then
If
= =
Number of girders outside theeffective
effective
width
41:
42:
43: 1
1
43where:
here:
For
prestressed
concrete girders with cast-in-place deck slabs, where all girders
For
precast, prestressed girders with cast-in-place deck slabs, where all girders are within the
areeffective
withinwidth
the effective
width
or for
theeach
effective
widthsthefor
eachhinging
column
overlap,
or theeffective
widths
column overlap,
plastic
moment
at the
the
plastic
hinging
moment
at
the
c.g.
of
the
superstructure
shall
be
resisted
by
c.g. of the superstructure shall be resisted by all
girders
within
the
effective
width.
The
plastic
5.1.41:
5.1.41:
5.1.41:
5.1.41:
5.1.42:
5.1.42:
5.1.42:
5.1.42:
(5 .1 .3-7)
(5.1.3-7)
5.1.43:
5.1.43:
5.1.43:
1
5.1.43:
111
The effective width for the extended strand calculation shall be taken as:
5.1.43where:
5.1.43where:
5.1.43where:
5.1.43where:
The effective width for the extended strand calculation shall be taken as:
Where:
Dc =
Ds =
2
2
2
2V
V
V
V 5.1.3-3
Diameter or width of column, see Figure
L
LLL
(5.1.3-8)
2
SS
see Figure 5.1.3-3
S
S
H
V
H
H
H
R
L
R
R
R
See
Appendix
5-B10 for a design example.
V
L
S
f
fpES
fpED
fpLT
5.1.44:f
ffpT
f
f
fpES
fpED
5.1.44:f
5.1.44:f
ff
ff
pT
pRO
pES
pED
pLT
pT
pRO
5.1.44:f
fpLT
pRO
pES
pED
pLT
SH pT
fpRO
R
H
R
.55
5.1.45:
.55
.55
5.1.45:
5.1.45:
.55
5.1.45:
5.1.46:
5.1.46:
45:
.55 5.1.46:
5.1.46:
.55
5.1.47:
5.1.47:
5.1.47:
46:
5.1.47:
47:
Page 5.1-13
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Strand
Development
Figure 5.1.3-1
Page 5.1-14
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Continuity of extended strands is essential for all prestressed concrete girder bridges
with fixed diaphragms at intermediate piers. Strand continuity may be achieved by
directly overlapping extended strands as shown in Figure 5.1.3-4, by use of strand
ties as shown in Figure 5.1.3-5, by the use of the crossbeam ties as shown in Figure
5.1.3-6 along with strand ties, or by a combination of all three methods. The following
methods in order of hierarchy shall be used for all prestressed concrete girders for
creating continuity of extended strands:
Method 2 Strand ties shall be used at intermediate piers with a girder angle point
Direct extended strands overlapping shall be used at intermediate piers without any angle poin
due to horizontal curvature
where extended strands are not parallel and would cross
to horizontal curvature and for any crossbeam width. This is the preferred method of achievin
during girder placement. Crossbeam
shall
be greater
than or equal
to 6 ft
extended strandwidths
continuity.
Congestion
of reinforcement
and girder setting constructability sha
considered when large numbers of extended strands are required. In these cases, strand ties m
measured along the skew. It is preferable that strand ties be used for all extended
used inbecomes
conjunctiontoo
withcongested
extended strands.
strands, however if the region
for rebar placement and
Method
2:
concrete consolidation, additional forces may be carried by crossbeam ties up to a
Strand ties shall be used at intermediate piers with a girder
angle point due to horizontal curv
maximum limit as specified
in equation 5.1.3-8.
The area of transverse tiescrossbeam shall be increased to provide sufficient lap for the strand ties.
considered effective for strand ties development in the
The
area
of transverse ties considered effective for strand ties development in the lower crossb
exceed:
lower crossbeam (As) shall not
Method 1:
where extended strands are not parallel and would cross during girder placement. Crossbeam
limit as specified in equation 5.1.3-8. If this limit is exceeded, the geometry of the width of th
Where:
Aps =
fpy =
ns =
fye =
=
2
Where:
(5.1.3-9)
(5.1.3-9)
2
Area of strand A
ties,
Area
of strand ties, in2
ps =in
Yield strength of
extended
strands,
ksi strands, ksi
Yield strength
of extended
fpy =
Number of extended strands that are spliced with strand and crossbeam ties
s = Number of extended strands that are spliced with strand and crossbeam ties
Expected yieldnstrength
of transverse tie reinforcement, ksi
Two-thirds of As shall be placed directly below the girder and the remainder of As
Two-thirds of As shall be placed directly below the girder and the remainder of As shall be pla
shall be placed outside theoutside the bottom flange width as
bottom flange width as shown
Figure
5.1.3-6.
shown in
in Figure
5.1.3-6.
Thebe
size
of same
strand ties shall be the same as the extended strands, and shall be placed at the sam
The size of strand ties shall
the
as the extended strands, and shall be placed
level
and
proximity
of the extended
strands.
at the same level and proximity of the extended
strands.
Page 5.1-15
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Overlapping Extended
Extended Strand
Overlapping
Strand
Figure
Figure5.1.3-4
5.1.3-4
Strand Ties
Figure 5.1.3-5
Page 5.1-16
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Lower
Crossbeam Ties
Lower
Crossbeam
Ties
Figure
5.1.3-6
Figure
5.1.3-6
x x 100100
5.1.11
Therefore,
5.1.11
Therefore,
x x
70 70 64 64
110%
110%
5.1.12
total
total
AASHTO LRFD
Specifications
outline
the shall
methodbe
of used
predicting
prestressexcept
losses forasusual
prestressed
usual prestressed
concrete
bridges
that
in design
notedbelow.
concrete bridges that shall be used in design except as notedbelow.
12
12
5.1.31
5.1.31
A. Instantaneous
Losses
A. Instantaneous
Losses
.
1. Elastic
Transfer
of
prestress
forces into forces
the girderinto
endsthe
results in an
Shortening of
1. Elastic
Shortening
ofConcrete
Concrete
Transfer
of
prestress
loss
instantaneous
elastic loss.The
prestress
due
to
elastic
5.1.32
5.1.32
results
prestressed
concrete girder
elastic loss. The
ends
in an instantaneous
dependent losses to determine the total losses. The loss due to elastic shortening shall be taken as
prestress
loss
due
to
elastic
shortening
shall
be
added
to
the
time dependent
per AASHTO LRFD 5.9.5.2.3.
lossesFor pretensioned member and low-relaxation strands,
to determine
total
losses.
The loss due to elastic shortening shall be
5 .1 .3-3the
girders
within
effective
width
pu. For
5 .1 .3-3
ForFor
girders
within
thethe
effective
width
cgp may be calculated based on 0.7
takenpost-tensioned members with bonded tendons,
as per AASHTO LRFD5.9.5.2.3.
cgp may be calculated based on prestressing force
may be
calculated
For pretensioned
member
and
low-relaxation
strands,
5 .1 .3-4
girders
outside
effective
width
5 .1 .3-4
ForFor
girders
outside
thethe
effective
width
cgp
2. Anchorage
The
anchor
Set Loss
set
loss shall be based on slippage for design purposes.
may be
basedAnchor
on 0.7
pu. For post-tensioned members with bonded tendons,
set loss and the length affected by anchor set loss is shown in Figure
5.1.4-1.cgp
calculated based
on
prestressing
force
after
jacking
at
the
section
of
maximum
5.1.35 If
If
then
5.1.35
then
moment.
set loss
then
5.1.36
If
If
2. Anchorage5.1.36
Set
Loss The
anchor
shall
bebased
on
slippage
for
then
design purposes. Anchor set loss and the length affected by anchor set loss is
shown in Figure
5.1.4-1.
5.1.37
5.1.37
5.1.41:
5.1.41:
(5.1.4-1)
5.1.42:
5.1.42:
(5.1.4-2)
5.1.43:
5.1.43:
11
where:
where:
2
VV 2
L L
S S
Page 5.1-17
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
5.1.11
11
5.1.12 1
5.1.31
5.1.32
5 .1 .3-3
12
For girders
within the effective width
`Anchorage
Set Loss
Figure 5.1.4-1
3. Friction Losses
occurring
and width
prior to
losses
5 .1 .3-4 Friction
girders during
outside jacking
the effective
For
anchoring depend on the system and materials used. For a rigid spiral
shall be 0.20
and K=0.0002. For
galvanized 5.1.35
ferrous metal
Ifduct
then
system,
plastic ducts, the designer shall use the values shown in AASHTO LRFD
Table5.9.5.2.2b.
then
5.1.36
If
To avoid the substantial friction loss caused by sharp tendon curvature in the
flare
out
from a stacked arrangement towards
end regions5.1.37
where the
tendons
the bearing plates, use 0.10 times the span length or 20feet as the minimum
5.1.41:Therecommended
flared tendons is 200feet. In the special cases where sharp curvature cannot be
avoided, extra horizontal and
vertical
ties shall be added along the concave side
5.1.42:
5.1.43: 1
5.1.44:f
ffriction
fpLTthe
structure,
When summing
the angles
along
pT ffor
pROtotal
pES floss
pED
horizontal curvature of the tendons as well as horizontal and vertical roadway
curvature shall
be included
in the
summation.
The
.55
5.1.45:
angles for horizontally and
5.1.47:
5.1.47where:3
Page 5.1-18
(5.1.4-3)
3 .
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
=
=
=
(5 .1 .4-4)
(5 .1 .4-4)
(5.1.4-4)
(5 .1 .4-4)
The total
prestress loss may be estimated as:
estimated as:
tThe total prestress loss may be
(5 .1 .4-5)
(5.1.4-5)
(5 .1 .4-5)
(5 .1 .4-5)
Initial relaxation that occurs between the time of strand stressing and prestress
The
first be
termestimatedas:
relates to iInitial relaxation that occurs between the time of strand stressing and prestress
transfer
may
The first term relates to iInitial relaxation that occurs between the time of strand stressing and prestress
transfer may be estimated as:.
The firstmay be estimated as:.
term relates to iInitial relaxation that occurs between the time of strand stressing and prestress
transfer
transfer may be estimated as:.
(5 .1 .4-56)
(5.1.4-6)
(5 .1 .4-56)
(5 .1 .4-56)
Where:
Where:
t = Duration of time between strand stressing and prestress transfer, typically 1
Where:
t = Duration of time between strand stressing and prestress transfer, typically 1 day.
day.
Where:
tfpj == Duration of time between strand stressing and prestress transfer, typically 1 day.
Jacking stress
= Jacking
Duration of time between strand stressing and prestress transfer, typically 1 day.
fpj =
stressof the strand
stress
ftfpjpy =
= Jacking
Yield strength
= Yield
Jacking
stress ofofthe
pj =
fpy =
strength
the
strand
ffpy
Yield
strength
strand
Long term time dependent losses, fpLT, are computed in accordance with the
Long term time dependent losses, fpLT, are computed in accordance with the refined estimates of
refinedAASHTO
estimates
AASHTO
LRFD
5.9.5.4
or ain detailed
time-step
method.
Elastic
Long
term LRFD
timeofdependent
fpLTtime-step
, are
computed
accordance
refined
estimates
of
5.9.5.4 orlosses,
a detailed
method.
Elastic
gain with
due tothedeck
shrinkage
shall be
Long
term
time
dependent
losses,
f
,
are
computed
in
accordance
with
the
refined
estimates
of
pLT
AASHTO
LRFD
5.9.5.4
or
a
detailed
time-step
method.
Elastic
gain
due
to
deck
shrinkage
shall be
gain due
to deckseparately.
shrinkage shall be considered separately.
considered
AASHTO LRFD
5.9.5.4 or a detailed time-step method. Elastic gain due to deck shrinkage shall be
considered
separately.
considered
separately.
, accounts
for elastic
shortening
and is computed in
Elastic
shortening,
The ,second
term, fpES,in
is computed
accordance
with
AASHTO
ElasticElastic
shortening,
fThe
pESsecond
shortening,
term,
fpES,, accounts for elastic shortening and is computed in
accordance
with AASHTO
LRFD
5.9.5.2.3a.
Elastic shortening,
The second
term,
fpES,, accounts for elastic shortening and is computed in
LRFD5.9.5.2.3a.
accordance
with AASHTO
LRFD
5.9.5.2.3a.
accordance
5.9.5.2.3a.
The elastic with
gain AASHTO
due to deckLRFD
placement,
and superimposed dead loads and live loads is taken to be:
The elastic gain due to deck placement, and superimposed dead loads and live loads is taken to be:
)loads
due
to
+
and (
+
+ +
live loads is taken to be:
The
elastic=gain
deck
placement,
superimposed
dead
and
+
( + +
) +
WSDOT Bridge Design ManualM
23-50.14
Page 5.1-19
=
( + +
) +
(5 .1 .4-67)
April 2015
(5 .1 .4-67)
(5 .1 .4-67)
Formatte
Formatte
Formatte
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
The elastic gain due to deck placement, superimposed dead loads and live loads is
taken to be:
=
( + + ) +
(5.1.4-7)
(5 .1 .4-7)
Where:
= Modulus of elasticity of the prestressing strand
Ep
Where: Ec = Modulus of elasticity of the concrete at the time of loading
=
Moment
caused byofdeck
slab placement
Modulus
of elasticity
the prestressing
strand
Ep Mslab=
= Moment
caused byofdiaphragms
other
external
loads applied to the
= Modulus
of elasticity
the concreteand
at the
time
of loading
Ec Mdiaphragms
girder section
= Moment caused by deck slab placement
Mslab non-composite
Msidl =
caused by all superimposed dead loads including traffic barriers
= Moment
Moment caused by diaphragms and other external loads applied to the
Mdiaphragms
and
overlays
non-composite girder section
Moment caused by live load and dynamic load allowance
Moment caused by all superimposed dead loads including traffic barriers
MsidlMLL+=IM =
LL
= Live load factor (1.0 for Service I and 0.8 for Service III)
and overlays
eps
= Eccentricity of the prestressing strand
Moment caused by live
and dynamic load
allowance
MLL+IM
I
= =
Moment of inertia of load
the non-composite
girder
LiveMoment
load factor
(1.0
for
Service
I
and
0.8
for
Service
III)
LL Ig = =
of inertia of the composite girder
c
Eccentricity
of
the
prestressing
strand
eps Y = =
Location of the centroid of the non-composite girder measured from
bg
= Moment
of inertia
of girder
the non-composite girder
Ig
the bottom
of the
Moment
of inertia
the composite
girder girder measured from
Ic Ybc = =
Location
of the of
centroid
of the composite
the bottom
the girder
= Location
of theofcentroid
of the non-composite girder measured from the bottom
Ybg
of the girder
The elastic gain due to slab shrinkage, fpSS, shall be computed in accordance with
= Location of the centroid of the composite girder measured from the bottom
Ybc
AASHTO LRFD
Deck shrinkage shall be considered as an external
of the5.9.5.4.3d.
girder
force applied to the composite section for the Service I, Service III, and Fatigue I
limit states. This force is applied at the center of the deck with an eccentricity from
the
center of the deck to the center of gravity
of the composite section. This force
The elastic gain due to slab shrinkage, f
pSS, shall be computed in accordance with AASHTO
causes
compression
in
the
top
of
the
girder,
tension
bottom
of the
girder,
andcomposite
LRFD 5.9.5.4.3d. Deck shrinkage shall be considered asinanthe
external
force
applied
to the
an
increase
in Service
the effective
prestress
(anIelastic
gain).This
Theforce
deckis shrinkage
section
for the
I, Service
III, andforce
Fatigue
limit states.
applied at the center of the
strain
shall
be
computed
as
50%
of
the
strain
determined
by
AASHTO
LRFD
deck with an eccentricity from the center of the deck to the center of gravity of
the composite section.
Equation
5.4.2.3.3-1.
This force causes compression in the top of the girder, tension in the bottom of the girder, and an
increase in the effective prestress force (an elastic gain). The deck shrinkage strain shall be computed as
E. Temporary
Losses For checking stresses during release, lifting, transportation,
50% of the strain determined by AASHTO LRFD Equation 5.4.2.3.3-1.
and erection of prestressed concrete girders, the elastic and time-dependent losses
E. may
For checking
stresses during release, lifting, transportation, and erection of
Temporary
Lossesbased
be computed
on the followingassumptions.
prestressed girders, the elastic and time-dependent losses may be computed based on the following
1.
Lifting of Girders From Casting Beds For normal construction, forms are
assumptions.
stripped and girders are lifted from the casting bed within oneday.
1. Lifting of Girders From Casting Beds For normal construction, forms are stripped and girders
2. Transportation
Girders are most difficult
are lifted from the casting bed within one
day. to transport at a young age. The
hauling configuration causes reduced dead load moments in the girder and
2. Transportation Girders are most difficult to transport at a young age. The hauling configuration
the
potential for overstress between the harping points. Overstress may also
causes reduced dead load moments in the girder and the potential for overstress between the
occur
at points.
the support
points
depending
the trucking
harping
Overstress
may
also occuron
at the
the prestressing
support pointsand
depending
on the prestressing and
configuration.
This
is
compounded
by
the
magnitude
of
the
prestress
force not
the trucking configuration. This is compounded by the magnitude of the prestress
force not having
having
been reduced by losses. For an aggressive construction schedule girders
been reduced by losses. For an aggressive construction schedule girders are typically transported to
are
typically transported
the job site around day
10. to the job site around day10.
When losses are estimated by the Approximate Estimate of AASHTO LRFD 5.9.5.3, the losses
at the time of hauling may be estimated by:
(5 .1 .4-7)
Page 5.1-20
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
(5 .1 .4-8)
Where:
fpTH
Where: fpH
=
=
3. Erection During construction the non-composite girders must carry the full
weight of the deck slab and interior diaphragms. This loading typically occurs
around 120 days for a normal constructionschedule.
4. Final Configuration The composite slab and girder section must carry all
conceivable loads including superimposed dead loads such as traffic barriers,
overlays, and live loads. It is assumed that superimposed dead loads are placed
at 120 days and final losses occur at 2,000days.
5.1.5 Prestressing Anchorage Systems
There are numerous prestressing systems. Most systems combine a method of
prestressing the strands with amethod of anchoring it to concrete.
WSDOT requires approval of all multi-strand and/or bar anchorages used in
prestressed concrete bridges asdescribed in Standard Specifications 6-02.3(26).
5.1.6 Post-Tensioning Ducts
Post-tensioning ducts shall meet the requirements of Standard Specifications
6-02.3(26)E.
Ducts for longitudinal post-tensioning tendons in spliced prestressed concrete I-girders
shall be made of rigid galvanized spiral ferrous metal to maintain standard girder
concrete cover requirements.
Page 5.1-21
Concrete Structures
Page 5.1-22
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Stress
Tensile
Compressive
Temporary
Stress at
Shipping and
Erection
Tensile
Compressive
Final Stresses
at Service
Load
Final Stresses
at Fatigue
Load
Tensile
Compressive
Compressive
Location
Allowable Stress
5.2.31table:
0.0948
. 19
sufficient
to resist tensile
force 0.2
.. 19
19
0.65
intheconcrete
5.2.31table:0.0948 0.2
0.65
. 19
0.65
All Locations
0.65
0.0948
5.2.31table:
0.0948
0.2
5.2.31table:
0.0948
0.2
.
19
5.2.31table:
0.2
In areas
other than0.0948
the precompressed
0.65
0.0948
5.2.31table:0.0948
0.0948
0.2
0.0948
0.65
19
reinforcement
0.0948
0.19
.. 19
19
0.19
0.19
0.65
0.0948
0.65
0.19
0.24
0.65
0.24
0.24
0.0948
0.24
0.19
0.0948
In areas other than the precompressed
0.19
0.19
0.65
tensile zone and with bonded
0.19
0.19
0.24
0.19
0.65
0.19
0.19
0.65
0.65
0.0
impact
0.24
0.24
0.19
0.0
0.65
0.24
0.65
0.19
0.45
0.0
0.19
reinforcement, after temporary top strand
0.45
0.19
0.45
0.60
detensioning
0.65
0.0
0.65
0.60
0.45
0.65
0.60
0.65
0.60
All locations
0.40
0.0
0.45
0.0
0.40
0.60
0.0
Precompressed tensile zone
0.40
0.40
0.0
0.45
0.60
Effective
prestress and permanent loads
0.45
0.40
0.45
0.45
5.2.41:
Effective
prestress, permanent
loads and
0.60
0.40
0.60
5.2.41:
transient
loads
0.60
5.2.41:
0.60
5.2.41:
Fatigue
I Load Combination
plus one-half 0.5 0.40
5.2.42:
0.58
0.25 1 1.0
5.2.41:
0.40
0.58
permanent
0.40
effective
prestress 0.5
and
loads
1
1.0
5.2.42:
0.25
0.40
1.0
5.2.42:
0.5
0.58
0.25
5.2.41:
0.5
0.650
5.2.42:
1
1.0 0.15 1 0.9
0.5 5.2.43:
0.58 0.25
5.2.43:
1 0.9
0.5
0.650
0.15
Allowable Stresses
in
Prestressed
Concrete
Members
1
0.9
5.2.43:
0.5
0.650
0.15
5.2.41:
5.2.43:
0.5
5.2.41:Table 5.2.1-1
1
1
0.9
1.0
5.2.42:
0.5
0.650
0.58
0.15
0.25
5.2.41:
0.5
0.616
0.650 0.15
5.2.41:
1
0.9 0.20 1 0.95
5.2.43:
0.5
5.2.44:
1
5.2.44:
0.5
0.616
0.20
0.95
5.2.42:
0.5
5.2.44:
0.616
0.20
0.95
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.14
1
1
1.0
1.0 Page 5.2-1
5.2.42:
0.5
0.58
0.58
0.25
0.25
5.2.44:
0.5
0.616
0.20
0.95
1
1.0
5.2.42:
0.5
0.58
0.25
0.9
5.2.43:
0.650
0.15
April 2015
1
1.0
5.2.42:
0.5 5.2.45:
0.58 0.25
0.95
5.2.44:
0.5 0.616 0.20
0.15
5.2.45:
1 0.9
5.2.43:
0.5
0.650
0.0948 ()
0.19 ()
0.0948 ()
0.19 ()
0.24 ()
Concrete Structures
5.2.2
Strength-Limit
5.2.2-1
table: 0.0948 State
0.2 ()
5.2.2-1 table:
0.19 ()
0.24 ()
0.19 ()
0.24 ()
()
0.65
0.19LRFD
shall be per
AASHTO
0.19 ()
Chapter 5
5.7.
0.65
For prestressed concrete girders, the approximate methods
LRFD
0.0 of AASHTO
2, 23.
0.65
0.0
0.45
5.2.2-1 table:approaches
0.0948 such
0.2
Strain compatibility
as()
the PCI Bridge
Design
Manual3 method
Nonlinear
(PCI BDM Section 8.2.2.5)0.0948
and the
Strain0.0
Compatibility
()
0.45 Analysis
0.60
23
()
.
19
method in the PCI Journal are recommended. In addition
to the effective area of
()
0.45
and the mild reinforcement
0.60
the deck, the top flange of the0.19
girder
in the
deck and the
0.40
0.65
0.0948 0.2top
()
flange of the girder may be included in the analysis.
0.60
. 19 ()
()
section properties5.2.2-1:
is shown in0.19
Figure
5.6.2-1. +0.40
0.75
0.25 1 1.0
= 0.583
5.2.2-2:
()
0.19
0.75 = 0.650 + 0.15
1 0.9
0.0
5.2.2-2:
0.75 = 0.616
+0.19
0.20 ()
1 0.95
0.45
5.2.2-1:
=
=
(5.2.2-1)
5.2.2-3:
0.75
=
0.616
+
0.20
0.95
0.65
()
0.24
5.2.2-1:
= =
0.60
However,
if:
2
5.2.2-2:
=
0.0
1
5.2.2-1:0.19 ()
= 0.40
=
2
5.2.2-2:
=
(5.2.2-2)
0.45
1
1
2 2
0.65 =
5.2.2-3:
5.2.2-1:
0.755.2.2-2:
= 0.583 +0.25
1
1
1.0
=
1
Equation (2) can be substituted
into equation
(1) and
0.60solved
2 for A :
5.2.2-3:
= 1 2 s
0.0
1
0.9
0.005
=
5.2.2-2:
0.75 5.2.2-4:
= 0.650 + 0.15
0.003
1
2 0.40
1
2
=
5.2.2-3: 0.45
(5.2.2-3)
1
5.2.2-4:
= 0.003 = 0.005
5.2.2-1:
0.75
5.2.2-3:
0.75Where:
= 0.616
1=0.583
0.95 + 0.25 1
1
1.0
1
0.60+0.20
2
=
0.003
0.005
5.2.2-4:
tension reinforcement
As = Area of
(in
)
Mu = 0.40
Factored
moment
(kip-in)
0.75
0.9 1 1
5.2.2-2:
=
0.650
+
0.15
1
5.2.2-1:
=
=
=
c = Specified
compressive
strength of concrete
(ksi)
2
1 reinforcement
1
(ksi)
y
0.75 = 0.583 + 0.25
1.0
b = Width of0.75
the compression
face
(in) 1 0.95
=
0.616
+
0.20
5.2.2-2:
= 5.2.2-3:
()
5.2.2-3:
0.19
5.2.2-1:
5.2.2-2:
5.2.2-3:
5.2.2-1:
5.2.2-2:
5.2.2-3:
5.2.2-4:
1
= Distance from compression face to centroid of tension reinf. (in)
d
0.9 0.9
0.75 = 0.650 + 0.15
=
1
5.2.2-1:
1 =
From AASHTO
=
= 2
LRFD
5.7.2.2
2
2
5.2.2-3:
=
+The
0.75 = 0.616
0.20resistance
1 factor
0.95 should
be assumed to be 0.9 for a tension-controlled
5.2.2-2:
=
the
section
for
of As. This assumption must then be
initial determination
5.2.2-4:
= 0.003 0.005 1
to or5.2.2-3:
greater
than 0.005.
This
=
assure
=
tension reinforcement has
2 that
1
1 1
yielded as assumed.
5.2.2-4:
= 0.003
2
2
Where:
1
= 0.003
0.005
(5.2.2-4)
t = Tensile strain in the extreme tension steel 1 1
=
0.005
reinforcement (in)
1 1
c =
=
Page 5.2-2
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
For prestressed concrete girders, shear for the critical section at dv from the internal
face of the support and at the harping point are of particular interest.
When designing for shear transfer between new and existing concrete, the designer
shall consider the high construction cost associated with roughening existing
concrete surfaces. Whenever practical, the design for placing new concrete against
existing concrete shall be completed such that roughening of the existing concrete
surfaces is not required (i.e. use cohesion and friction factors for a surface that is
not intentionally roughened).
The spall pattern roughening detail shown in Figure 5.2.2-1 may be included
onplans as an alternative to the default uniform amplitude roughening.
Page 5.2-3
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
SPALL
SPALL
"
ORIGINAL CONCRETE
SURFACE PRIOR TO
ROUGHENING
3" (TYP.)
3"
SPALL
SPALL
6"
3"
(TYP.)
SURFACE SPALL
4" MIN.
ELEVATION
SECTION
It is conservative to compute the interface shear force using the full factored
loading applied to the composite deck slab and girder. However, the interface
shear force need only be computed from factored loads applied to the
composite section after the deck slab is placed such as superimposed dead loads
and live loads.
For SIP deck systems, only the roughened top flange surface between SIP panel
supports (andthe portion of the permanent net compressive force Pc on that
section) is considered engaged ininterface shear transfer.
Page 5.2-4
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Similar requirements exist for connecting the end diaphragm at bridge ends
where the diaphragm is cast on the girders (girder End Type A). In this case,
however, loads consist only of the factored diaphragm dead load, approach
slab dead load, and those wheel loads which can distribute to the interface.
Longitudinal reinforcement provided at girder ends shall be identical in both
ends of the girder for construction simplicity.
The program PGSuper does not check interface shear friction at girder ends.
Standard girder plan details are adequate for girder End Types A and B.
Standard girder plan details shall be checked for adequacy for girder End Types
C and D.
PIER
MAIN LONGITUDINAL BRIDGE
DECK REINFORCING
PRESTRESSED GIRDER
(WF SHOWN, OTHERS
SIMILAR)
G4 BARS
G8 BARS
G5 BARS
CAST IN PLACE
CONCRETE
EXTENDED
STRANDS
STRAND CHUCK AND ANCHOR
PLATE OR 2" x 1" STEEL
STRAND ANCHOR
Page 5.2-5
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
D. Shear and Torsion The design for shear and torsion is based on ACI 318-02
Building Code4 Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary (318F02)
and is satisfactory for bridge members with dimensions similar to those normally
used in buildings. AASHTO LRFD 5.8.3.6 may also be used for design.
According to Hsu5, utilizing ACI 318-02 is awkward and overly conservative when
applied to large-size hollow members. Collins and Mitchell6 propose a rational
design method for shear and torsion based on the compression field theory or
strut-and-tie method for both prestressed and non-prestressed oncrete beams. These
methods assume that diagonal compressive stresses can be transmitted through
cracked concrete. Also, shear stresses are transmitted from one face of the crack to
the other by a combination of aggregate interlock and dowel action of the stirrups.
For recommendations and design examples, the designer can refer tothe paper
by M.P. Collins and D. Mitchell, Shear and Torsion Design of Prestressed and
NonPrestressed Concrete Beams, PCI Journal, September-October 1980, pp.
32-1006.
Page 5.2-6
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
PGSuper calculates estimated cambers at 40 days (D40) and 120 days (D120). Due
to variations in observed camber, these estimated cambers are generally considered
to be upper bounds at their respective times. This is based on measured girder
cambers of prestressed concrete girders compared with the estimated cambers from
PGSuper.
D @ 120 Days is the upper bound of expected camber range at a girder age of 120
days after the release of prestress and is primarily intended to mitigate interference
between the top of the cambered girder and the placement of concrete deck
reinforcement. It is also used to calculate the Adimension at the girder ends. The
age of 120 days was chosen because data has shown that additional camber growth
after this age is negligible. D @ 120 Days may be taken as D120, the estimated
camber at 120 days reported by PGSuper.
Figure 5.2.4-1 shows a typical pattern of girder deflection with time at centerline
span. Portions of this characteristic curve are described below. The subparagraph
numbers correspond to circled numbers on the curve.
1. Elastic Deflection Due to Release of Prestress The prestress force produces
moments in the girder tending to bow the girder upward. Resisting these
moments are girder section dead load moments. The result is a net upward
deflection.
2. Creep Deflection Before Cutting Temporary Strands The girder continues
to deflect upward due to the effect of creep. This effect is computed using the
equation stated in Section 5.1.1E.
3. Deflection Due to Cutting of Temporary Strands Cutting of temporary
strands results in an elastic upward deflection. The default time interval for
creep calculations for release of top temporary strands is 90 days after the
release of prestress during girder fabrication for D120 (10days for D40).
4. Diaphragm Load Deflection The load of diaphragm is applied to the girder
section resulting in an elastic downward deflection. The default time interval
for creep calculations forplacing diaphragms is 90 days after the release of
prestress during girder fabrication for D120(10daysforD40).
5. Creep Deflection After Casting Diaphragms The girder continues to deflect
upward for any time delay between diaphragms and deck slabcasting.
Page 5.2-7
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
6. Deck Slab Load Deflection The load of the deck slab is applied to the girder
section resulting in an elastic downward deflection. The default time interval
for creep calculations for placing the deck slab is 120 days after the release of
prestress during girder fabrication for D120 (40daysforD40).
7. Superimposed Dead Load Deflection The load of the traffic barriers,
sidewalk, overlay, etc. isapplied to the composite girder section resulting in an
elastic downward deflection.
8. Final Camber It might be expected that the above deck slab dead load
deflection would be accompanied byacontinuing downward deflection due
to creep. However, many measurements of actual structure deflections have
shown that once the deck slab is poured, the girder tends to act asthough it is
locked in position. To obtain a smooth riding surface on the deck, the deflection
indicated on Figure 5.2.4-1 as Screed Camber (known as C) is added to the
profile grade elevation of the deck screeds. The C dimension and the Screed
Setting Dimensions detail shall be given in theplans.
diaphragm
4
tps 3
creep2
creep1
slab
tb + ov
D
excess
Time
(Final Camber)
Release Prestress
Cast of Girder
ps +girder
GIRDER CAMBER
(IMMEDIATELY PRIOR
TO DECK PLACEMENT)
Deflection
(upward)
Page 5.2-8
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Joints are either wide or match cast. Depending on their width, they may be filled
withCIP concrete or grout. Match cast joints are normally bonded with an epoxy
bonding agent. Dry match cast joints are not recommended.
B. Shear Keys
In order to assist shear transmission in wide joints, use a suitable system of keys.
The shape of the keys may be chosen to suit a particular application and they can
be either single keys or multiple keys. Single keys are generally large and localized
whereas multiple keys generally cover as much ofthe joint surface area as is
practical.
Single keys provide an excellent guide for erection of elements. Single keys are
preferred for all match cast joints.
For all types of joints, the surfaces must be clean, free from grease and oil, etc.
When using epoxy for bonding, the joints shall be lightly sandblasted to remove
laitance. For CIP or other types ofwide joints, the adjacent concrete surfaces shall
be roughened and kept thoroughly wet, prior toconstruction of the joint. CIP joints
are generallypreferred.
Box girders with inside clear height of less than or equal to 4feet do not require
access, lighting, receptacles and ventilation. Utilities, longitudinal restrainers and
other components requiring inspection or maintenance are not permitted inside the
box girder cells.
Box girders with inside clear height greater than 4feet but less than 6.5feet shall
have access, lighting, receptacles and ventilation provided inside each box girder
cell containing utilities, longitudinal restrainers and other components requiring
inspection or maintenance.
Box girders with inside clear height greater than or equal to 6.5feet shall have
access, lighting, receptacles and ventilation provided inside.
Access, lighting, receptacles and ventilation shall not be provided inside prestressed
concrete tub girder cells. Utilities, longitudinal restrainers and other components
requiring inspection or maintenance are not permitted inside the girdercells.
Page 5.2-9
Concrete Structures
Page 5.2-10
Chapter 5
Access doors shall have a minimum 2-6 diameter or 2-6 square clear opening.
Lock box latches shall be installed on all access doors accessible from ground
level. Access hatches shall swing into the box girders and shall be placed at
locations that do not impact traffic. Lighting and receptacle requirements shall
conform to WSDOT Design Manual Chapter 1040. Air vents shall conform to
Figures 5.2.6-1 and 5.2.6-2.
Box girder penetrations greater than one inch in diameter through the exterior shall
be covered with galvanized wire mesh screen to prevent vermin and birds from
accessing the penetration and the interior of the box girder. The wires shall have
amaximum spacing of 1 inch in both directions.
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5.2-11
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Page 5.2-12
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
The number of girder stems can be reduced by cantilevering the top slab beyond
the exterior girders. A deck overhang of approximately one-half the girder spacing
generally gives satisfactory results. This procedure usually results in a more
aesthetic as well as a more economical bridge.
B. Basic Dimensions The basic dimensions for concrete box girders with vertical
and sloped exterior webs are shown in Figures 5.3.1-1 & 2, respectively.
1. Top Slab Thickness, T1 (includes wearing surface)
5.3.1B1
but not less than 7 with overlay or 7.5 without overlay.
5.3.1B1
5.3.1B2
but not less than 5.5 (normally 6.0 is used).
5.3.1B2
b.
5.3.21
5.3.21
Near
intermediate piers
Thickening
5.3.22
5.3.22
5.3.31
5.3.31
5.3.32
5.3.32
Page 5.3-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
T4 = 8.0
Page 5.3-2
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
D. Load Distribution
1. Unit Design According to the AASHTO LRFD Specifications, the entire slab
width shall be assumed effective for compression. It is both economical and
desirable to design the entire superstructure as a unit rather than as individual
girders. When a reinforced box girder bridge is designed as an individual girder
with a deck overhang, the positive reinforcement is congested in the exterior
cells. The unit design method permits distributing all girder reinforcement
uniformly throughout the width of the structure.
2. Dead Loads Include additional D.L. for top deck forms:
3. Live Load See Section 3.9.4 for live load distribution to superstructure and
substructure.
Page 5.3-3
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Page 5.3-4
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5.3-5
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
5.3.2Reinforcement
This section discusses flexural and shear reinforcement for top slab, bottom slab, webs,
and intermediate diaphragms in box girders.
A. Top Slab Reinforcement
1. Near Center of Span Figure 5.3.2-1 shows the reinforcement required near
the center of the span and Figure 5.3.2-2 shows the overhang reinforcement.
a. Transverse reinforcing in the top and bottom layers to transfer the load to
the main girder stems.
b. Bottom longitudinal distribution reinforcement in the middle half of the
deck span in Seff is provided to aid distributing the wheel loads.
c. Top longitudinal temperature and shrinkage reinforcement.
2. Near Intermediate Piers Figure 5.3.2-3 illustrates the reinforcement
requirement near intermediate piers.
a. Transverse reinforcing same as center of span.
b. Longitudinal reinforcement to resist negative moment (see Figure 5.3.2-3).
c. Distribution of flexure reinforcement to limit cracking shall satisfy the
requirement of AASHTO LRFD 5.7.3.4 for class 2 exposure condition.
3. Bar Patterns
a. Transverse Reinforcement It is preferable to place the transverse
reinforcement normal to bridge center line and the areas near the expansion
joint and bridge ends are reinforcement by partial length bars.
b. Longitudinal Reinforcement
Page 5.3-6
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Overhang Detail
Figure 5.3.2-2
Page 5.3-7
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
(5.3.2-1)
Page 5.3-8
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
(5.3.2-2)
The maximum spacing of skin reinforcement shall not exceed the lesser of d/6
and 12. Such reinforcement may be included in strength computations if a
strain compatibility analysis is made to determine stresses in the individual bars
or wires. The total area of longitudinal skin reinforcement in both faces need
not exceed one half of the required flexural tensile reinforcement.
For CIP sloped outer webs, increase inside stirrup reinforcement and bottom
slab top transverse reinforcement as required for the web moment locked-in
during construction of the top slab. This moment about the bottom corner of the
web is due to tributary load from the top slab concrete placement plus 10psf
form dead load. See Figure 5.3.2-10 for typical top slab forming.
Page 5.3-9
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Web Reinforcement
Figure 5.3.2-7
Page 5.3-10
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5.3-11
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5.3-12
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Notes:
1. The diagonal brace supports web forms during web pour. After cure, the web is stiffer than the brace,
andthe web attracts load from subsequent concrete placements.
2. The tributary load includes half the overhang because the outer web form remains tied to and transfers
load to the web which is considerably stiffer than the formwork.
3. Increase web reinforcement for locked-in construction load due to top slab forming for sloped web
boxgirders.
Page 5.3-13
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
5.3.3Crossbeam
A. General Crossbeam shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of
strength limit state design of AASHTO LRFD Specifications and shall satisfy the
serviceability requirements for crack control.
B. Basic Geometry For aesthetic purposes, it is preferable to keep the crossbeam
within the superstructure so that the bottom slab of the entire bridge is a continuous
plane surface interrupted only by the columns. Although the depth of the crossbeam
may be limited, the width can be made as wide as necessary to satisfy design
requirements. Normally, it varies from 3feet to the depth of box but is not less
than thecolumn size plus 1-0 to allow placement of the column reinforcement as
shown in see Figures 5.3.3-1 and 2.
The bottom slab thickness is frequently increased near the crossbeam in order to
keep the main box girder compressive stresses to a desirable level for negative
girder moments as shown in Figures 5.3.3-1 & 2. This bottom slab flare also helps
resist negative crossbeam moments. Consideration should be given to flaring the
bottom slab at the crossbeam for designing the cap even if it is not required for
resisting main girder moments.
C. Loads For concrete box girders the superstructure dead load shall be considered
as uniformly distributed over the crossbeam. For concrete box girders the live
load shall be considered as the truck load directly to the crossbeam from the wheel
axles. Truck axles shall be moved transversely over the crossbeam to obtain the
maximum design forces for the crossbeam and supporting columns.
D. Reinforcement Design and Details The crossbeam section consists of
rectangular section with overhanging deck and bottom slab if applicable. The
effective width of the crossbeam flange overhang shall be taken as the lesser of:
6 times slab thickness,
1/10 of column spacing, or
1/20 of crossbeam cantilever as shown in Figure 5.3.3-3.
Page 5.3-14
Crossbeam is usually cast to the fillet below the top slab. To avoid cracking of
concrete on top of the crossbeam, construction reinforcement shall be provided at
approximately 3 below the construction joint. The design moment for construction
reinforcement shall be the factored negative dead load moment due to the weight
of crossbeam and adjacent 10 of superstructure each side. The total amount of
construction reinforcement shall be adequate to develop an ultimate moment at the
critical section at least 1.2times the cracking moment Mcr.
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5.3-15
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
t bot.
slab
t top
slab
total width
6xtslab or
1/10 x col.
spacing
6xt slab or
1/10 x col.
spacing
6xt slab or
1/10 x col.
spacing
6" min.
Page 5.3-16
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Special attention should be given to the details to ensure that the column and
crossbeam reinforcement will not interfere with each other. This can be a problem
especially when round columns with a great number of vertical bars must be
meshed with a considerable amount of positive crossbeam reinforcement passing
over the columns.
1. Top Reinforcement The negative moment critical section shall be at the
point of the square or equivalent square columns.
a. When Skew Angle 25 If the bridge is tangent or slightly skewed
deck transverse reinforcement is normal or radial to centerline bridge, the
negative cap reinforcement can be placed either in contact with top deck
negative reinforcement (see Figure 5.3.3-1) or directly under the main deck
reinforcement.
b. When Skew Angle > 25 When the structure is on a greater skew and the
deck steel is normal or radial to the longitudinal centerline of the bridge,
the negative cap reinforcement should be lowered to below the main deck
reinforcement (see Figure 5.3.3-2).
c. To avoid cracking of concrete Interim reinforcement is required below
the construction joint in crossbeams.
2. Skin Reinforcement Longitudinal skin reinforcement shall be provided per
AASHTO LRFD 5.7.3.4.
Page 5.3-17
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
The most commonly used type of end diaphragm is shown in Figure 5.3.4-3. The
dimensions shown here are used as a guideline and should be modified if necessary.
This end diaphragm is used with a stub abutment and overhangs the stub abutment.
It is used on bridges with an overall length less than 400feet. If the overall length
exceeds 400feet, an L-shape abutment should be used.
Page 5.3-18
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
1.90
2.20
2.70
3.00
Page 5.3-19
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
In addition to dead load deflection, forms and falsework tend to settle and compress
under the weight offreshly placed concrete. The amount of this take-up is dependent
upon the type and design of the falsework, workmanship, type and quality of materials
and support conditions. The camber shall be modified to account for anticipated takeup in the falsework.
5.3.6 Thermal Effects
Concrete box girder bridges are subjected to stresses and/or movements resulting from
temperature variation. Temperature effects result from time-dependent variations in
the effective bridge temperature and from temperature differentials within the bridge
superstructure.
A. Effective Bridge Temperature and Movement Proper temperature expansion
provisions are essential in order to ensure that the structure will not be damaged
by thermal movements. These movements, in turn, induce stresses in supporting
elements such as columns or piers, and result in horizontal movement of the
expansion joints and bearings. Formore details, see Chapter8.
B. Differential Temperature Although time-dependent variations in the effective
temperature have caused problems in both reinforced and prestressed concrete
bridges, detrimental effects caused by temperature differential within the
superstructure have occurred only in prestressed bridges. Therefore, computation
of stresses and movements resulting from the vertical temperature gradients is
not included in this chapter. For more details, see AASHTO Guide Specifications,
Thermal Effects on Concrete BridgeSuperstructures dated 1989.
5.3.7 Hinges
Hinges are one of the weakest links of box girder bridges subject to earthquake forces
and it is desirable to eliminate hinges or reduce the number of hinges. For more details
on the design of hinges, see Section5.4.
Designer shall provide access space or pockets for maintenance and inspection of
bearings.
Allowance shall be provided to remove and replace the bearings. Lift point locations,
maximum lift permitted, jack capacity, and number of jacks shall be shown in the
hinge plan details.
5.3.8 Drain Holes
Drain holes shall be placed in the bottom slab at the low point of each cell to drain
curing water during construction and any rain water that leaks through the deck slab.
Additional drains shall be provided as a safeguard against water accumulation in the
cell (especially when waterlines are carried by the bridge). In some instances, drainage
through the bottom slab is difficult and other means shall be provided (i.e., cells
over large piers and where a sloping exterior web intersects a vertical web). Inthis
case, a horizontal drain shall be provided through the vertical web. Figure 5.3.8-1
shows drainage details for the bottom slab of concrete box girder bridges with steel
wirescreen.
Page 5.3-20
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5.3-21
Concrete Structures
Page 5.3-22
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5.4-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Page 5.4-2
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
In-Span Hinge
Figure 5.4-2
Page 5.4-3
Concrete Structures
Page 5.4-4
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
The special provisions may include pertinent information that is not covered on the
plans orinthe AASHTO LRFD Specifications.
Page 5.5-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
The construction sequence and degree of interaction between the widening and
the existing structure, after completion, shall be fully considered in determining
the distribution of the dead load for design of the widening and stress checks
for the existing structure.
Page 5.5-2
A check of the existing main members after attachment of the widening shall be
made for the final design loading condition.
If the existing structural elements do not have adequate strength, consult your
Design Unit Manager or in the case of consultants, contact the Consultant
Liaison Engineer for appropriate guidance.
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.14
April 2015
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
8. Special Considerations
a. For structures that were originally designed for HS-20 loading, HL-93 shall
be used to design the widening. For structures that were originally designed
for less than HS-20, consideration should be given to replacing the structure
instead of widening it.
b. Longitudinal joints are not permitted in order to eliminate potentially
hazardous vehicle control problems.
c. The Standard Specifications do not permit falsework to be supported from
the existing structure unless the Plans and Specifications state otherwise.
This requirement eliminates the transmission of vibration from the existing
structure to the widening during construction. The existing structure may
still be in service.
d. For narrow widenings where the Plans and Specifications require that
the falsework be supported from the original structure (e.g., there are no
additional girders, columns, crossbeams, or closure strips), there shall be
no external rigid supports such as posts orfalsework from the ground.
Supports from the ground do not permit the widening to deflect with the
existing structure when traffic is on the existing structure. This causes
the uncured concrete of the widening to crack where it joins the existing
structure. Differential dead load deflection during construction shall be
given consideration.
e. Precast members may be used to widen existing CIP structures. This
method is useful when the horizontal or vertical clearances during
construction are insufficient to build CIP members.
f. The alignment for diaphragms for the widening shall generally coincide
with the existing diaphragms.
g. When using battered piles, estimate the pile tip elevations and ensure that
they will have ample clearance from all existing piles, utilities, or other
obstructions. Also check that there issufficient clearance between the
existing structure and the pile driving equipment.
B. Seismic Design Criteria for Bridge Widenings Seismic design of bridge
widenings shall be per Section 4.3.
C. Substructure
1. Selection of Foundation
a. The type of foundation to be used to support the widening shall generally
be the same as that of the existing structure unless otherwise recommended
by the Geotechnical Engineer. Theeffects of possible differential settlement
between the new and the existing foundations shall be considered.
Page 5.5-3
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
2. Closure Strip Except for narrow deck slab widenings a closure strip is
required for all CIP widenings. Thewidth shall be the minimum required
to accommodate the necessary reinforcement and forform removal.
Reinforcement, which extends through the closure strip shall be investigated.
Shear shall be transferred across the closure strip by shear friction and/or
shearkeys.
Page 5.5-4
For example, a T-beam bridge was originally constructed on falsework and the
falsework was released after the deck slab concrete gained strength. As part
of a major rehabilitation project, the bridge was closed to traffic and the entire
deck slab was removed and replaced without shoring. Without the deck slab,
the stems behave as rectangular sections with a reduced depth and width. The
existing stem reinforcement was not originally designed to support the weight
ofthe deck slab without shoring. After the new deck slab was placed, wide
cracks from the bottom ofthe stem opened, indicating that the reinforcement
was overstressed. This overstress resulted inalower load rating for the newly
rehabilitated bridge. This example shows the need to shore upthe remaining
T-beam stems prior to placing the new deck slab so that excessive deflections
donot occur and overstress in the existing reinforcing steel is prevented.
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.14
April 2015
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
E. Stability of Widening For relatively narrow box girder and T-beam widenings,
symmetry about the vertical axis should bemaintained because lateral loads
are critical during construction. When symmetry is not possible, use pile cap
connections, lateral connections, or special falsework. A minimum of two webs
isgenerally recommended for box girder widenings. For T-beam widenings
that require only one additional web, the web should be centered at the axis of
symmetry of the deck slab. Often the width of the closure strip can be adjusted to
accomplish this.
In prestressed concrete girder bridge widenings with one or two lines of new
girders, the end and intermediate diaphragms shall be placed prior to the deck slab
casting to ensure the stability of the girders during construction. The closure shall
be specified for deck slab but shall not be required for diaphragms. The designer
shall investigate the adequacy of the existing girder adjacent to the widening for
the additional load due to the weight of wet deck slab transferred through the
diaphragms, taking into account the loss of removed overhang and barrier. The
diaphragms must be made continuous with existing diaphragms.
Page 5.5-5
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
In cases where an existing sidewalk is to be removed but the supporting slab under the
sidewalk istoberetained, Region personnel should check the feasibility of removing
the sidewalk. Priortodesign, Region personnel should make recommendations on
acceptable removal methods and required construction equipment. The plans and
specifications shall then be prepared to accommodate these recommendations. This
will ensure the constructibility of plan details and the adequacy of the specifications.
5.5.4 Attachment of Widening to Existing Structure
A. General
1. Lap and Mechanical Splices To attach a widening to an existing structure,
the first choice is to utilize existing reinforcing barsby splicing new bars to
existing. Lap splices or mechanical splices should be used. However, it may not
always be possible to splice to existing reinforcing bars and spacing limitations
may make it difficult to use mechanical splices.
2. Welding Reinforcement Existing reinforcing steel may not be readily
weldable. Mechanical splices should be used wherever possible. If welding is
the only feasible means, the chemistry of the reinforcing steel must be analyzed
and acceptable welding procedures developed.
3. Drilling Into Existing Structure It may be necessary to drill holes and set
dowels in epoxy resin in order to attach the widening tothe existing structure.
Core drilled holes shall have a minimum clearance of 3 from the edge of
the concrete and 1clearance from existing reinforcing bars in the existing
structure. These clearances shall benoted in the plans.
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
embedment lengths when the dowel spacing is less than 6. Note that in
Table 5.5.4-2 the edge clearance is equal to or greater than 3, because this
is the minimum edge clearance foradrilled hole from aconcrete edge.
c. The embedments shown in Table 5.5.4-1 and Table 5.5.4-2 are based on
dowels embedded inconcrete with c=4,000 psi.
Bar
Allowable Design
Drill Hole
Size Tensile Load, T*(kips) Size (in)
Required Embedment, Le
Uncoated (in)
#4
12.0
#5
18.6
#6
26.4
10
#7
36.0
11
12
#8
47.4
13
14.5
#9
60.0
16
17
#10
73.6
20
22
#11
89.0
25
28
Allowable Tensile Load for Dowels Set With Epoxy Resin c = 4,000
psi, Grade 60 Reinforcing Bars, Edge Clearance 3, and Spacing 6
Table 5.5.4-1
Bar
Allowable Design
Drill Hole
Size Tensile Load, T*(kips) Size (in)
Required Embedment, Le
Uncoated (in)
#4
12.0
10
#5
18.6
10
11
#6
26.4
11
12
#7
36.0
13
15
#8
47.4
16
18
#9
60.0
20
22
#10
73.6
24
27
#11
89.0
30
33
Allowable Tensile Load for Dowels Set With Epoxy Resin, c=4,000
psi, Grade 60 Reinforcing Bars, Edge Clearance 3, and Spacing < 6
Table 5.5.4-2
Page 5.5-7
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
5. Shear Transfer Across a Dowelled Joint Shear shall be carried across the
joint by shear friction. The existing concrete surface shall be intentionally
roughened. Both the concrete and dowels shall be considered effective
intransmiting the shear force. Chipping shear keys in the existing concrete can
also be used totransfer shear across a dowelled joint, butisexpensive.
6. Preparation of Existing Surfaces for Concreting See Removing Portions
of Existing Concrete in the General Special Provisions and Standard
Specifications Section 6-02.3(12) for requirements. Unsound, damaged, dirty,
porous, or otherwise undesirable old concrete shall be removed, and the
remaining concrete surface shall be clean, freeof laitance, and intentionally
roughened to ensure proper bond between the old and new concrete surfaces.
7. Control of Shrinkage and Deflection on Connecting Reinforcement
Dowels that are fixed in the existing structure may be subject to shear as a
result of longitudinal shrinkage and vertical deflection when the falsework
is removed. These shear forces may result in a reduced tensile capacity of
the connection. When connecting the transverse reinforcing bars across
the closure strip is unavoidable, the interaction between shear and tension
in the dowel orreinforcing bar shall be checked. The use of wire rope or
sleeved reinforcement may beacceptable, subject to approval by your
DesignUnitManager.
Rock bolts may be used to transfer connection loads deep into the existing
structure, subject tothe approval of your Design Unit Manager.
Page 5.5-8
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
B. Connection Details The details on the following sheets are samples of details
which have been used for widening bridges. They are informational and are not
intended to restrict the designers judgment.
1. Box Girder Bridges Figures 5.5.4-1 through 5.5.4-6 show typical details for
widening box girder bridges.
Welding or mechanical butt splice are preferred over dowelling for the main
reinforcement incrossbeams and columns when it can be done in the horizontal
or flat position. It shall beallowed only when the bars to be welded are free
from restraint at one end during the weldingprocess.
Page 5.5-9
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Page 5.5-10
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5.5-11
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Page 5.5-12
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5.5-13
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Page 5.5-14
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
2. Flat Slab Bridges It is not necessary to remove any portion of the existing
slab to expose the existing transverse reinforcing bars for splicing purposes,
because the transverse slab reinforcement is only distribution reinforcement.
The transverse slab reinforcement for the widening may be dowelled directly
into the existing structure without meeting the normal splice requirements.
Note: Falsework shall be maintained under pier crossbeams until closure pour
is made and cured for 10 days.
Page 5.5-15
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
3. T-Beam Bridges Use details similar to those for box girder bridges for
crossbeam connections. See Figure 5.5.4-8 for slab connection detail.
Page 5.5-16
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
4. Prestressed Concrete Girder Bridges Use details similar to those for box
girder bridges for crossbeam moment connections and use details similar to
those in Figure 5.5.4-9 for the slab connection detail.
Page 5.5-17
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
"
"A"
SAVE EXISTING
REINFORCEMENT
COMPRESSION SEAL
"
(TYP.)
Page 5.5-18
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
CONCRETE FOR
EXPANSION JOINTS
BACK OF
PAVT. SEAT
2 #4 WITH
2'-0" MIN. SPLICE
2"
2" CLR.
4"
VARIES
3"
MI
N.
60
SIDE OF NEW
DIAPHRAGM
90
1
EXISTING OPENING
DRILL " HOLE FOR #4 REINF. BAR.
SET WITH EPOXY RESIN (TYP.).
(PLACE BETWEEN CURBS ONLY)
Page 5.5-19
Concrete Structures
Page 5.5-20
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5.6-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Prestressed Concrete Wide Flange Thin Deck Girders In 2015, the top flanges
of wide flange I girders were widened to create a girder which would support a CIP
concrete deck placement without formwork. This Series includes the WF36TDG
through the WF100TDG.
Deck Bulb Tee Girders This type of girder has a top flange designed to support
traffic loads and are mechanically connected at the flange edges to adjacent girders.
They include Series W35DG, W41DG, W53DG and W65DG.
Prestressed Concrete Slab Girders Prestressed concrete slab girders are available
in heights ranging from 12 inches to 36 inches.
Prestressed Concrete Tub Girders In 2004 prestressed concrete tub girders were
added as standard girders.
All WSDOT prestressed concrete girders are high performance high strength concrete
girders. Theygenerally rely on high strength concrete to be effective for the spans
expected as a single piece. Theapproximate ranges of maximum span lengths are
asshown in Table5.6.1-1 and Appendix 5.6-A1.
Standard drawings for WSDOT prestressed concrete girders are shown in
Appendix5.6-A and 5.9-A.
Page 5.6-2
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Volume to
Max. Length
Max. Span
Surface Ratio
(252 kips
Capability (ft)
(in)
Limit) (ft)
Type
Depth
(in)
Area
(in2)
Iz
(in4)
Yb
(in)
Wt
(k/ft)
W42G
42.00
373.25
76092
18.94
0.428
2.77
85
W50G
50.00
525.5
164958
22.81
0.602
3.12
115
W58G
58.00
603.5
264609
28.00
0.692
3.11
130
W74G
73.50
746.7
546110
38.08
0.856
2.90
150
WF36G
36.00
690.8
124772
17.54
0.792
3.24
105
WF42G
42.00
727.5
183642
20.36
0.834
3.23
120
WF50G
50.00
776.5
282559
24.15
0.890
3.22
140
WF58G
58.00
825.5
406266
27.97
0.946
3.21
155
WF66G
66.00
874.5
556339
31.80
1.002
3.20
165
WF74G
74.00
923.5
734356
35.66
1.058
3.19
175
WF83G
82.63
976.4
959393
39.83
1.119
3.19
190
WF95G
94.50
1049.1
1328995
45.60
1.202
3.18
190
WF100G
100.00
1082.8
1524912
48.27
1.241
3.17
205
203
12 Slab
12.00
566.0
6772
6.01
0.649
4.82
30
18 Slab
18.00
658.6
21922
9.01
0.755
3.84
45
24 Slab
24.00
745.8
48331
12.02
0.855
3.91
60
26 Slab
26.00
840.3
63080
13.02
0.963
4.32
65
30 Slab
30.00
1027.6
104791
15.01
1.177
4.72
75
36 Slab
36.00
1450.0
223718
18.01
1.661
5.12
90
U54G4
54.00
1038.8
292423
20.97
1.190
3.51
130
U54G5
54.00
1110.8
314382
19.81
1.273
3.47
130
U66G4
66.00
1208.5
516677
26.45
1.385
3.51
150
U66G5
66.00
1280.5
554262
25.13
1.467
3.47
150
U78G4
78.00
1378.2
827453
32.06
1.579
3.51
170
160
U78G5
78.00
1450.2
885451
30.62
1.662
3.48
170
152
UF60G4
60.00
1207.7
483298
26.03
1.384
3.48
150
UF60G5
60.00
1279.7
519561
24.74
1.466
3.45
150
UF72G4
72.00
1377.4
787605
31.69
1.578
3.48
160
160
UF72G5
72.00
1449.4
844135
30.26
1.661
3.45
170
152
UF84G4
84.00
1547.1
1190828
37.42
1.773
3.48
180
142
UF84G5
84.00
1619.1
1272553
35.89
1.855
3.46
180
136
Page 5.6-3
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Design Method
Superstructure
Continuity
Service, Strength, Fatigue, and Extreme Event Limit State loads and
load combinations shall be per AASHTO LRFD Specifications
Shear Design
Shipping and
Handling
Continuous
Structure
Configuration
Girder End Support Girder end support skew angles shall be limited to 45 for all
Skew Angle
prestressed concrete girders. Skew angles for prestressed concrete
slabs, deck bulb-tees and tubs shall be limited to 30.
Intermediate
Diaphragms
Page 5.6-4
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
The dead load of one traffic barrier or sidewalk may be divided among
amaximum of three girder webs.
Page 5.6-5
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
"A" AT BRG.
T (7" MIN.)
" FILLET
(TYP.)
SECTION AS DETAILED
WEF
(EFFECTIVE FLANGE WIDTH)
" WEARING
SURFACE
EFFECTIVE FLANGE
THICKNESS
t = T - "
WT = WEF
WT
ESLAB
EGIRDER
Page 5.6-6
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
d. Section Dead Load The bridge deck dead load to be applied to the girder
shall be based on the full bridge deck thickness. The full effective pad/
haunch weight shall be added to that load over the full length of the girder.
The full effective pad or haunch height is typically the A dimension
minus the flange thickness T, but may be higher at midspan for a crest
vertical curve.
C. Design Procedure
1. General The WSDOT Prestressed concrete girder design computer program
PGSuper is the preferred method for final design.
2. Stress Conditions The designer shall ensure that the stress limits as
described in Table 5.2.1-1 are not exceeded for prestressed concrete girders.
Each condition is the result of the summation of stresses with each load acting
on its appropriate section (such as girder only or composite section).
During shipping, girder stresses shall be checked using two load cases. The
first load case consists of a plumb girder with dead load impact of 20% acting
either up or down. The second load case consists of an inclined girder with
no dead load impact. The angle of inclination shall be the equilibrium tilt
angle computed for lateral stability (see BDM 5.6.3.D.6 and equation (12)
inreference12) with a roadway superelevation of 6%.
Page 5.6-7
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Page 5.6-8
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
E. Girder End Types There are four typical end types for prestressed concrete
girders. Due to the extreme depth of the WF83G, WF95G, and WF100G girders,
and possible end of girder tilt at the piers for profile grades, the designer will
need to pay particular attention to details to assure the girders will fit and perform
asintended.
The end types designs may require modification for bridge security. The space
between girders at the abutment may require omission by extending the diaphragm
to the face of the abutment stem. Coordinate with the State Bridge and Structures
Architect during final design where required.
Reinforcing bars and pretensioned strands project from the end of the girder.
The designer shall assure that these bars and strands fit into the end diaphragm.
Embedment of the girder end into the end diaphragm shall be a minimum of
3 and a maximum of 6. For girder ends where the tilt would exceed 6 of
embedment, the girder ends shall be tilted to attain a plumb surface when the
girder is erected to the profile grade.
The gap between the end diaphragm and the stem wall shall be a minimum of
1 or greater than required for longitudinal bridge movement.
Page 5.6-9
would exceed 6 of embedment, the girder ends shall be tilted to attain a plumb surface when the
girder is erected to the profile grade.
Concrete Structures The
5
gap between the end diaphragm and the stem wall shall be a minimum of 1Chapter
or greater
than required for longitudinal bridge movement.
BACK OF
PAVEMENT SEAT
BEARING
VARIES
"A" DIM. AT
GIRDER
1'-1"
10"
3" FILLET
1'-0"
END OF
PRECAST
GIRDER
3"
MIN.
VARIES
2'-2"
1"
MIN.
End
Type
(End
Diaphragm
Girder)
End
Type
AA
(End
Diaphragm
onon
Girder)
Figure
5.6.2-3
Figure
5.6.2-4
Page 5.6-10
Page 5.6-7
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
JOINT
90
"A" DIM. AT
GIRDER
1'-1"
10"
6"
MIN.
6" MIN.
3" FILLET
6"
END OF
P.C. GIRDER
1'-0"
INTERSECTION OF
DIAPHRAGM &
BEARING
BRG.
Page 5.6-11
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
3. End Type C End Type C as shown in Figure 5.6.2-5 is for continuous spans
and an intermediate hinge diaphragm at an intermediate pier. There is no
bearing recess and the girder is temporarily supported on oak blocks. Inthe
past, this detail was used in low seismic areas such as east ofthe Cascade
Mountains. This end type shall not be used on new structures and is restricted
to the widening of existing bridges with hinge diaphragms at intermediate piers.
The designer shall check the edge distance and provide a dimension that
prevents edge failure, or spalling, at the top corner of the supporting cross beam
for load from the oak block including dead loads from girder, deck slab, and
construction loads.
1" EMBEDMENT
(TYP.)
TOP OF P.C.
GIRDER
3"
45 FILLET (TYP.)
VARIES
4" AT GIRDER
VARIES
(3" MIN.)
6"
VARIES
(3" MIN.)
Page 5.6-12
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
4. End Type D End Type D as shown in Figure 5.6.2-6 is for continuous spans
fully fixed to columns atintermediate piers. There is no bearing recess and the
girder is temporarily supported onoakblocks.
The designer shall check the edge distance and provide a dimension that
prevents edge failure, or spalling, at the top corner of the supporting cross
beam for load from the oak block including dead loads from girder, deck slab,
and construction loads. The designer shall check interface shear friction at the
girder end (see Section 5.2.2.C.2).
PIER
3"
MIN.
TOP OF
GIRDER
45 FILLET (TYP.)
END OF PRECAST
GIRDER
CROSSBEAM
VARIES
(3" MIN.)
VARIES
(3" MIN.)
6"
MIN.
End Type D
Figure 5.6.2-6
Page 5.6-13
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
H. Girder Stirrups Girder stirrups shall be field bent over the top mat of
reinforcement in the deckslab.
Girder stirrups may be prebent, but the extended hook shall be within the core of
the slab (the inside edge of the hook shall terminate above the bottom mat deck
slab bars).
In special cases, transformed section properties may be used for the design of
prestressed concrete girders with the approval of the WSDOT Bridge Design
Engineer. The live load factor at the Service III load combination shall be as
follows:
LL = 0.8 when gross section properties are used
LL = 1.0 when transformed section properties are used
Page 5.6-14
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5.6-15
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Standard rail cars can usually accommodate larger loads than a standard truck.
Rail cars range incapacity from approximately 120 to 200 kips. However,
unless the rail system runs directly from the precasting plant to the jobsite,
members must be trucked for at least some of the route, and weight may be
restricted by the trucking limitations.
For a project where a large number of girders are required, barge transportation
is usually the most economical. Product weights and dimensions are generally
not limited by barge delivery, but by the handling equipment on either end. In
most cases, if a product can be made and handled inthe plant, itcan be shipped
by barge.
Page 5.6-16
Long span prestressed concrete girders may bear increased costs due to
difficulties encountered during fabrication, shipping, and erection. Generally,
costs will be less if a girder can be shipped to the project site in one piece.
However, providing an alternate spliced-girder design to long span one-piece
pretensioned girders may reduce the cost through competitive bidding.
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Expectations are that, in some cases, overhead clearance will not accommodate
the vertical stirrup projection on deeper WSDOT standard girder sections.
Alternate stirrup configurations canbeused to attain adequate clearance,
depending on the route from the plant to the jobsite.
absence
of more
accurate
information,
a. Roll
stiffness
of entire
truck/trailer
system: the following parameters shall be used:
a. Roll stiffness of entire truck/trailer system:
4,000
28,000
Where:
N = required number of axles = Wg/Wa, rounded up to the nearest integer
Wg = total girder weight (kip)
Wa = 18 (kip/axle)
Where:
Wa
18 (kip/axle)
Page 5.6-17
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Page 5.6-18
Fewer girder lines may result in extra reinforcement and concrete but less
forming cost. Theseitems must also be considered.
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5.6-19
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
3. Bridge Deck Strength It must be noted that for larger overhangs, the bridge
deck section between the exterior and the first interior girder may be critical
and may require thickening.
4. Drainage Where drainage for the bridge is required, water from bridge
drains is normally piped across the top of the girder and dropped inside of
the exterior girder line. A large bridge deck cantilever length may severely
affect this arrangement and it must be considered when determining exterior
girderlocation.
5. Bridge Curvature When straight prestressed concrete girders are used
to support curved roadways, the curb distance must vary. Normally, the
maximum bridge deck overhang at the centerline of the long span will bemade
approximately equal to the overhang at the piers on the inside of the curve. At
the point ofminimum curb distance, however, the edge of the girder top flange
should be no closer than 1-0 from the bridge deck edge. Where curvature is
extreme, other types of bridges should beconsidered. Straight girder bridges
on highly curved alignments have a poor appearance and also tend to become
structurally less efficient.
C. Diaphragm Requirements
1. General Diaphragms used with prestressed concrete girder bridges serve
multiple purposes. During the construction stage, the diaphragms help to
provide girder stability for the bridge deck placement. During the life ofthe
bridge, the diaphragms act as load distributing elements, and are particularly
advantageous for distribution of large overloads. Diaphragms also improve the
bridge resistance to over-height impact loads.
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
The diaphragms inside the tub may be cast in the field or at the fabrication
plant. The bottom of the diaphragm inside the tub shall be at least 3 inches
above the top of the bottom flange.
The diaphragms between the tubs shall be cast in the field. For diaphragms
between the tubs, the roughened surface or shear keys on the sloped web faces
may not be effective in resisting interface shear. All diaphragm and construction
loads on the diaphragm before the deck cures and gains strength will then be
resisted by the reinforcement or inserts alone.
Page 5.6-21
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Girder lengths shall be modified for added length along grade slope.
F. Curve Effect and Flare Effect Curves and tapered roadways each tend to
complicate the design of straight girders. The designer must determine what girder
spacing to use for dead load and live load design and whether or not arefined
analysis, that considers actual load application, is warranted. Normally, the girder
spacing atcenterline of span can be used for girder design, especially in view of the
conservative assumptions made for the design of continuous girders.
G. Girder Pad Reinforcement Girders with a large A dimension may require
a deep pad between the top of the girder and the bottom of the deck. When the
depth of the pad at the centerline of the girder exceeds 6, reinforcement shall be
provided in the pad as shown in Figure 5.6.4-1.
GIRDER
CLEARANCE DETERMINED BY
DECK PROTECTION SYSTEM
DECK REINFORCEMENT
PAD HEIGHT
1" CLR.
(TYP.)
1" CLR. MIN.
#4 @ 1'-6"
SPACING
#4 AT MID-HEIGHT
OF PAD (TYP.)
GIRDER REINFORCEMENT
Page 5.6-22
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5.6-23
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Page 5.6-24
In general, the procedure consists of cutting through the existing deck slab and
diaphragms and removing the damaged girder. Adequate exposed reinforcement
steel must remain to allow splicing of the new bars. The new girder and new
reinforcement is placed and previously cut concrete surfaces are cleaned and
coated with epoxy. New deck slab and diaphragm portions are then poured.
It is important that the camber of the new girder be matched with that in the
old girders. Excessive camber in the new girder can result in inadequate deck
slab thickness. Girder camber can be controlled by prestress, curing time, or
dimensional changes.
Pouring the new deck slab and diaphragms simultaneously in order to avoid
overloading the existing girders in the structure should be considered. Extra
bracing of the girder at the time ofdeck slab pour shall be required.
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Existing bridges with pigmented sealer shall have replacement girders sealed.
Those existing bridges without pigmented sealer need not be sealed.
Page 5.6-25
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Page 5.6-26
There are other situations as listed below which do not automatically trigger
replacement, butrequire further consideration and analysis.
Significant Concrete Loss For girder damage involving significant
loss of concrete from the bottom flange, consideration should be given
to verifying the level of stress remaining in the exposed prestressing
strands. Residual strand stress values will be required for any subsequent
repairprocedures.
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Project Name
C-7425
C-7637
C-7095
Work Description
5/518
322
2008
11/1
287
2009
14/12
208
2006
C-7451
90/121
250
2007
C-7567
395/103
114
2008
C-7774
509/11
3584
2010
C-9593
Repair
C-9593
Repair
C-9446
KD-2488
KD-2488
C-5328
KD-2976
Page 5.6-27
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Deck girders without a composite CIP concrete deck shall have a minimum
concrete cover of 2 over the top mat. The top mat of reinforcement in the deck
(top flange) shall be epoxy-coated.
B. Slab Girders Slab girder spans between centerline bearings shall be limited to
the prestressed concrete girder height multiplied by 30 due to unexpected variations
from traditional beam camber calculations.
Standard configurations of slab girders are shown in the girder standard plans. The
width of slab girders should not exceed 8-0.
A minimum 5 composite CIP bridge deck shall be placed over slab girders. The
CIP concrete deck shall at a minimum be Class 4000D concrete with one layer of
#4 epoxy coated reinforcement in both the transverse and longitudinal directions
spaced at 1-0 maximum. Welded ties are still required.
The AASHTO LRFD 2.5.2.6.2 deflection criteria shall be satisfied for slab girders.
A minimum of two permanent top strands shall be provided for slab girders, one
adjacent to each edge. Additional permanent top strands can be used if required to
control girder end tensile stresses as well as concrete stresses due to plant handling,
shipping and erection.
In some cases it may be necessary to use temporary top strands to control girder
end tensile stresses as well as concrete stresses due to plant handling, shipping
and erection. Thesestrands shall be bonded for 10 at both ends of the girder, and
unbonded for the remainder of the girder length. Temporary strands shall be cut
prior to equalizing girders and placing the CIP bridge deck. Designers may also
consider other methods to control girder stresses including debonding permanent
strands at girder ends and adding mild steelreinforcement.
The specified design compressive strength (c) of slab girders should be kept less
than or equal to8ksi to allow more fabricators to bid.
C. Double-Tee and Ribbed Deck Girders Double-tee and ribbed deck girders
shall be limited to widening existing similar structures. An HMA overlay with
membrane shall be specified. These sections are capable of spanning up to 60.
D. Deck Bulb-Tee Girders Deck bulb-tee girders have standard girder depths of 35,
41, 53, and 65inches. The top flange/deck may vary from 4-feet 1-inch to 6-feet
wide. They are capable of spanning up to 145feet. Deck bulb-tee girders shall be
limited to pedestrian bridges, temporary bridges and to widening existing similar
structures.
Page 5.6-28
Deck bulb-tee girders shall be installed with girder webs plumb. Bridge deck
superelevation shall be accommodated by varying the top flange thickness.
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.14
April 2015
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Girder size and weight shall be evaluated for shipping and hauling to the
projectsite.
E. Wide Flange Deck Girders Wide flange deck girders have standard girder
depths ranging from 39 inches to 103 inches. The top flange/deck may vary from
5-feet to 8-feet wide. They are capable of spanning up to 195feet for a 5-foot top
flange width and 165feet for an 8-foot top flange width. Wide flange deck girders
shall be limited to pedestrian bridges, temporary bridges and to widening existing
similar structures.
Wide flange deck girders shall have an HMA or concrete overlay. A waterproofing
membrane shall be provided with an HMA overlay.
Wide flange deck girders shall be installed with girder webs plumb. Bridge deck
superelevation shall be accommodated by varying the top flange thickness.
Superelevation should be limited so that lifting embedments can be located at the
center of gravity of the girder to prevent complications with lifting, hauling and
erection. Use of wide flange deck girders should be avoided when superelevation
transitions occur within the span.
Girder size and weight shall be evaluated for shipping and hauling to the
projectsite.
F. Wide Flange Thin Deck Girders Wide flange thin deck girders have standard
girder depths ranging from 36 inches to 100 inches. The top flange may vary from
5-feet to 8-feet wide. They are capable of spanning up to 225feet for a 5-foot top
flange width and 200feet for an 8-foot top flange width.
Wide flange thin deck girders shall have a minimum 5 thick composite CIP bridge
deck. Welded ties and grouted keys at flange edges are not required. The CIP
bridge deck thickness shall be capable of accommodating expected girder camber
variations and tolerances. Transverse reinforcement in the CIP bridge deck shall be
designed to resist live loads and superimposed dead loads. Additional transverse
reinforcement may be necessary over the flange edge joints to help control concrete
cracking in the CIP bridge deck.
Wide flange thin deck girders shall be installed with girder webs plumb. Bridge
deck superelevation shall be accommodated by varying the CIP bridge deck
thickness. Use of wide flange thin deck girders should be avoided with large
superelevations in order to limit CIP bridge deck thickness.
Girder size and weight shall be evaluated for shipping and hauling to the
projectsite.
Page 5.6-29
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
The standard tub girders (U sections) have 4-0 or 5-0 bottom flange widths and
are 4-6, 5-6 or 6-6 deep. A 6 deep top flange can be added to tub girders (UF
sections) to improve structural efficiency and to accommodate placement of stayin-place precast deck panels.
Drain holes shall be provided at the low point of the tub girders at the centerline of
the bottom flange.
B. Curved Tub Girders Curved tub girders may be considered for bridges with
moderate horizontal radiuses. I-girders may not be curved.
Curved tub girders can either be designed in one piece or in segments depending
on span configurations and shipping limitations. Curved tub girders are posttensioned at the fabrication plant and shipped to the jobsite. Additional jobsite
post-tensioning may be required ifsegment assembly is necessary, or if continuity
over intermediate piers is desired. Closure joints atsegment splices shall meet the
requirements of Section 5.9.4.C.
Page 5.6-30
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5.6-31
Concrete Structures
Page 5.6-32
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
The minimum CIP bridge deck thickness for prestressed concrete slab girders is 5.
Minimum bridge deck thicknesses are established in order to ensure that overloads
will not result in premature bridge deck cracking.
The minimum clearance between top and bottom reinforcing mats shall be 1.
B. Computation of Bridge Deck Strength The design thickness for usual bridge
decks are shown in Figures 5.7.1-1 & 2.
The thickness of the bridge deck and reinforcement in the area of the cantilever
may be governed bytraffic barrier loading. Wheel loads plus dead load shall be
resisted by the sections shown inFigure5.7.1-2.
Design of the cantilever is normally based on the expected depth of the bridge
deck at centerline ofgirder span. This is usually less than the dimensions at the
girderends.
Page 5.7-1
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
C. Computation of A Dimension The distance from the top of the bridge deck
to the top of the girder at centerline bearing at centerline of girder is represented
bythe A Dimension. It is calculated in accordance with the guidance of
Appendix 5-B1. This ensures that adequate allowance will be made for excess
camber, transverse deck slopes, vertical and horizontal curvatures. Where
temporary prestress strands at top of girder are used to control the girder stresses
due to shipping and handling, the A dimension must be adjusted accordingly.
The note in the left margin of the layout sheet shall read: A Dimension = X (not
for design).
Page 5.7-2
For skewed spans, the transverse bars are placed normal to bridge centerline
and the areas near the expansion joints and bridge ends are reinforced by partial
length bars. For raised crossbeam bridges, the bottom transverse bridge deck
reinforcement is discontinued at the crossbeam.
The spacing of bars over the crossbeam must be detailed to be large enough to
allow concrete tobepoured into the crossbeam. For typical requirements, see
Section 5.3.3.D.
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
For bridge decks with a crowned roadway, the bottom surface and rebar shall be
flat, as shown inFigure5.7.2-1.
Page 5.7-3
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
#5
#6
#7
#4
--
--
#5
#6
#7
#8
#9
#10
--
--
Note:
Deduct from minimum bridge deck thickness shown in table when an overlay is used.
Page 5.7-4
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
D. Bar Patterns Figure 5.7.2-3 shows two typical top longitudinal reinforcing
bar patterns. Care must be taken that bar lengths conform to the requirements of
Section 5.1.2.
The symmetrical bar pattern shown should normally not be used when required
bar lengths exceed 60feet. If the staggered bar pattern will not result in bar lengths
within the limits specified inSection5.1.2, the method shown in Figure 5.7.2-4
may be used to provide an adequate splice. Allbars shall be extended by their
development length beyond the point where the bar is required.
Normally, no more than 33% of the total area of main reinforcing bars at a support
(negative moment) or at midspan (positive moment) shall be cut off at one point.
Where limiting this value to33% leads to severe restrictions on the reinforcement
pattern, an increase in figure may beconsidered. Two reinforcement bars shall be
used as stirrup hangers.
Page 5.7-5
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
E. Concrete Bridge Deck Design and Detailing These requirements are primarily
for beam-slab bridges with main reinforcement perpendicular totraffic:
Minimum cover over the top layer of reinforcement shall be 2.5 including 0.5
wearing surface (Deck Protection Systems 1 and 4). The minimum cover over
the bottom layer reinforcement shall be1.0.
The minimum clearance between top and bottom reinforcing mats shall be 1.
A maximum bar size of #5 is preferred for longitudinal and transverse
reinforcement in the bridge deck except that a maximum bar size of #7 is
preferred for longitudinal reinforcement atintermediate piers.
The minimum amount of reinforcement in each direction shall be
0.18 in.2/ft for the top layer and 0.27 in.2/ft for the bottom layer. The amount of
longitudinal reinforcement in the bottom ofbridge decks shall not be less than
220
67 percent of the positive moment as specified in AASHTO LRFD9.7.3.2.
S
Top and bottom reinforcement in longitudinal direction of bridge deck shall be
staggered to allow better flow of concrete between the reinforcing bars.
The maximum bar spacing in transverse and longitudinal directions for the
top mat, and transverse direction of the bottom mat shall not exceed 12. The
maximum bar spacing for bottom longitudinal within the effective length, as
specified in AASHTO LRFD 9.7.2.3, shall not exceed the deck thickness.
Allow the Contractor the option of either a roughened surface or a shear key
atthe intermediate pier diaphragm construction joint.
Page 5.7-6
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Both, top and bottom layer reinforcement shall be considered when designing
for negative moment at the intermediate piers.
Reduce lap splices if possible. Use staggered lap splices for both top and
bottom in longitudinal and transverse directions.
5.7.3 Stay-in-place Deck Panels
A. General The use of precast, prestressed stay-in-place (SIP) deck panels for
bridge decks may be investigated at the preliminary design stage. The acceptance
evaluation will consider such items as extra weight for seismic design and the
resulting substructure impacts.
The composite deck system consisting of precast prestressed concrete deck panels
with a CIP topping has advantages in minimizing traffic disruption, speeding up
construction and solving constructability issues on certain projects. Contractors,
in most cases, prefer this composite deck panel system for bridge decks in traffic
congested areas and other specific cases.
SIP deck panels may be used on WSDOT bridges with WSDOT Bridge and
Structures Office approval. Details for SIP deck panels are shown in Appendix
5.6-A10-1.
Steel deck forms are not permitted in order to allow inspection of deck soffits and
to avoid maintenance of a corrosion protection system.
B. Design Criteria The design of SIP deck panels follows the AASHTO LRFD
Specifications and the PCI Bridge Design Manual. The design philosophy of SIP
deck panels is identical to simple span prestressed concrete girders. They are
designed for Service Limit State and checked for Strength Limit State. The precast
panels support the dead load of deck panels and CIP topping, and the composite
SIP deck panel and CIP cross-section resists the live load and superimposed dead
loads. The tensile stress at the bottom of the panel is limited to zero per WSDOT
design practice.
C. Limitations on SIP Deck Panels The conventional full-depth CIP bridge deck
shall be used for most applications. However, the WSDOT Bridge and Structures
Office may allow the use of SIP deck panels with the following limitations:
1. SIP deck panels shall not be used in negative moment regions of continuous
conventionally reinforced bridges. SIP deck panels may be used in posttensioned continuous bridges.
2. Bridge widening. SIP deck panels are not allowed in the bay adjacent to the
existing structure because it is difficult to set the panels properly on the existing
structure, and the requirement for a CIP closure. SIP deck panels can be used
on the other girders when the widening involves multiple girders.
3. Phased construction. SIP deck panels are not allowed in the bay adjacent to the
previously placed deck because of the requirement for a CIP closure.
4. Prestressed concrete girders with narrow flanges. Placement of SIP deck panels
on girders with flanges less than 12 wide is difficult.
Page 5.7-7
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
5. A minimum bridge deck thickness of 8.5, including 3.5 precast deck panel
and 5 CIP concrete topping shall be specified.
6. SIP deck panels are not allowed for steel girder bridges.
5.7.4 Bridge Deck Protection
All bridge decks, precast or cast-in-place slabs, or deck girder structures shall use
a deck protection system as described in this section to reduce the deterioration of
the bridge deck and superstructure. The WSDOT Bridge Management Unit shall
determine the type of protection system during the preliminary plan or Request For
Proposal (RFP) stage for structures not described in this section. Special conditions
(i.e. a widening) where it may be desirable to deviate from the standard deck protection
systems require approval of the WSDOT Bridge Management Unit.
Preliminary plans shall indicate the protection system in the left margin per BDM
Section 2.3.8.
Saw cutting or grinding pavement items are not allowed on the bridge decks. Rumble
strips and recessed pavement markers shall not be placed on bridge decks, or approach
slab surfaces whether they are concrete or asphalted as stated in Section 8-08 and 8-09
of the Standard Specifications, respectively.
Traffic detection loops shall not be located in an existing bridge surface. They may be
installed during the construction of bridge decks prior to placing the deck concrete in
accordance with Standard Plan J-50.16.
A. Deck Protection Systems The following paragraphs describe five WSDOT
protective systems used to protect a concrete bridge deck design.
1. Type 1 Protection System This is the minimum default protection system for
cases where a protection system has not been specified on a structure. Type 1
protection system shall be used for cast-in-place bridge decks with two layers
of reinforcement, see Figure 5.7.4-1. This also applies to CIP slab bridges,
deck replacements and the widening of existing decks. System 1 consists of the
following:
a. A minimum 2 of concrete cover over top bar of deck reinforcing. The
cover includes a wearing surface and tolerance for the placement of
the reinforcing steel.
b. Both the top and bottom mat of deck reinforcing shall be epoxy-coated.
c. Girder stirrups and horizontal shear reinforcement do not require
epoxy-coating.
Page 5.7-8
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
WSDOT Bridge Management Unit shall determine the type of concrete overlay
placed on all new or existing decks; and may specify similar overlays such as a
polyester or RSLMC in special cases when rapid construction is cost effective.
Brief descriptions of common overlays are asfollows.
a. 1 Modified Concrete Overlay These overlays were first used by
WSDOT in 1979 and have an expected life between 20-40 years. There
are more than 600 bridges with concrete overlays as of 2010. This is
the preferred overlay system for deck rehabilitation that provides longterm deck protection and a durable wearing surface. In construction, the
existing bridge deck is hydromilled prior to placing the 1.5 overlay.
This requires the grade to be raised 1. The modified concrete overlay
specifications allow a contractor to choose between a Latex, Microsilica
or Fly ash mix design. Construction requires a deck temperature between
45F - 75F with a wind speed less than 10 mph. Traffic control can be
significant since the time to construct and cure is 42 hours.
Page 5.7-9
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Page 5.7-10
Waterproof membranes are required with the HMA overlay. Unlike roadway
surfaces, the HMA material collects and traps water carrying salts and oxygen
at the concrete surface deck. This is additional stress to an epoxy protection
system or a bare deck and requires a membrane to mitigate the penetration of
salts and oxygen to the structural reinforcement and cement paste. See Standard
Specifications for more information on waterproof membranes.
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.14
April 2015
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Existing structures may apply an HMA overlay in accordance with the Bridge
Paving Policies, Section5.7.5.
Standard Plan A-40.20.00, Bridge Transverse Joints Seals for HMA provides
some standard details for saw cutting small relief joints in HMA paving. Saw
cut joints can have a longer life, better ride, and help seal the joint at a location
known to crack and may be used for small bridge expansion joints less than
1inch.
Page 5.7-11
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
5. Type 5 System This system requires a layered, 3 concrete cover for double
protection, see Figure 5.7.4-5. All segmentally constructed bridges shall use
this system to protect construction joints and provide minor grade adjustments
during construction. Bridge decks with transverse or longitudinal posttensioning in the deck shall use this system since deck rehabilitation due to
premature deterioration is very costly. The 3 cover consists of the following:
a. The deck is constructed with a 1 concrete cover.
b. Both the top and bottom mat of deck reinforcing are epoxy-coated.
Girder/web stirrups and horizontal shear reinforcement does not require
epoxy-coating.
c. The deck is then scarified prior to the placement of a modified concrete
overlay. Scarification shall be diamond grinding to preserve the integrity of
the segmental deck andjoints.
d. A Type 2a, 1 Modified Concrete Overlay is placed as a wearing surface.
Page 5.7-12
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
B. Existing Bridge Deck Widening New deck rebar shall match the existing top
layer. This provides steel at a uniform depth which is important when removing
concrete during future rehab work. Bridges prior to the mid 1980s used 1
concrete cover. New and widened decks using a Type 1 Protection System have
2 cover.
When an existing bridge is widened, the existing concrete or asphalt deck may
require resurfacing. WSDOT is forced to rehab concrete decks based on the
condition of the existing deck or concrete overlay. If a deck or overlay warrants
rehabilitation, then the existing structure shall be resurfaced and included in the
widening project.
By applying the stated design criteria, the following policies shall apply to bridge
widening projects which may require special traffic closures for the bridge work.
1. Rebar The deck or cast-in-place slab of the new widened portion shall use
the Type 1 Protection System, even though the existing structure has bare rebar.
The top mat of new rebar shall match the height of existing rebar. Variations in
deck thickness are to be obtained by lowering the bottom of the deck or slab.
2. Concrete Decks If the existing deck is original concrete without a concrete
overlay, the new deck shall have a Type 1 Protection System and the existing
deck shall have a 1 concrete overlay or Type 2 Protection System. This
matches the rebar height and provides a concrete cover of 2.5 on both the new
and old structure.
If the existing deck has a concrete overlay, the new deck shall have a Type
1 Protection System and the existing overlay shall be replaced if the deck
deterioration is greater than 1% of the deckarea.
Page 5.7-13
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
4. HMA Overlays The depth of existing asphalt must be field measured and
shown on the bridge plans. This mitigates damage of the existing structure due
to removal operations and reveals other design problems such as: improper
joint height, buried construction problems, excessive weight, or roadway grade
transitions adjustments due to drainage.
The new deck must meet the rebar and cover criteria stated above for Concrete
Decks and deck tinning is not required. Type 3 Protection system shall be used
and HMA shall be placed to provide a minimum 0.15 or the optimum 0.25.
Page 5.7-14
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
All WSDOT structures within the defined project limits must be evaluated for paving
or Bituminous Surface Treatment (BST or chip seal). All bridges shall be identified in
the Plans as INCLUDED IN PROJECT or NOT INCLUDED per WSDOT Plan
Preparation Manual, Section 4 Vicinity Map, paragraph (n). This includes all state
bridges and not limited to:
1. Off the main line. Typical locations include bridges on ramps, frontage roads, or
bridges out of right-of-way.
2. Bridges where the main line route crosses under the structure.
3. Bridges at the beginning and ending stations of the project. It is not necessary to
include the bridge when it was recently resurfaced, but it should be included if
incidental joint maintenance repairs are necessary.
Region is responsible for field evaluation of paving condition and the depth of asphalt
provided by the last paving contract. Asphalt depths can vary on the concrete deck
and from bridge to bridge. In most cases, asphalt depth measurements at the fog line
on the four corners of the deck are sufficient to establish a design depth for contracts.
The Bridge Asset Manager shall be informed of the measurements. Paving shown
in the Plans would use an approximate or averaged value of the measurements.
Some situations may require a Plan Detail showing how the depth varies for the
Planingcontractor.
A standard Microstation detail is available to simplify detailing of bridge paving in the
Plans, see SH_DT_RDSECBridgeDeckOverlay_Detail. The table format is copied
from the BCR and allows the bridge paving design requirements to be listed in the
table. All bridges within the limits of the project must be listed in the table to clarify
which structures do not have paving and facilitate data logging for the Washington
State Pavement Management System and the Bridge Office.
The following bridge paving policies have been developed with the concurrence of
WSDOT Pavement Managers to establish bridge HMA Design options available for
state managed structures.
1. Maximum HMA Depth Bridge decks shall be 0.25 or 3. A greater depth
may be allowed if the structure is specifically designed for more than 0.25, such
as structures with ballast or as approved by the WSDOT Load Rating Engineer.
Paving designs that increase the HMA more than 3 require a new Load Rating
analysis and shall be submitted to the WSDOT Load Rating engineer.
a. Concrete bridge decks with more than 0.21 HMA may be exempted from
paving restrictions for mill/fill HMA design.
b. Prestressed concrete deck girders and slabs with less than 0.25 HMA require
paving restrictions to avoid planing the supporting structure.
c. A paving grade change will be required when more than 0.25 of asphalt
exists on a structure in order to reduce the weight on the structure and meet
acceptable rail height standards.
2. Grade limited/0.15 For bridge decks with 0.15 HMA and the grade is limited
by bridge joint height or other considerations, resurfacing must provide full depth
removal of HMA or mill/fill the minimum0.12.
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.14
April 2015
Page 5.7-15
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
3. Grade Transitions When raising or lowering the HMA grade profile on/off or
under the bridge, the maximum rate of change or slope shall be 1/40 (1/500)
as shown in Standard Plan A60.30.00, even if this means extending the project
limits. Incorrect transitions are the cause of many bumps at the bridge and create
an undesired increase in truck loading. The following items should be considered
when transitioning a roadway grade:
a. Previous HMA overlays that raised the grade can significantly increase the
minimum transition length.
b. Drainage considerations may require longer transitions or should plane to
existing catch basins.
c. Mainline paving that raises the grade under a bridge must verify Vertical
Clearance remains in conformance to current Vertical Clearance requirements.
Mill/Fill of the roadway at the bridge is generally desired unless lowering the
grade is required.
i. Design Manual Reference: Section 720.04 Bridge Site Design Elements,
(5) Vertical Clearances, (c) Minimum Clearance for Existing Structures, 1.
Bridge Over a Roadway.
4. Full Removal Full depth removal and replacement of the HMA is always an
alternate resurfacing design option. Full depth removal may be required by the
Region Pavement Manager or the Bridge Office due to poor condition of the HMA
or bridge deck. Bridge Deck Repair and Membrane Waterproofing (Deck Seal)
standard pay items are required for this option and the Bridge Office will provide
engineering estimates of the quantity (SF) and cost for both.
a. Bridge Deck Repair will be required when the HMA is removed and the
concrete is exposed for deck inspection. Chain Drag Testing is completed
and based on the results, the contractor is directed to fix the quantity of deck
repairs. The Chain Drag results are sent to the Bridge Asset Manager and
used by the Bridge Office to monitor the condition of the concrete deck and
determine when the deck needs rehabilitation or replacement.
b. Membrane Waterproofing (Deck Seal) is Std. Item 4455 and will be required
for all HMA bridge decks, except when the following conditions are met.
i. HMA placed on a deck that has a Modified Concrete Overlay which acts
like a membrane.
ii. The bridge is on the P2 replacement list or deck rehabilitation scheduled
within the next 4years or two bienniums.
5. Bare Deck HMA Paving projects may place HMA on a bare concrete deck, with
concurrence of the WSDOT Bridge Asset Manager, if the bridge is on an HMA
route and one of the following conditionsapply.
a. Rutting on the concrete deck is or more.
b. The Region prefers to simplify paving construction or improve the smoothness
at the bridge.
Page 5.7-16
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
When the concrete bridge deck does not have asphalt on the surface, Region
Design should contact the Region Materials lab and have a Chain Drag Report
completed and forwarded to the Bridge Asset Manager during design to establish
the Bridge Deck Repair quantities for the project. Pavement Design should
then contact Region Bridge Maintenance to request the repairs be completed
prior to contract; or the repairs may be included in the paving contract. Small
amounts of Bridge Deck Repair have an expensive unit cost by contract during
pavingoperations.
6. Bridge Transverse Joint Seals Saw cut pavement joints shown in Std. Plan
A-40.20.00 perform better and help prevent water problems at the abutment
or in the roadway. Typical cracking locations where pavement joint seals are
required: End of the bridge; End of the approach slab; or HMA joints on the deck.
Std. Plan A-40.20.00, Detail 8 shall be used at all truss panel joint locations.
However, if Pavement Designers do not see cracking at the ends of the bridge, then
sawcut joints may be omitted for these locations. HQ Program management has
determined this work is incidental to P1 by definition and should be included in a
P1 paving project and use Std. Item 6517. The following summarizes the intended
application of the Details in Std. Plan A-40.20.00.
a. Detail 1 Applies where HMA on the bridge surface butts to the HMA
roadway.
b. Detail 2, 3, & 4 Applies where concrete bridge surface butts to the HMA
roadway.
c. Detail 8 Applies at truss panel joints or generic open concrete joints.
d. Detail 5, 6 &7 For larger 1 sawcut joints instead of joints provided in
details 2, 3, & 4.
7. BST (chip seal) Bituminous Surface Treatments thick may be applied to
bridge decks with HMA under the following conditions.
a. Plans must identify or list all structures bridges included or excepted within
project limits and identify bridge expansion joint systems to be protected.
b. BST is not allowed on weight restricted or posted bridges.
c. Planing will be required for structures at the maximum asphalt design depth or
the grade is limited.
It is true that BSTs are not generally a problem but only if the structure is not
grade limited by for structural reasons. BCRs will specify a chip seal paving
depth of 0.03 for BST Design to be consistent with Washington State Pavement
Management System. Plans should indicate chip seal to be consistent with
Standard Specifications and standard pay items.
8. Culverts and Other Structures Culverts or structures with significant fill and
do not have rail posts attached to the structure generally will not have paving
limitations. Culverts and structures with HMA pavement applied directly to the
structure have bridge paving design limits.
Page 5.7-17
Concrete Structures
Page 5.7-18
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
The AASHTO criteria for reinforced concrete apply equally to bridges with or
without post-tensioning steel. However, designers should note certain requirements
unique to prestressed concrete such as special -factors, load factors and shear
provisions.
B. Bridge Types Post-tensioning has been used in various types of CIP bridges
in Washington State with box girders predominating. See Appendix5-B4 for a
comprehensive list of box girder designs. The following are some examples of
other bridge types:
Covington Way to 180th Avenue SE, Contract 4919, Two-Span Box Girder
Longitudinal Posttensioning
See Section 2.4.1 of this manual for structure type comparison of post-tensioned
concrete box girder bridges to other structures. In general, a post-tensioned
CIP bridge can have a smaller depth-to-span ratio than the same bridge with
conventional reinforcement. This is an important advantage where minimum
structure depth is desirable. However, structure depth must be deep enough to
accommodate anchorages.
Page 5.8-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
1. Slab Bridge Structure depth can be quite shallow in the positive moment
region when post-tensioning is combined with haunching in the negative
moment region. However, post-tensioned CIP slabs are usually more expensive
than when reinforced conventionally. Designers should proceed with caution
when considering post-tensioned slab bridges because severe cracking in the
decks ofbridges of this type has occurred 21, 22, 23.
2. T-Beam Bridge This type of bridge, combined with tapered columns, can be
structurally efficient and aesthetically pleasing, particularly when the spacing of
the beams and the columns are the same. AT-Beam bridge can also be a good
choice for a single-span simply-supported structure.
When equally spaced beams and columns are used in the design, the width of
beam webs should generally be equal to the width of the supporting columns.
See SR 16, Union Avenue OXings, for an example. Since longitudinal
structural frame action predominates in this type of design, crossbeams at
intermediate piers can be relatively small and the post-tensioning tendons can
be placed side-by-side in the webs, resulting in an efficient center of gravity
of steel line throughout. For other types of T-Beam bridges, the preferred
solution may be smaller, more closely spaced beams and fewer, but larger pier
elements. If this type of construction is used in a multispan, continuous bridge,
the beam cross-section properties in the negative moment regions need to be
considerably larger than the properties in the positive moment regions to resist
compression.
3. Box Girder Bridge This type of bridge has been a popular choice in this
state. The cost of a prestressed box girder bridge is practically the same as
a conventionally-reinforced box girder bridge, however, longer spans and
shallower depths are possible with prestressing.
Page 5.8-2
For criteria on distribution of live loads, see Section 3.9.4. All slender members
subjected to compression must satisfy buckling criteria.
Web spacing should normally be 8 to 11feet and the top slab overhang
over exterior girders should be approximately half the girder spacing unless
transverse post-tensioning is used. The apparent visual depth of box girder
bridges can be reduced by sloping all or the lower portion of the exterior web.
If the latter is done, the overall structure depth may have to be increased. Web
thickness should be 12 inches minimum, but not less than required for shear,
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
horizontal and vertical reinforcing, duct placement, and for concrete placing
clearance. Providing 2 of clear cover expedites concrete placement and
consolidation in the heavily congested regions adjacent to the post-tensioning
ducts. Webs should be flared at anchorages. Top and bottom slab thickness
should normally meet the requirements of Section 5.3.1.B, but not less than
required by stress and specifications. Generally, the bottom slab would require
thickening at the interior piers of continuous spans. This thickening should be
accomplished by raising the top surface of the bottom slab at the maximum rate
of per foot.
C. Strand and Tendon Arrangements The total number of strands selected should
be the minimum required to meet the strength and service limit state requirements
at all points. Duct sizes and the number of strands they contain vary slightly,
depending on the supplier. Chapter 2 of the PTI Post-tensioned Box Girder Bridge
Manual, and shop drawings of the recent post-tensioned bridges kept on file in
the Construction Plans Section offer guidance to strand selection. In general, a
supplier will offer several duct sizes and associated end anchors, each of which will
accommodate a range of strand numbers up to a maximum in the range. Present
WSDOT practice is to indicate only the design force and cable path on the contract
plans and allow the post-tensioning supplier to satisfy these requirements with
tendons and anchors. The most economical tendon selection will generally be the
maximum size within the range. Commonly-stocked anchorages for diameter
strands include 9, 12, 19, 27, 31, and 37 strands. Commonly-stocked anchorages
for 0.6 diameter strands include 4, 7, 12, 19, 22, and 27 strands. The design should
utilize commonly-stocked items. For example, a design requiring 72 strands per
web would be most economically satisfied by two standard 37-strand tendons. A
less economical choice would be three standard 27-strand tendons containing 24
strands each. Tendons shall not be larger than (37) strand units or (27) 0.6
strand units, unless specifically approved by the WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer.
The duct area shall be at least 2.5 times the net area of the prestressing steel. In the
regions away from the end anchorages, the duct placement patterns indicated in
Figures 5.8.1-1 through 5.8.1-3 shall be used.
Page 5.8-3
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Some systems offer couplers which make possible stage construction of long
bridges. With such systems, forms can be constructed and concrete cast and
stressed in a number of spans during stage 1, as determined by the designer. After
stage 1 stressing,
couplers can be added, steel installed, concrete cast and stressedChapter 5
Concrete
Structures
in additional spans. To avoid local crushing of concrete and/or grout, the stress
existing in the steel at the coupled end after stage 1 stressing shall not be exceeded
during stage 2stressing.
WEB & TENDONS
TYPICAL SECTION
* 2" MIN. CLR. TO ANY REINF.
(TO PERMIT POURING OF CONCRETE)
A SINGLE TIER OF TENDONS CENTERED
IN THE WEB WILL GENERALLY PERMIT
THE USE OF THINNER WEBS THAN
USING DOUBLE TIERS.
Page 5.8-4
Tendon Placement
Pattern
WSDOT Bridge
Design Manual
for Box Girder Bridges
M 23-50.14
April 2015
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Page 5.8-5
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
D. Layout of Anchorages and End Blocks Consult industry brochures and shop
plans for recent bridges before laying out end blocks. To encourage bids from a
wider range of suppliers, try to accommodate the large square bearing plate sizes
common to several systems.
Page 5.8-6
Sufficient room must be allowed inside the member for mild steel and concrete
placement and outside the member for jacking equipment. The size of the
anchorage block in the plane of the anchor plates shall be large enough to provide a
minimum of 1 clearance from the plates to any free edge.
The end block dimensions shall meet the requirements of the AASHTO LRFD
Specifications. Note that in long-span box girder superstructures requiring large
bearing pads, the end block should be somewhat wider than the bearing pad
beneath to avoid subjecting the relatively thin bottom slab to high bearing stresses.
When the piers of box girder or T-beam bridges are severely skewed, the layout of
end blocks, bearing pads, and curtain walls at exterior girders become extremely
difficult as shown in Figure 5.8.1-4. Note that if the exterior face of the exterior
girder is in the same plane throughout its entire length, all the end block widening
must be on the inside. To lessen the risk of tendon break-out through the side of a
thin web, the end block shall be long enough to accommodate a horizontal tendon
curve of 200feet minimum radius. The radial component of force in a curved
tendon is discussed in AASHTO LRFD 5.10.4.3.
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.14
April 2015
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
E
G XT
IR E
DE RIO
R R
C
RE HEC
IS IN K
IN N FO TO
-P EE RC S
LA D E E
NE ED ME E
I
FO FO NT F
R
RC
ES
EXTERIOR FACE
OF GIRDER
E
SE
CL
R.
2"
M
IN
.
FRONT EDGE OF
PIER WALL
H
R= OR
I
(M 20 Z.
0
IN '
.)
1'-0" MIN
P.C.
1
18.
in 5.
Lm LE
B
TA
P.T.
UPPER BRG.
ELEMENT
LOWER BRG.
ELEMENT
END DIAPHR.
BACK EDGE OF
PIER WALL
ES
ON AG
D
N OR
TE CH
AN
Layout of Anchorages
Blocks
All post-tensioning
anchorages inand
websEnd
of box
girder or multi stem superstructures
Figure
5.8.1-4
shall be vertically aligned. Special Anchorage Devices may be used to avoid a
staggered anchorage layout. If a staggered layout must be used, the plans shall be
reviewed and approved by the WSDOT Bridge Design Engineer.
Page 5.8-7
Chapter 5
Anchor
Radii, ft.
Tangent
Types
Length, ft.
Diameter Strand Tendons
Table 5.8.1-1 and Figure 5.8.1-5 present the5-4required minimum
radius
7.5
2.6 of curvature
along with the required minimum tangent lengths
at stressing
anchorages.
5-7
9.8
2.6
5-12
13.5
3.3 Bridge
Deviation from these requirements needs the approval of the WSDOT
5-19
17.7
3.3
Design Engineer.
5-27
21.0
3.3
5-31
22.3
4.9
Tangent
5-37
24.0
4.9
Anchor Types
Radii, ft.
Length, ft.
0.6 Diameter Strand Tendons
6-4
10.6
3.3
Diameter Strand Tendons
6-7
12.8
3.3
5-4
7.5
2.6
6-12
16.4
3.3
5-7
9.8
2.6
6-19
20.7
4.9
6-22
22.6
4.9
5-12
13.5
3.3
6-31
26.4
4.9
5-19
17.7
3.3
5-27
21.0
3.3
5-31
22.3
4.9
5-37
24.0
4.9
10.6
3.3
6-7
12.8
3.3
6-12
16.4
3.3
6-19
20.7
4.9
6-22
22.6
4.9
6-31
26.4
4.9
TangentLength
Length and
Radii
Tangent
andTendon
Tendon
Radii
Figure
5.8.1-5
Figure 5.8.1-5
E. Superstructure
Shortening
Whenever members such as columns, crossbeams, and diaphragm
E. Superstructure Shortening
Whenever
members
such as columns, crossbeams,
appreciably affected by post-tensioning of the main girders, those effects shall be included in the
and diaphragms are appreciably affected by post-tensioning of the main girders,
design. This will generally be true in structures containing rigid frame elements. For further discus
those effects shall be included in the design. This will generally be true in
structures containing rigid frame elements. For further discussion, see Section2.6
of reference17.
Page 5.8-8
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
(5.8.1-1)
Where:
= Factored tendon force = 1.2 Pjack (kips)
Pu
Rin
= Radius of curvature of the tendon at the considered location causing
in-plane force effects (typically horizontal) (ft)
Rout
= Radius of curvature of the tendon at the considered location causing
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
out-of-plane force effects (typically vertical) (ft)
INSIDE OF
CURVE
Y
Z
PT1 #4
G. Edge Tension Forces If the centroid of all tendons is located outside of the kern
of the section, spalling and longitudinal edge tension forces are induced. Evaluate
per AASHTO LRFD 5.10.9.6.4.
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.14
April 2015
Page 5.8-9
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
5.8.2Analysis
A. General The procedures outlined in Section 2.1 through 2.5 of reference 17 for
computation of stress in single and multispan box girders can be followed for the
analysis of T-beams and slab bridges as well.
The WinBDS program available on the WSDOT system will quickly perform
a complete stress analysis of a box girder, T-beam, or slab bridge, provided the
structure can be idealized as a plane frame. For further information, see the
program user instructions.
Page 5.8-10
For frame analysis, use the properties of the entire superstructure regardless of the
type of bridge being designed. For stress analysis of slab bridges, calculate loads
and steel requirements for a 1 wide strip. For stress analysis of T-beam bridges, use
the procedures outlined in the AASHTO LRFD Specifications.
Note that when different concrete strengths are used in different portions of the
same member, the equivalent section properties shall be calculated in terms of
either the stronger or weaker material. In general, the concrete strength shall be
limited to the values indicated in Section 5.1.1.
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
During preliminary design, the first objective should be to satisfy the allowable
flexural stresses in the concrete at the critical points in the structure with the chosen
cross-section and amount of prestressing steel, then the requirements for shear
stress, stirrups, and ultimate moment capacity can be readily met with minor or
no modifications in the cross-section. For example, girder webs can be thickened
locally near piers to reduce excessive shear stress.
In all cases where tension is allowed in the concrete under initial or final
conditions, extra mild steel (auxiliary reinforcement) shall be added to carry the
total tension present. This steel can be computed as described in Section 9-5 of
Reference18.
Page 5.8-11
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
In case of overstress, try one or more of the following remedies: adjust tendon
profiles, add or subtract prestress steel, thicken slabs, revise strength of concrete of
top slab, add more short tendons locally, etc.
D. Camber The camber to be shown on the plans shall include the effect of both
dead load and finalprestress.
E. Expansion Bearing Offsets Figure 5.8.1-4 indicates expansion bearing offsets
for the partial effects ofelastic shortening, creep, and shrinkage. The initial offset
shown is intended to result in minimal bearing eccentricity for the majority of the
life of the structure. The bearing shall be designed for the full range ofanticipated
movements: ES+CR+SH+TEMP including load factors specified in AASHTO for
deflections.
5.8.3Post-tensioning
A. Tendon Layout After a preliminary estimate has been made of the concrete
section and the amount of prestressing needed at points of maximum applied
load, it may be advantageous in multispan bridges to draw a tendon profile to
a convenient scale superimposed on a plot of the center of gravity of concrete
(c.g.c.) line. The most efficient tendon profile from the standpoint of steel stress
loss will normally be a series of rather long interconnected parabolas, but other
configurations are possible. For continuous bridges with unequal span lengths, the
tendon profile (eccentricity) shall be based on the span requirement. This results
in an efficient post-tensioning design. The tendon profile and c.g.c. line plot is
strongly recommended for superstructures of variable cross-section and/or multiple
unsymmetrical span arrangements, but is not necessary for superstructures having
constant cross- section and symmetrical spans. The main advantages of the tendon
profile and c.g.c. plot are:
1. The primary prestress moment curves (prestress force times distance from
c.g.c. line to center of gravity of steel (c.g.s.) lines) at all points throughout
all spans are quickly obtained from this plot and will be used to develop the
secondary moment curves (if present) and, ultimately, to develop the resultant
total prestress moment curve.
2. Possible conflicts between prestressing steel and mild steel near end regions,
crossbeams, and diaphragms may become apparent.
3. Possible design revisions may be indicated. For example, camber in bridges
with unequal spans can be balanced by adjusting tendon profiles.
Page 5.8-12
The tendon profile and c.g.c. line diagram shall also contain a sketch of how
the end bearing plates or anchors are to be arranged at the ends of the bridge.
Such a sketch can be useful in determining how large the end block in a girder
bridge will have to be and how much space will be required for mild steel in the
end region. In general, the arrangement of anchor plates should be the same as
the arrangement of the ducts to which they belong to avoid problems with duct
cross-overs and to keep end blocks of reasonable width.
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
When stressing tendons from both ends or when alternating a single pull from both
ends (half tendons pulled from one end with the other half pulled from the other
end), all tendons shall be stressed on one end before all tendons are stressed on the
opposite end.
Stressing at both ends shall preferably be done on alternate tendons, and need not
be done simultaneously on the same tendon. In rare cases, tendons can be stressed
from both ends to reduce large tendon losses but is undesirable due to worker
safety issues and a reduction in stressing redundancy.
D. Steel Stress Curve Steel stresses may be plotted either as the actual values or as
a percentage of the jacking stresses. A steel stress diagram for a typical two-span
bridge is shown in Figure 5.8.3-1. Spans are symmetrical about pier 2 and the
bridge is jacked from both ends.
Page 5.8-13
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
PIER 1
PIER 2
PIER 3
FINA
L
JACKED END
DES
IGN
JACKED END
ESS
STR
Page 5.8-14
Accurate plotting of steel stress variation due to local curvature is normally not
necessary, and straight lines between intersection points on the diagram as shown
in Figure 5.8.3-1 are usually sufficient. When tendons are continuous through the
length of the bridge, the stress for design purposes at the jacked end should be
limited to 0.79pu or 213 ksi for 270 ksi low relaxation strands. This would permit
the post-tensioning contractor to jack to the slightly higher value of 0.81pu for low
relaxation strands as allowed by the AASHTO LRFD Specifications in case friction
Stress Diagram
forturn
a 2-span
PT Bridge
values encountered
in the field
out somewhat
greater than the standard values
Figure
5.8.3-1
used in design. Stress loss at jacked end shall be calculated from the assumed
anchor set of , the normal slippage during anchoring in most systems. At the
high points on the initial stress curve, the stress shall not exceed 0.74pu for low
relaxation strands after seating of the anchorage. If these values are exceeded, the
jacking stress can be lowered or alternately the specified amount of anchor set can
be increased.
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
When the total tendon length (L) is less than the length of cable influenced by
anchor set (x) and the friction loss is small, as in short straight tendons, the 0.70pu
value at the anchorage immediately after anchor set governs. In these cases, the
allowable jacking stress value at the anchorage cannot be used and a slightly lower
value shall be specified.
500 ft or less
0.15
0.20
0.25
E. Flexural Stress in Concrete Stress at service load levels in the top and bottom
fibers of prestressed members shall be checked for at least two conditions that
will occur in the lifetime of the members. The initial condition occurs just after
the transfer of prestress when the concrete is relatively fresh and the member is
carrying its own dead load. The final condition occurs after all the prestress losses
when the concrete has gained its full ultimate strength and the member is carrying
dead load and live load. For certain bridges, other intermediate loading conditions
may have to be checked, such as when prestressing and falsework release are done
in stages and when special construction loads have to be carried, etc. The concrete
stresses shall be within the AASHTO LRFD Specification allowable except as
amended in Section5.2.1.
Page 5.8-15
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
In addition, maximum and minimum steel percentages and cracking moment shall
be checked. See Section 2.3.8 of Reference17.
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
B. Horizontal Shear Horizontal shear stress acts over the contact area between two
interconnected surfaces of a composite structural member. AASHTO LRFD 5.8.4
shall be used for shear-friction design.
C. End Block Stresses The highly concentrated forces at the end anchorages
cause bursting and spalling stresses in the concrete which must be resisted
by reinforcement. For a better understanding of this subject, see Chapter 7 of
Reference18 and 19, and Section 2.82 of Reference17.
Note that the procedures for computing horizontal bursting and spalling steel in
the slabs of box girders and T-beams are similar to those required for computing
vertical steel in girder webs, except that the slab steel is figured in a horizontal
instead of a vertical plane. In box girders, this slab steel should be placed half in
the top slab and half in the bottom slab. The anchorage zones of slab bridges will
require vertical stirrups as well as additional horizontal transverse bars extending
across the width of the bridge. The horizontal spalling and bursting steel in slab
bridges shall be placed half in a top layer and half in a bottom layer.
Page 5.8-17
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
E. Anchorage Plate Design The design and detailing of the anchorage block in
CIP post-tensioned box girders should be based on Normal Anchorage Devices
as defined in Standard Specifications Section 6-02.3(26)C. Special Anchorage
Devices as defined in Standard Specifications Section 6-02.3(26)D could be
used ifstacking of Normal Anchorage Devices within the depth of girder is
geometrically not possible. Anchorage plates shall not extend to top and bottom
slab of box girders. If Special Anchorage Devices are used, they shall be specified
in the contract plans and bridge specialprovisions.
5.8.5 Temperature Effects
Most specifications for massive bridges call for a verification of stresses under uniform
temperature changes of the total bridge superstructure. Stresses due to temperature
unevenly distributed within the cross-section are not generally verified. In reality,
however, considerable temperature gradients are set up within the cross-section of
superstructures. Such temperature differences are mostly of a very complex nature,
depending on the type of cross-section and direction of solar radiation 20.
Solar radiation produces uniform heating of the upper surface of a bridge
superstructure which is greater than that of the lower surface. An inverse temperature
gradient with higher temperatures at the lower surface occurs rarely and involves much
smaller temperature differences. In statically indeterminate continuous bridge beams, a
temperature rise at the upper surface produces positive flexural moments which cause
tensile stresses in the bottom fibers. When the temperature gradient is constant over
the entire length of a continuous beam superstructure, positive flexural moments are
induced in all spans. These moments are of equal constant magnitude in the interior
spans and decrease linearly to zero in the end spans. The most critical zones are
those which have the lowest compressive stress reserve in the bottom fibers under
prestress plus dead load. Normally, these are the zones near the interior supports where
additional tensile stresses develop in the bottom fibers dueto
A concentrated support reaction, and
Insufficient curvature of prestressed reinforcement.
Studies have shown that temperature is the most important tension-producing factor,
especially in two-span continuous beams in the vicinity of intermediate supports,
even when the temperature difference is only 10C between the deck and bottom of
the beam. In practice, a box girder can exhibit a T=30C. The zone at a distance of
about 0.3 to 2.0d on either side of the intermediate support proved to be particularly
crack-prone.
Computation of stresses induced by vertical temperature gradients within prestressed
concrete bridges can become quite complex and are ignored in typical designs done by
WSDOT. It is assumed that movements at the expansion devices will generally relieve
any induced stresses. However, such stresses can be substantial in massive, deep
bridge members in localities with large temperature fluctuations. If the structure being
designed falls within this category, a thermal stress investigation shall be considered.
See Reference17 and the following temperature criteria for further guidance.
1. A mean temperature 50F with rise 45F and fall 45F for longitudinal analysis
using one-half of the modulus of elasticity. (Maximum Seasonal Variation.)
Page 5.8-18
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5.8-19
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Page 5.8-20
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
If jacking is done at both ends of the bridge, the minimum strand elongation due
to the specified jacking load for the end jacked first as well as the end jacked last
shall be indicated. The calculated strand elongations at the ends of the bridge are
compared with the measured field values to ensure that the friction coefficients
(and hence the levels of prestressing throughout the structure) agree with the values
assumed by the designer.
The tendons shall be jacked in a sequence that avoids causing overstress or tension
in the bridge.
Page 5.8-21
Concrete Structures
Page 5.8-22
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5.9-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
All supports required prior to the splicing of the girder shall be shown on the contract
documents, including elevations and reactions. The stage of construction during which
the temporary supports are removed shall also be shown on the contract documents.
Stresses due to changes in the structural system, in particular the effects of the
application of load to one structural system and its removal from a different structural
system, shall be accounted for. Redistribution of such stresses by creep shall be taken
into account and allowance shall be made for possible variations in the creep rate
andmagnitude.
Prestress losses in spliced prestressed concrete girder bridges shall be estimated using
the provisions of Section5.1.4. The effects of combined pretensioning and posttensioning and staged post-tensioning shall beconsidered. When required, the effects
of creep and shrinkage in spliced prestressed concrete girder bridges shall beestimated
using the provisions of Section 5.1.1.
5.9.2 WSDOT Criteria for Use of Spliced Girders
See Section 5.6.3.D.3 for criteria on providing an alternate spliced-girder design for
long span one-piece pretensioned girders.
5.9.3 Girder Segment Design
A. Design Considerations Stress limits for temporary concrete stresses in girder
segments before losses and stress limits for concrete stresses in girder segments
at the service limit state after losses specified in Section 5.2.1.C shall apply at
each stage of pretensioning or post-tensioning with due consideration for all
applicable loads during construction. The concrete strength at the time the stage of
prestressing isapplied shall be substituted for ci in the stress limits.
The designer shall consider requirements for bracing of the girder segments once
they have been erected on the substructure. Any requirements for temporary
or permanent bracing during subsequent stages of construction, along with the
contractors responsibilities for designing and placing them, shall be specified in
the contract documents.
Page 5.9-2
All post-tensioning tendons shall be fully grouted after stressing. Prior to grouting
of post-tensioning ducts, gross cross-section properties shall be reduced by
deducting the area of ducts and void areas around tendoncouplers.
Where some or all post-tensioning is applied after the bridge deck concrete is
placed, fewer post-tensioning tendons and a lower concrete strength in the closure
joint may be required. However, deck replacement, if necessary, is difficult to
accommodate with this construction sequence. Where all ofthe post-tensioning
is applied before the deck concrete is placed, a greater number ofposttensioning
tendons and a higher concrete strength in the closure joint may be required.
However, in this case, the deck can be replaced if necessary.
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.14
April 2015
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
The final configuration of the closures shall be coordinated with the State Bridge
and Structures Architect on all highly visible bridges, such as bridges over
vehicular or pedestrian traffic.
Web reinforcement within the joint shall be the larger of that in the adjacent
girders. The face of the segments at closure joints shall be specified as intentionally
roughened surface.
Concrete cover to web stirrups at the CIP closures of pier diaphragms shall not
be less than 2. Ifintermediate diaphragm locations coincide with CIP closures
between segments, then the concrete cover at the CIP closures shall not be less than
2. This increase in concrete cover is not necessary if intermediate diaphragm
locations are away from the CIP closures. See Figures 5.9.4-1 to5.9.4-3 for details
of closure joints.
The clear spacing between ducts at CIP closures of pier diaphragms shall be 2.0
minimum. The duct diameter for WSDOT standard spliced girders shall not exceed
4.0 for spliced I-girders and 4 for spliced tub girders.
On the construction sequence sheet indicate that the side forms at the CIP closures
and intermediate pier diaphragms shall be removed to inspect for concrete
consolidation prior to post-tensioning andgrouting.
Page 5.9-3
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
D. Joint Design Stress limits for temporary concrete stresses in joints before
losses specified in Section 5.2.1.C shall apply at each stage of post-tensioning.
The concrete strength at the time the stage of post-tensioning isapplied shall be
substituted for ci in the stress limits.
Page 5.9-4
Stress limits for concrete stresses in joints at the service limit state after losses
specified in Section5.2.1.C shall apply. These stress limits shall also apply
for intermediate load stages, with the concrete strength at the time of loading
substituted for c in the stress limits. The compressive strength of the closure joint
concrete at a specified age shall be compatible with designstresslimitations.
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
PIER
PRECAST TRAPEZOIDAL
TUB GIRDER
2"
#5 @ 4" SPA.
45 FILLET
(TYP.)
2" CLR.
(TYP.)
2"
END OF PRECAST
SEGMENT
EXTERIOR WEB
FACE OF
DIAPHRAGM
DIAPHRAGM
REINFORCING
POST-TENSIONING
DUCT (TYP.)
INTERIOR WEB
Page 5.9-5
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
2'-0"
CLOSURE
PRECAST TRAPEZOIDAL
TUB GIRDER
2"
1" CLR.
(TYP.)
#5
5 SPA. @
4" =1'-8"
2"
EXTERIOR WEB
END OF PRECAST
SEGMENT
POST-TENSIONING
DUCT (TYP.)
INTERIOR WEB
Page 5.9-6
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
INTERMEDIATE
DIAPHRAGM
2'-0"
CLOSURE
#5
5 SPA. @
4" =1'-8"
PRECAST TRAPEZOIDAL
TUB GIRDER
2"
POST-TENSIONING
DUCT (TYP.)
2"
EXTERIOR WEB
45 FILLET (TYP.)
END OF PRECAST
SEGMENT
DIAPHRAGM
REINFORCING
2" CLR.
(TYP.)
INTERIOR WEB
Page 5.9-7
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Page 5.9-8
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
22. The curvature friction coefficient and wobble friction coefficient. The curvature
friction coefficient of = 0.15 for bridges less than 400feet, = 0.2 for bridges
between 400feet and 800feet, and = 0.25 for bridges longer than 800feet. The
wobble friction coefficient of k = 0.0002/ft is often used. These coefficients may
be revised by the post-tensioning supplier if approved by the design engineer and
conform to the Standard Specifications 6.02.3(26)G.
23. Post-tensioning stressing sequence.
24. Tendon stresses shall not exceed the following limits for low relaxation strands as
specified in Section5.8.3.D:
0.81pu at anchor ends immediately before seating.
0.70pu at anchor ends immediately after seating.
0.74pu at the end point of length influenced by anchor set.
25. Elongation calculations for each jacking operation shall be verified. If the
difference in tendon elongation exceeds 2%, the elongation calculations shall be
separated for each tendon per Standard Specifications Section 6-02.3(26)A.
26. Vent points shall be provided at all high points along tendon.
27. Drain holes shall be provided at all low points along tendon.
28. The concrete strength at the time of post-tensioning, ci shall not be less than
4,000psi per Standard Specifications 6-02.3(26)G. Different concrete strength may
be used if specified in the contract plans.
29. Concrete stresses at the anchorage shall be checked per Standard Specifications
Section 6-02.3(26)C for bearing type anchorage. For other type of anchorage
assemblies, ifnot covered in the Appendix 5-B2 for pre-approved list of posttensioning system, testing per Standard Specifications Section 6-02.3(26)D
isrequired.
30. Concrete stresses at CIP closures shall conform to allowable stresses of
Table5.2.1-1.
5.9.6 Post-tensioning Notes Spliced Prestressed Concrete Girders
1. The CIP concrete in the bridge deck shall be Class 4000D. The minimum
compressive strength of the CIP concrete at the wet joint at the time of posttensioning shall be . ksi.
2. The minimum prestressing load after seating and the minimum number of
prestressing strands for each girder shall be as shown in post-tensioning table.
3. The design is based on .. inch diameter low relaxation strands with a jacking
load for each girder as shown in post-tensioning table, an anchor set of a
curvature friction coefficient, = 0.20 and a wobble friction coefficient, k = 0.0002/
ft. The actual anchor set used by the contractor shall be specified in the shop plans
and included in the transfer force calculations.
4. The design is based on the estimated prestress loss of post-tensioned prestressing
strands as shown inpost-tensioning table due to steel relaxation, elastic shortening,
creep and shrinkage of concrete.
Page 5.9-9
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
5. The contractor shall submit the stressing sequence and elongation calculations to
the engineer for approval. All losses due to tendon vertical and horizontal curvature
must be included in elongation calculations. The stressing sequence shall meet the
following criteria:
A. The prestressing force shall be distributed with an approximately equal amount
in each web and shall be placed symmetrically about the centerline of the
bridge.
B. No more than one-half of the prestressing force in any web may be stressed
before an equal force is stressed in the adjacent webs. At no time during
stressing operation will more than one-sixth of the total prestressing force is
applied eccentrically about the centerline of bridge.
6. The maximum outside diameter of the duct shall be . inches. The area of the duct
shall be at least 2.5 times the net area of the prestressing steel in the duct.
7. All tendons shall be stressed from pier .
Page 5.9-10
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
5.99References
1. AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications, Current Edition, AASHTO,
Washington, D.C.
2. Seguirant, S.J., New Deep WSDOT Standard Sections Extend Spans of
Prestressed Concrete Girders, PCI JOURNAL, V. 43, No. 4, July-August 1998,
pp. 92-119.
3. PCI Bridge Design Manual, Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute,
Chicago,IL,1997.
4. ACI 318-02, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and
Commentary, American Concrete Institute, 1989, pp.353.
5. Hsu, T. T. C., Torsion of Reinforced Concrete, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co.,
NewYork, 1st Ed., 1984, 516pp.
6. Collins, M. P. and Mitchell, D., Shear and Torsion Design of Prestressed and NonPrestressed Concrete Beams, PCI Journal, September-October, 1980, pp.32-100.
7. Mirza, S.A., and Furlong, R.W., Design of Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete
Inverted T Beams for Bridge Structures, PCI Journal, Vol. 30, No. 4, July-August
1985, pp. 112-136.
8. Rabbat, B.G., Reader Comments Design of Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete
inverted T Beams for Bridge Structures, PCI Journal, Vol. 31, No. 3, May-June
1986, pp. 157-163.
9. ACI Committee 345, Guide for Widening Highway Bridges, ACI Structural
Journal, July/August, 1992, pp.451-466.
10. PCI Design Handbook, Precast and Prestressed Concrete, Sixth Edition, Precast/
Prestressed Concrete Institute, Chicago, IL, 2004.
11. Mast, R.F., Lateral Stability of Long Prestressed Concrete Beams, Part 1,
PCIJOURNAL, V. 34, No. 1, January-February 1989, pp. 34-53.
12. Mast, R.F., Lateral Stability of Long Prestressed Concrete Beams, Part 2,
PCIJOURNAL, V. 38, No. 1, January-February 1993, pp. 70-88.
13. Imper, R.R., and Laszlo, G., Handling and Shipping of Long Span Bridge
Beams, PCI JOURNAL, V. 32, No. 6, November-December 1987, pp. 86-101.
14. Manual for the Evaluation and Repair of Precast, Prestressed Concrete Bridge
Products, Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute, Chicago, IL, 2006.
15. Transportation Research Board Report No. 226 titled, Damage Evaluation and
Repair Methods for Prestressed Concrete Bridge Members.
16. Transportation Research Board Report No. 280 titled, Guidelines for Evaluation
and Repair of Prestressed Concrete Bridge Members.
17. Post-tensioned Box Girder Bridge Manual, Post-tensioning Institute,
301WestOsborn, Phoenix, Arizona.
18. Prestressed Concrete Structures T. Y. Lin, Wiley.
19. Prestressed Concrete Vol. I and II, Guyon, Wiley
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.14
April 2015
Page 5.99-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
20. Design of Concrete Bridges for Temperature Gradients, ACI Journal, May 1978.
21. Mast, R. F., Unified Design Provisions for Reinforced and Prestressed Concrete
Flexural and Compression Members, ACI Structural Journal, V. 89, No. 2, MarchApril 1992, pp. 185-199. See also discussions by R.K. Devalapura and M.K.
Tadros, C.W. Dolan and J.V. Loscheider and closure to discussions in V. 89, No.5,
September-October 1992, pp. 591-593.
22. Weigel, J.A., Seguirant, S.J., Brice, R., and Khaleghi, B., High Performance
Precast, Prestressed Concrete Girder Bridges in Washington State, PCI
JOURNAL, V. 48, No. 2, March-April 2003, pp.28-52.
23. Seguirant, S. J., Brice, R., and Khaleghi, B., Flexural Strength of
ReinforcedandPrestressed Concrete T-Beams, PCI JOURNAL, V. 50, No. 1,
January-February 2005, pp 44-73.
24. TRAC Report WA-RD 696.1, "Effect of Intermediate Diaphragms to Prestressed
Concrete Bridge Girders in Over-Height Truck Impacts completed on April 2008
by the Washington State University.
25. NCHRP Report 628, Self-Consolidating Concrete for Precast, Prestressed
Concrete Bridge Elements, NCHRP Project 18-12, Transportation Research
Board, 2009.
Page 5.99-2
Appendix 5.1-A1
Standard Hooks
Page 5.1-A1-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5.1-A1-2
Chapter 5
Appendix 5.1-A2
Appendix 5.1-A2
Page 5.1-A2-1
Page 5.1-A2-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5.1-A2-2
Chapter 5
Appendix
5.1-A3
Appendix 5.1-A3
ReinforcingBar
BarProperties
Properties
Reinforcing
Weight (lbs/ft)
Nominal
Diameter (in)
Outside
Diameter (in)
Area (in2)
Standard Mill
Length (ft)
0 .376
0 .375
0 .42
0 .11
40
0 .668
0 .500
0 .56
0 .20
40
1 .043
0 .625
0 .70
0 .31
60
1 .502
0 .750
0 .83
0 .44
60
2 .044
0 .875
0 .96
0 .60
60
2 .670
1 .000
1 .10
0 .79
60
3 .400
1 .128
1 .24
1 .00
60
10
4 .303
1 .270
1 .40
1 .27
60
11
5 .313
1 .410
1 .55
1 .56
60
14
7 .65
1 .693
1 .86
2 .25
60
18
13 .60
2 .257
2 .48
4 .00
60
Page 5.1-A3-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5.1-A3-2
Chapter 5
Appendix 5.1-A4
Appendix
5.1-A4
Tension Development
Tension
Development
Length
of Deformed
Bars
Length of Deformed Bars
rc = 0 .6
Top Bars Others
21 .06
16 .20
18 .84
14 .49
17 .20
13 .23
28 .08
21 .60
25 .12
19 .32
22 .93
17 .64
35 .10
27 .00
31 .39
24 .15
28 .66
22 .05
42 .12
32 .40
37 .67
28 .98
34 .39
26 .45
49 .14
37 .80
43 .95
33 .81
40 .12
30 .86
56 .16
43 .20
50 .23
38 .64
45 .85
35 .27
63 .35
48 .73
56 .66
43 .59
51 .72
39 .79
71 .32
54 .86
63 .79
49 .07
58 .24
44 .80
79 .19
60 .91
70 .83
54 .48
64 .65
49 .73
95 .08
73 .14
85 .04
65 .42
77 .63
59 .72
126 .75
97 .50
113 .37
87 .21
103 .49
79 .61
rc = 0 .8
Top Bars Others
28 .08
21 .60
25 .12
19 .32
22 .93
17 .64
37 .44
28 .80
33 .49
25 .76
30 .57
23 .52
46 .80
36 .00
41 .86
32 .20
38 .21
29 .39
56 .16
43 .20
50 .23
38 .64
45 .85
35 .27
65 .52
50 .40
58 .60
45 .08
53 .50
41 .15
74 .88
57 .60
66 .97
51 .52
61 .14
47 .03
84 .46
64 .97
75 .55
58 .11
68 .97
53 .05
95 .10
73 .15
85 .06
65 .43
77 .65
59 .73
105 .58
81 .22
94 .43
72 .64
86 .21
66 .31
126 .77
97 .52
113 .39
87 .22
103 .51
79 .62
169 .00
130 .00
151 .16
116 .28
137 .99
106 .15
rc = 1 .0
Top Bars Others
35 .10
27 .00
31 .39
24 .15
28 .66
22 .05
46 .80
36 .00
41 .86
32 .20
38 .21
29 .39
58 .50
45 .00
52 .32
40 .25
47 .77
36 .74
70 .20
54 .00
62 .79
48 .30
57 .32
44 .09
81 .90
63 .00
73 .25
56 .35
66 .87
51 .44
93 .60
72 .00
83 .72
64 .40
76 .42
58 .79
105 .58
81 .22
94 .43
72 .64
86 .21
66 .31
118 .87
91 .44
106 .32
81 .79
97 .06
74 .66
131 .98
101 .52
118 .04
90 .80
107 .76
82 .89
158 .46
121 .90
141 .74
109 .03
129 .39
99 .53
211 .26
162 .50
188 .95
145 .35
172 .49
132 .68
Notes:
1. Values based on use of normal weight concrete.
2. Values based on use of grade 60 reinforcement.
3. Top bars are horizontal bars placed so that more than 12 of fresh concrete is cast below the reinforcement.
4. The minimum tension development length = 12.
5 . rc is the Reinforcement Confinement Factor .
Page 5.1-A4-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Others
16 .20
14 .49
13 .23
21 .60
19 .32
17 .64
27 .00
24 .15
22 .05
32 .40
28 .98
26 .45
37 .80
33 .81
30 .86
43 .20
38 .64
35 .27
48 .73
43 .59
39 .79
54 .86
49 .07
44 .80
60 .91
54 .48
49 .73
73 .14
65 .42
59 .72
97 .50
87 .21
79 .61
Top Bars
27 .54
24 .63
22 .49
36 .72
32 .84
29 .98
45 .90
41 .05
37 .48
55 .08
49 .27
44 .97
64 .26
57 .48
52 .47
73 .44
65 .69
59 .96
82 .84
74 .09
67 .64
93 .27
83 .42
76 .15
103 .55
92 .62
84 .55
124 .33
111 .21
101 .52
165 .75
148 .25
135 .34
Others
24 .30
21 .73
19 .84
32 .40
28 .98
26 .45
40 .50
36 .22
33 .07
48 .60
43 .47
39 .68
56 .70
50 .71
46 .30
64 .80
57 .96
52 .91
73 .09
65 .38
59 .68
82 .30
73 .61
67 .19
91 .37
81 .72
74 .60
109 .71
98 .12
89 .57
146 .25
130 .81
119 .42
Top Bars
36 .72
32 .84
29 .98
48 .96
43 .79
39 .98
61 .20
54 .74
49 .97
73 .44
65 .69
59 .96
85 .68
76 .63
69 .96
97 .92
87 .58
79 .95
110 .45
98 .79
90 .19
124 .36
111 .23
101 .54
138 .07
123 .49
112 .73
165 .78
148 .28
135 .36
221 .01
197 .67
180 .45
Others
32 .40
28 .98
26 .45
43 .20
38 .64
35 .27
54 .00
48 .30
44 .09
64 .80
57 .96
52 .91
75 .60
67 .62
61 .73
86 .40
77 .28
70 .55
97 .46
87 .17
79 .58
109 .73
98 .14
89 .59
121 .82
108 .96
99 .47
146 .28
130 .83
119 .43
195 .00
174 .42
159 .22
Top Bars
45 .90
41 .05
37 .48
61 .20
54 .74
49 .97
76 .50
68 .42
62 .46
91 .80
82 .11
74 .95
107 .10
95 .79
87 .45
122 .40
109 .48
99 .94
138 .07
123 .49
112 .73
155 .45
139 .04
126 .92
172 .58
154 .36
140 .91
207 .22
185 .35
169 .20
276 .26
247 .09
225 .56
Others
40 .50
36 .22
33 .07
54 .00
48 .30
44 .09
67 .50
60 .37
55 .11
81 .00
72 .45
66 .14
94 .50
84 .52
77 .16
108 .00
96 .60
88 .18
121 .82
108 .96
99 .47
137 .16
122 .68
111 .99
152 .28
136 .20
124 .34
182 .84
163 .54
149 .29
243 .76
218 .02
199 .03
Notes:
1. Values based on use of normal weight concrete.
2. Values based on use of grade 60 reinforcement.
3. Top bars are horizontal bars placed so that more than 12 of fresh concrete is cast below the reinforcement.
4. The minimum tension development length = 12.
5 . rc is the Reinforcement Confinement Factor .
Page 5.1-A4-2
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Others
12 .96
12 .00
12 .00
17 .28
15 .46
14 .11
21 .60
19 .32
17 .64
25 .92
23 .18
21 .16
30 .24
27 .05
24 .69
34 .56
30 .91
28 .22
38 .98
34 .87
31 .83
43 .89
39 .26
35 .84
48 .73
43 .59
39 .79
58 .51
52 .33
47 .77
78 .00
69 .77
63 .69
Top Bars
25 .27
22 .60
20 .63
33 .70
30 .14
27 .51
42 .12
37 .67
34 .39
50 .54
45 .21
41 .27
58 .97
52 .74
48 .15
67 .39
60 .28
55 .03
76 .02
67 .99
62 .07
85 .59
76 .55
69 .88
95 .02
84 .99
77 .59
114 .09
102 .05
93 .16
152 .10
136 .05
124 .19
Others
19 .44
17 .39
15 .87
25 .92
23 .18
21 .16
32 .40
28 .98
26 .45
38 .88
34 .78
31 .75
45 .36
40 .57
37 .04
51 .84
46 .37
42 .33
58 .48
52 .30
47 .75
65 .84
58 .89
53 .76
73 .09
65 .38
59 .68
87 .77
78 .50
71 .66
117 .00
104 .65
95 .53
Top Bars
33 .70
30 .14
27 .51
44 .93
40 .18
36 .68
56 .16
50 .23
45 .85
67 .39
60 .28
55 .03
78 .62
70 .32
64 .20
89 .86
80 .37
73 .37
101 .36
90 .66
82 .76
114 .12
102 .07
93 .18
126 .70
113 .32
103 .45
152 .13
136 .07
124 .21
202 .80
181 .39
165 .59
Others
25 .92
23 .18
21 .16
34 .56
30 .91
28 .22
43 .20
38 .64
35 .27
51 .84
46 .37
42 .33
60 .48
54 .09
49 .38
69 .12
61 .82
56 .44
77 .97
69 .74
63 .66
87 .78
78 .51
71 .67
97 .46
87 .17
79 .58
117 .02
104 .67
95 .55
156 .00
139 .53
127 .38
Top Bars
42 .12
37 .67
34 .39
56 .16
50 .23
45 .85
70 .20
62 .79
57 .32
84 .24
75 .35
68 .78
98 .28
87 .90
80 .25
112 .32
100 .46
91 .71
126 .70
113 .32
103 .45
142 .65
127 .59
116 .47
158 .37
141 .65
129 .31
190 .16
170 .08
155 .26
253 .51
226 .74
206 .99
Others
32 .40
28 .98
26 .45
43 .20
38 .64
35 .27
54 .00
48 .30
44 .09
64 .80
57 .96
52 .91
75 .60
67 .62
61 .73
86 .40
77 .28
70 .55
97 .46
87 .17
79 .58
109 .73
98 .14
89 .59
121 .82
108 .96
99 .47
146 .28
130 .83
119 .43
195 .00
174 .42
159 .22
Notes:
1. Values based on use of normal weight concrete.
2. Values based on use of grade 60 reinforcement.
3. Top bars are horizontal bars placed so that more than 12 of fresh concrete is cast below the reinforcement.
4. The minimum tension development length = 12.
5 . rc is the Reinforcement Confinement Factor .
Page 5.1-A4-3
Concrete Structures
Page 5.1-A4-4
Chapter 5
Appendix 5.1-A5
Appendix 5.1-A5
Bar (#)
Min . Compression
Lap Splice (in)
c = 3 ksi
c = 4 ksi
c 5 ksi
c 3 ksi
12 .00
12 .00
12 .00
24 .00
12 .00
12 .00
12 .00
24 .00
13 .64
12 .00
12 .00
24 .00
16 .37
14 .18
13 .50
24 .00
19 .10
16 .54
15 .75
26 .25
21 .82
18 .90
18 .00
30 .00
24 .62
21 .32
20 .30
33 .84
10
27 .72
24 .00
22 .86
38 .10
11
30 .77
26 .65
25 .38
42 .30
14
36 .95
32 .00
30 .47
50 .79
18
49 .26
42 .66
40 .63
67 .71
Notes:
1. Where excess bar area is provided, the development length may be reduced by the ratio of required area to
provided area .
2. Where reinforcement is enclosed within a spiral composed of a bar of not less than 0.25 inches in diameter
and spaced at not more than a 4.0 inch pitch, the compression development length may be multiplied by 0.75.
3. The minimum compression development length is 12 inches.
4. Where bars of different size are lap spliced in compression, the splice length shall not be less than the
development length of the larger bar or the splice length of the smaller bar.
5 . Where ties along the splice have an effective area not less than 0 .15 percent of the product of the thickness of
the compression component times the tie spacing, the compression lap splice may be multiplied by 0.83.
6. Where the splice is confined by spirals, the compression lap splice may be multiplied by 0.75.
7. The minimum compression lap splice length is 24 inches.
Page 5.1-A5-1
Page 5.1-A5-2
Chapter 13
Tension Development
Development Length
Tension
Length
of90
90and
and 180
180 Standard
Standard Hooks
of
Hooks
Appendix 5.1-A6
Appendix
5.1-A6
10
11
14
18
4
5
6
4
5
6
4
5
6
4
5
6
4
5
6
4
5
6
4
5
6
4
5
6
4
5
6
4
5
6
4
5
6
7 .13
6 .37
5 .82
9 .50
8 .50
7 .76
11 .88
10 .62
9 .70
14 .25
12 .75
11 .64
16 .63
14 .87
13 .57
19 .00
16 .99
15 .51
21 .43
19 .17
17 .50
24 .13
21 .58
19 .70
26 .79
23 .96
21 .87
32 .17
28 .77
26 .26
42 .88
38 .36
35 .01
7 .13
6 .37
6 .00
9 .50
8 .50
7 .76
11 .88
10 .62
9 .70
14 .25
12 .75
11 .64
16 .63
14 .87
13 .57
19 .00
16 .99
15 .51
21 .43
19 .17
17 .50
24 .13
21 .58
19 .70
26 .79
23 .96
21 .87
32 .17
28 .77
26 .26
42 .88
38 .36
35 .01
6 .00
6 .00
6 .00
7 .60
6 .80
6 .21
9 .50
8 .50
7 .76
11 .40
10 .20
9 .31
13 .30
11 .90
10 .86
15 .20
13 .60
12 .41
17 .15
15 .34
14 .00
19 .30
17 .27
15 .76
21 .43
19 .17
17 .50
32 .17
28 .77
26 .26
42 .88
38 .36
35 .01
6 .00
6 .00
6 .00
7 .60
6 .80
6 .21
9 .50
8 .50
7 .76
11 .40
10 .20
9 .31
13 .30
11 .90
10 .86
15 .20
13 .60
12 .41
17 .15
15 .34
14 .00
19 .30
17 .27
15 .76
21 .43
19 .17
17 .50
32 .17
28 .77
26 .26
42 .88
38 .36
35 .01
6 .00
6 .00
6 .00
6 .08
6 .00
6 .00
7 .60
6 .80
6 .21
9 .12
8 .16
7 .45
10 .64
9 .52
8 .69
12 .16
10 .88
9 .93
13 .72
12 .27
11 .20
15 .44
13 .81
12 .61
17 .15
15 .34
14 .00
32 .17
28 .77
26 .26
42 .88
38 .36
35 .01
Page 5.1-A6-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Notes:
1. Values based on use of normal weight concrete.
2. Values based on use of grade 60 reinforcement.
3. The basic development length lhb shall be multiplied by 1.2 for epoxy coated reinforcement.
4. The basic development length lhb may be reduced by the ratio of required area to provided area where
excess bar area is provided.
5. The basic development length lhb may be multiplied by 0.8 for #11 and smaller bars for hooks with side
cover normal to plane of the hook not less than 2.5 inches, and for 90 degree hook with cover on the bar
extension beyond hook not less than 2.0 inches.
6. The basic development length lhb may be multiplied by 0.8 for 90 degree hooks of #11 and smaller bars that
are either enclosed within ties or stirrups perpendicular to the bar being developed, spaced not greater than
3db along the development length, ldh, of the hook; or enclosed within ties or stirrups parallel to the bar being
developed spaced not greater than 3db along the length of the tail extension of the hook plus bend, and in both
cases the first tie or stirrup enclosing the bent portion of the hook is within 2db of the outside of the bend.
7. The basic development length lhb may be multiplied by 0.8 for 180 degree hooks of #11 and smaller bars
that are enclosed within ties or stirrups perpendicular to the bar being developed, spaced not greater than 3db
along the development length, ldh, of the hook, and the first tie or stirrup enclosing the bent portion of the hook
is within 2db of the outside of the bend.
8 . Minimum tension development length is the larger of 8db and 6 inches .
Page 5.1-A6-2
Appendix 5.1-A7
Appendix 5.1-A7
Page 5.1-A7-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Class B Tension Lap Splice Length of Epoxy Coated Deformed Bars (in)
(cover less than 3db or clear spacing between bars less than 6db)
cf = 1 .5
rc = 0 .6
rc = 0 .8
rc = 1 .0
rc = 0 .4
Bar c
(#) (ksi) Top Bars
Others
4 .0
24 .00
24 .00
3
5 .0
24 .00
24 .00
6 .0
24 .00
24 .00
4 .0
31 .82
28 .08
4
5 .0
28 .46
25 .12
6 .0
25 .98
24 .00
4 .0
39 .78
35 .10
5
5 .0
35 .58
31 .39
6 .0
32 .48
28 .66
4 .0
47 .74
42 .12
6
5 .0
42 .70
37 .67
6 .0
38 .98
34 .39
4 .0
55 .69
49 .14
7
5 .0
49 .81
43 .95
6 .0
45 .47
40 .12
4 .0
63 .65
56 .16
8
5 .0
56 .93
50 .23
6 .0
51 .97
45 .85
4 .0
71 .79
63 .35
9
5 .0
64 .22
56 .66
6 .0
58 .62
51 .72
4 .0
80 .83
71 .32
10 5 .0
72 .30
63 .79
6 .0
66 .00
58 .24
4 .0
89 .74
79 .19
11 5 .0
80 .27
70 .83
6 .0
73 .28
64 .65
Not Allowed
14
Not Allowed
18
Top Bars
Others
35 .80
31 .59
32 .02
28 .25
29 .23
25 .79
47 .74
42 .12
42 .70
37 .67
38 .98
34 .39
59 .67
52 .65
53 .37
47 .09
48 .72
42 .99
71 .60
63 .18
64 .04
56 .51
58 .46
51 .59
83 .54
73 .71
74 .72
65 .93
68 .21
60 .18
95 .47
84 .24
85 .39
75 .35
77 .95
68 .78
107 .69
95 .02
96 .32
84 .99
87 .93
77 .59
121 .25
106 .98
108 .45
95 .69
99 .00
87 .35
134 .62
118 .78
120 .40
106 .24
109 .91
96 .98
Not Allowed
Not Allowed
Top Bars
Others
47 .74
42 .12
42 .70
37 .67
38 .98
34 .39
63 .65
56 .16
56 .93
50 .23
51 .97
45 .85
79 .56
70 .20
71 .16
62 .79
64 .96
57 .32
95 .47
84 .24
85 .39
75 .35
77 .95
68 .78
111 .38
98 .28
99 .62
87 .90
90 .94
80 .25
127 .30
112 .32
113 .86
100 .46
103 .94
91 .71
143 .59
126 .70
128 .43
113 .32
117 .24
103 .45
161 .67
142 .65
144 .60
127 .59
132 .00
116 .47
179 .49
158 .37
160 .54
141 .65
146 .55
129 .31
Not Allowed
Not Allowed
Top Bars
Others
59 .67
52 .65
53 .37
47 .09
48 .72
42 .99
79 .56
70 .20
71 .16
62 .79
64 .96
57 .32
99 .45
87 .75
88 .95
78 .49
81 .20
71 .65
119 .34
105 .30
106 .74
94 .18
97 .44
85 .98
139 .23
122 .85
124 .53
109 .88
113 .68
100 .31
159 .12
140 .40
142 .32
125 .58
129 .92
114 .64
179 .49
158 .37
160 .54
141 .65
146 .55
129 .31
202 .08
178 .31
180 .75
159 .48
165 .00
145 .59
224 .36
197 .96
200 .67
177 .06
183 .19
161 .64
Not Allowed
Not Allowed
Notes:
1. Values based on use of normal weight concrete.
2. Values based on use of grade 60 reinforcement.
3. Top bars are horizontal bars placed so that more than 12 of fresh concrete is cast below the reinforcement.
4. The minimum tension lap splice length = 24.
5 . rc is the Reinforcement Confinement Factor .
6. Class A tension lap splices may be used where the area of reinforcement provided is at least twice that
required by analysis over the entire length of the lap splice and one-half or less of the total reinforcement is
spliced within the required lap splice length. The Class A modification factor is 0.77.
Page 5.1-A7-2
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Class B Tension Lap Splice Length of Epoxy Coated Deformed Bars (in)
(cover not less than 3db and clear spacing between bars not less than 6db)
cf = 1 .2
rc = 0 .6
rc = 0 .8
rc = 1 .0
rc = 0 .4
Bar c
(#) (ksi) Top Bars
Others
4 .0
24 .00
24 .00
3
5 .0
24 .00
24 .00
6 .0
24 .00
24 .00
4 .0
29 .20
24 .00
4
5 .0
26 .12
24 .00
6 .0
24 .00
24 .00
4 .0
36 .50
28 .08
5
5 .0
32 .65
25 .12
6 .0
29 .81
24 .00
4 .0
43 .80
33 .70
6
5 .0
39 .18
30 .14
6 .0
35 .77
27 .51
4 .0
51 .11
39 .31
7
5 .0
45 .71
35 .16
6 .0
41 .73
32 .10
4 .0
58 .41
44 .93
8
5 .0
52 .24
40 .18
6 .0
47 .69
36 .68
4 .0
65 .88
50 .68
9
5 .0
58 .93
45 .33
6 .0
53 .79
41 .38
4 .0
74 .18
57 .06
10 5 .0
66 .35
51 .03
6 .0
60 .56
46 .59
4 .0
82 .35
63 .35
11 5 .0
73 .66
56 .66
6 .0
67 .24
51 .72
Not Allowed
14
Not Allowed
18
Top Bars
Others
32 .85
25 .27
29 .39
24 .00
26 .82
24 .00
43 .80
33 .70
39 .18
30 .14
35 .77
27 .51
54 .76
42 .12
48 .98
37 .67
44 .71
34 .39
65 .71
50 .54
58 .77
45 .21
53 .65
41 .27
76 .66
58 .97
68 .57
52 .74
62 .59
48 .15
87 .61
67 .39
78 .36
60 .28
71 .53
55 .03
98 .82
76 .02
88 .39
67 .99
80 .69
62 .07
111 .26
85 .59
99 .52
76 .55
90 .85
69 .88
123 .53
95 .02
110 .49
84 .99
100 .86
77 .59
Not Allowed
Not Allowed
Top Bars
Others
43 .80
33 .70
39 .18
30 .14
35 .77
27 .51
58 .41
44 .93
52 .24
40 .18
47 .69
36 .68
73 .01
56 .16
65 .30
50 .23
59 .61
45 .85
87 .61
67 .39
78 .36
60 .28
71 .53
55 .03
102 .21
78 .62
91 .42
70 .32
83 .46
64 .20
116 .81
89 .86
104 .48
80 .37
95 .38
73 .37
131 .76
101 .36
117 .85
90 .66
107 .59
82 .76
148 .35
114 .12
132 .69
102 .07
121 .13
93 .18
164 .71
126 .70
147 .32
113 .32
134 .48
103 .45
Not Allowed
Not Allowed
Top Bars
Others
54 .76
42 .12
48 .98
37 .67
44 .71
34 .39
73 .01
56 .16
65 .30
50 .23
59 .61
45 .85
91 .26
70 .20
81 .63
62 .79
74 .51
57 .32
109 .51
84 .24
97 .95
75 .35
89 .42
68 .78
127 .76
98 .28
114 .28
87 .90
104 .32
80 .25
146 .02
112 .32
130 .60
100 .46
119 .22
91 .71
164 .71
126 .70
147 .32
113 .32
134 .48
103 .45
185 .44
142 .65
165 .86
127 .59
151 .41
116 .47
205 .88
158 .37
184 .15
141 .65
168 .10
129 .31
Not Allowed
Not Allowed
Notes:
1. Values based on use of normal weight concrete.
2. Values based on use of grade 60 reinforcement.
3. Top bars are horizontal bars placed so that more than 12 of fresh concrete is cast below the reinforcement.
4. The minimum tension lap splice length = 24.
5 . rc is the Reinforcement Confinement Factor .
6. Class A tension lap splices may be used where the area of reinforcement provided is at least twice that
required by analysis over the entire length of the lap splice and one-half or less of the total reinforcement is
spliced within the required lap splice length. The Class A modification factor is 0.77.
Page 5.1-A7-3
Concrete Structures
Page 5.1-A7-4
Chapter 5
Appendix 5.1-A8
Weight
(lbs/ft)
Nominal
Area (in2)
Diameter (in)
3/8
0.290
0.375
0.085
22.5
5.05
8.08
7/16
0.390
0.438
0.115
26.3
5.90
9.44
1/2
0.520
0.500
0.153
30.0
6.74
10.78
1/2 S
0.568
0.520
0.167
31.2
7.01
11.21
9/16
0.651
0.563
0.192
33.8
7.58
12.14
0.60
0.740
0.600
0.217
36.0
8.08
12.93
0.62
0.788
0.620
0.231
37.2
8.35
13.36
0.70
1.000
0.700
0.294
42.0
9.43
15.09
Page 5.1-A8-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5.1-A8-2
Chapter 5
Appendix 5.2-A1
Page 5.2-A1-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5.2-A1-2
Chapter 5
Appendix 5.2-A2
Appendix
5.2-A2
Page 5.2-A2-1
Page 5.2-A2-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5.2-A2-2
Chapter 5
Appendix
Appendix 5.2-A3
5.2-A3
BridgeBridge
DesignDesign
ManualManual
M 23-50M 23-50.14
WSDOT
June
2006
April
2015
Page 5.2-A3-1
Page 5.2-A3-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5.2-A3-2
Chapter 5
Appendix 5.3-A1
Page 5.3-A1-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5.3-A1-2
Chapter 5
Appendix 5.3-A2
Page 5.3-A2-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5.3-A2-2
Chapter 5
Appendix 5.3-A3
Page 5.3-A3-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5.3-A3-2
Chapter 5
Appendix 5.3-A4
Page 5.3-A4-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5.3-A4-2
Chapter 5
10
11
12
13
14
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
8.0
8.5
Page 1
7.5
#5 Bars
#6 Bars
9.0
9.5
10.0
10.5
11.0
9.0" Slab
8.5" Slab
8.0" Slab
7.5" Slab
Required Bar Spacing for Girder Spacings and Slab Thicknesses for the Positive Moment Region
11.5
12.0
Appendix 5.3-A5
Cast-In-Place Deck Slab Design for
Positive Moment Regions c = 4.0 ksi
Page 5.3-A5-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5.3-A5-2
Chapter 5
10
11
12
13
14
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
8.0
8.5
Page 1
7.5
#5 Bars
#6 Bars
9.0
9.5
10.0
10.5
11.0
9.0" Slab
8.5" Slab
8.0" Slab
7.5" Slab
Required Bar Spacing for Girder Spacings and Slab Thicknesses for the Negative Moment Region
11.5
12.0
Appendix 5.3-A6
Cast-In-Place Deck Slab Design for
Negative Moment Regions c = 4.0 ksi
Page 5.3-A6-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5.3-A6-2
Chapter 5
Appendix 5.3-A7
Slab Overhang Required Reinforcement for Vehicle Impact Interior Barrier Segment - LRFD A13.4.1 Design Case 1
2.8
2.6
2.4
2.2
2
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
3.5
3.75
4.25
4.5
4.75
5.25
5.5
5.75
6.25
6.5
d (in)
Notes:
1. Top and bottom mats each carry one-half the tension impact load.
2. Only Design Case 1 of LRFD A13.4.1 is considered. Designer must also check Design Cases 2 and3.
3. Section considered is a vertical section through the slab overhang at the toe of the barrier.
Slab Overhang Required Reinforcement for Vehicle Impact - Interior Barrier Segment - LRFD
A13.4.1 Design Case 1
Page 5.3-A7-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5.3-A7-2
Chapter 5
Slab
Overhang
Slab Overhang Required Reinforcement
for Vehicle
Impact -DesignAppendix End
5.3-A8
Barrier Segment - LRFD A13.4.1 End
DesignBarrier
Case 1 Segment
3.2
32in F Shape
34in Single Slope
42in F Shape
42in Single Slope
2.8
2.6
2.4
2.2
2
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1
0.8
3.5
3.75
4.25
4.5
4.75
5.25
5.5
5.75
6.25
6.5
d (in)
Notes:
1. Top and bottom mats each carry one-half the tension impact load.
2. Only Design Case 1 of LRFD A13.4.1 is considered. Designer must also check Design Cases 2 and3.
3. Section considered is a vertical section through the slab overhang at the toe of the barrier.
Slab Overhang Required Reinforcement for Vehicle Impact End Barrier Segment - LRFD A13.4.1 Design Case 1
Page 5.3-A8-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5.3-A8-2
Chapter 5
Span Capability
of W Girders Span Capability of W Girders
Appendix
5.6-A1-1
Girder
Type
W42G
W50G
W58G
W74G
Girder
Spacing (ft)
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
CL Bearing to
CL Bearing (ft)
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
50
115
110
105
100
95
90
85
80
130
125
120
115
110
105
100
95
150
145
140
135
130
125
120
115
"A" Dim .
(in)
10 .25
10 .25
10 .00
10 .00
9 .75
9 .75
10 .00
10 .00
11 .00
11 .00
10 .75
10 .75
10 .50
10 .50
10 .75
11 .00
11 .25
11 .25
11 .00
11 .00
11 .00
10 .75
11 .25
11 .50
11 .00
11 .00
11 .25
11 .00
11 .00
11 .00
11 .25
11 .25
Deck
Thickness (in)
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .75
8 .25
8 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .75
8 .00
8 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
8 .00
8 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .75
8 .00
Shipping
Weight (kips)
36
34
32
30
28
26
24
22
69
66
63
60
57
54
51
48
89
86
82
79
76
72
69
66
127
123
119
114
110
106
102
98
Design
Parameters:
Design
Parameters:
version
2.2.3.0
- PGSuper
PGSuper
Version
2.2.3.0
=
7.5
ksi,
c = f'c
9.0 =
ksi9 .0 ksi
Girder
Page 5.6-A1-1-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5.6-A1-1-2
Chapter 5
Appendix
Span Capability of WF Girders
Span5.6-A1-2
Capability of WF Girders
Girder
Type
WF36G
WF42G
WF50G
WF58G
WF66G
WF74G
Girder
CL Bearing to
Deck
Spacing (ft) CL Bearing (ft) "A" Dim . (in) Thickness (in)
5
105
11 .25
7 .50
6
100
11 .25
7 .50
7
95
11 .25
7 .50
8
95
11 .25
7 .50
9
90
11 .25
7 .50
10
85
11 .25
7 .50
11
85
11 .00
7 .50
12
80
11 .00
8 .00
5
120
11 .25
7 .50
6
115
11 .25
7 .50
7
110
11 .50
7 .50
8
105
11 .25
7 .50
9
100
11 .25
7 .50
10
95
11 .25
7 .50
11
90
11 .25
7 .50
12
90
11 .50
8 .00
5
140
11 .00
7 .50
6
135
11 .25
7 .50
7
125
11 .25
7 .50
8
120
11 .50
7 .50
9
115
11 .25
7 .50
10
110
11 .25
7 .50
11
110
11 .25
7 .50
12
105
11 .50
8 .00
5
155
10 .75
7 .50
6
150
11 .00
7 .50
7
145
11 .25
7 .50
8
140
11 .25
7 .50
9
135
11 .25
7 .50
10
130
11 .25
7 .50
11
120
11 .25
7 .50
12
120
11 .50
8 .00
5
165
10 .75
7 .50
6
160
10 .75
7 .50
7
155
11 .00
7 .50
8
150
11 .25
7 .50
9
145
11 .25
7 .50
10
140
11 .50
7 .50
11
135
11 .25
7 .50
12
130
11 .75
8 .00
5
175
10 .50
7 .50
6
170
10 .75
7 .50
7
165
11 .00
7 .50
8
160
11 .00
7 .50
9
155
11 .25
7 .50
10
150
11 .25
7 .50
11
145
11 .25
7 .50
Shipping
Weight (kips)
83
79
76
76
72
68
68
64
100
96
92
88
84
80
75
75
124
119
111
107
102
98
98
94
145
141
136
132
127
122
113
113
164
159
154
149
144
139
135
130
183
178
173
168
163
157
152
Page 5.6-A1-2-1
WF74G
Concrete Structures
WF83G
WF95G
WF100G
Chapter 5
12
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
140
190
185
180
170
165
160
155
150
190
185
175
175
170
165
160
155
205
200
195
185
180
175
170
165
11 .75
10 .00
10 .50
10 .50
10 .75
11 .00
11 .00
11 .00
11 .50
9 .50
9 .75
10 .25
10 .50
10 .75
10 .75
11 .00
11 .25
9 .50
10 .00
10 .00
10 .25
10 .50
10 .50
10 .50
11 .25
8 .00
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
8 .00
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
8 .00
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
7 .50
8 .00
147
210
204
199
188
183
177
172
166
226
220
208
208
202
196
191
185
251
245
239
227
221
215
209
203
Design Parameters:
- PGSuper Version 2.2.3.0
- Girder f'ci = 7 .5 ksi, f'c = 9 .0 ksi
- Slab f'c = 4.0 ksi.
- No vertical or horizontal curve
- 2% roadway crown slope
- Standard WSDOT "F" shape barrier
- 6% roadway superelevation for shipping check
- Standard WSDOT Abutment End Type A
- Includes 2" future HMA overlay with density of 140 pcf
Page 5.6-A1-2-2
Span
SpanCapability
Capabilityofof
Deck
Deck Bulb
BulbTee
TeeGirders
Girders
Appendix5.6-A1-3
5.6-A1-4
Appendix
Girder Type
W35DG
W41DG
W53DG
W65DG
CL Bearing to
CL Bearing (ft)
95
4 .38
90
3 .98
85
3 .82
110
4 .34
105
4 .50
100
4 .33
135
4 .29
130
4 .51
120
4 .51
155
3 .46
145
3 .71
140
3 .97
Design Parameters:
PGSuper version 2.2.3.0
Girder ci = 7.5 ksi, c = 9 .0 ksi
Slab c = 4 .0 ksi
No horizontal or vertical curve
2% roadway crown slope
Standard WSDOT "F" shape barrier
6% roadway superelevation for shipping check
Standard WSDOT Abutment End Type A
Includes 2 future HMA overlay with density of 140 pcf
WSDOT
Bridge
Design
ManualM 23-50.14
M 23-50.06
WSDOT
Bridge
Design
Manual
July
2011
April
2015
Page
5.6-A1-4-1
Page
5.6-A1-3-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5.6-A1-3-2
Chapter 5
Appendix 5.6-A1-4:
Appendix 5.6-A1-4
Girder
Type
WF36TDG
WF42TDG
WF50TDG
WF58TDG
WF66TDG
WF74TDG
WF83TDG
WF95TDG
WF100TDG
Girder
Spacing
(ft)
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
Span Capability of
Span CapabilityWF
of WFThin
Thin Deck
GirdersGirders
Deck
CL Bearing to
CL Bearing
(ft)
120
110
105
100
135
130
120
115
155
150
140
135
180
165
160
150
195
185
175
165
210
200
190
180
225
220
210
200
200
205
200
190
190
200
195
190
"A" Dim.
(in)
8.00
8.25
8.50
8.75
7.75
8.25
8.50
8.75
7.25
8.00
8.50
8.75
6.25
7.50
8.25
8.50
5.75
7.00
8.00
8.50
5.50
6.50
7.50
8.25
5.25
5.75
7.00
8.00
5.25
6.00
7.00
7.75
5.50
6.25
6.25
7.00
Shipping
Weight (kips)
102
98
98
98
120
121
117
117
146
148
144
145
180
172
173
169
206
203
200
196
234
231
228
224
265
268
265
261
253
268
270
265
247
270
270
263
Page 5.6-A1-4-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Design Parameters:
-
Page 5.6-A1-4-2
Appendix 5.6-A1-5
Girder
Type
Appendix 5.6-A1-5:
WF39DG
WF45DG
WF53DG
WF61DG
WF69DG
WF77DG
WF86DG
WF98DG
WF103DG
Girder
Spacing
(ft)
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
Span Capability of
WF Deck Girders
Span Capability of WF Deck Girders
CL Bearing
to CL
Bearing (ft)
115
110
100
100
130
125
115
105
145
140
130
125
160
155
145
135
170
165
155
150
185
180
175
165
195
180
170
160
180
170
160
155
175
165
160
150
Shipping
Weight
(kips)
122
126
123
131
143
148
146
142
167
173
172
176
193
200
200
198
215
223
222
228
244
253
261
260
270
264
264
262
265
265
263
268
264
263
269
264
Page 5.6-A1-5-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Design Parameters:
-
Page 5.6-A1-5-2
Appendix 5.6-A1-6
Girder
CL Bearing to
Deck
Spacing (ft) CL Bearing (ft) "A" Dim . (in) Thickness (in)
8
130
8 .25
7 .50
10
125
8 .25
7 .50
U54G4
12
120
8 .50
7 .50
14
115
8 .50
7 .50
9
130
8 .25
7 .50
11
125
8 .50
7 .50
U54G5
13
120
8 .75
7 .50
15
115
8 .50
7 .50
8
150
8 .25
7 .50
10
145
8 .25
7 .50
U66G4
12
140
8 .25
7 .50
14
130
8 .50
7 .50
9
150
8 .25
7 .50
11
145
8 .25
7 .50
U66G5
13
140
8 .25
7 .50
15
135
8 .50
7 .50
8
170 #
8 .25
7 .50
10
160
8 .25
7 .50
12
155
8 .25
7 .50
U78G4
14
145
8 .50
7 .50
16
135
9 .00
8 .00
9
170 #
8 .25
7 .50
11
165 #
8 .25
7 .50
13
160 #
8 .25
7 .50
U78G5
15
155 #
8 .25
7 .50
17
150
8 .75
8 .00
# Span capability exceeds maximum shipping weight of 252 kips
Shipping
Weight (kips)
153
147
142
136
164
158
151
145
205
198
192
178
217
210
203
196
264
249
242
226
211
278
270
262
254
246
Design Parameters:
- PGSuper Version 2.2.3.0
- Girder f'ci = 7 .5 ksi, f'c = 9 .0 ksi
- Slab f'c = 4.0 ksi.
- No vertical or horizontal curve
- 2% roadway crown slope
- Standard WSDOT "F" shape barrier
- 6% roadway superelevation for shipping check
- Standard WSDOT Abutment End Type A
- Includes 2" future HMA overlay with density of 140 pcf
Page 5.6-A1-6-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5.6-A1-6-2
Chapter 5
Span Capability of Trapezoidal
Span Capability
of Trapezoidal Tub
with
TopTop
Flange
Appendix
5.6-A1-7
TubGirders
Girders
with
Flange
Girder
Type
Girder
CL Bearing to
Deck
Spacing (ft) CL Bearing (ft) "A" Dim . (in) Thickness (in)
9
150
9 .25
8 .50
11
140
9 .50
8 .50
UF60G4
13
135
9 .75
8 .50
15
130
10 .00
8 .50
10
150
9 .25
8 .50
12
145
9 .25
8 .50
UF60G5
14
140
9 .75
8 .50
16
135
9 .75
8 .50
9
160
9 .25
8 .50
11
150
9 .50
8 .50
UF72G4
13
145
9 .75
8 .50
15
140
9 .75
8 .50
10
170 #
9 .25
8 .50
12
160 #
9 .25
8 .50
UF72G5
14
155 #
9 .50
8 .50
16
150
9 .50
8 .50
10
180 #
9 .25
8 .50
12
170 #
9 .25
8 .50
UF84G4
14
165 #
9 .50
8 .50
16
160 #
9 .75
8 .50
11
180 #
9 .25
8 .50
13
175 #
9 .25
8 .50
UF84G5
15
165 #
9 .50
8 .50
17
160 #
9 .50
8 .50
# Span capability exceeds maximum shipping weight of 252 kips
Shipping
Weight (kips)
205
192
185
178
217
210
203
196
249
234
226
218
278
262
254
246
314
297
288
280
329
320
302
293
Design
Parameters:
Design
Parameters:
- PGSuper
PGSuper
Version
2.2.3.0
version
2.2.3.0
- Girder
Girder f'ci
=
7 .5
ksi,
f'c = 9 .0 ksi
ci = 7.5 ksi, c = 9.0 ksi
- CIP
CIPslab
Slab
= ksi
4.0 ksi.
= 4.0
c f'c
- No
Nohorizontal
vertical or
orvertical
horizontal
curve curve
- 2%
2%roadway
roadway
crown
crown
slopeslope
- Standard
Standard
WSDOT
"F" shape
WSDOT "F" shape
barrier barrier
- 6%
6%roadway
roadway
superelevation
for shipping
check
superelevation
for shipping
check
- Standard
Standard
WSDOT
Abutment
End
Type
A
WSDOT Abutment End Type A
- Includes
Includes
future
withofdensity
2 2"
future
HMAHMA
overlayoverlay
with density
140 pcf of 140 pcf
- Deck
Deckincludes
includes
a
3.5"
Stay-In-Place
Panel
a 3.5 SIP panel with a 5 CIP slab with a 5" CIP Slab
Page 5.6-A1-7-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5.6-A1-7-2
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Appendix 5.6-A1-12
Appendix 5.6-A1-8
Span Capability of
Span Capability of
Post-Tensioned Spliced I-Girders
Post-tensioned Spliced I-Girders
f'ci = 6.0 ksi, f'c = 9 ksi Strand diameter = 0.6" Grade 270 ksi low relaxation
Girder Type
WF74PTG
Post-tensioned
Before Slab
Casting
WF74PTG
Post-tensioned
After Slab
Casting
WF83PTG
Post-tensioned
Before Slab
Casting
WF83PTG
Post-tensioned
After Slab
Casting
WF95PTG
Post-tensioned
Before Slab
Casting
WF95PTG
Post-tensioned
After Slab
Casting
Tendon
Tendson
Jacking
Force after
Loss*
Force**
Seating**
(kips)
(kips)
(kips)
E1
(in)
E3
(in)
170
22
22
22
2970
2680
730
36.4
12.7
155
22
22
22
2970
2670
740
36.4
12.7
10
140
22
22
22
2970
2650
760
36.4
12.7
12
120
22
22
22
2970
2630
780
36.4
12.7
14
100
22
22
22
2970
2590
815
36.4
12.7
195
22
22
22
2960
2690
680
36.4
12.7
185
22
22
22
2960
2710
680
36.4
12.7
10
175
22
22
22
2960
2690
690
36.4
12.7
12
165
22
22
22
2990
2720
700
36.4
12.7
14
155
22
22
22
3020
2750
710
36.4
12.7
185
11
22
22
22
3500
3160
850
33.8
14.5
165
22
22
22
2985
2710
720
36.4
12.7
10
155
22
22
22
2985
2700
730
36.4
12.7
12
135
22
22
22
2985
2680
740
36.4
12.7
14
115
22
22
22
2985
2620
810
33.8
12.7
*205
11
22
22
22
3500
3200
810
33.8
14.5
200
11
22
22
22
3500
3210
800
37.6
14.5
10
195
22
22
22
22
4000
3640
940
37.6
15.7
12
185
22
22
22
22
4000
3640
940
37.6
15.7
14
175
22
22
22
22
4000
3640
940
37.6
15.7
200
11
22
22
22
3500
3150
860
46.1
14.5
185
11
22
22
22
3500
3110
980
46.1
14.5
10
175
11
22
22
22
3500
3130
880
46.1
14.5
12
155
22
22
22
3360
2990
860
44.9
14.1
14
135
22
22
22
3000
2630
810
59.0
12.7
235
11
22
22
22
3500
3210
800
46.1
14.5
230
22
22
22
22
4000
3650
930
37.6
15.7
10
215
22
22
22
22
4000
3640
940
37.6
15.7
12
205
22
22
22
22
4000
3640
950
37.6
15.7
14
190
22
22
22
22
4000
3630
960
37.6
15.7
Page 5.6-A1-8-1
Page 5.6-A1-12-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Page 5.6-A1-8-2
U78PTG6
U78PTG5
U78PTG4
U66PTG6
U66PTG5
U66PTG4
U54PTG6
U54PTG5
U54PTG4
Girder
Type
4
4
150
135
150
135
145
155
170
155
170
155
165
175
190
180
195
180
190#
15
10
16
14
15
10
16
16
17
10
18
135
14
No. of Straight
Strands
Span
Length
(ft)
Girder
Spacing
(ft)
End Segments
20
10
22
10
20
10
14
16
16
14
14
14
No. of Straight
Strands
Middle Segment
22
21
15
12
10
22
22
22
22
22
19
22
21
22
17
22
15
22
18
22
12
22
11
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
PT Ducts ~
Strands/Duct
(Duct #4 @ Bottom)
5896
4400
5720
4048
5192
3608
4928
3784
4752
3432
4488
3256
4576
3520
4400
2992
4048
2904
5400
4018
5202
3692
4718
3262
4500
3434
4334
3110
4088
2944
4196
3200
4032
2764
3708
2636
1104
840
1110
776
1014
722
940
742
910
678
864
648
852
684
826
578
760
570
395.0
29.8
25.2
31.5
26.8
18.1
27.7
17.7
29.3
18.5
29.4
18.9
29.0
18.3
29.8
19.7
31.5
20.0
E1
(in)
12.9
10.9
12.6
10.1
12.1
9.6
11.7
9.7
11.3
9.4
11.0
9.3
11.2
9.5
10.9
9.0
10.1
8.9
E3
(in)
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Span
of of
Post
SpanCapability
Capability
Post-tensioned
Appendix
5.6-A1-13
Tensioned
Spliced
Tub
Girders
Appendix 5.6-A1-9
Spliced Tub Girders
Page 5.6-A1-13-1
Page 5.6-A1-9-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Page 5.6-A1-9-2
5.6-A1-10
I GIRDERS
W42G
1'-8"
1'-3"
3'-2"
WF42G
3'-2"
4'-1"
WF36G
4'-1"
3'-0"
3'-6"
3'-6"
W50G
2'-1"
1'-8"
REGION
NO.
WF50G
3'-2"
4'-1"
4'-2"
4'-2"
SHEET
NO.
TOTAL
SHEETS
WF58G
3'-2"
4'-1"
W58G
2'-1"
2'-1"
5'-6"
SPAN LENGTH = 155 FT.
WF66G
3'-2"
4'-1"
W74G
2'-1"
3'-7"
WF74G
3'-2"
4'-1"
6'-2"
4'-10"
4'-10"
6'-1"
6'-10"
WF95G
3'-2"
4'-1"
7'-10"
SHEETS
OF
SHEET
BRIDGE
SHEET
NO.
WF100G
3'-2"
4'-1"
NOTES:
WF83G
3'-2"
4'-1"
8'-4"
3'-2"
5'-0" MIN.
8'-0" MAX.
3'-9"
3'-2"
5'-0" MIN.
8'-0" MAX.
2'-1"
4'-1" MIN.
6'-0" MAX.
3'-2"
5'-0" MIN.
8'-0" MAX.
2'-1"
4'-1" MIN.
6'-0" MAX.
3'-2"
5'-0" MIN.
8'-0" MAX.
5 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 115 FT. 5 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 130 FT.
8 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 100 FT. 8 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 105 FT.
3'-3"
3'-2"
5'-0" MIN.
8'-0" MAX.
3'-2"
5'-0" MIN.
8'-0" MAX.
3'-2"
5'-0" MIN.
8'-0" MAX.
3'-2"
3'-2"
5'-0" MIN.
8'-0" MAX.
REGION
NO.
2'-1"
4'-1" MIN.
6'-0" MAX.
SHEET
NO.
TOTAL
SHEETS
2'-1"
4'-1" MIN.
6'-0" MAX.
VOID (TYP.)
JOINT
3'-2"
5'-0" MIN.
8'-0" MAX.
3'-2"
5'-0" MIN.
8'-0" MAX.
3'-2"
5'-0" MIN.
8'-0" MAX.
3'-2"
5'-0" MIN.
8'-0" MAX.
3'-2"
5'-0" MIN.
8'-0" MAX.
3'-2"
5'-0" MIN.
8'-0" MAX.
5 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 180 FT. 5 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 175 FT.
8 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 155 FT. 8 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 150 FT.
3'-2"
5'-0" MIN.
8'-0" MAX.
4'-0"
18"
4'-4"
5'-8"
4'-0"
26"
30"
36"
24.85"
18"
15.7"
15.7"
9"
DIA.
VOIDS
NUM.
4'-0"
24"
4'-0"
W
12"
90'
75'
65'
60'
45'
30'
MAX. SPAN
LENGTH ~
BRG. TO BRG.
NOTES:
SHEETS
OF
SHEET
BRIDGE
SHEET
NO.
5 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 210 FT. 5 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 225 FT. 5 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 200 FT. 5 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 190 FT.
8 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 180 FT. 8 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 200 FT. 8 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 190 FT. 8 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 190 FT.
3'-2"
5'-0" MIN.
8'-0" MAX.
JOINT
5 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 155 FT. 5 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 180 FT. 5 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 195 FT.
8 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 135 FT. 8 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 150 FT. 8 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 165 FT.
3'-2"
5'-0" MIN.
8'-0" MAX.
5'-0" MIN.
8'-0" MAX.
5 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 145 FT. 5 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 160 FT. 5 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 170 FT.
8 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 125 FT. 8 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 135 FT. 8 FT. SPAN LENGTH = 150 FT.
4'-5"
4'-2"
4'-5"
3'-0"
2'-11"
5'-1"
4'-10"
5'-5"
3'-6"
3'-5"
5'-9"
5'-6"
H
6'-5"
6'-2"
8'-1"
7'-10"
7'-1"
6'-10"
8'-7"
8'-4"
GIRDER
DEPTH
SPLICED WF-GIRDERS
6'-2"
3'-4"
4'-2"
4'-6" TO 6'-2"
SHEET
NO.
TOTAL
SHEETS
REGION
NO.
3'-4"
4'-2"
6'-6" TO 7'-0"
*
**
SPAN LENGTH = 185 FT., 205 FT.
6'-10"
*
**
SPAN LENGTH = 170 FT., 195 FT.
4'-6"
5'-0"
6'-6"
7'-0"
7'-10"
*
**
SPAN LENGTH = 200 FT., 235 FT.
3'-4"
4'-2"
7'-10"
1.
NOTES:
3'-4"
4'-2"
8'-4"
*
**
SPAN LENGTH = 230 FT., 255 FT.
8'-4"
SHEETS
OF
SHEET
BRIDGE
SHEET
NO.
5.6-A1-13
GIRDER
DEPTH
4'-0" WIDE
5'-0" WIDE
REGION
NO.
SHEET
NO.
TOTAL
SHEETS
U66G5
SPAN LENGTH = 140 FT.
UF60G5
SPAN LENGTH = 145 FT.
U66G4
4'-0"
5'-6"
U54G5
4'-6"
4'-6"
5'-0"
UF60G4
4'-0"
5'-0"
5'-0"
5'-0"
5'-0"
5'-0"
U54G4
4'-0"
4'-6"
5'-6"
5'-6"
6'-0"
SHEETS
OF
SHEET
BRIDGE
SHEET
NO.
1. SPAN LENGTHS SHOWN ARE THE MAXIMUM FOR EACH TYPE OF GIRDER USING
PGSUPER PROGRAM.
NOTES:
UF72G5
5'-0"
UF72G4
4'-0"
6'-0"
6'-0"
01/05/2015
5.6-A2-1
STAGE 4
CAST TRAFFIC BARRIERS
M:\STANDARDS\Girders\CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE\CONSEQ-SINGLESPAN.MAN
STAGE 3
CAST BRIDGE DECK
END PIER
STAGE 2
CAST DIAPHRAGMS AND
PLACE BRIDGE DECK REINFORCEMENT
INTERMEDIATE
DIAPHRAGM (TYP.)
STAGE 1
SET GIRDERS IN PLACE
END PIER
ELASTOMERIC BEARING
PAD TYPICAL AT END PIERS
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
TEMPORARY STRAND
CUTTING SEQUENCE
01/05/2015
5.6-A2-2
STAGE 4
COMPLETE DIAPHRAGMS
INTERMEDIATE PIER
STAGE 3
CAST BRIDGE DECK
INTERMEDIATE PIER
M:\STANDARDS\Girders\CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE\CONSEQ-MULTIPLE-SPAN.MAN
NOTE:
NO LIVE LOAD SHALL BE ALLOWED ON THE SPANS UNTIL
THE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF THE TOP PORTION OF
THE PIER DIAPHRAGM HAS REACHED 3000 PSI (MIN.).
INTERMEDIATE PIER
STAGE 1
SET GIRDERS IN PLACE
INTERMEDIATE PIER
STAGE 2
CAST DIAPHRAGMS AND PLACE BRIDGE DECK REINFORCEMENT
INTERMEDIATE
DIAPHRAGM (TYP.)
END PIER
ELASTOMERIC BEARING
PAD TYPICAL AT END PIERS
TEMPORARY STRAND
CUTTING SEQUENCE
01/05/2015
5.6-A2-3
INTERMEDIATE PIER
STAGE 4
COMPLETE DIAPHRAGMS AND REMOVE TEMPORARY SUPPORT
INTERMEDIATE PIER
STAGE 3
CAST BRIDGE DECK
INTERMEDIATE PIER
M:\STANDARDS\Girders\CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE\CONSEQ-RAISED.man
NOTE:
NO LIVE LOAD SHALL BE ALLOWED ON THE SPANS UNTIL
THE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF THE TOP PORTION OF
THE PIER DIAPHRAGM HAS REACHED 3000 PSI (MIN.).
STAGE 1
SET GIRDERS ON TEMPORARY SUPPORT
TEMPORARY SUPPORTS
(??? KIPS, SERVICE LOAD)
(TYP. AT INTERMEDIATE PIERS)
STAGE 2
CAST DIAPHRAGMS AND PLACE BRIDGE DECK REINFORCEMENT
INTERMEDIATE
DIAPHRAGM (TYP.)
END PIER
ELASTOMERIC BEARING
PAD TYPICAL AT END PIERS
INTERMEDIATE PIER
4.
5.
1.
2.
TEMPORARY STRAND
CUTTING SEQUENCE
5.6-A3-1
SHEET
JOB NO.
SR
BRG.
3" R.
2 G8 #4
SAWTEETH
EXTEND
G4 #5
9"
M:\STANDARDS\Girders\W\W42G\W42G1.MAN
6 SPA. @ 1'-3"
7'-6"
B2 = 3" ( G5 )
B1 = 1"( G4 , G8 )
G5 BARS RIGHT OF
B2 = 0" ( G5 )
B1 = 0" ( G4 , G8 )
G5 BARS LEFT OF
1"+B1
G5 #7
(TYP.)
G4 #5
(TYP.)
1"+B1
MARK
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
G8
G9
G10
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
7"
SIZE
4
5
5
5
7
W12
3
4
3
3
STR.
STR.
STR.
STR.
G2
6"
3"
MIN.
8"
BEARING
RECESS
YES
YES
NO
NO
END
TYPE
A
B
C
D
Diaphragm Type
End Diaph. on Girder
"L" Abutment
Hinge Diaph. @ Intermediate Pier
Fixed Diaph. @ Intermediate Pier
G6
1'-3"
R=1"
W42G GIRDER
DETAILS 1 OF 2
1'-10"
0"
1'-6"
0"
1'-6"
1'-10"
1'-10"
G10
9"
0"
9"
1'-6"
G9
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM:
1/2 point of span for span lengths 40'-0" to 80'-0".
No intermediate diaphragm for span lengths 40'-0" or less.
9"
YES
YES
NO
YES
SAWTEETH
9. FOR DIAPHRAGMS, OMIT HOLES AND PLACE INSERTS ON THE INTERIOR FACE OF
EXTERIOR GIRDERS. PLACE HOLES AND INSERTS PARALLEL TO SKEW. INSERTS
SHALL BE 1" MEADOWBURKE MX-3 HI-TENSILE, 1 x 5 WILLIAMS F22 OPEN
FERRULE INSERT, 1 x 4 DAYTON-SUPERIOR F-62 FLARED THIN SLAB FERRULE
INSERT OR APPROVED EQUAL.
3. FOR END TYPES A, C AND D CUT ALL STRANDS FLUSH WITH THE GIRDER ENDS
AND PAINT WITH AN APPROVED EPOXY RESIN, EXCEPT FOR EXTENDED STRANDS AS
SHOWN. FOR END TYPE B CUT ALL STRANDS 1" BELOW CONCRETE SURFACE AND
GROUT WITH AN APPROVED EPOXY GROUT.
3"
G7 #3
G1 #4
FORM
HANGERS
G1
1'-8"
6"
1'-3"
GIRDER
GIRDER NOTES
1. PLAN LENGTH SHALL BE INCREASED AS NECESSARY TO COMPENSATE FOR
SHORTENING DUE TO PRESTRESS AND SHRINKAGE.
SECTION
1" CHAMFER
G7 #3
LOCATION
STIRRUPS
END STIRRUPS
TOP FLANGE
LONGIT. FULL LENGTH
END LONGIT.
END TIES
BOT. FLANGE TIES
END LONGIT.
BOT. FLANGE TIES
BOT. FLANGE TIES
SAWTEETH SHOWN
BY HATCHED AREA.
VIEW
G2 #5
G3 #5
G6 W12
(TYP.)
GIRDER
G8 #4 EMBED 6'-0"
INTO GIRDER. OMIT
FOR END TYPE "B".
HARPED
STRANDS
Ld
END TYPE B
6"
6"
DIAPHRAGM
SPA. @ 1'-6"
2 G4 #5 WITH
2'-0" MIN. SPLICE
3 SPA. @ 9"
= 2'-3"
9"
GIRDER ELEVATION
2
MAX. SLOPE **
2'-4"
HARPING POINT
3"
G2 #5, G3 #5
& 2 G7 #3
3 SPA
@ 3"
=10"
2 UNIT HOLD
DOWN 6" MIN.,
1'-6" MAX.
HARPED STRANDS
SPLAYED
2" CLR.
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED STRANDS
MEASURED
ALONG GIRDER
END TYPE A
Fo
G5 #7 - 3 EQUAL SPACES.
EMBED 6'-0" TYP. INTO GIRDER.
SPLAY TO CLEAR HARPED STRANDS.
OMIT FOR END TYPE "B".
3"
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
(SEE "FRAMING PLAN" FOR LOCATIONS)
3'-6"
LIFTING LOOPS:
" STRANDS
SEE NOTE 5.
3"
1'-3"
3"
2"
5"
3"
7"+B2
9"
1"
3'-8"+ "A"
1" CLR
(TYP.)
1"
6"
PICKUP
FORCE
60 MIN.
90 MAX.
2"
3"
3"
SHEET
5.6-A3-2
JOB NO.
SR
4"
(MIN.)
10
11
BEARING
RECESS
90
90
3 SPA. @
2"=6"
1
5
13
11
2"
2
6
14
10
12
BEARING
RECESS
LEVEL (AFTER
CASTING SLAB)
M:\STANDARDS\Girders\W\W42G\W42G2.man
LL
P1
P2
4'-6"
SPLAY G3 AND
2 G7 BARS
LT
1
2
(DEG.) (DEG.)
TRANSVERSE REINFORCING
SKEWED ENDS
10"
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED
STRANDS
NOTE:
Dimensions shall be shown in Imperial
units to the nearest th inch.
PLAN
BEARING RECESS AND
BOTTOM FLANGE SPALL PROTECTION
" CHAMFER ON
WEB FOR SKEWS
GREATER THAN 15
" EXPANDED
POLYSTYRENE FOR
SKEWS GREATER
THAN 15
" CHAMFER ON
FLANGE FOR SKEWS
GREATER THAN 15
1"
2"
BEARING
RECESS
GIRDER SLOPE
ELEVATION
BEARING
RECESS
Fo
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED
STRANDS
STRAND PATTERN
AT GIRDER END
2" (TYP.)
SPAN
1"
E
"
3"
Fb
C.G. TOTAL
STRAIGHT STRANDS
GIRDER
"
LT
MIN. CONC.
COMP. STRENGTH
GIRDER END
1"
SAWTOOTH DETAILS
END OF
P.S. GIRDER
90
STRAIGHT
Fb
Fo
ALTERNATE #2
GIRDER END
1'-9"
W42G GIRDER
DETAILS 2 OF 2
ALTERNATE #1
LOCATION OF
C.G. STRANDS
JACKING
JACKING
NO. OF
FORCE
FORCE
STRANDS
(KIPS)
(KIPS)
NO. OF
STRANDS
HARPED
STEEL ANCHOR x 4 x 4
WITH " HOLE
1'-9"
GIRDER
GIRDER SCHEDULE
END 2
PLAN LENGTH
ALONG GIRDER GRADE
P2
BEARING
RECESS
NOTE:
LL AND LT ARE SHIPPING SUPPORT
LOCATIONS AT LEADING AND
TRAILING ENDS, RESPECTIVELY.
LL
(ALONG GIRDER
GRADE)
PLAN
LENGTH
END 1
P1
AHEAD
ON STATIONING
@ RELEASE
F'CI (KSI)
2"
END 1 TYPE
BEARING
RECESS
GIRDER
D @ 40 DAYS
GIRDER
GIRDER
@ FINAL
F'C (KSI)
1"
GIR.
END 2 TYPE
GIRDER
Ld
TOP OF GIRDER
GIR.
D @ 120 DAYS
5.6-A3-3
SHEET
JOB NO.
SR
2 G8 #4
SAWTEETH
3" R.
EXTEND
G4 #5
2"
CLR.
MEASURED
ALONG GIRDER
4 G4 #5 WITH
2'-0" MIN. SPLICE
HARPING POINT
9"
9"
M:\STANDARDS\Girders\W\W50G\W50G1.MAN
8 SPA. @ 1'-3"
= 10'-0"
B2 = 3" ( G5 )
B1 = 1"( G4 , G8 )
G5 BARS RIGHT OF
B2 = 0" ( G5 )
B1 = 0" ( G4 , G8 )
G5 BARS LEFT OF
4"
MARK
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
G8
G9
G10
G2 #5
G3 #5
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
LOCATION
STIRRUPS
END STIRRUPS
TOP FLANGE
LONGIT. FULL LENGTH
END LONGIT.
END TIES
BOT. FLANGE TIES
END LONGIT.
BOT. FLANGE TIES
BOT. FLANGE TIES
SAWTEETH
SHOWN BY HATCHED AREA.
6"
SIZE
4
5
5
5
7
W12
3
4
3
3
STR.
STR.
STR.
STR.
1" CHAMFER
G7 #3 (TYP.)
G6 W12
(TYP.)
GIRDER
VIEW
G5 #7
(TYP.)
G8 #4 EMBED 6'-0"
INTO GIRDER. OMIT
FOR END TYPE "B".
Ld
3"
GIRDER NOTES
MECHANICAL METHOD.
2'-1"
6"
6"
G2
G1
SECTION
9"
1'-8"
GIR.
3"
MIN.
3"
YES
YES
NO
NO
A
B
C
D
8"
G6
1'-6"
G7
R=2"
BEARING
RECESS
END
TYPE
Diaphragm Type
1'-10"
1'-10"
0"
1'-10"
W50G GIRDER
DETAILS 1 OF 2
1'-6"
0"
1'-6"
G10
1'-11"
11"
9"
0"
9"
G9
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM:
1/2 points of span for span lengths 40'-0" to 80'-0"
No intermediate diaphragm for span lengths 40'-0" or less.
YES
YES
NO
YES
SAWTEETH
9. FOR DIAPHRAGMS, OMIT HOLES AND PLACE INSERTS ON THE INTERIOR FACE OF
EXTERIOR GIRDERS. PLACE HOLES AND INSERTS PARALLEL TO SKEW. INSERTS
SHALL BE 1" MEADOWBURKE MX-3 HI-TENSILE, 1 x 5 WILLIAMS F22 OPEN
FERRULE INSERT, 1 x 4 DAYTON-SUPERIOR F-62 FLARED THIN SLAB FERRULE
INSERT OR APPROVED EQUAL.
G7 #3 (TYP.)
G1 #4
FORM
HANGERS
3. FOR END TYPES A, C AND D CUT ALL STRANDS FLUSH WITH THE GIRDER ENDS
AND PAINT WITH AN APPROVED EPOXY RESIN, EXCEPT FOR EXTENDED STRANDS AS
SHOWN. FOR END TYPE B CUT ALL STRANDS 1" BELOW CONCRETE SURFACE AND
GROUT WITH AN APPROVED EPOXY GROUT.
END TYPE B
6"
DIAPH.
G4 #5
(TYP.)
1"+B1
3" + B1
HARPED
STRANDS
G3 #5 & 2 G7 #3
5 SPA. @ 9"
= 3'-9"
2 G1 #4,
MAX. SLOPE **
2'-4"
GIRDER ELEVATION
3 SPA.
@ 3"
= 10"
2 G2 #5, G3 #5
& 2 G7 #3
HARPED STRANDS
SPLAYED
END TYPE A
BRG.
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED STRANDS
3"
LIFTING LOOPS:
" STRANDS
SEE NOTE 5.
3"
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
(SEE "FRAMING PLAN" FOR LOCATION)
4'-2"
Fo
5"
2"
3"
6"
G5 #7 - 4 EQUAL SPACES.
EMBED 7'-0" TYP. INTO GIRDER.
SPLAY TO CLEAR HARPED STRANDS.
OMIT FOR END TYPE "B".
3"
9"+B2
11"
1'-3"
4'-4"+ "A"
1"
1" CLR.
(TYP.)
PICKUP
FORCE
60 MIN.
90 MAX.
8"
3"
3"
3"
5.6-A3-4
SHEET
JOB NO.
SR
10
11
GIRDER SLOPE
BEARING
RECESS
90
90
15
13
23
4 SPA @
2" = 8"
11
4"
24
2
6
1
5
10
16
22
12
18
4 SPA @
2" = 8"
14
20
26
25
2"
BEARING
RECESS
LEVEL (AFTER
CASTING SLAB)
BEARING
RECESS
M:\STANDARDS\Girders\W\W50G\W50G2.man
P1
LT
1
2
(DEG.) (DEG.)
5'-6"
SPLAY G3
AND 2 G7 BARS
LL
TRANSVERSE REINFORCING
SKEWED ENDS
10"
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED
STRANDS
NOTE:
Dimensions shall be shown in Imperial
units to the nearest th inch.
2"
17
19
PLAN
BEARING RECESS AND
BOTTOM FLANGE SPALL PROTECTION
" CHAMFER ON
WEB FOR SKEWS
GREATER THAN 15
" EXPANDED
POLYSTYRENE FOR
SKEWS GREATER
THAN 15
" CHAMFER ON
FLANGE FOR SKEWS
GREATER THAN 15
2"
ELEVATION
BEARING
RECESS
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED
STRANDS
Fo
STRAND PATTERN
AT GIRDER END
4"
(MIN.)
2" (TYP.)
"
2"
2"
21
GIRDER
2"
END 1 TYPE
3"
Fb
LT
MIN. CONC.
COMP. STRENGTH
1"
SAWTOOTH DETAILS
END OF
P.S. GIRDER
90
ALTERNATE #1
STRAIGHT
Fb
Fo
ALTERNATE #2
GIRDER END
1'-9"
W50G GIRDER
DETAILS 2 OF 2
LOCATION OF
C.G. STRANDS
JACKING
JACKING
NO. OF
FORCE
FORCE
STRANDS
(KIPS)
(KIPS)
NO. OF
STRANDS
HARPED
STEEL ANCHOR x 4 x 4
" HOLE
1'-9"
GIRDER
GIRDER SCHEDULE
END 2
PLAN LENGTH
ALONG GIRDER GRADE
P2
BEARING
RECESS
NOTE:
LL AND LT ARE SHIPPING SUPPORT
LOCATIONS AT LEADING AND
TRAILING ENDS, RESPECTIVELY.
LL
(ALONG GIRDER
GRADE)
GIRDER END
P2
PLAN
LENGTH
END 1
P1
AHEAD
ON STATIONING
@ RELEASE
F'CI (KSI)
C.G. TOTAL
STRAIGHT
STRANDS
END 2 TYPE
BEARING
RECESS
@ FINAL
F'C (KSI)
1"
GIRDER
"
TOP OF GIRDER
GIRDER
D @ 40 DAYS
GIR.
SPAN
GIRDER
Ld
GIRDER
GIR.
D @ 120 DAYS
5.6-A3-5
SHEET
JOB NO.
SR
3" R.
2 G8 #5
SAWTEETH
EXTEND
G4 #5
2"
CLR.
2 UNIT HOLD
DOWN. 6" MIN.,
1'-6" MAX.
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED STRANDS
12 SPA. @
6" = 6'-0"
G2 #5, G3 #5
& 2 G7 #3
9"
3"
9"
M:\STANDARDS\Girders\W\W58G\W58G1.man
B2 = 3" ( G5 )
B1 = 1"( G4 , G8 )
G5 BARS RIGHT OF
B2 = 0" ( G5 )
B1 = 0" ( G4 , G8 )
G5 BARS LEFT OF
6 G4 #5 WITH
2'-0" MIN. SPLICE
10 SPA.@ 1'-3"
= 12'-6"
2 G1 #4, G3 #5 & 2 G7 #3
GIRDER ELEVATION
6 SPA. @ 9"
= 4'-6"
6"
Ld
6"
DIAPH.
APPLY APPROVED RETARDANT
FOR " ETCH TO SIDE FORMS
OR " ROUGHENED SURFACE
TREATMENT BY APPROVED
MECHANICAL METHOD.
3" +B1
MARK
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
G8
G9
G10
G3
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
LOCATION
STIRRUPS
END STIRRUPS
TOP FLANGE
LONGIT. FULL LENGTH
END LONGIT.
END TIES
BOT. FLANGE TIES
END LONGIT.
BOT. FLANGE TIES
BOT. FLANGE TIES
#5
SIZE
4
5
5
5
7
W12
3
5
3
3
STR.
STR.
STR.
STR.
9"
2'-1"
6"
2'-1"
6"
G2
G1
SECTION
1" CHAMFER
G7 #3
(TYP.)
G6 W12
G5 #7
G2 #5
GIRDER
VIEW
6"
SAWTEETH
SHOWN BY HATCHED AREA.
G8 #5 EMBED 6'-0"
INTO GIRDER. OMIT
FOR END TYPE "B".
HARPED
STRANDS
TEMPORARY
STRANDS (TYP.)
G4 #5
(TYP.)
3"
1" + B1
3"
3"
MIN.
GIRDER NOTES
YES
YES
NO
NO
A
B
C
D
8"
G6
1'-6"
G7
R=2"
BEARING
RECESS
END
TYPE
Diaphragm Type
1'-6"
0"
1'-6"
9"
0"
9"
W58G GIRDER
DETAILS 1 OF 3
G10
1'-11"
G9
11"
ALT. 1 OR ALT. 2
1'-10"
STRAND EXTEN.
1'-10"
0"
1'-10"
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM:
1/3 points of span for span lengths 80'-0" to 120'-0"
1/2 points of span for span lengths 40'-0" to 80'-0"
No intermediate diaphragm for span lengths 40'-0" or less.
YES
YES
NO
YES
SAWTEETH
9. FOR DIAPHRAGMS, OMIT HOLES AND PLACE INSERTS ON THE INTERIOR FACE OF
EXTERIOR GIRDERS. PLACE HOLES AND INSERTS PARALLEL TO SKEW. INSERTS
SHALL BE 1" MEADOWBURKE MX-3 HI-TENSILE, 1 x 5 WILLIAMS F22 OPEN
FERRULE INSERT, 1 x 4 DAYTON-SUPERIOR F-62 FLARED THIN SLAB FERRULE
INSERT OR APPROVED EQUAL.
3. FOR END TYPES A, C AND D CUT ALL STRANDS FLUSH WITH THE GIRDER ENDS
AND PAINT WITH AN APPROVED EPOXY RESIN, EXCEPT FOR EXTENDED STRANDS AS
SHOWN. FOR END TYPE B CUT ALL STRANDS 1" BELOW CONCRETE SURFACE AND
GROUT WITH AN APPROVED EPOXY GROUT.
3"
G7 #3
(TYP.)
G1 #4
FORM
HANGERS
GIRDER
3"
END TYPE B
MAX. SLOPE **
2'-4"
HARPING POINT
3"
4 SPA.
@ 3"
= 1'-2"
HARPED STRANDS
SPLAYED
MEASURED
ALONG GIRDER
END TYPE A
BRG.
G5 #7 - 5 EQUAL SPACES.
EMBED 7'-6" TYP. INTO GIRDER.
SPLAY TO CLEAR HARPED STRANDS.
OMIT FOR END TYPE "B".
LIFTING LOOPS
- " STRANDS
SEE NOTE 5.
4'-10"
Fo
3"
9"+B2
5"
2"
3"
6"
5'-0"+ "A"
11"
1'-3"
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
(SEE "FRAMING PLAN" FOR LOCATION)
1"
1" CLR.
(TYP.)
8"
PICKUP
FORCE
60 MIN.
90 MAX.
3"
3"
3"
5.6-A3-6
SHEET
JOB NO.
SR
10
BEARING
RECESS
90
90
BEARING
RECESS
M:\STANDARDS\Girders\W\W58G\W58G2.man
11
21
15
19
13
23
4 SPA @
2" = 8"
17
7
5
25
4"
24
14
2
6
10
16
22
12
18
4 SPA @
2" = 8"
20
26
2"
LL
LT
P1
NOTE:
Dimensions shall be shown in Imperial
units to the nearest th inch.
1
2
(DEG.) (DEG.)
PLAN LENGTH
ALONG GIRDER GRADE
6'-0"
SPLAY G3 & 2 G7 BARS
STRAIGHT
LT
P2
TEMPORARY
90
1"
Fb
Fo
D @ 40 DAYS
Ld
W58G GIRDER
DETAILS 2 OF 3
SAWTOOTH DETAILS
LOCATION OF
C.G. STRANDS
END 2
BEARING
RECESS
NOTE:
LL AND LT ARE SHIPPING SUPPORT
LOCATIONS AT LEADING AND
TRAILING ENDS, RESPECTIVELY.
LL
JACKING
JACKING
JACKING
NO. OF
NO. OF
FORCE
FORCE
FORCE
STRANDS
STRANDS
(KIPS)
(KIPS)
(KIPS)
HARPED
NO. OF
STRANDS
END 1
P1
GIRDER SCHEDULE
AHEAD
ON STATIONING
BEARING
RECESS
(ALONG GIRDER
GRADE)
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED
STRANDS
TRANSVERSE REINFORCING
SKEWED ENDS
1'-2"
P2
PLAN
LENGTH
2"
LEVEL (AFTER
CASTING SLAB)
BEARING
RECESS
PLAN
BEARING RECESS AND
BOTTOM FLANGE SPALL PROTECTION
" CHAMFER ON
WEB FOR SKEWS
GREATER THAN 15
" EXPANDED
POLYSTYRENE FOR
SKEWS GREATER
THAN 15
" CHAMFER ON
FLANGE FOR SKEWS
GREATER THAN 15
ELEVATION
BEARING
RECESS
"
GIRDER SLOPE
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED
STRANDS
Fo
STRAND PATTERN
AT GIRDER END
11
2" (TYP.)
2"
2"
4" (MIN.)
2"
GIRDER
2"
SPAN
C.G. TOTAL
STRAIGHT
STRANDS
END 2 TYPE
3"
Fb
@ FINAL
F'C (KSI)
GIRDER
"
END 1 TYPE
GIRDER
@ RELEASE
F'CI (KSI)
TOP OF GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
C
GIRDER
1"
D @ 120 DAYS
5.6-A3-7
SHEET
JOB NO.
SR
GIRDER
PLAN
PRETENSIONED TEMPORARY
TOP STRANDS
GIRDER END
ALTERNATE #1
1'-9"
1'-9"
ALTERNATE #2
GIRDER END
10'-0"
GIR.
3'-0"
M:\STANDARDS\Girders\W\W58G\W58G3.man
STEEL ANCHOR
x 4 x 0'-4
WITH " HOLE
10'-0"
GIR.
3"
2"
4"
#4 #2
PT ANCHOR PLATE TO BE
INSTALLED PERPENDICULAR
TO TOP OF GIRDER
2
#5 - TOP AND
BOTTOM OF STUDS
W58G GIRDER
DETAILS 3 OF 3
PLAN
TEMPORARY STRAND
POST-TENSIONED ALTERNATE
GIRDER
ADJUST G4 BARS TO
CLEAR THE STEEL PLATE
END VIEW
TEMPORARY STRAND
POST-TENSIONED ALTERNATE
1 x 3 (TYP.)
#1 #3
3" 6"
SECTION
NORMAL TO
GIRDER
2"
"
5.6-A3-8
SHEET
JOB NO.
SR
EXTEND
G4 #5
Fo
R=3"
2 G8 #6
SAWTEETH
MEASURED
ALONG GIRDER
2"
CLR.
END TYPE A
BRG.
6 G4 #5 WITH
2'-0" MIN. SPLICE
M:\STANDARDS\Girders\W\W74G\W74G1.man
C
2"+B1
3"
B2 = 3" ( G5 )
B1 = 1"( G4 , G8 )
G5 BARS RIGHT OF
B2 = 0" ( G5 )
B1 = 0" ( G4 , G8 )
G5 BARS LEFT OF
1'-0"
MARK
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
G8
G9
G10
G7 #3
SIZE
5
5
5
5
7
W12
3
6
3
3
9"
2"
2'-1"
STR.
STR.
STR.
STR.
6"
G2
G1
6"
GIR.
3'-7"
SECTION
LOCATION
STIRRUPS
END STIRRUPS
TOP FLANGE
LONGIT. FULL LENGTH
END LONGIT.
END TIES
BOT. FLANGE TIES
END LONGIT.
BOT. FLANGE TIES
BOT. FLANGE TIES
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
SAWTEETH SHOWN
BY HATCHED AREA
G2 #5
G3 #5
G6 W12
(TYP.)
GIRDER
6"
GIRDER NOTES
6"
MIN.
FORM
HANGERS
YES
NO
NO
B
C
D
"L" Abutment
Hinge Diaph. @ Intermediate Pier
Fixed Diaph. @ Intermediate Pier
8"
G6
G7
1'-6"
R=2"
1'-10"
0"
1'-6"
0"
1'-6"
1'-10"
1'-10"
W74G GIRDER
DETAILS 1 OF 3
3"
YES
A
End Diaph. on Girder
BEARING
RECESS
END
TYPE
G10
1'-11"
G9
11"
9"
0"
9"
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM:
1/4 points of span for span lengths over 120'-0".
1/3 points of span for span lengths 80'-0" to 120'-0"
1/2 points of span for span lengths 40'-0" to 80'-0"
YES
YES
NO
YES
SAWTEETH
9. FOR DIAPHRAGMS, OMIT HOLES AND PLACE INSERTS ON THE INTERIOR FACE OF
EXTERIOR GIRDERS. PLACE HOLES AND INSERTS PARALLEL TO SKEW. INSERTS
SHALL BE 1" MEADOWBURKE MX-3 HI-TENSILE, 1 x 5 WILLIAMS F22 OPEN
FERRULE INSERT, 1 x 4 DAYTON-SUPERIOR F-62 FLARED THIN SLAB FERRULE
INSERT OR APPROVED EQUAL.
3. FOR END TYPES A, C AND D CUT ALL STRANDS FLUSH WITH THE GIRDER ENDS
AND PAINT WITH AN APPROVED EPOXY RESIN, EXCEPT FOR EXTENDED STRANDS AS
SHOWN. FOR END TYPE B CUT ALL STRANDS 1" BELOW CONCRETE SURFACE AND
GROUT WITH AN APPROVED EPOXY GROUT.
Diaphragm Type
G7 #3 (TYP.)
G1 #5
6"
MAX. SLOPE **
VIEW
3" +B1
#7 (TYP.)
3"
G8 #6 EMBED 6'-0"
INTO GIRDER. OMIT
FOR END TYPE "B".
HARPED
STRANDS
G5
TEMPORARY
STRANDS (TYP.)
G4 #5 (TYP.)
SPA. @ 1'-6"
11 SPA. @ 1'-3"
13'-9"
2 G1 #5, G3 #5 & 2 G7 #3
9"
1'-0"
3" OPEN HOLE. ADJUST
3" OPEN HOLE *
HOLE LOCATION VERTICALLY
L
TO MISS HARPED STRANDS *
HARPED STRANDS BUNDLED
END TYPE B
BETWEEN HARPING POINTS
* OMIT HOLES AND PLACE INSERTS ON THE INTERIOR FACE
OF EXTERIOR GIRDERS. PLACE HOLES AND INSERTS
PARALLEL TO SKEW. INSERTS SHALL BE 1" BURKE HI-TENSILE,
LANCASTER MALLEABLE, DAYTON-SUPERIOR F-62 FLARED
THIN SLAB (1" x 4") FERRULE OR APPROVED EQUAL. (TYP.)
4"
HARPING POINT
4"
GIRDER ELEVATION
5 SPA.
@ 3"
= 1'-5"
2 G2 #5, G3 #5 & 2 G7 #3
HARPED STRANDS
SPLAYED
2"
3'-6"
6'-1"
2"
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED STRANDS
2"
3"
6"
G5 #7 - 6 EQUAL SPACES.
EMBED 9'-6" TYP. INTO GIRDER.
SPLAY TO CLEAR HARPED STRANDS.
OMIT FOR END TYPE "B".
3"
9"+B2
10"
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
(SEE "FRAMING PLAN" FOR LOCATION)
1"
11"
3"
1'-3"
6'-5"+ "A"
1" CLR.
(TYP.)
PICKUP
FORCE
60 MIN.
90 MAX.
8"
LIFTING LOOPS
- " STRANDS
SEE NOTE 5.
3"
3"
3"
5.6-A3-9
SHEET
JOB NO.
SR
10
BEARING
RECESS
90
90
BEARING
RECESS
LEVEL (AFTER
CASTING SLAB)
BEARING
RECESS
SPAN
M:\STANDARDS\Girders\W\W74G\W74G2.man
PLAN
BEARING RECESS AND
BOTTOM FLANGE SPALL PROTECTION
" CHAMFER ON
WEB FOR SKEWS
GREATER THAN 15
" EXPANDED
POLYSTYRENE FOR
SKEWS GREATER
THAN 15
" CHAMFER ON
FLANGE FOR SKEWS
GREATER THAN 15
ELEVATION
BEARING
RECESS
"
GIRDER SLOPE
Fo
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED
STRANDS
STRAND PATTERN
AT GIRDER END
11
2"
2"
4"
(MIN.)
2" (TYP.)
E
GIRDER
2"
"
13
2
6
1
5
4"
26
25
10
16
22
12
18
4 SPA @
2" = 8"
14
24
20
LL
LT
1
2
(DEG.) (DEG.)
2"
1'-5"
P1
(ALONG GIRDER
GRADE)
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED
STRANDS
END 1
P1
AHEAD
ON STATIONING
PLAN LENGTH
ALONG GIRDER GRADE
STRAIGHT
TEMPORARY
90
1"
Fb
LOCATION OF
C.G. STRANDS
Fo
END 2
D @ 40 DAYS
Ld
W74G GIRDER
DETAILS 2 OF 3
SAWTOOTH DETAILS
JACKING
JACKING
JACKING
NO. OF
NO. OF
FORCE
FORCE
FORCE
STRANDS
STRANDS
(KIPS)
(KIPS)
(KIPS)
TRANSVERSE REINFORCING
SKEWED ENDS
7'-6"
SPLAY G3 AND 2 G7 BARS
NO. OF
STRANDS
HARPED
LT
P2
BEARING
RECESS
NOTE:
LL AND LT ARE SHIPPING SUPPORT
LOCATIONS AT LEADING AND
TRAILING ENDS, RESPECTIVELY.
LL
BEARING
RECESS
GIRDER SCHEDULE
MIN. CONC.
COMP. STRENGTH
P2
PLAN
LENGTH
NOTE:
Dimensions shall be shown in Imperial
units to the nearest th inch.
19
23
4 SPA @
2" = 8"
11
21
15
2"
17
C.G. TOTAL
STRAIGHT
STRANDS
END 2 TYPE
GIRDER
@ FINAL
F'C (KSI)
2"
END 1 TYPE
GIRDER
3"
Fb
@ RELEASE
F'CI (KSI)
GIRDER
GIRDER
TOP OF GIRDER
1"
GIRDER
D @ 120 DAYS
5.6-A3-10
SHEET
JOB NO.
SR
STEEL ANCHOR
x 4 x 0'-4
WITH " HOLE
PLAN
PRETENSIONED TEMPORARY
TOP STRANDS
ALTERNATE #1
ALTERNATE #2
GIRDER END
1'-9"
M:\STANDARDS\Girders\W\W74G\W74G3.man
GIRDER END
1'-9"
10'-0"
3'-0"
GIR.
GIRDER
10'-0"
GIR.
2"
SECTION
#1 #3 #5
3" 3"
6"
W74G GIRDER
DETAILS 3 OF 3
#6 #4 #2
ADJUST G4 BARS TO
CLEAR THE STEEL PLATE
END VIEW
TEMPORARY STRAND
POST-TENSIONED ALTERNATE
1 x 3 (TYP.)
PT ANCHOR PLATE TO BE
INSTALLED PERPENDICULAR
TO TOP OF GIRDER
2 ~ #5 - TOP AND
BOTTOM OF STUDS
PLAN
TEMPORARY STRAND
POST-TENSIONED ALTERNATE
GIRDER
"
2"
01/01/2015
5.6-A4-1
SPAN
GIRDER SERIES
END 1 TYPE
END 2 TYPE
"A" DIMENSION AT
BEARINGS
Ld
L1
3.
NOTES TO DESIGNER:
GIRDER
(FULL OR
PARTIAL)
INT.
DIAPHRAGM
TYPE
L2
P1
P2
@ 28-DAYS
F'C (KSI)
@ RELEASE
F'CI (KSI)
STRAIGHT
PT.
SET SCREED
TO THIS LINE
HARPED
BRG.
PT.
BRG.
SPAN
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
PLACE DETAIL ON BRIDGE DECK REINFORCEMENT PLAN.
STRANDS
-
? TO ?
STRANDS
? TO ?
DECK SCREED
CAMBER C
-
LOWER BOUND
@ 40 DAYS
UPPER BOUND
@ 120 DAYS
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ZONE 1
REINFORCEMENT
DETAILS
H1
WF GIRDER
DETAILS 1 OF 5
2. ALL PRETENSIONED AND TEMPORARY STRANDS SHALL BE 0.6" AASHTO M203 GRADE
270 LOW RELAXATION STRANDS, JACKED TO 202.5 KSI.
GIRDER NOTES
EXTENSION
LENGTH
-
EXTENSION
LENGTH
END 2
LENGTH
END 1
SPACING
LENGTH
STRAIGHT STRANDS
TO EXTEND
SPACING
LENGTH
GIRDER SCHEDULE
TEMPORARY
SPACING
3"
3"
3"
END 1
AHEAD ON STATIONING
FACE OF WEB
P1
GIRDER PLAN
PLAN LENGTH
(ALONG GIRDER GRADE)
END 2
HARPED STRANDS
SPLAYED
GIRDER
L2
P2
BEARING
RECESS
SHIPPING
SUPPORT
LOCATION
HARPING POINT
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
SEE "FRAMING PLAN" FOR LOCATIONS.
L1
SHIPPING
SUPPORT
LOCATION
BEARING
RECESS
GIRDER ELEVATION
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED STRANDS
C.G. TOTAL
TEMPORARY STRANDS
PICKUP
FORCE
FORM
HANGERS
SECTION A
3'-2"
6"
REINFORCEMENT AND
STRANDS NOT SHOWN
3"
1'-4"
5"
Fo
3"
4"
3"
6"
MIN.
10"
3"
39 37 35 33 41
43 45
11
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED STRANDS
4"
2 30 24 32 26 22 28 8
H
GIRDER
HEIGHT
3'-0"
3'-6"
4'-2"
4'-10"
5'-6"
6'-2"
6'-10"
7'-10"
8'-4"
GIRDER
SERIES
WF36G
WF42G
WF50G
WF58G
WF66G
WF74G
WF83G
WF95G
WF100G
2"
WF GIRDER
DETAILS 2 OF 5
1'-2"
1'-6"
1'-9"
2'-3"
2'-4"
2'-8"
2'-1"
3'-1"
2'-8"
1'-2"
1'-2"
1'-2"
1'-2"
1'-2"
1'-2"
1'-2"
1'-2"
1'-2"
ID
ID
PARTIAL DEPTH
FULL DEPTH
INT. DIAPHRAGM INT. DIAPHRAGM
7 SPA @ 2"
= 1'-2"
6 20 14 18 12 16 10 4
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED STRANDS
4" (MIN.)
42 34 36 38 40
46 44
GIRDER
SECTION
7 SPA @ 2"
= 1'-2"
9 15 11 17 13 19 5
7 27 21 25 31 23 29 1
C.G. TOTAL
STRAIGHT
STRANDS
2"
VIEW B
2"
(TYP.)
HARPED STRAND
BUNDLES (TYP.)
5
9 10
2
4
6
1
3
2"
GIRDER
Fo
TOP OF GIRDER
3 SPA.@
2" = 6"
2"
4'-1"
ID
03/03/2015
5.6-A4-2
PARALLEL TO GIRDER
EXTENSION LENGTH ~
PARALLEL TO GIRDER
BEARING RECESS
END OF GIRDER
END TYPE D
END OF GIRDER
SAWTEETH
END TYPE A
1'-4"
SAWTEETH
10"
BEARING RECESS
1'-4"
END TYPE B
6" *
1"
HARPED STRANDS
WF GIRDER
DETAILS 3 OF 5
GIRDER SLOPE
BEARING RECESS
PLAN
90
BEARING RECESS
ELEVATION
LEVEL (AFTER
CASTING DECK)
" EXPANDED
POLYSTYRENE
FOR SKEW ANGLE
GREATER THAN 15
SKEW ANGLE
" EXPANDED
POLYSTYRENE
FOR SKEW ANGLE
GREATER THAN 15
P OR P
1
2
SAWTEETH DETAIL
" CHAMFER ON
FLANGE FOR SKEW
ANGLE GREATER
THAN 15.
END OF GIRDER
90
1"
DIAPHRAGM
GIRDER
Ld *
"
01/01/2015
5.6-A4-3
3"
ZONE 1
ZONE 3
10'-0"
6 G4 #5 WITH
2'-0" MIN. SPLICE
ZONE 2
HARPED
STRANDS
2 G1 #5, G3 #5 & 2 G7 #3 ~
SEE GIRDER SCHEDULE FOR SPACING AND LENGTH OF ZONES
2 G8 #5 (OMIT
FOR END TYPE B)
1'-10"
(TYP.)
1"
CLR.
NORMAL TO
GIRDER
PLAN
TRANSVERSE REINFORCING
AT SKEWED ENDS
G1 , G3
AND G7 BARS
ZONE 2
SPLAY AS SHOWN
2 EQUAL
SPACES
G8 #5 (TYP.)
STRANDS
NOT SHOWN
SECTION
6" 6"
G5 #5 (TYP.)
G4 #5 (TYP.)
2"
#5
G1 #5
G3
G7 #3
(TYP.)
G6 W12
(TYP.)
GIRDER
G2
2'-0"
R=2"
FIELD BEND
ALT. SIDES
G6
1'-8"
8"
G7
3"
1'-6"
G10
3'-0"
G9
3
4
5
6
7
7
8
9
10
WF36G
WF42G
WF50G
WF58G
WF66G
WF74G
WF83G
WF95G
WF100G
BENDING DIAGRAM
NO. OF
G5 BARS
GIRDER
SERIES
WF GIRDER
DETAILS 4 OF 5
G1
H1
1" CLR.
(TYP.)
GIRDER
ZONE 1 ~
PARALLEL TO END
1"
10"
1'-0"
6"
3"
3"
01/01/2015
5.6-A4-4
01/01/2015
5.6-A4-5
GIRDER
GIRDER
LIVE END
3'-0"
3'-0"
10'-0" BOND
TEMPORARY STRANDS
PLAN
POST-TENSIONED TEMPORARY
TOP STRANDS ALTERNATE
DEAD END
END G4 ~ 2"
FROM ANCHOR PLATE
(TYP. AT ANCHOR )
PT ANCHOR PLATE TO BE
DETERMINED BY GIRDER
MANUFACTURER (TYP.)
DETAIL
VIEW
PT ANCHOR PLATE TO BE
DETERMINED BY GIRDER
MANUFACTURER. (TYP.)
G4 (TYP.)
SECTION
6"
4"
4"
NORMAL TO
GIRDER
WF GIRDER
DETAILS 5 OF 5
TEMPORARY STRAND IN
PLASTIC SLEEVE (TYP.)
4"
NOTES:
10'-0"
BOND TEMPORARY STRANDS
PLAN
PRETENSIONED TEMPORARY
TOP STRANDS ALTERNATE
SEE DETAIL
10'-0"
BOND TEMPORARY STRANDS
GIRDER
2"
TEMPORARY STRANDS
TEMPORARY
STRANDS
1'-6"
1'-6"
VIEW
GIRDER
PRESTRESSING
STRANDS 2" MIN. SPA.
(TYP. ~ NOT TENSIONED)
GIR.
* ALL ADDITIONAL STRANDS
IN EXCESS OF 5 SHALL BE
PLACED IN THIS GROUP
M:\STANDARDS\Girders\WF\ADDITIONAL STRANDS.MAN
GIR.
ANCHOR PLATE
ADDITIONAL STRAND
EXTENSION DETAIL
ANCHOR PLATE
SEE "ANCHOR PLATE
DETAIL" THIS SHEET
10'-0" (TYP.)
6"
4"
03/03/2015
5.6-A4-6
2"
2"
" x 1'-4"
ASTM A36
ANCHOR PLATE
R=" (TYP.)
8" HOLE
2"
01/01/2015
5.6-A4-7
2"
3"
DIAPHRAGM
SECTION
PARALLEL
PIER WALL
OPEN
JOINT **
M:\STANDARDS\Girders\WF\END DIAPHRAGM.MAN
ELEVATION
END DIAPHRAGM
DIAPHRAGM
#4 TIE, 2
#4 STIRRUPS AND
#4 STIRRUP @ 1'-3" MAX.
WALL
SECTION
#4
W
0"
0"
1"
2"
3"
4"
4"
4"
5"
Open Joint
** = 1.5"
** = 2.0"
** = 2.5"
Special design
Insert correct
dimension value
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
GIRDER
WF36G
WF42G
WF50G
WF58G
WF66G
WF74G
WF83G
WF95G
WF100G
Bridge length
L 200'
200' < L 300'
300' < L 400'
L > 400'
2
#6 (2'-2" SPLICE
WHEN REQUIRED) &
#4
2
#4 (2'-0" SPLICE
WHEN REQUIRED)
2
#6 (3'-0" SPLICE
WHEN REQUIRED)
NOTE TO DETAILER:
BACK OF
PAVEMENT SEAT
#6
#6
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
OPEN JOINT**
3" FILLET
GRADE
10" + W
PIER WALL
BEARING PAD
DECK REINF.
(TYP.)
2.
1.
NOTES:
TOP OF
GIRDER
"A" DIM. @
GIRDER
SECTION
2'-2"
3" MIN.
EMBEDMENT
10"
BEARING
BUTYL RUBBER
SHEETING
#4 STIRRUP
#4 STIRRUP
END OF GIRDER
#4 (TYP.)
CONSTRUCTION JT.
WITH ROUGHENED
SURFACE
#4 TIE
BRIDGE APPROACH
SLAB ANCHOR SEE
BRIDGE APPROACH
SLAB SHEETS
1'-1"
1'-0"
01/01/2015
5.6-A4-8
GIRDER STOP
(TYP.)
1'-0"
1" MIN.
3" MAX.
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
ADJUST GIRDER STOP HEIGHT TO PROVIDE
2" MIN. GAP TO BOTTOM OF DIAPHRAGM.
FACE OF WEB
1'-6"
NOTE TO DETAILER:
ASTM A-307
9" AT GIRDER
2
#7 FULL WIDTH
(2'-7" MIN. SPLICE ADJACENT
TO GIRDERS WHEN REQUIRED)
#7 FULL WIDTH
(3'-7" MIN. SPLICE BETWEEN
GIRDERS WHEN REQUIRED)
2
#4 BETWEEN
GIRDERS (TYP.)
3
#6 (3'-0" MIN.
SPLICE WHEN REQUIRED)
ANCHOR DETAIL
1" MIN.
6" MAX. THREAD
6"
GIRDER
ELEVATION
END DIAPHRAGM
#4 TIE
(TYP.)
SPA. @ 1'-0"
MAX.
NOTES:
1'-6" MIN.
1" MIN.
3" MAX.
2 SPA. @ 3"
#4 STIRRUPS
(TYP.)
1'-1"
(TYP.)
GIRDER
#7
#4 STIRRUP
INTERSECTION OF
DIAPHRAGM &
BEARING
BEARING PAD
DIAPHRAGM NORMAL
TO GIRDER BOTTOM
#4 BETWEEN
GIRDERS (TYP.)
#7
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
W/ ROUGHENED SURFACE
2" FILLET
BETWEEN GIRDERS
GRADE
L ABUTMENT
END DIAPHRAGM DETAILS
BRG.
SECTION
6" MIN.
END OF GIRDER
TOP OF GIRDER
#6 (TYP.)
DIAPHRAGM
12/02/2014
5.6-A4-9
GIRDER
NOTE TO DETAILER:
GIRDER
H5 STIRR. AND
H6 TIE
H1 STIRRUP
ELEVATION
2 H3
SECTION
H3
H4
12
H7
PIER
X'-X"
5.
3"
3"
3"
3"
3"
4"
4"
5"
5"
B4
B4
B3
6"
TOP OF
GIRDER
SEE DETAIL
(TYP.)
(TYP.)
SECTION
X'-X"
9"
MIN.
45
DETAIL
DIAPHRAGM
AT INTERMEDIATE PIER DETAILS
END OF GIRDER
LEVEL PERPENDICULAR
TO CROSSBEAM
H5 STIRR.
? #? (TYP.)
H1 STIRR.
H3 (TYP.)
BEARING
(OAK BLOCK) (TYP.)
DIAPHRAGM REINFORCING
NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY
FACE OF
DIAPHRAGM
TOP OF GIRDER
6"
? #?
(TYP.)
PIER
9"
MIN.
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
WITH ROUGHENED
SURFACE OR SHEAR KEY
CROSSBEAM
END OF GIRDER
FACE OF DIAPHRAGM
AND CROSSBEAM
3"
3"
3"
3"
4"
4"
4"
4"
5"
B3
NOTE TO DESIGNER
WF36G
WF42G
WF50G
WF58G
WF66G
WF74G
WF83G
WF95G
WF100G
GIRDER
2.
1.
PIER ?
ELEVATION AT TOP
OF OAK BLOCK
GIRDER
NOTES:
H7 (TYP.)
FIELD CUT AS REQUIRED
NOTE TO DESIGNER
H6 TIES
SPACED AS SHOWN
EACH
FACE (TYP.)
2 H2 AND 2 H4
BETWEEN GIRDERS (TYP.)
(TYP.)
H2
EXTERIOR
GIRDER
SUPERSTRUCTURE
SUBSTRUCTURE
10"
2 H2 AND 2 H4 ~
SPA. @ X" MAX.
H1 STIRR.
INTERIOR
GIRDER
1'-0"
01/01/2015
5.6-A4-10
1'-0"
1" MIN.
3" MAX.
6"
2
#4 BETWEEN
GIRDERS (TYP.)
#7 FULL WIDTH
(3'-7" MIN. SPLICE BETWEEN
GIRDERS WHEN REQUIRED)
2
#7 FULL WIDTH
(2'-7" MIN. SPLICE ADJACENT
TO GIRDERS WHEN REQUIRED)
2
#6 (3'-0" MIN.
SPLICE WHEN REQUIRED)
1'-6"
FACE OF WEB
ASTM A-307
D
2'-0"
2'-3"
2'-7"
2'-10"
3'-4"
3'-9"
5'-0"
5'-0"
5'-11"
8"
#7
#4
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
5"
#4 STIRRUP
#4 BETWEEN
GIRDERS (TYP.)
#7
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
WITH ROUGHENED SURFACE
3" FILLET
BETWEEN GIRDERS
BEND IN FIELD
135 (TYP.)
5.
- I-5 bridges
NOTES:
SECTION
#6
Insert appropriate
dimension value for "D"
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
GIRDER
WF36G
WF42G
WF50G
WF58G
WF66G
WF74G
WF83G
WF95G
WF100G
TOP OF
GIRDER
NOTE TO DETAILER:
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
ELEVATION
PARTIAL DEPTH INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
#4 TIE
(TYP.)
SPA. @ 1'-0"
MAX.
1" MIN.
3" MAX.
ANCHOR DETAIL
1" MIN.
6" MAX. THREAD
1'-6" MIN.
#4 STIRRUPS
(TYP.)
2 SPA. @ 3"
GIRDER
VARIES
D
AT GIRDER
9" AT
GIR.
SPACE @ 1'-0" MAX.
3"
GIRDER
D + "A"
Dimension
01/01/2015
5.6-A4-11
1'-6"
FACE OF WEB
6"
2
#7 FULL WIDTH
(2'-7" MIN. SPLICE ADJACENT
TO GIRDERS WHEN REQUIRED)
2
#4 BETWEEN
GIRDERS (TYP.)
#7 FULL WIDTH
(3'-7" MIN. SPLICE BETWEEN
GIRDERS WHEN REQUIRED)
- I-5 bridges
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
ASTM A-307
1'-0"
1" MIN.
3" MAX.
2
#6 (3'-0" MIN.
SPLICE WHEN REQUIRED)
ELEVATION
FULL DEPTH INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
#4 TIE
(TYP.)
SPA. @ 1'-0"
MAX.
1" MIN.
3" MAX.
ANCHOR DETAIL
1" MIN.
6" MAX. THREAD
1'-6" MIN.
#4 STIRRUPS
(TYP.)
2 SPA. @ 3"
GIRDER
11"
(TYP.)
GIRDER
8"
SECTION
#6
#7
5.
#4
5"
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
#4 STIRRUP
#4 BETWEEN
GIRDERS (TYP.)
#7
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
WITH ROUGHENED SURFACE
3" FILLET
BETWEEN GIRDERS
BEND IN FIELD
135 (TYP.)
NOTES:
9" AT GIRDER
TOP OF
GIRDER
NOTE TO DETAILER:
VARIES
SPACE @ 1'-0" MAX.
3"
9/16/2014
GIRDER STOP
" CHAMFER
(TYP.)
ELASTOMERIC GIRDER
STOP PAD (TYP.)
1" MIN.
1" MAX. (TYP.)
SKEW
ANGLE
90
GIRDER
SKEW ANGLE
LEVEL
" RECESS
1" AT BEARING
GIRDER
NOTES:
GROUT PAD
SECTION
GIRDER
ELASTOMERIC BEARING
PAD (SEE DETAIL)
GIRDER
ING ER
AR PI
BE NG
O
AL
" RECESS
ING R
AR PIE
BE NG
O
L
A
3"
MIN.
5.6-A4-12
14 GAGE (0.0747")
SHIM (TYP.)
SECTION
IN
IN
UNLOADED HEIGHT
LOADED HEIGHT (DL)
I GIRDER
BEARING DETAILS
165 PSI
KIPS
SHEAR MODULUS
KIPS
" INNER
LAYER (TYP.)
" OUTER
LAYER (TYP.)
01/01/2015
5.6-A5-1
SPAN
GIRDER SERIES
END 1 TYPE
END 2 TYPE
"A" DIMENSION AT
BEARINGS
Ld
L1
L2
P1
P2
@ 28-DAYS
F'C (KSI)
@ RELEASE
F'CI (KSI)
STRAIGHT
PT.
SET SCREED
TO THIS LINE
BRG.
HARPED
PT.
BRG.
SPAN
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
PLACE DETAIL ON BRIDGE DECK REINFORCEMENT PLAN.
NOTES TO DESIGNER:
GIRDER
(FULL OR
PARTIAL)
INT.
DIAPHRAGM
TYPE
STRANDS
-
? TO ?
EXTENSION
LENGTH
? TO ?
DECK SCREED
CAMBER C
-
LOWER BOUND
@ 40 DAYS
UPPER BOUND
@ 120 DAYS
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ZONE 1
2. ALL PRETENSIONED AND TEMPORARY STRANDS SHALL BE 0.6" AASHTO M203 GRADE
270 LOW RELAXATION STRANDS, JACKED TO 202.5 KSI.
GIRDER NOTES
STRANDS
END 2
EXTENSION
LENGTH
REINFORCEMENT
DETAILS
LENGTH
END 1
SPACING
LENGTH
STRAIGHT STRANDS
TO EXTEND
SPACING
LENGTH
GIRDER SCHEDULE
TEMPORARY
SPACING
3"
3"
3"
5"
L1
PLAN LENGTH
(ALONG GIRDER GRADE)
HARPED STRANDS
SPLAYED
HARPING POINT
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
P2
END 2
L2
BEARING
RECESS
SHIPPING
SUPPORT
LOCATION
OF INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM.
SEE "FRAMING PLAN" FOR LOCATIONS.
1'-11"
(TYP.)
GIRDER PLAN
GIRDER ELEVATION
8" NORMAL TO
DIAPHRAGM
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED STRANDS
C.G. TOTAL
TEMPORARY STRANDS
SHIPPING
SUPPORT
LOCATION
BEARING
RECESS
END 1
P1
AHEAD ON STATIONING
FACE OF WEB
SECTION A
3'-2"
6"
REINFORCEMENT AND
STRANDS NOT SHOWN
3"
1'-4"
3"
1'-6
PICKUP
TEXTURE TOP OF GIRDER
FORCE
IN ACCORDANCE WITH
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
6-02.3(25)H
ALL OTHER
LOCATIONS
DETAIL
" (TYP.)
JOINT
" CHAMFER OR
0.6" HALF ROUND
DRIP GROOVE
EXTERIOR EDGE OF
EXTERIOR GIRDERS
DETAIL
4"
Fo
3"
4"
SEE DETAIL
(TYP.)
JOINT
GIRDER
JOINT
39 37 35 33 41
43 45
11
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED STRANDS
4"
2 30 24 32 26 22 28 8
WF36TDG
WF42TDG
WF50TDG
WF58TDG
WF66TDG
WF74TDG
WF83TDG
WF95TDG
WF100TDG
GIRDER
SERIES
ID
ID
PARTIAL DEPTH
FULL DEPTH
INT. DIAPHRAGM INT. DIAPHRAGM
1'-2"
1'-2"
1'-6"
1'-2"
1'-9"
1'-2"
2'-3"
1'-2"
2'-4"
1'-2"
2'-8"
1'-2"
2'-1"
1'-2"
3'-1"
1'-2"
2'-8"
1'-2"
2"
H
GIRDER
HEIGHT
3'-0"
3'-6"
4'-2"
4'-10"
5'-6"
6'-2"
6'-10"
7'-10"
8'-4"
7 SPA @ 2"
= 1'-2"
6 20 14 18 12 16 10 4
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED STRANDS
4" (MIN.)
42 34 36 38 40
46 44
GIRDER
SECTION
7 SPA @ 2"
= 1'-2"
9 15 11 17 13 19 5
7 27 21 25 31 23 29 1
C.G. TOTAL
STRAIGHT
STRANDS
2"
VIEW B
2"
(TYP.)
HARPED STRAND
BUNDLES (TYP.)
5
9 10
2
4
6
1
3
2"
GIRDER
Fo
TOP OF GIRDER
10"
3"
3 SPA.@
2" = 6"
2"
JOINT
ID
01/01/2015
5.6-A5-2
EXTENSION LENGTH ~
PARALLEL TO GIRDER
EDGE OF DIAPHRAGM
FACE OF WEB
1'-4"
VIEW
BLOCKOUT AREA
END TYPE B
6" *
BEARING RECESS
VIEW
1" EMBEDMENT
END OF GIRDER
END TYPE D
END OF GIRDER
SAWTEETH
END OF GIRDER
BEARING RECESS
END TYPE A
1'-4"
SAWTEETH
1"
SKEW ANGLE
GIRDER SLOPE
ELEVATION
LEVEL (AFTER
CASTING DECK)
BEARING RECESS
90
BEARING RECESS
PLAN
P OR P
1
2
" EXPANDED
POLYSTYRENE
FOR SKEW ANGLE
GREATER THAN 15
" EXPANDED
POLYSTYRENE
FOR SKEW ANGLE
GREATER THAN 15
HARPED STRANDS
SAWTEETH DETAIL
" CHAMFER ON
FLANGE FOR SKEW
ANGLE GREATER
THAN 15.
END OF GIRDER
90
1"
DIAPHRAGM
"
Ld *
GIRDER
PARALLEL TO GIRDER
GIRDER
01/01/2015
5.6-A5-3
ZONE 1
10'-0"
G4 #4 WITH
2'-0" MIN. SPLICE
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
2 G8 #5 (OMIT
FOR END TYPE B)
1'-10"
(TYP.)
1"
CLR.
HARPED
STRANDS
G8 #5 (TYP.)
GIRDER
STRANDS
NOT SHOWN
SECTION
6" 6"
#4
G7 #3
(TYP.)
G6 W12
(TYP.)
G1 #5
G3
G4 #4 @ 1'-0" MAX.
G5 #5 (TYP.)
BARRIER REINF.
SEE BARRIER
SHEETS FOR DETAILS
1"
CLR.
END OF GIRDER
2 G1 #5, G3 #4 & 2 G7 #3 ~
SEE GIRDER SCHEDULE FOR SPACING AND LENGTH OF ZONES
NORMAL TO
GIRDER
G2
1'-8"
2'-0"
G7
2'-0" MIN.
SPLICE
G3 ALTERNATIVE
G3
R=2"
3"
FIELD BEND
ALT. SIDES
G6
1'-6"
G10
3'-0"
G9
8"
BENDING DIAGRAM
3
4
5
6
7
7
8
9
10
4"
(TYP.)
NO. OF
G5 BARS
GIRDER
SERIES
WF36TDG
WF42TDG
WF50TDG
WF58TDG
WF66TDG
WF74TDG
WF83TDG
WF95TDG
WF100TDG
G1
4"
(TYP.)
GIRDER
DIMENSIONS
MEASURED
ALONG GIRDER
PLAN
TRANSVERSE REINFORCING
AT SKEWED ENDS
G1 , G3 AND G7 BARS
ZONE 2
SPLAY AS SHOWN
2"
(TYP.)
1" CLR.
(TYP.)
10"
ZONE 1 ~
PARALLEL TO END
3"
1'-0"
1"
EXTEND G1 AND G4
THROUGH BLOCKOUT
6"
3"
3"
01/01/2015
5.6-A5-4
01/01/2015
5.6-A5-5
3'-0"
3'-0"
DEAD END
END G4 ~ 2"
FROM ANCHOR PLATE
(TYP. AT ANCHOR )
PT ANCHOR PLATE TO BE
DETERMINED BY GIRDER
MANUFACTURER (TYP.)
DETAIL
VIEW
PT ANCHOR PLATE TO BE
DETERMINED BY GIRDER
MANUFACTURER. (TYP.)
G4 (TYP.)
SECTION
6"
4"
4"
NORMAL TO
GIRDER
TEMPORARY STRAND IN
PLASTIC SLEEVE (TYP.)
4"
NOTES:
10'-0" BOND
TEMPORARY STRANDS
PLAN
POST-TENSIONED TEMPORARY
TOP STRANDS ALTERNATE
SEE DETAIL
PLAN
PRETENSIONED TEMPORARY
TOP STRANDS ALTERNATE
10'-0"
BOND TEMPORARY STRANDS
2"
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
LIVE END
10'-0"
BOND TEMPORARY STRANDS
TEMPORARY STRANDS
TEMPORARY
STRANDS
01/01/2015
5.6-A5-6
SECTION
DIAPHRAGM
DIAPHRAGM
PIER WALL
OPEN
JOINT **
PARALLEL
ELEVATION
END DIAPHRAGM
#4 TIE, 2
#4 STIRRUPS AND
#4 STIRRUP @ 1'-3" MAX.
WALL
SECTION
2"
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
3"
#4
W
0"
0"
1"
2"
3"
4"
4"
4"
5"
Open Joint
** = 1.5"
** = 2.0"
** = 2.5"
Special design
Insert correct
dimension value
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
GIRDER
WF36TDG
WF42TDG
WF50TDG
WF58TDG
WF66TDG
WF74TDG
WF83TDG
WF95TDG
WF100TDG
Bridge length
L 200'
200' < L 300'
300' < L 400'
L > 400'
#4 TIE
BACK OF
PAVEMENT SEAT
#4 STIRRUP
END OF GIRDER
#4 (TYP.)
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
WITH ROUGHENED SURFACE
2
#6 (2'-2" SPLICE
WHEN REQUIRED) &
#4
2
#4 (2'-0" SPLICE
WHEN REQUIRED)
2
#6 (3'-0" SPLICE
WHEN REQUIRED)
NOTE TO DETAILER:
Revise Details to show correct
girder shape and girder spacing.
1'-1"
#6
OPEN JOINT**
SECTION
2'-2"
#6
10" + W
PIER WALL
BEARING PAD
2.
1.
NOTES:
DECK REINF.
(TYP.)
GRADE
TOP OF
GIRDER
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
3" MIN.
EMBEDMENT
10"
BEARING
BUTYL RUBBER
SHEETING
#4 STIRRUP
1'-0"
01/01/2015
5.6-A5-7
6"
(TYP.)
1'-6"
ASTM A-307
ANCHOR DETAIL
FACE OF WEB
1" MIN.
6" MAX. THREAD
2
#7 FULL WIDTH
(2'-7" MIN. SPLICE ADJACENT
TO GIRDERS WHEN REQUIRED)
4"
EXTERIOR EDGE OF
EXTERIOR GIRDERS
DETAIL
EDGE BEAM
SOFFIT
SECTION
INTERSECTION OF
DIAPHRAGM &
BEARING
BEARING PAD
#7
#4 STIRRUP
LONGITUDINAL DIMENSIONS
ARE NORMAL TO DIAPHRAGM.
GIRDER STOP NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY.
END OF GIRDER
EDGE BEAM
SOFFIT
#4 BETWEEN
GIRDERS (TYP.)
#7
#4 AT
EXT. GIRDERS
DIAPHRAGM NORMAL
TO GIRDER BOTTOM
6" MIN.
GRADE
BRG.
DIAPHRAGM
9" AT GIRDER
TOP OF GIRDER
#6 (TYP.)
NOTE TO DETAILER:
#7 FULL WIDTH
(3'-7" MIN. SPLICE BETWEEN
GIRDERS WHEN REQUIRED)
3
#6 (3'-0" MIN.
SPLICE WHEN REQUIRED)
2
#4 BETWEEN
GIRDERS (TYP.)
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
ADJUST GIRDER STOP HEIGHT TO PROVIDE
2" MIN. GAP TO BOTTOM OF DIAPHRAGM.
ELEVATION
END DIAPHRAGM
1'-1"
(TYP.)
GIRDER
GIRDER STOP
(TYP.)
1" CLR.
#4 STIRRUP ~
SPA. @ 1'-0" MAX. (TYP.)
GIRDER
NOTES:
SEE "ANCHOR
DETAIL" THIS SHEET
1" CLR.
1" CLR.
(TYP.)
SEE DETAIL
(TYP.)
BARRIER REINF. ~
SEE BARRIER SHEETS
FOR DETAILS
2
#4
AT EXTERIOR GIRDER
3"
SPACE @ 1'-0" MAX.
3"
03/03/2015
5.6-A5-8
NOTE TO DETAILER:
2 H3 (TYP.)
H5
ELEVATION
GIRDER
SECTION
H3
H4
STIRR. AND
H6 TIE
GIRDER
H1 STIRRUP
12
X'-X"
PIER ?
5.
3"
3"
3"
3"
4"
4"
4"
4"
5"
3"
3"
3"
3"
3"
4"
4"
5"
5"
B4
B4
B3
6"
TOP OF
GIRDER
(TYP.)
CROSSBEAM
6"
9"
MIN.
X'-X"
9"
MIN.
LEVEL PERPENDICULAR
TO CROSSBEAM
H5 STIRR.
? #? (TYP.)
H1 STIRR.
H3 (TYP.)
BEARING
(OAK BLOCK) (TYP.)
? #?
(TYP.)
PIER
SECTION
END OF GIRDER
FACE OF DIAPHRAGM
AND CROSSBEAM
NOTE TO DESIGNER
B3
GIRDER
WF36TDG
WF42TDG
WF50TDG
WF58TDG
WF66TDG
WF74TDG
WF83TDG
WF95TDG
WF100TDG
2.
NOTES:
GIRDER
ELEVATION AT TOP
OF OAK BLOCK
1.
H7 (TYP.)
FIELD CUT AS REQUIRED
H7
PIER
NOTE TO DESIGNER
H6 TIES
SPACED AS SHOWN
EACH
FACE (TYP.)
2 H2 AND 2 H4
BETWEEN GIRDERS (TYP.)
(TYP.)
H2
EXTERIOR
GIRDER
SUPERSTRUCTURE
SUBSTRUCTURE
H1 STIRR.
10"
2 H2 AND 2 H4 ~
SPA. @ X" MAX.
6"
INTERIOR
GIRDER
1'-0"
01/01/2015
5.6-A5-9
6"
GIRDER
2
#4 BETWEEN
GIRDERS (TYP.)
2
#7 FULL WIDTH
(2'-7" MIN. SPLICE ADJACENT
TO GIRDERS WHEN REQUIRED)
#7 FULL WIDTH
(3'-7" MIN. SPLICE BETWEEN
GIRDERS WHEN REQUIRED)
1'-6"
FACE OF WEB
#7
5.
NOTES:
* 9" AT GIRDER
SECTION
8"
#4 STIRRUP
#4 BETWEEN
GIRDERS (TYP.)
- I-5 bridges
Insert appropriate
dimension value for "D"
1"
CLR.
#7
DIAPHRAGM,
NORMAL TO GRADE
ASTM A-307
TOP OF
GIRDER
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
GIRDER
D
WF36TDG 2'-0"
WF42TDG
2'-3"
WF50TDG
2'-7"
WF58TDG
2'-10"
WF66TDG 3'-4"
WF74TDG
3'-9"
WF83TDG
5'-0"
WF95TDG
5'-0"
WF100TDG 5'-11"
NOTE TO DETAILER:
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
ELEVATION
PARTIAL DEPTH INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
ANCHOR DETAIL
1" MIN.
6" MAX. THREAD
#4 STIRRUP ~
SPA. @ 1'-0" MAX. (TYP.)
6"
GIRDER
VARIES
D
AT GIRDER
*
SPACE @ 1'-0" MAX.
3"
01/01/2015
5.6-A5-10
FACE OF WEB
1'-6"
2
#7 FULL WIDTH
(2'-7" MIN. SPLICE ADJACENT
TO GIRDERS WHEN REQUIRED)
2
#4 BETWEEN
GIRDERS (TYP.)
#7 FULL WIDTH
(3'-7" MIN. SPLICE BETWEEN
GIRDERS WHEN REQUIRED)
- I-5 bridges
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
ASTM A-307
6"
GIRDER
ELEVATION
FULL DEPTH INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
ANCHOR DETAIL
1" MIN.
6" MAX. THREAD
11"
(TYP.)
#4 STIRRUP ~
SPA. @ 1'-0" MAX. (TYP.)
6"
GIRDER
NOTES:
8"
SECTION
1"
CLR.
5.
#7
#4 BETWEEN
GIRDERS (TYP.)
#4 STIRRUP
#7
DIAPHRAGM,
NORMAL TO GRADE
TOP OF
GIRDER
NOTE TO DETAILER:
VARIES
9" AT
GIR.
SPACE @ 1'-0" MAX.
3"
01/01/2015
5.6-A6-1
SPAN
GIRDER SERIES
-
END 1 TYPE
-
END 2 TYPE
Ld
L1
NOTES TO DESIGNER:
GIRDER
L2
P1
P2
@ 28-DAYS
F'C (KSI)
@ RELEASE
F'CI (KSI)
STRAIGHT
? TO ?
LOWER BOUND
@ 40 DAYS
-
UPPER BOUND
@ 120 DAYS
-
LENGTH
-
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ZONE 1
REINFORCEMENT
DETAILS
SPACING
LENGTH
WF DECK GIRDER
DETAILS 1 OF 4
3. STRUCTURAL STEEL SHAPES AND ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE ASTM A36. THEY SHALL BE
PAINTED WITH A PRIMER COAT IN ACCORDANCE WITH STD. SPEC. 6-07.3(9). WELD TIES
SHALL BE PAINTED WITH A FIELD PRIMER COAT OF AN ORGANIC ZINC PAINT AFTER FIELD
WELDING.
2. ALL PRETENSIONED AND TEMPORARY STRANDS SHALL BE 0.6" AASHTO M203 GRADE
270 LOW RELAXATION STRANDS, JACKED TO 202.5 KSI.
GIRDER NOTES
? TO ?
SPACING
LENGTH
GIRDER SCHEDULE
HARPED
SPACING
5"
H (MIN.)
ADD DEPTH DUE TO SUPERELEVATION
3"
4"
3'-2"
6"
PLUMB
PICKUP
FORCE
AHEAD ON
STATIONING
FACE OF WEB
HARPED STRANDS
SPLAYED
HARPING POINT
39 37 35 33 41
43 45
11
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED STRANDS
4"
2 30 24 32 26 22 28 8
WF39DG
WF45DG
WF53DG
WF61DG
WF69DG
WF77DG
WF86DG
WF98DG
WF103DG
GIRDER
SERIES
H
GIRDER
HEIGHT
3'-3"
3'-9"
4'-5"
5'-1"
5'-9"
6'-5"
7'-1"
8'-1"
8'-7"
WF DECK GIRDER
DETAILS 2 OF 4
7 SPA @ 2"
= 1'-2"
6 20 14 18 12 16 10 4
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED STRANDS
4" (MIN.)
42 34 36 38 40
46 44
GIRDER
SECTION
7 SPA @ 2"
= 1'-2"
9 15 11 17 13 19 5
7 27 21 25 31 23 29 1
C.G. TOTAL
STRAIGHT
STRANDS
2"
VIEW B
2"
(TYP.)
HARPED STRAND
BUNDLES (TYP.)
5
9 10
2
4
6
1
3
2"
GIRDER
Fo
TOP OF GIRDER
END 2
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
GIRDER PLAN
PLAN LENGTH
(ALONG GIRDER GRADE)
L2
L1
P2
BEARING RECESS
END 1
P1
GIRDER ELEVATION
8" NORMAL TO
DIAPHRAGM
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED STRANDS
REINFORCEMENT AND
STRANDS NOT SHOWN
SECTION A
3"
1'-4"
3"
OF INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM.
SEE "FRAMING PLAN" FOR LOCATIONS.
1'-11"
(TYP.)
JOINT
EXTERIOR EDGE OF
EXTERIOR GIRDERS
DETAIL
" CHAMFER OR
0.6" HALF ROUND
DRIP GROOVE
4"
JOINT
1'-6
GIRDER
Fo
3"
3"
JOINT
7"
3 SPA.@
2" = 6"
2"
1'-2"
2"
SEE DETAIL
EXT. EDGE OF
EXT. GIRDERS
01/01/2015
5.6-A6-2
1"
VIEW
1" EMBEDMENT
END OF GIRDER
EDGE OF
DIAPHRAGM
FACE OF WEB
2" x 4"
SMOOTH BAR
2"
"
STUD
INTERSECTION
WITH BAR
BAR 3 x x 0'-6
()
2"
"
TYP.
FILL KEYWAY
WITH GROUT
BAR 1 x 1 x 0'-4
2 x 2 x x 0'-6"
"
"
"
FILL KEYWAY
WITH GROUT
WF DECK GIRDER
DETAILS 3 OF 4
ELEVATION
GIRDER SLOPE
BEARING RECESS
90
BEARING RECESS
PLAN
P OR P
1
2
LEVEL (AFTER
CASTING DECK)
" EXPANDED
POLYSTYRENE
FOR SKEW ANGLE
GREATER THAN 15
SKEW ANGLE
" EXPANDED
POLYSTYRENE
FOR SKEW ANGLE
GREATER THAN 15
1"
KEYWAY DETAIL
" CHAMFER ON
FLANGE FOR SKEW
ANGLE GREATER
THAN 15.
BLOCKOUT AREA
FILL KEYWAY
WITH GROUT
VIEW
3" FILLET
END TYPE B
6" *
1"
2" 1"
DIAPHRAGM
HARPED STRANDS
1'-4"
* MEASURED NORMAL TO DIAPHRAGM
SAWTEETH DETAIL
END OF GIRDER
90
BEARING RECESS
END OF GIRDER
END TYPE A
PARALLEL TO GIRDER
1'-4"
SAWTEETH
GIRDER
2" 2"
Ld *
2"
GIRDER
1"
"
01/01/2015
5.6-A6-3
ZONE 2
SPLAY AS SHOWN
GIRDER
ZONE 1
END OF GIRDER
10'-0"
G4 #4 WITH
2'-0" MIN. SPLICE
ZONE 2
G3 #6
(TYP.)
G11 #5 (TYP.)
ZONE 3
1"
CLR.
3"
HARPED
STRANDS
G8 #5 (TYP.)
NO. OF
G5 BARS
3
4
5
6
7
7
8
9
10
GIRDER
SERIES
WF39DG
WF45DG
WF53DG
WF61DG
WF69DG
WF77DG
WF86DG
WF98DG
WF103DG
LEVEL (TYP.)
G7 #3 (TYP.)
G1
45
R=2"
2'-0"
G2
G6
FIELD BEND
ALT. SIDES
1'-6"
8"
G10
3'-0"
G9
3"
WF DECK GIRDER
DETAILS 4 OF 4
2'-0"
G7
1'-8"
2'-0"
G11
45
(TYP.)
Note to Designer:
Determine G3 spacing
BENDING DIAGRAM
G6 W12 (TYP.)
G1 #5
G11 #5
1" CLR.
(TYP.)
STRANDS
NOT SHOWN
SECTION
6" 6"
G5 #5 (TYP.)
G3 #6
G4 #4 TOP &
G12 #4 BTM.
SPA @ 1'-0" MAX.
GIRDER
END TYPE B
BLOCKOUT
G12 #4 WITH
2'-0" MIN. SPLICE
G1 AND G7 ~
SPA. @ 1'-6" MAX.
2 G1 #5 AND 2 G7 #3 ~
SEE GIRDER SCHEDULE FOR SPACING AND LENGTH OF ZONES
2 G8 #5 (OMIT
FOR END TYPE B)
1'-10"
(TYP.)
DIMENSIONS
MEASURED
1"
ALONG GIRDER CLR.
PLAN
TRANSVERSE REINFORCING
AT SKEWED ENDS
NORMAL TO
GIRDER
2"
CLR.
3"
10"
ZONE 1 ~
PARALLEL TO END
3"
1'-0"
1"
EXTEND G1 , G4 AND
G12 THROUGH BLOCKOUT
6"
3"
3"
01/01/2015
5.6-A6-4
01/01/2015
5.6-A6-5
2"
SECTION
DIAPHRAGM
PIER WALL
OPEN
JOINT **
PARALLEL
ELEVATION
END DIAPHRAGM
DIAPHRAGM
TOP OF OVERLAY
#4 TIE, 2
#4 STIRRUPS AND
#4 STIRRUP @ 1'-3" MAX.
WALL
SECTION
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
3"
#4
W
0"
0"
1"
2"
3"
4"
4"
4"
5"
Open Joint
** = 1.5"
** = 2.0"
** = 2.5"
Special design
Insert correct
dimension value
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
GIRDER
WF36TDG
WF42TDG
WF50TDG
WF58TDG
WF66TDG
WF74TDG
WF83TDG
WF95TDG
WF100TDG
Bridge length
L 200'
200' < L 300'
300' < L 400'
L > 400'
#4 TIE
BACK OF
PAVEMENT SEAT
#4 STIRRUP
END OF GIRDER
#4 (TYP.)
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
WITH ROUGHENED SURFACE
2
#6 (2'-2" SPLICE
WHEN REQUIRED) &
#4
2
#4 (2'-0" SPLICE
WHEN REQUIRED)
2
#6 (3'-0" SPLICE
WHEN REQUIRED)
NOTE TO DETAILER:
Revise Details to show correct
girder shape and girder spacing.
1'-1"
#6
OPEN JOINT**
SECTION
2'-2"
#6
10" + W
PIER WALL
BEARING PAD
GRADE
2.
WF DECK GIRDER
END DIAPHRAGM DETAILS
1.
NOTES:
TOP OF
GIRDER
TOP OF OVERLAY
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
3" MIN.
EMBEDMENT
10"
BEARING
BUTYL RUBBER
SHEETING
#4 STIRRUP
1'-0"
01/01/2015
5.6-A6-6
#4
GIRDER
2
#7 FULL WIDTH
(2'-7" MIN. SPLICE ADJACENT
TO GIRDERS WHEN REQUIRED)
3
#6 (3'-0" MIN.
SPLICE WHEN REQUIRED)
2
#4 BETWEEN
GIRDERS (TYP.)
NOTE TO DETAILER:
1'-6"
FACE OF WEB
EDGE BEAM
SOFFIT
ASTM A-307
ANCHOR DETAIL
1" MIN.
6" MAX. THREAD
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
ADJUST GIRDER STOP HEIGHT TO PROVIDE
2" MIN. GAP TO BOTTOM OF DIAPHRAGM.
TOP OF OVERLAY
ELEVATION
END DIAPHRAGM
GIRDER STOP
(TYP.)
2'-0"
#4 STIRRUP ~
SPA. @ 1'-0" MAX. (TYP.)
NOTES:
SEE "ANCHOR
DETAIL" THIS SHEET
1"
CLR.
(TYP.)
6"
(TYP.)
1'-1"
(TYP.)
BARRIER REINF. ~
SEE BARRIER SHEETS
FOR DETAILS
GIRDER
1'-0" MAX.
SECTION
#7
WF DECK GIRDER
L ABUTMENT END DIAPHRAGM DETAILS
INTERSECTION OF
DIAPHRAGM &
BEARING
BEARING PAD
DIAPHRAGM NORMAL
TO GIRDER BOTTOM
#4 STIRRUP
#4 BETWEEN
GIRDERS (TYP.)
#4 AT EXT.
GIRDERS
GRADE
TOP OF GIRDER
TOP OF OVERLAY
OPTIONAL FIELD
BEND (TYP.)
BRG.
DIAPHRAGM
LONGITUDINAL DIMENSIONS
ARE NORMAL TO DIAPHRAGM.
GIRDER STOP NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY.
END OF GIRDER
EDGE BEAM
SOFFIT
6" MIN.
#6 (TYP.)
SEE EXPANSION JOINT, EDGE
BEAM AND ABUTMENT
DETAILS ON BRIDGE SHEETS
2"
CLR.
SPACE @ 1'-0" MAX.
3"
01/01/2015
5.6-A6-7
#4
GIRDER
2
#7 FULL WIDTH
(2'-7" MIN. SPLICE ADJACENT
TO GIRDERS WHEN REQUIRED)
3
#6 (3'-0" MIN.
SPLICE WHEN REQUIRED)
2
#4 BETWEEN
GIRDERS (TYP.)
NOTE TO DETAILER:
1'-6"
FACE OF WEB
EDGE BEAM
SOFFIT
ASTM A-307
1'-0" MAX.
ANCHOR DETAIL
1" MIN.
6" MAX. THREAD
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
ADJUST GIRDER STOP HEIGHT TO PROVIDE
2" MIN. GAP TO BOTTOM OF DIAPHRAGM.
TOP OF OVERLAY
ELEVATION
END DIAPHRAGM
GIRDER STOP
(TYP.)
SEE FRAMING PLAN
2'-0"
#4 STIRRUP ~
SPA. @ 1'-0" MAX. (TYP.)
NOTES:
SEE "ANCHOR
DETAIL" THIS SHEET
1"
CLR.
(TYP.)
6"
(TYP.)
GIRDER
1'-1"
(TYP.)
BARRIER REINF. ~
SEE BARRIER SHEETS
FOR DETAILS
EDGE BEAM
SOFFIT
1'-0"
SECTION
INTERSECTION OF
DIAPHRAGM &
BEARING
BEARING PAD
LONGITUDINAL DIMENSIONS
ARE NORMAL TO DIAPHRAGM.
GIRDER STOP NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY.
#7 (TYP.)
DIAPHRAGM NORMAL
TO GIRDER BOTTOM
#4 STIRRUP
(TYP.)
#4 BETWEEN
GIRDERS (TYP.)
#4 AT EXT.
GIRDERS (TYP.)
GRADE
TOP OF GIRDER
TOP OF OVERLAY
END OF GIRDER
6" 6"
BRG.
BRG.
OPTIONAL FIELD
BEND (TYP.)
DIAPHRAGM
DIAPHRAGM
#6 (TYP.)
SEE EXPANSION JOINT, EDGE
BEAM AND ABUTMENT
DETAILS ON BRIDGE SHEETS
2"
CLR.
SPACE @ 1'-0" MAX.
3"
01/01/2015
5.6-A6-8
6"
B
TOP OF OVERLAY
6" HOLE FOR PLACEMENT OF
DIAPHRAGM CONCRETE (TYP.)
GIRDER
1'-6"
FACE OF WEB
ASTM A-307
ANCHOR DETAIL
1" MIN.
6" MAX. THREAD
ELEVATION
FULL DEPTH INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
11" (TYP.)
#4 STIRRUP ~
SPA. @ 1'-0" MAX. (TYP.)
6"
GIRDER
2
#7 FULL WIDTH
(2'-7" MIN. SPLICE ADJACENT
TO GIRDERS WHEN REQUIRED)
2
#4 BETWEEN
GIRDERS (TYP.)
#7 FULL WIDTH
(3'-7" MIN. SPLICE BETWEEN
GIRDERS WHEN REQUIRED)
TOP OF
GIRDER
TOP OF OVERLAY
8"
SECTION
1"
CLR.
WF DECK GIRDER
FULL DEPTH INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
#7
#4 STIRRUP
#4 BETWEEN
GIRDERS (TYP.)
#7
DIAPHRAGM,
NORMAL TO GRADE
NOTES:
6" AT GIRDER
NOTE TO DETAILER:
6/22/2011
5.6-A7-1
SPAN
END 1 TYPE
GIRDER SERIES
END 2 TYPE
LL
LT
P1
(ALONG
GIRDER
GRADE)
@ 28-DAYS
F'C (KSI)
MIN. CONC.
COMP. STRENGTH
@ RELEASE
F'CI (KSI)
P2
NOTES TO DESIGNER:
GIRDER
PLAN
LENGTH
NUMBER OF
STRAIGHT STRANDS
GIRDER SCHEDULE
NUMBER OF
HARPED STRANDS
-
Fo
LOCATION OF
C.G. STRANDS
? TO ?
END 1
? TO ?
END 2
STRAIGHT STR.
TO EXTEND
D @ 120 DAYS
(D120)
-
V1
V2
V3
V4
V5
REINFORCEMENT
DETAILS
V6
GIRDER NOTES
9. FOR DIAPHRAGMS, OMIT HOLES AND PLACE INSERTS ON THE INTERIOR FACE OF EXTERIOR
GIRDERS. PLACE HOLES AND INSERTS PARALLEL TO SKEW. INSERTS SHALL BE 1"
MEADOWBURKE MX-3 HI-TENSILE, 1 x 5 WILLIAMS F22 OPEN FERRULE INSERT, 1 x
4 DAYTON-SUPERIOR F-62 FLARED THIN SLAB FERRULE INSERT OR APPROVED EQUAL.
8. STRUCTURAL STEEL SHAPES AND ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE ASTM A36. THEY SHALL BE
PAINTED WITH A PRIMER COAT IN ACCORDANCE WITH STD. SPEC. 6-07.3(9). WELD TIES
SHALL BE PAINTED WITH A FIELD PRIMER COAT OF AN ORGANIC ZINC PAINT AFTER FIELD
WELDING.
7. FORMS FOR BEARING PAD RECESSES SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED AND FASTENED IN SUCH A
MANNER AS TO NOT CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE GIRDER DURING THE STRAND RELEASE
OPERATION.
6. CAUTION SHALL BE EXERCISED IN HANDLING AND PLACING GIRDERS. ALL GIRDERS SHALL
BE CHECKED BY THE CONTRACTOR TO ENSURE THAT THEY ARE BRACED ADEQUATELY TO
PREVENT TIPPING AND TO CONTROL LATERAL BENDING DURING SHIPPING. ONCE ERECTED,
ALL GIRDERS SHALL BE BRACED LATERALLY TO PREVENT TIPPING UNTIL THE DIAPHRAGMS
ARE CAST AND CURED.
4. THE TOP SURFACE OF THE GIRDER FLANGE SHALL BE FINISHED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
SECTION 6-02.3(25)H OF THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS.
3. CUT ALL STRANDS FLUSH WITH THE GIRDER ENDS AND PAINT WITH AN APPROVED EPOXY
RESIN, EXCEPT FOR EXTENDED STRANDS AS SHOWN.
2. ALL PRETENSIONED STRANDS SHALL BE 0.6" AASHTO M203 GRADE 270 LOW
RELAXATION STRANDS, JACKED TO 202.5 KSI.
BEARING
Fo
1"
CLR.
10"
1'-6"
4"
R=3"
V6
V5 SPA. @ V6
2 G1 #5 & 2
4"
1" DEEP
SHEAR KEYS (TYP.)
SAWTEETH SHOWN BY SHADED AREA.
USE SAWTEETH KEYS FROM BOTTOM
OF BOTTOM FLANGE TO BOTTOM OF
LOWEST HARPED STRAND
GIRDER END
MAX. SLOPE **
END OF
P.S. GIRDER
90
1"
" CHAMFER OR
0.6" HALF ROUND
DRIP GROOVE
3"
ROTATE HOOKS AS
REQ'D. TO ACHIEVE
MIN. COVER
BARRIER REINF.
SEE BARRIER
SHEETS FOR
DETAILS
GIRDER
LEVEL (TYP.)
G7 #3
G2 #5
2'-11"
3'-5"
4'-5"
5'-5"
GIRDER
HEIGHT
W35DG
W41DG
W53DG
W65DG
GIRDER
SERIES
2" CLR.
G4 #4 @ 1'-0" MAX.
(CONT. WITH 2'-0"
MIN. SPLICE TYP.)
G6 W12
45
6" 6"
6"
8"
DIAPH.
2 G2 #5
(TYP.)
#4
2'-1"
SECTION
9"
G7 #3
G5 #4 @ 1'-0" MAX.
(CONT. WITH 2'-0" MIN.
SPLICE TYP.)
SEE KEYWAY
SECTION
G11
1'-6"
G3
G6
FIELD BEND
ALT. SIDES
1'-1"
8"
G7
3"
VARIES
VARIES
11"
G10
1'-11"
G9
VARIES
VARIES
2" CLR.
JOINT
1" CHAMFER
G1 #5
2"
9" 6"
1'-7"
PLUMB
G3
G13 #6
45
(TYP.)
FACE OF
DIAPH. (TYP.)
6"
G5 #4
G4 #4
G1
G2
JOINT
BEARING
SECTION
G8 #4
PLUMB
G3 #4
G12 #6
END TYPE B
G5 #4 @ 1'-0" MAX.
(CONT. WITH 2'-0" MIN.
SPLICE TYP.)
SAWTEETH DETAILS
HARPED
STRANDS
G5 #4
G4 #4
SPA. @
1'-6" MAX.
G7 #3
GIRDER ELEVATION
8"
HARPING POINT
1'-0"
1'-0" SPA.
(TYP.)
V3 SPA. @ V4
2 G2 #5 & 2 G7 #3
V1 SPA.
@ V2
HARPED STRANDS
SPLAYED
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED STRANDS
EXTEND G4 , G5 , G8
AND STRANDS (TYP.)
EXTEND STRAIGHT
STRANDS IDENTIFIED
IN GIRDER SCHEDULE
9"
2 G8 #4 EMBEDED
6'-0" INTO GIRDER
SAWTEETH
END TYPE A
2"
1'-0"
1'-0"
3"
2"
1'-0"
1'-0"
DIAPH.
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
SEE "FRAMING PLAN" FOR LOCATIONS.
1"
6"
3"
2"
3"
6"
4"
1"
4"
PICKUP FORCE
3"
4"
06/22/2011
5.6-A7-2
PLAN LENGTH
(ALONG GIRDER GRADE)
LT
P2
END 2
BEARING
RECESS
TOP OF GIRDER
2
4
6
8
10
11
4 SPA @
2" = 8"
5"
4 SPA @
2" = 8"
6 12 8 10 4
2 20 16 18 14
24 26 22
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED STRANDS
HARPED STRAND
BUNDLES (TYP.)
2"
"
3
5'-0"
STUD
INTERSECTION
WITH BAR
ALTERNATE 1
"
ALTERNATE 1
1"
WELD TIE
SECTION
KEYWAY
SECTION
FOAM BACKER
ROD
FILL KEYWAY
WITH GROUT
" TO "
1" (TYP.)
4" (TYP.)
GIRDER PLAN
"
R
PH
M
AG
2"
"
TYP.
FOAM BACKER
ROD
FILL KEYWAY
WITH GROUT
" TO "
ALTERNATE 2
2"
FILL KEYWAY
WITH GROUT
BAR 1 x 1 x 0'-4
" TO "
ALTERNATE 2
2 x 2 x x 0'-6"
DIA
1'-0"
(TYP.)
BAR 3 x x 0'-6
()
" TO "
FILL KEYWAY
WITH GROUT
2" x 4"
SMOOTH BAR
2"
SPLAY G3 #4 AND
G12 #6 OR G13 #6
END OF WEB
AND BOTTOM
FLANGE
2B (5'-0" MAX)
(TYP.)
END OF TOP
FLANGE
"
1 .
R
CL
GIR.
GIRDER
STRAND PATTERN
AT SPAN
2"
11
21 25 23
13 17 15 19
GIRDER
C.G. TOTAL
STRAIGHT
STRANDS
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED STRANDS
STRAND PATTERN
AT GIRDER END
1
3
5
7
9
2"
GIRDER
4" (MIN.)
LL
AHEAD
ON STATIONING
2" 2"
END 1
2"
P1
2"
(TYP.)
Fo
2 SPA. @
2" = 4"
2"
1"
2" 1"
GIRDER SLOPE
BEARING RECESS
PLAN
90
BEARING RECESS
ELEVATION
LEVEL (AFTER
CASTING DECK)
" EXPANDED
POLYSTYRENE
FOR SKEWS
GREATER THAN 15
" CHAMFER ON
WEB FOR SKEWS
GREATER THAN 15
" EXPANDED
POLYSTYRENE
FOR SKEWS
GREATER THAN 15
" CHAMFER ON
FLANGE FOR SKEWS
GREATER THAN 15
GIRDER
BEARING
RECESS
1"
2"
2"
"
06/22/2011
5.6-A7-3
01/01/2015
5.6-A8-1
SPAN
NUMBER
8.
7.
4'-0"
4'-0"
4'-0"
4'-0"
4'-4"
5'-8"
12"
18"
24"
26"
30"
36"
9"
24.85"
18"
15.7"
15.7"
90'
75'
65'
60'
45'
30'
MAX. SPAN
LENGTH ~
BRG. TO BRG.
DIA.
VOIDS
NUM.
L1
6.
5.
4.
3.
END 1 TYPE
DIAMETER
2.
END 2 TYPE
"A" DIMENSION AT
BEARINGS
1.
NOTES TO DESIGNER:
GIRDER
GIRDER GIRDER
HEIGHT WIDTH
H
W
L2
@ 28-DAYS
F'C (KSI)
-
@ RELEASE
F'CI (KSI)
-
PERMANENT
STRANDS
2
EXTENDED
NUMBER
AND LENGTH
-
PT.
SET SCREED
TO THIS LINE
4 @ 1'-9"
EXTENDED
NUMBER
AND LENGTH
BRG.
PERMANENT
STRANDS
PT.
BRG.
SPAN
4 @ 1'-9" 2 @ 3'-0"
DEBONDED
NUMBER AND
LENGTH
-
TEMPORARY
STRANDS
-
DECK SCREED
CAMBER C
-
LOWER BOUND
@ 40 DAYS
-
UPPER BOUND
@ 120 DAYS
-
BAR SIZE
ZONE 1
LENGTH
-
BAR SIZE
-
ZONE 2
SPACING
-
LENGTH
-
BAR SIZE
ZONE 3
G1
G2
LONGITUDINAL
REINFORCEMENT
SLAB GIRDER
DETAILS 1 OF 4
STRUCTURAL STEEL SHAPES AND ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE ASTM A36, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
THEY SHALL BE PAINTED WITH A PRIMER COAT IN ACCORDANCE WITH STD. SPEC. 6-07.3(9). WELD
TIES SHALL BE PAINTED WITH A FIELD PRIMER COAT OF AN ORGANIC ZINC PAINT AFTER FIELD
WELDING. STAINLESS STEEL SHAPES AND ASSEMBLIES SHALL NOT BE PAINTED.
DEBONDED STRANDS SHALL BE DEBONDED AT EACH GIRDER END FOR THE INDICATED
LENGTH PARALLEL TO THE GIRDER CENTERLINE. DEBONDED STRANDS SHALL NOT BE EXTENDED PAST
GIRDER ENDS. DEBONDED STRANDS SHALL BE SYMMETRICALLY PLACED ABOUT THE GIRDER
CENTERLINE. DEBONDED LENGTHS OF PAIRS OF STRANDS THAT ARE SYMMETRICALLY POSITIONED
ABOUT THE GIRDER CENTERLINE SHALL BE EQUAL.
4.
5.
SPACE EXTENDED STRANDS SYMMETRICALLY AND EVENLY ACROSS GIRDER WIDTH. STAGGER
EXTENDED STRAND LOCATIONS WITH RESPECT TO GIRDERS IN ADJACENT SPANS.
ALL STRANDS SHALL BE 0.6" AASHTO M203 GRADE 270 LOW RELAXATION STRANDS, JACKED TO
202.5 KSI. STRANDS SHALL BE SYMMETRICAL ABOUT THE GIRDER CENTERLINE. EXTERIOR STRANDS
IN EACH ROW SHALL BE FULLY BONDED.
SPACING
TRANSVERSE
REINFORCEMENT
LENGTH
3.
2.
1.
GIRDER NOTES
PERMANENT
STRANDS
2
SPACING
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
PLACE DETAIL ON BRIDGE DECK REINFORCEMENT PLAN.
PLAN
LENGTH
(ALONG
GIRDER
GRADE)
(SEE GIRDER
NOTE 1)
BAR SIZE
GIRDER SCHEDULE
NO. OF
BARS
MIN. CONC.
COMP. STRENGTH
NO. OF
BARS
VOIDS
BAR SIZE
01/01/2015
5.6-A8-2
2" (TYP.)
PLAN
PLAN LENGTH
(ALONG GIRDER GRADE)
WELD TIE
AHEAD ON
STATIONING
3" (TYP.)
WELD TIE
SECTION
DIFFERENTIAL CAMBER
TOLERANCE PER STANDARD
SPECIFICATION 6-02.3(25)I.
"(")
GAP
EXTERIOR EDGE OF
EXTERIOR GIRDER
END 2
ADJACENT GIRDER
L2
ADJACENT GIRDER
JOINT
4"
MIN.
(TYP.)
SPA.
@ 2"
2" 2"
2" N.
)
I
M P.
Y
(T
SPA.
@ 2"
VOID
4"
MIN.
VOID
ROW 2
ROW 1
SLAB GIRDER
DETAILS 2 OF 4
JOINT
CROWN DETAIL
W
(AT TOP OF GIRDER)
(TYP.)
JOINT
ADJACENT
GIRDER (TYP.)
TOP ROW
JOINT
CROWN IN BRIDGE
(SEE LAYOUT FOR LOCATION)
POTENTIAL PRESTRESSING
STRAND LOCATION (TYP.)
"(")
GAP
EXTERIOR EDGE
DETAIL
L 2 x 2 x MIN. x 0'-6
(TYP.)
BAR 1 x 1 x 0'-4
CENTER OVER JOINT WHEN
GIRDERS ARE LEVEL
END 1
WELD TIE
L (TYP.)
3'-0"
(TYP.)
1'-6" MIN.
3'-0" MAX. (TYP.)
L1
GIRDER
VOIDS
G.
BR
VOID
" CHAMFER
AT CORNERS (TYP.)
GIRDER
3"
MIN.
2"
2 SPACES
@ 2" = 4"
01/01/2015
5.6-A8-3
1"
CLR.
END OF GIRDER
1'-4"
SAWTEETH
G1
EXTEND STRAIGHT
STRANDS IDENTIFIED
IN GIRDER SCHEDULE
2"
(TYP.)
6"
(TYP.)
EXTENSION LENGTH
PARALLEL TO GIRDER
EXTEND STRAIGHT
STRANDS IDENTIFIED
IN GIRDER SCHEDULE
END TYPE D
SAWTEETH
6"
MIN.
SECTION
STRAND (TYP.)
4"
END TYPE A
1'-0"
END TYPE B
PARALLEL TO GIRDER
BEARING AT
OF JOINT
1"
1"
1"
10'-0"
BOND TEMPORARY
STRANDS
x 12 x 0'-4
ASTM A 276
GRADE 316
1"
PLAN
TEMPORARY STRANDS
FULLY BONDED
PERMANENT STRAND
3'-0"
TEMPORARY
STRANDS
10'-0"
BOND TEMPORARY
STRANDS
SLAB GIRDER
DETAILS 3 OF 4
SAWTEETH DETAIL
END OF GIRDER
90
1"
GIRDER
01/01/2015
5.6-A8-4
3"
G4 #4
SPA. @ 8" MAX.
3"
1"
CLR.
ZONE 1
G1
ELEVATION
ZONE 3
NORMAL TO GIRDER
PLAN
TRANSVERSE REINFORCEMENT
G5 AND G6 OR 2 G7 AND 2 G8
SEE GIRDER SCHEDULE FOR BAR SIZE AND SPACING
AND LENGTH OF ZONES.
ZONE 2
SPLAY AS SHOWN
10'-0"
(TYP.)
PARALLEL TO END
G4 #4
G3 #4
1'-10"
(TYP.)
G6
CONTINUOUS #4 AT BEND
IN TRAFFIC BARRIER REINF.
(2'-0" MIN. LAP)
G5 AND G6 SHOWN,
2 G7 AND 2 G8 SIMILAR.
2" TO TOP
OF BAR (TYP.)
SECTION
1"
CLR.
G7
2'-0"
MIN. LAP
(TYP.)
G8
SLAB GIRDER
DETAILS 4 OF 4
G5
G6
G5
1"
CLR.
G3 #4
SPACED AT 1'-0" MAX.
9"
(TYP.)
NOTE TO DETAILER:
H6 TIES
SPACED AS SHOWN
2 H2 (TYP.)
H1 STIRR.
GIRDER
2 H5 STIRR. AND
H8 TIE
GIRDER
ELEVATION
GIRDER
SECTION
H1 STIRR. (TYP.)
PIER
4 H3
H4 (TYP.)
H3 (TYP.)
H4
CROSSBEAM
X'-X"
PIER ?
3"
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
WITH ROUGHENED
SURFACE OR SHEAR KEY
FACE OF CROSSBEAM
MEASURED NORMAL
TO PIER
END OF GIRDER
4"
3"
GIRDER
ELEVATION AT TOP
OF OAK BLOCK AT GIRDER
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
SUPERSTRUCTURE
SUBSTRUCTURE
CONCRETE CLASS
4000D
CONCRETE CLASS
4000
1'-0"
10"
X'-X"
H2 (TYP.)
GIRDER
EXTERIOR
GIRDER
9"
X'-X"
INTERIOR
GIRDER (TYP.)
3"
01/01/2015
5.6-A8-5
LEVEL PERPENDICULAR
TO CROSSBEAM
?? #? (TYP.)
H1 STIRR.
H5 STIRR.
?? #? (TYP.)
H8 TIE *
CROSSBEAM
H2 (TYP.)
SLAB GIRDER
FIXED DIAPHRAGM
2.
(TYP.)
H6 TIE (TYP.) *
NOTES:
1.
X'-X"
9"
MIN.
9"
MIN.
SECTION
1'-0"
6" (TYP.)
PIER
DIAPHRAGM
WALL
SECTION
DIAPHRAGM
2
#6
(2'-2" SPLICE
WHEN REQUIRED)
AND
#4
2
#6
(3'-0" SPLICE
WHEN REQUIRED)
SECTION
2"
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
Open Joint
** = 1.5"
** = 2.0"
** = 2.5"
Special design
Insert correct
dimension value
2
#4
(2'-0" SPLICE
WHEN REQUIRED)
ELEVATION
END DIAPHRAGM
3
#4
(2'-0" SPLICE
WHEN REQUIRED)
#4 TIE
ABUTMENT
OPEN
JOINT **
#6
3"
MIN.
SECTION
BEARING
PIER
NOTE:
FULL BEARING OF SLAB UNIT IS
REQUIRED AT EACH ELASTOMERIC
BEARING
ABUTMENT
" CHAMFER
(TYP.)
STOP PLATE ~
SEE "STOP PLATE"
DETAIL THIS SHT. (TYP.)
OPEN
JOINT **
8"
SLAB GIRDER
GROUT PAD
BEARING
PIER
3" 3"
" THICK
GROUT PAD
x 8 x 1'-2
ASTM A276 GRADE 316
STAINLESS STEEL
" RADIUS ~
ALL EDGES
" RADIUS AT
CORNERS (TYP.)
" ELASTOMERIC
BEARING PAD
SLAB GIRDER
END DIAPHRAGM
SECTION
1"
(TYP.)
BEARING AND
PIER
ELASTOMERIC
BEARING PAD
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
Elastomeric bearing pad size
and adequacy to be determined
by the designer.
ABUTMENT
STOP PLATE
Adequacy of stop
plate to be determined
by the designer
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
BRIDGE DECK
REINFORCEMENT (TYP.)
1"
(TYP.)
BEND IN FIELD
135 (TYP.)
8"
SECTION
2'-2"
END OF GIRDER
#6
#4 STIRRUP
#4 (TYP.)
#4 STIRRUP
1'-1"
#4 STIRRUP AND
#4 STIRRUPS,
Bridge length
L 200'
200' < L 300'
300' < L 400'
L > 400'
10"
R
IRDE
AB G
SL
G
ARIN
BE
3"
SPACED AT
1'-0" MAX.
1'-0"
BEARING AND
PIER
9"
X'-X"
X'-X"
NOTE TO DESIGNER:
2'-0" + OPEN JOINT
EEN
BETW S AND
INT
R
UT
JO B GIRDE BLOCKO
E
T
SL A
A
L
P P
O
T
S
1"
01/01/2015
ABUTMENT
"
RECESS
BACK OF
PAVEMENT SEAT
ND
G. A
ER
BR B GIRD
LA
S
EEN
BETW S AND
INT
R
UT
JO B GIRDE BLOCKO
E
T
SLA
A
L
P P
O
T
S
5.6-A8-6
7/8/2011
5.6-A9-1
SPAN
GIRDER SERIES
END 1 TYPE
END 2 TYPE
-
"A" DIMENSION AT
BEARINGS
-
Ld
LL
LT
4.
NOTES TO DESIGNER:
GIRDER
P1
(ALONG
GIRDER
GRADE)
PLAN
LENGTH
@ 28-DAYS
F'C (KSI)
-
NUMBER OF
STRAIGHT STRANDS
-
NUMBER OF
HARPED STRANDS
-
Fo
? TO ?
END 1
? TO ?
END 2
STRAIGHT STR.
TO EXTEND
DECK SCREED
CAMBER C
-
3. FOR END TYPES A, C AND D CUT ALL STRANDS FLUSH WITH THE GIRDER ENDS
AND PAINT WITH AN APPROVED EPOXY RESIN, EXCEPT FOR EXTENDED STRANDS
AS SHOWN. FOR END TYPE B CUT ALL STRANDS 1" BELOW CONCRETE SURFACE
AND GROUT WITH AN APPROVED EPOXY GROUT.
V1
V2
V3
V4
V5
V6
REINFORCEMENT
DETAILS
H1
TUB GIRDER
SCHEDULE AND NOTES
9. FOR DIAPHRAGMS, OMIT HOLES AND PLACE INSERTS ON THE INTERIOR FACE OF
THE EXTERIOR WEB OF EXTERIOR GIRDERS. PLACE HOLES AND INSERTS PARALLEL
TO SKEW. INSERTS SHALL BE 1" MEADOWBURKE MX-3 HI-TENSILE, 1 x 5
WILLIAMS F22 OPEN FERRULE INSERT, 1 x 4 DAYTON-SUPERIOR F-62 FLARED
THIN SLAB FERRULE INSERT OR APPROVED EQUAL.
LOWER BOUND
@ 40 DAYS
GIRDER NOTES
LOCATION OF
C.G. STRANDS
P2
@ RELEASE
F'CI (KSI)
MIN. CONC.
COMP. STRENGTH
NUMBER OF
TEMP. STRANDS
GIRDER SCHEDULE
UPPER BOUND
@ 120 DAYS
Fo
1"
CLR.
SAWTEETH
R=3"
#6 (TYP.)
#5
1" CLR.
(TYP.)
#4
1'-0"
G7 #5
(TYP.)
G3 #4
2 SPA.
(TYP.)
G6 W12
(TYP.)
G2
G9
G10 #4
(TYP.)
SAWTEETH
(HATCHED AREA)
G5
G1 #5
G4 #5
(TYP.)
7" (TYP
.)
G2 OR G9
U54G4
U54G5
U66G4
U66G5
U78G4
U78G5
UF60G4
UF60G5
UF72G4
UF72G5
UF84G4
UF84G5
1'-3"
5"
4'-0"
5'-0"
4'-0"
5'-0"
4'-0"
5'-0"
4'-0"
5'-0"
4'-0"
5'-0"
4'-0"
5'-0"
G11 #4
0"
1'-6"
9"
0"
9"
SEE "STRAND
1'-10"
EXTENSION DETAIL"
1'-10"
0"
Y
1'-6"
X
1'-10"
B2 = 0" FOR
G5
B2 = 2" FOR G5
3"
FIELD BEND
ALT. SIDES
G11
1'-5"
9"
FIELD BEND
ALT. SIDES
G6
TUB GIRDER
DETAILS 1 OF 3
G7
G9
2'-0"
G8
G2
3"
G1
YES
YES
NO
YES
SAWTEETH
6
6
8
8
10
10
7
7
9
9
11
11
NO
NO
D
YES
C
YES
A
B
BEARING
RECESS
END
TYPE
R1
EQUAL SPACES
FOR G5
G1 OR G8
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
TOP
FLANGE
3"
4'-6"
4'-6"
5'-6"
5'-6"
6'-6"
6'-6"
5'-0"
5'-0"
6'-0"
6'-0"
7'-0"
7'-0"
W
GIRDER SOFFIT
WIDTH
H
GIRDER
HEIGHT
ADJUST G4 #5
G8 #4
SHOWN AT END
END TYPE B
6"
3"
** - 8 : 1 MAXIMUM SLOPE FOR EACH HARPED STRAND
MAX. SLOPE **
6"
TYPICAL SECTION
2 G10 #4 WITH
2'-0" MIN. SPLICE
2 G3 #4 WITH
2'-0" MIN. SPLICE
HARPED
STRANDS
2 G7 #5, G8 #4,
G9 #4 & 2 G11 #4
V5 SPA. @ V6
V6
8"
4 G4 #5 WITH
2'-0" MIN. SPLICE
V3 SPA. @ V4
G1 #5, 2 G2 #5,
2 G7 #5 & 2 G11 #4
V1 SPA.
@ V2
HARPED STRANDS
SPLAYED
7"
HARPING POINT
3"
GIRDER ELEVATION
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED STRANDS
MEASURED
ALONG GIRDER
END TYPE A
BRG.
3"-B2
4 G5 #6 - R1 EQUAL SPACES.
EMBED 8'-0" INTO GIRDER.
SPLAY TO CLEAR HARPED STRANDS.
OMIT FOR END TYPE B.
1'-0"+B2
6"
6"
10"
DIAPH.
Ld
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
SEE "FRAMING PLAN" FOR LOCATIONS.
H1
C.G. TOTAL
TEMPORARY STRANDS
H1
2'-0"
4"
1"
PICKUP
FORCE
1"
2"
7/7/2011
5.6-A9-2
LT
END 2
11
5 13 7
15
6"
40 36 38 34
44 42
4 10 2
7 SPA @ 2"
= 1'-2"
16 8 14 6 12
32 24 30 22 28 20 26 18
STRAND PATTERN
AT SPAN
7 SPA @ 2"
= 1'-2"
17 25 19 27 21 29 23 31
33 37 35 39
41 43
STRAND PATTERN
AT GIRDER END
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED STRANDS
4" (MIN.)
TOP OF GIRDER
2"
5"
4 2
8 6
12 10
16 14
20 18
24 22
28 26
32 30
36 34
38
C.G. TOTAL
HARPED STRANDS
HARPED STRAND
BUNDLES (TYP.)
WEB
2"
5"
1 3
5 7
9 11
13 15
17 19
21 23
25 27
29 31
33 35
37
1"
WEB
C.G. TOTAL
STRAIGHT
STRANDS
1"
P2
END 1
LL
P1
P2
AHEAD
ON STATIONING
BOTTOM OF TUB
Fo
GIRDER
V3 SPA. @ V4
SPLAY
ALT. 2
GIRDER END
1'-9"
BOTTOM SLAB
DRAIN HOLE DETAIL
" CIRCULAR
DRIP GROOVE
3" I.D.
ALT. 1
TRANSVERSE REINFORCING
SKEWED ENDS
V1 SPA. @ V2
MATCH SKEW
1"
PLAN
"
ELEVATION
GIRDER SLOPE
BEARING RECESS
BEARING RECESS
90
(TYP.)
BOTTOM OF TUB
LEVEL (AFTER
CASTING DECK)
6"
GIRDER
TUB GIRDER
DETAILS 2 OF 3
" EXPANDED
POLYSTYRENE
FOR SKEWS
GREATER THAN 15
" CHAMFER ON
WEBS FOR SKEWS
GREATER THAN 15
SAWTOOTH DETAILS
END OF
P.S. GIRDER
90
1"
P1
GIR.
2"
(TYP.)
3 SPA.@
2" = 6"
2"
7/8/2011
5.6-A9-3
GIRDER
GIRDER
3'-0"
3'-0"
A
3'-0"
PLAN
POST-TENSIONED TEMPORARY
TOP STRANDS ALTERNATE
3'-0"
PT ANCHOR
PLATE (TYP.)
DEAD END
SEE DETAIL
3'-0" BOND
TEMPORARY STRANDS
10'-0"
BOND TEMPORARY STRANDS
PLAN
PRETENSIONED TEMPORARY
TOP STRANDS ALTERNATE
10'-0"
BOND TEMPORARY STRANDS
SEE DETAIL
LIVE END
GIRDER
SECTION
NORMAL TO
GIRDER
4"
4"
NORMAL TO
GIRDER
TEMPORARY
STRANDS
NORMAL TO
GIRDER
4"
TUB GIRDER
DETAILS 3 OF 3
4"
NORMAL TO
GIRDER
VIEW
G4 #5 (TYP.)
DETAIL
PT ANCHOR PLATE TO BE
DETERMINED BY GIRDER
MANUFACTURER. (TYP.)
TEMPORARY STRAND IN
PLASTIC SLEEVE (TYP.)
GIRDER
2"
TEMPORARY
STRANDS
2"
7/7/2011
5.6-A9-4
4 EQUAL SPACES
WEB
4"
SEE DETAIL A
6
MISCELLANEOUS
DIAPHRAGM DETAILS SHEET
OPEN
JOINT
ABUTMENT
WALL
DIAPHRAGM
OPEN
JOINT
BOND WITH ADHESIVE
6" EACH SIDE
2
#6 FULL WIDTH
(2'-2" SPLICE WHEN REQUIRED)
&
#4 FULL WIDTH
BEARING
" RECESS
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
W/ ROUGHENED SURFACE
2" CHAMFER
BACK OF
PAVEMENT SEAT
2
#4 FULL WIDTH
(2'-0" SPLICE WHEN REQUIRED)
#4 FULL WIDTH
CONSTRUCTION JOINT W/
ROUGHENED SURFACE (TYP.)
PARALLEL
SEE JOINT
FILLER DETAIL
3. END DIAPHRAGM MAY BE CAST ON GRADE. IF SO, THE UPPER LEG OF THE JOINT
FILLER SHALL FORM THE BOTTOM FACE FULL WIDTH.
4. JOINT FILLER TYPE 1 SHALL BE USED TO COVER ALL VERTICAL END DIAPHRAGM JOINTS.
EITHER JOINT FILLER TYPE 1 OR JOINT FILLER TYPE 2 SHALL BE USED TO COVER
ALL HORIZONTAL END DIAPHRAGM JOINTS.
PLAN VIEW
BUTYL RUBBER AT VERTICAL JOINTS
NOTE:
BEARING
"
(TYP.)
WEB
BEARING
GIRDER
ELEVATION
BUTYL RUBBER AT DIAPHRAGM
DIAPHRAGM
# NOTE TO DESIGNER
SEE JOINT
FILLER DETAIL
1'-0"
1'-0"
BRG.
#6
2" CHAMFER
" RECESS
CONSTRUCTION
JOINT WITH
ROUGHENED SURFACE
+ GRADE
TOP OF GIRDER
2'-2"
6"
MAX.
3"
MIN.
BEARING
L200
200<L300
300<L400
L>400
PIER WALL
** = 1.5 IN.
** = 2.0 IN.
** = 2.5 IN.
SPECIAL DESIGN
JOINT
BEARING PAD
- GRADE
TOP OF GIRDER
"A" DIM. @
GIRDER
GIRDER SEAT
& RECESS - LEVEL
** OPEN JOINT
10" 10"
2'-4"
SEE JOINT
FILLER DETAIL
10"
BEARING PAD
45 FILLET
TOP OF GIRDER
SLAB REINF.(TYP.)
GIRDER SEAT
& RECESS - LEVEL
BRG.
SECTION
BACK OF
PAVEMENT SEAT
SEE JOINT
FILLER DETAIL
#6
#4 STIRRUP @ 1'-3"
#4 STIRRUP @ 1'-3"
#4 STIRRUP @ 1'-3"
#4 (TYP.)
#4 (TYP.)
2" CHAMFER
#4 TIES @ 1'-3"
"A" DIM. @
GIRDER
PIER WALL
1'-0"
** OPEN JOINT
10" 10"
2'-4"
3"
MIN.
6"
MAX.
2'-2"
10"
1'-1"
2"
4'-2"
BEND IN FIELD
135(TYP.)
1'-1"
2
#6 FULL WIDTH
(2'-7" SPLICE WHEN
REQUIRED)
4'-2"
#4 TIES,
#4 STIRRUPS @ 1'-3"
#4,
#4 STIRRUPS @ 1'-3"
1'-0"
3"
1'-0"
6/23/2011
5.6-A9-5
H3 #5
PIER
SKEWED
TEMPORARY
SUPPORT (TYP.)
1"
(TYP.)
6"
(TYP.)
8" (TYP.)
EB
TEMPORARY FALSEWORK
SUPPORT (TYP.)
EDGE OF CROSSBEAM
CONSTRUCTION JOINT W/
ROUGHENED SURFACE
TEMPORARY
FALSEWORK
SUPPORT (TYP.)
BRG. ~ PIER
ELEVATION
STRAIGHT STRANDS
PRESTRESSED TRAPEZOIDAL
TUB GIRDER
H1 #5 (TYP.)
VARIES
H3 #5
1"
MIN.
END OF TRAPEZOIDAL
TUB GIRDER
4
5
6
2
3
CONSTRUCTION
SEQUENCE
DETAIL
PIER
EDGE OF WEB
7"
(TYP.)
FACE OF CROSSBEAM
TOP OF
TRAPEZOIDAL
TUB GIRDER
INTERIOR WEB
45
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
W/ ROUGHENED SURFACE
NO SKEW
WIDTH OF
BOTTOM FLANGE
EXTERIOR WEB
PLAN
H2 #5 (TYP.)
H1 #5 (TYP.)
HARPED
STRANDS
ELASTOMERIC
BEARING PAD
EDGE OF WEB
1"
(TYP.)
IN
OR
2'-6"
MIN.
"A"
DIMENSION
SUPERSTRUCTURE
SUBSTRUCTURE
CLASS 4000D
CONCRETE
TOP OF
CROSSBEAM
REINFORCING
COLUMN
REINF. (TYP.)
H3 #5
H2 #6
TUB GIRDER
RAISED CROSSBEAM DETAILS
6" MIN.
(TYP.)
1" CLR.
H4 #5
1" CLR.
CONSTR. JT. W/
ROUGHENED
SURFACE
2'-6"
MIN.
PIER
SECTION
2'-6"
MIN.
3" GAP
IN SPIRAL
CONTINUITY
CONSTR. JOINT
W/ROUGHENED
SURFACE
VARIES
H1 #5 @ 1'-0" MAX.
SECTION
BOTTOM OF
CROSSBEAM
REINFORCING
H1 #5
TOP OF
CROSSBEAM
REINFORCING
COLUMN
REINF. (TYP.)
BOTTOM OF
CROSSBEAM
REINFORCING
1'-6"
SEE DETAIL
CLASS
4000 CONC.
TE
IN
1'-6"
(TYP.)
RI
TE
1'-6"
EB
W
VARIES
OR
RI
**
7/20/2011
5.6-A9-6
7/20/2011
5.6-A9-7
4 EQUAL SPACES
OPEN
JOINT
ABUTMENT
BEARING
SEE JOINT
FILLER DETAIL
3. END DIAPHRAGM MAY BE CAST ON GRADE. IF SO, THE UPPER LEG OF THE JOINT
FILLER SHALL FORM THE BOTTOM FACE FULL WIDTH.
4. JOINT FILLER TYPE 1 SHALL BE USED TO COVER ALL VERTICAL END DIAPHRAGM JOINTS.
EITHER JOINT FILLER TYPE 1 OR JOINT FILLER TYPE 2 SHALL BE USED TO COVER
ALL HORIZONTAL END DIAPHRAGM JOINTS.
PLAN VIEW
BUTYL RUBBER AT VERTICAL JOINTS
WALL
OPEN
JOINT
" RECESS
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
W/ ROUGHENED SURFACE
2" CHAMFER
BACK OF
PAVEMENT SEAT
2
#4 FULL WIDTH
(2'-0" SPLICE WHEN REQUIRED)
2
#6 FULL WIDTH
(2'-2" SPLICE WHEN REQUIRED)
&
#4 FULL WIDTH
DIAPHRAGM
#4 FULL WIDTH
CONSTRUCTION JOINT W/
ROUGHENED SURFACE (TYP.)
PARALLEL
ELEVATION
BUTYL RUBBER AT DIAPHRAGM
"
(TYP.)
WEB
BEARING
NOTE:
4"
DIAPHRAGM
BEARING
GIRDER
SEE DETAIL G
MISCELLANEOUS
DIAPHRAGM DETAILS SHEET
WEB
# NOTE TO DESIGNER
SEE JOINT
FILLER DETAIL
1'-0"
1'-0"
BRG.
#6
2" CHAMFER
" RECESS
2'-2"
6"
MAX.
3"
MIN.
BEARING
L200
200<L300
300<L400
L>400
BRIDGE LENGTH
** = 1.5 IN.
** = 2.0 IN.
** = 2.5 IN.
SPECIAL DESIGN
JOINT
*
TO BE INCREASED AS NECESSARY
BEARING PAD
- GRADE
TOP OF GIRDER
"A" DIM. @
GIRDER
PIER WALL
GIRDER SEAT
& RECESS - LEVEL
* *
10" 10"
2'-4"
SEE JOINT
FILLER DETAIL
10"
BEARING PAD
45 FILLET
TOP OF GIRDER
SLAB REINF.(TYP.)
GIRDER SEAT
& RECESS - LEVEL
BRG.
SECTION
BACK OF
PAVEMENT SEAT
CONSTRUCTION
JOINT WITH
ROUGHENED SURFACE
+ GRADE
TOP OF GIRDER
"A" DIM. @
GIRDER
SEE JOINT
FILLER DETAIL
#6
#4 STIRRUP @ 1'-3"
#4 STIRRUP @ 1'-3"
#4 STIRRUP @ 1'-3"
#4 (TYP.)
#4 (TYP.)
2" CHAMFER
#4 TIES @ 1'-3"
PIER WALL
1'-0"
* *
10" 10"
2'-4"
3"
MIN.
6"
MAX.
2'-2"
10"
1'-1"
2"
4'-2"
BEND IN FIELD
135(TYP.)
1'-0"
2
#6 FULL WIDTH
(2'-7" SPLICE WHEN
REQUIRED)
1'-1"
#4 TIES,
#4 STIRRUPS @ 1'-3"
#4,
#4 STIRRUPS @ 1'-3"
4'-2"
3"
1'-0"
8" (TYP.)
PIER
TEMPORARY FALSEWORK
SUPPORT (TYP.)
EDGE OF CROSSBEAM
CONSTRUCTION JOINT W/
ROUGHENED SURFACE
PRESTRESSED TRAPEZOIDAL
TUB GIRDER
TEMPORARY
FALSEWORK
SUPPORT (TYP.)
BRG. ~ PIER
ELEVATION
STRAIGHT STRANDS
HARPED
STRANDS
PLAN
H1 #5 (TYP.)
VARIES
H3 #5
1"
MIN.
END OF TRAPEZOIDAL
TUB GIRDER
4
5
6
2
3
CONSTRUCTION
SEQUENCE
DETAIL
PIER
EDGE OF WEB
7"
(TYP.)
FACE OF CROSSBEAM
TOP OF
TRAPEZOIDAL
TUB GIRDER
INTERIOR WEB
45
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
W/ ROUGHENED SURFACE
NO SKEW
TEMPORARY
SUPPORT (TYP.)
1"
(TYP.)
6"
(TYP.)
SKEWED
H2 #5 (TYP.)
H1 #5 (TYP.)
WIDTH OF
BOTTOM FLANGE
EXTERIOR WEB
1"
(TYP.)
H3 #5
ELASTOMERIC
BEARING PAD
EDGE OF WEB
EB
W
2'-6"
MIN.
"A"
DIMENSION
SUPERSTRUCTURE
SUBSTRUCTURE
CLASS 4000D
CONCRETE
TOP OF
CROSSBEAM
REINFORCING
COLUMN
REINF. (TYP.)
H2 #6
1" CLR.
H4 #5
1" CLR.
H3 #5
CONSTR. JT. W/
ROUGHENED SURFACE
2'-6"
MIN.
PIER
SECTION
2'-6"
MIN.
3" GAP
IN SPIRAL
CONTINUITY
CONSTR. JOINT
W/ROUGHENED
SURFACE
VARIES
H1 #5 @ 1'-0" MAX.
SECTION
BOTTOM OF
CROSSBEAM
REINFORCING
H1 #5
TOP OF
CROSSBEAM
REINFORCING
COLUMN
REINF. (TYP.)
BOTTOM OF
CROSSBEAM
REINFORCING
1'-6"
SEE DETAIL
CLASS
4000 CONC.
1'-6"
(TYP.)
OR
RI
TE
IN
6" MIN.
(TYP.)
1'-6"
EB
W
VARIES
OR
RI
TE
IN
**
7/20/2011
5.6-A9-8
7/20/2011
1" MIN.
1" MAX. (TYP.)
SECTION
BEARING
GROUT PAD
NOTES:
GIRDER STOP
ELASTOMERIC BEARING
PAD (SEE DETAIL)
BEARING
SKEW
ANGLE
G
IN ER
AR PI
BE NG
O
AL
9"
MIN.
90
1" AT BEARING
LEVEL
" RECESS AT
BEARING
BEARING
BEARING
SKEW ANGLE
I NG R
AR PIE
BE NG
O
AL
"
RECESS
5.6-A9-9
14 GAGE (0.0747")
SHIM (TYP.)
SECTION
IN
IN
UNLOADED HEIGHT
LOADED HEIGHT (DL)
TUB GIRDER
BEARING DETAILS
165 PSI
KIPS
SHEAR MODULUS
KIPS
" INNER
LAYER (TYP.)
" OUTER
LAYER (TYP.)
7/20/2011
5.6-A10-1
8'-0" MAXIMUM
3"
PRETENSIONING STRAND
3"
SEE DETAIL
3"
PLAN
SIP DECK PANEL
P3 #4
BOTTOM
P2 #4 LIFTING
BAR (TYP.)
SEE DETAIL
PRETENSIONING
STRAND (TYP.)
3" (TYP.)
3"
P2 #4 LIFTING
BAR (TYP.)
P3 #4
BOTTOM
6"
7"
W74G
2"
2"
PT TUBS
6"
WF GIRDERS
"E"
GIRDER SERIES
1" MAX.
"E"
2"
1"
DETAIL
3"
1"
NOTES:
WEB REINFORCEMENT
HANGER INSERT *
DECK PANEL
" OR "
JACKING FORCE
PER STRAND
(KIPS)
STRANDS
DIAMETER
(IN)
STAY-IN-PLACE (SIP)
DECK PANEL DETAILS
@ 28 DAYS @ RELEASE
F'C (KSI)
F'CI (KSI)
MIN. CONC.
COMP. STRENGTH
NOTES TO DESIGNERS:
# Provide enough deck panel overlap on girder flange to accommodate
fabrication tolerances for the girder and deck panel, while still
maintaining a sufficient bearing seat. The girder flange and deck
panel shall be checked for structural adequacy.
REINFORCING
DETAIL
PRETENSIONING
STRAND
2. LOOSEN THE LEVELING BOLT BY TWO TURNS AFTER THE GROUT HAS REACHED
THE DESIGN STRENGTH SPECIFIED IN SECTION 9-20.3(2). LEVELING BOLT SHALL
BE GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH AASHTO M232.
1. PRETENSIONING STRANDS, LEVELING BOLTS AND GROUT FOR GROUT PAD UNDER
SIP DECK PANELS SHALL BE AS SPECIFIED IN THE SPECIAL PROVISIONS.
CLOSED-CELL FOAM
MATCHING CONCRETE COLOR.
SECURE WITH ADHESIVE.
SEE NOTE 5. (TYP.)
BEND IN FIELD
100 MIN.
" CHAMFER
ALL 4 SIDES (TYP.)
DETAIL
SECTION
P1 #5
GIRDER TOP
FLANGE (TYP.)
SEE DETAIL
R = 3" MIN.
(TYP.)
SECTION
P3 #4
P1 #5 (TYP.)
??
1'-3"
(TYP.)
PRETENSIONING
STRANDS
5.9-A1-1
OF DUCTS
E1
1'-0"
1'-0"
CLOSURE
L/2
END OF
PRECAST
SEGMENTS
4" HEAT
SHRINK SLEEVE
1'-6"
3"
GIRDER
GIRDER
CLOSURE
NUMBER
OF
STRANDS
JACKING
AFTER
SEATING
TOTAL
PRESTRESS
LOSS (KSI)
POST-TENSIONING TABLE
3. THE DESIGN IS BASED ON [" OR 0.6"] LOW RELAXATION STRANDS WITH AN ANCHOR
SET OF ", A CURVATURE FRICTION COEFFICIENT, = 0.20 AND A WOBBLE FRICTION
COEFFICIENT, k = 0.0002/FT. THE ACTUAL ANCHOR SET AND JACKING FORCE USED BY
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE SPECIFIED IN THE SHOP PLANS AND INCLUDED IN THE
TRANSFER FORCE CALCULATIONS.
2. THE MAXIMUM OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF THE DUCT SHALL BE ??? INCHES. THE AREA OF
THE DUCT SHALL BE AT LEAST 2.5 TIMES THE NET AREA OF THE PRESTRESSING STEEL
IN THE DUCT.
2"
2'-0" CLOSURE
E2 (IN.)
E3 (IN.)
JACKING
FORCE (KIPS)
TEMPORARY STRANDS
NUMBER OF
STRANDS
E1 (IN.)
2 G8 #6
2 G5 #5
(TYP.)
6 G4 #5
2 G2 #5, G3 #5,
2 G7 #3 ~ 5 SPA.
@ 4" = 1'-8"
2"
CLOSURE DETAIL
POST-TENSIONING NOTES
PARABOLIC CURVE
BETWEEN CONTROL POINTS
PRECAST MID-SEGMENT
C.G. OF TOTAL
POST-TENSIONING
STRANDS
L2/2
SPAN
3"
POST-TENSIONING
STRAND PATTERN AT SPAN
GIRDER
DIMENSION SHOWN
ON POST-TENSIONING
PROFILE
C.G. OF
STRANDS
E2
DUCTS
BRG.
"
6"
L1
6"
6"
6" MIN.
E3
G8 #6
SAWTEETH
6 G4 #5
L (TYP.)
4'-6"
6"
G9 #5
4'-6"
SPLAY G3
AND 2 G7
GIRDER
10 SPA. @
6" = 5'-0"
6 SPA. @
3"= 1'-6"
#5, G3 #5 & 2 G7 #3
SPA. @ 1'-0"
SECTION
9"
2 G2
3"
TRANSVERSE REINFORCING
AT SKEWED ENDS
3'-0"
2 G9 #5
90 10
G5 #5
8 SPA. @ 6"
9 SPA. @ 3"
2 G1 #5, G3 #5 & 2 G7 #3
3'-0"
3"
3"
3"
6"
TYPICAL ELEVATION
AT END SEGMENT
EXTEND STRAIGHT
STRANDS (1) THROUGH (8)
GIR.
2'-0"
FIELD BENDING
REQUIRED TO OBTAIN
1" CONCRETE COVER
AT PAVEMENT SEAT.
4"
1'-2"
1'-4"
VIEW
4"
EXTEND STRAIGHT
STRANDS (1)
THROUGH (8)
Y
(TYP.)
X (TYP.)
SAWTEETH
3"
6"
G8 #6
(TYP.)
G7 #3
(TYP.)
G5 #5
(TYP.)
G9 #5
(TYP.)
1" CHAMFER
(TYP.)
3'-4"
FORM
HANGERS
7"
6"
MIN.
G4 #5
(TYP.)
G8 #6
(TYP.)
G7 #3
(TYP.)
G5 #5
(TYP.)
GIRDER
SECTION
3"
1'-4"
G2 #5
3"
G3 #5
4'-2"
VIEW
SAWTEETH SHOWN
BY HATCHED AREA
3. FOR END TYPES A, C, D AND E CUT ALL STRANDS FLUSH WITH THE GIRDER
ENDS AND PAINT WITH AN APPROVED EPOXY RESIN, EXCEPT FOR EXTENDED
STRANDS AS SHOWN. FOR END TYPE B CUT ALL STRANDS 1" BELOW
CONCRETE SURFACE AND GROUT WITH AN APPROVED EPOXY GROUT.
G6 W12
TIES (TYP.)
G1 #5
PRE-TENSIONING NOTES
PLAN LENGTH SHALL BE INCREASED AS NECESSARY TO COMPENSATE FOR
SHORTENING DUE TO PRESTRESS AND SHRINKAGE.
1.
G3 #5
2 G5 #5
ADJUST LOCATION TO
CLEAR P.T. DUCTS
SECTION C
1'-3"
GIRDER
6"
6"+B1
G2 #5
(TYP.)
TEMPORARY
STRANDS (TYP.)
G4 #5
(TYP.)
2"+B1
6" RECESS
4"
4"
SAWTEETH SHOWN
BY HATCHED AREA.
4'-0"
PICKUP FORCE
1'-3"
1" CLR.
(TYP.)
PICKUP FORCE
3"
6'-2"
2 G5 #5 & 2 G9 #5
ADJUST LOCATION TO
CLEAR P.T. DUCTS
1'-0"
1'-0"
3"
3"
4"
3"
5"
12/02/2014
5.9-A1-2
5.9-A1-3
1'-6"
GIRDER END
GIR.
" RECESS
PLAN
BRG. RECESS
ELEVATION
ALTERNATE #2
B1 = 1"( G4 , G8 )
B1 = 0" ( G4 , G8 )
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
GIRDER
LOCATION
STIRRUPS
END STIRRUPS
TOP FLANGE
LONGIT. FULL LENGTH
LONGIT.
END TIES
BOT. FLANGE TIES
LONGIT.
END LONGIT.
BOT. FLANGE TIES
BOT. FLANGE TIES
SIZE
5
5
5
5
5
W12
3
6
5
3
3
STR.
STR.
STR.
STR.
10'-0"
1'-6"
GIRDER END
GIR.
BOTTOM FLANGE
LEVEL (AFTER
CASTING SLAB)
BRG.
ALTERNATE #1
STEEL ANCHOR
x 4 x 0'-4
WITH " HOLE
GIRDER
GIR.
GIRDER DEPTH
+ 2" + "A"
6"
G2
G1
#1
4"
GIRDER
#4
2"
END VIEW
#3
4"
4"
#6
NO
D
E
8"
G6
ALT. SIDES
2'-0"
G7
R=2"
3"
1'-10"
NO
NO
1'-10"
YES
B
"L" Abutment
Hinge Diaph. @ Intermediate Pier
X
YES
A
End Diaph. on Girder
1'-10"
0"
1'-10"
BEARING
RECESS
END
TYPE
Diaphragm Type
ADJUST G4 BARS TO
CLEAR THE STEEL PLATE
G11
G12
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
SAWTEETH
1'-7"
9"
9"
0"
9"
3'-2"
1'-6"
1'-6"
0"
1'-6"
#2
PT ANCHOR PLATE TO BE
INSTALLED PERPENDICULAR
TO TOP OF GIRDER
2 ~ #5 - TOP AND
BOTTOM OF STUDS
1 x 3" (TYP.)
#5
GIRDER
PLAN
10"
1"
"
6"
3"
3"
5.9-A1-4
3"
D
2
6 SPA. @
3"= 1'-6"
1'-0"
GIRDER ELEVATION
MID-SEGMENT
4"
4"
SPA. @ 1'-0"
2 G2 #5, G3 #5 & 2 G7 #3
9"
ELEVATION
MID-SEGMENT REINFORCING
C.G. TOTAL
STRAIGHT STRANDS
9"
10 SPA. @ 6" = 5'-0"
90 10
SAWTEETH
6 G4 #5
E
2
INTER.
DIAPHR.
3'-6"
PICKUP FORCE
GIRDER &
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
6 SPA. @
3"= 1'-6"
PICKUP
FORCE
Y (TYP.)
X (TYP.)
3"
E
2
8"
INSERTS ON THE INTERIOR FACE
OF EXTERIOR GIRDERS (TYP.)
INTERMEDIATE
DIAPHRAGM
10"
2 G5 #5 - ADJUST
LOCATION TO CLEAR
P.T. DUCTS (TYP.)
EXTEND STRAIGHT STRANDS
(9) THROUGH(16).
Z
(TYP.)
5.9-A1-5
SPAN
MINIMUM CONCRETE
COMPR. STRENGTH
PIER
2
(DEG.)
1
(DEG.)
(ALONG
GIRDER GRADE)
P1
PLAN
LENGTH
END SEGMENT 1
END 2
P2
2"
E
NO. OF
STRANDS
3"
26 22 24 8
16 10 14 4
2 28 20
6 18 12
2 26 32 24 30 22 28 8
(KIPS)
C.G.
STRANDS
1
(DEG.)
2
(DEG.)
(ALONG
GIRDER GRADE)
(KIPS)
JACKING
FORCE
E
C.G.
STRANDS
STRAIGHT
NO. OF
STRANDS
NOTE:
Dimensions shall be shown in Imperial
units to the nearest th inch.
PLAN
LENGTH
MID-SEGMENT
GIRDER SCHEDULE
1
(DEG.)
2"
6 14 20 12 18 10 16 4
7 SPA @ 2"
= 1'-2"
9 17 11 19 13 5
7 27 21 29 23 31 25
3 15
STRAND PATTERN
PRECAST MID-SEGMENTS
JACKING
FORCE
STRAIGHT
4"
11 17
19 27 1
C.G. TOTAL
STRAIGHT
STRANDS
STRAND PATTERN
PRECAST END SEGMENTS
2"
GIRDER PLAN
@ FINAL
F'C (KSI)
3 13 9 15
END 1 TYPE
END 1
END 1 TYPE
7 23 21 25
D @ 40 DAYS
PLAN LENGTH
ALONG GIRDER GRADE
@ RELEASE
F'CI (KSI)
END 2 TYPE
C.G. TOTAL
STRAIGHT
STRANDS
P1
GIRDER
BRG. RECESS
END 1 TYPE
BRG. RECESS
END 2 TYPE
2"
GIRDER
END 2 TYPE
**
** Designer to determine
number and length of
debonded strands.
2
(DEG.)
1"
P2
NO. OF
STRANDS
(KIPS)
JACKING
FORCE
STRAIGHT
SPLICED GIRDER
DETAILS 5 OF 5
(ALONG
GIRDER GRADE)
PLAN
LENGTH
END SEGMENT 2
C.G.
STRANDS
SAWTEETH DETAIL
90
END OF
P.T. GIRDER
1'-9"
PVC TUBE TO
PREVENT STRAND BOND
END OF PRECAST
SEGMENT
1"
GIRDER
AHEAD
ON STATIONING
D @ 40 DAYS
5.9-A2-1
SHEET
JOB NO.
SR
OF DUCTS
E1
1'-0"
L/2
1'-0"
CLOSURE
END OF
PRECAST
SEGMENTS
4" HEAT
SHRINK SLEEVE
1'-6"
3"
GIRDER
GIRDER
CLOSURE
NUMBER
OF
STRANDS
JACKING
AFTER
SEATING
TOTAL
PRESTRESS
LOSS (KSI)
POST-TENSIONING TABLE
3. THE DESIGN IS BASED ON [" OR 0.6"] LOW RELAXATION STRANDS WITH AN ANCHOR
SET OF ", A CURVATURE FRICTION COEFFICIENT, = 0.20 AND A WOBBLE FRICTION
COEFFICIENT, k = 0.0002/FT. THE ACTUAL ANCHOR SET AND JACKING FORCE USED BY
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE SPECIFIED IN THE SHOP PLANS AND INCLUDED IN THE
TRANSFER FORCE CALCULATIONS.
2. THE MAXIMUM OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF THE DUCT SHALL BE ??? INCHES. THE AREA OF
THE DUCT SHALL BE AT LEAST 2.5 TIMES THE NET AREA OF THE PRESTRESSING STEEL
IN THE DUCT.
2'-0" CLOSURE
E2 (IN.)
E3 (IN.)
NUMBER OF
STRANDS
JACKING
FORCE (KIPS)
TEMPORARY STRANDS
2 G8 #6
2 G5 #5
(TYP.)
6 G4 #5
E1 (IN.)
2"
2 G2 #5, G3 #5,
2 G7 #3 ~ 5 SPA.
@ 4" = 1'-8"
2"
CLOSURE DETAIL
POST-TENSIONING NOTES
PARABOLIC CURVE
BETWEEN CONTROL POINTS
PRECAST MID-SEGMENT
C.G. OF TOTAL
POST-TENSIONING
STRANDS
L2/2
SPAN
3"
POST-TENSIONING
STRAND PATTERN AT SPAN
GIRDER
DIMENSION SHOWN
ON POST-TENSIONING
PROFILE
C.G. OF
STRANDS
E2
DUCTS
BRG.
"
6"
L1
6"
6"
6" MIN.
E3
2 G8 #6
SAWTEETH
6 G4 #5
L (TYP.)
4'-6"
6"
G9 #5
10 SPA. @
6" = 5'-0"
6 SPA. @
3"= 1'-6"
#5, G3 #5 & 2 G7 #3
SPA. @ 1'-0"
2 G2
SECTION
9"
4'-6"
SPLAY G3
AND 2 G7
GIRDER
3"
EXTEND STRAIGHT
STRANDS (1)
THROUGH (8)
PICKUP FORCE
1'-4"
1'-2"
SAWTEETH SHOWN
BY HATCHED AREA.
VIEW
4"
G4 #5
(TYP.)
2"+B1
1'-3"
4"
SAWTEETH
6"
6"
GIRDER
Y
(TYP.)
X (TYP.)
SECTION
6"+B1
6" RECESS
G2 #5
(TYP.)
TEMPORARY
STRANDS (TYP.)
4"
3"
TRANSVERSE REINFORCING
AT SKEWED ENDS
3'-0"
2 G9 #5
90 10
G5 #5
8 SPA. @ 6"
9 SPA. @ 3"
2 G1 #5, G3 #5 & 2 G7 #3
3'-0"
3"
3"
3"
6"
TYPICAL ELEVATION
AT END SEGMENT
EXTEND STRAIGHT
STRANDS (1) THROUGH (8)
2'-0"
2 G5 #5 AND 2 G9 #5
ADJUST LOCATION
TO CLEAR P.T. DUCTS
GIR.
Z
(TYP.)
4"
5'-0"
G8 #6
(TYP.)
G7 #3
(TYP.)
G5 #5
(TYP.)
G9 #5
(TYP.)
1" CHAMFER
(TYP.)
3"
1'-4"
#5
3'-4"
VIEW
SAWTEETH SHOWN
BY HATCHED AREA.
G8 #6
(TYP.)
G7 #3
(TYP.)
G5 #5 (TYP.)
FORM
HANGERS
6"
MIN.
G4 #5
(TYP.)
7"
GIRDER
SECTION
G2
3"
G3 #5
4'-2"
3. FOR END TYPES A, C, D AND E CUT ALL STRANDS FLUSH WITH THE GIRDER
ENDS AND PAINT WITH AN APPROVED EPOXY RESIN, EXCEPT FOR EXTENDED
STRANDS AS SHOWN. FOR END TYPE B CUT ALL STRANDS 1" BELOW
CONCRETE SURFACE AND GROUT WITH AN APPROVED EPOXY GROUT.
G6 W12
TIES (TYP.)
G1 #5
PRE-TENSIONING NOTES
PLAN LENGTH SHALL BE INCREASED AS NECESSARY TO COMPENSATE FOR
SHORTENING DUE TO PRESTRESS AND SHRINKAGE.
1.
G3 #5
2 G5 #5
ADJUST LOCATION TO
CLEAR P.T. DUCTS
1" CLR.
(TYP.)
FIELD BENDING
REQUIRED TO OBTAIN
1" CONCRETE COVER
AT PAVEMENT SEAT.
1'-0"
1'-0"
3"
PICKUP FORCE
6'-10"
1'-3"
3"
3"
4"
3"
5"
11/15/2013
5.9-A2-2
5.9-A2-4
SAWTEETH
6 G4 #5
3"
E
2
D
2
5"
1'-1"
SPA. @ 1'-0"
2 G2 #5, G3 #5 & 2 G7 #3
9"
ELEVATION
MID-SEGMENT REINFORCING
C.G. TOTAL
STRAIGHT STRANDS
9"
6 SPA. @
3"= 1'-6"
GIRDER ELEVATION
MID-SEGMENT
5"
* OMIT HOLES AND PLACE INSERTS ON THE INTERIOR FACE OF EXTERIOR
GIRDERS. PLACE HOLES AND INSERTS PARALLEL TO SKEW. INSERTS SHALL BE
1" BURKE HI-TENSILE, LANCASTER MALLEABLE, DAYTON-SUPERIOR F-62
FLARED THIN SLAB (1" x 4") FERRULE INSERT OR APPROVED EQUAL. (TYP.)
90 10
6 SPA. @
3"= 1'-6"
INTER.
DIAPHR.
E
2
Y (TYP.)
X (TYP.)
3"
PICKUP
FORCE
8"
INSERTS ON THE INTERIOR FACE
OF EXTERIOR GIRDERS (TYP.)
INTERMEDIATE
DIAPHRAGM
11"
GIRDER &
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
3'-9"
PICKUP FORCE
Z
(TYP.)
2 G5 #5 - ADJUST
LOCATION TO CLEAR
P.T. DUCTS (TYP.)
5.9-A3-1
SHEET
JOB NO.
SR
"
E1
DIMENSION SHOWN
ON POST-TENSIONING
PROFILE
C.G. OF
STRANDS
DUCTS
POST-TENSIONING
STRAND PATTERN AT SPAN
GIRDER
1'-0"
1'-0"
L/2
CLOSURE
END OF
PRECAST
SEGMENTS
4" HEAT
SHRINK SLEEVE
1'-6"
3"
GIRDER
GIRDER
CLOSURE
JACKING
AFTER
SEATING
TOTAL
PRESTRESS
LOSS (KSI)
3. THE DESIGN IS BASED ON [" OR 0.6"] LOW RELAXATION STRANDS WITH AN ANCHOR
SET OF ", A CURVATURE FRICTION COEFFICIENT, = 0.20 AND A WOBBLE FRICTION
COEFFICIENT, k = 0.0002/FT. THE ACTUAL ANCHOR SET AND JACKING FORCE USED BY
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE SPECIFIED IN THE SHOP PLANS AND INCLUDED IN THE
TRANSFER FORCE CALCULATIONS.
2. THE MAXIMUM OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF THE DUCT SHALL BE ??? INCHES. THE AREA OF
THE DUCT SHALL BE AT LEAST 2.5 TIMES THE NET AREA OF THE PRESTRESSING STEEL
IN THE DUCT.
2'-0" CLOSURE
E2 (IN.)
E3 (IN.)
NUMBER OF
STRANDS
JACKING
FORCE (KIPS)
TEMPORARY STRANDS
2 G8 #6
2 G5 #5
(TYP.)
6 G4 #5
E1 (IN.)
2"
2 G2 #5, G3 #5,
2 G7 #3 ~ 5 SPA.
@ 4" = 1'-8"
2"
CLOSURE DETAIL
POST-TENSIONING NOTES
NUMBER
OF
STRANDS
SPAN
PARABOLIC CURVE
BETWEEN CONTROL POINTS
POST-TENSIONING TABLE
PRECAST MID-SEGMENT
C.G. OF TOTAL
POST-TENSIONING
STRANDS
L2/2
E2
3"
OF DUCTS
BRG.
6"
L1
6"
6"
6" MIN.
E3
5.9-A3-2
G5 #5 AND 2 G9 #5
ADJUST LOCATION
TO CLEAR P.T. DUCTS
SAWTEETH
2 G8 #6
3"
3"
3"
4'-6"
6"
G9 #5
3'-0"
4'-6"
SPLAY G3
AND 2 G7
2 G2
10 SPA. @
6" = 5'-0"
6 SPA. @
3"= 1'-6"
#5, G3 #5 & 2 G7 #3
SPA. @ 1'-0"
SECTION
9"
EXTEND STRAIGHT
STRANDS (1) THROUGH (8)
PICKUP FORCE
3"
1'-4"
1'-2"
SAWTEETH SHOWN
BY HATCHED AREA.
VIEW
4"
G4 #5
(TYP.)
2"+B1
SAWTEETH
6"
GIRDER
6"
SECTION
6"+B1
1'-3"
4"
Y (TYP.)
G2 #5
(TYP.)
6" RECESS
E
X (TYP.)
TEMPORARY
STRANDS (TYP.)
4"
3"
GIRDER
TRANSVERSE REINFORCING
AT SKEWED ENDS
G5 #5
8 SPA. @ 6"
9 SPA. @ 3"
2 G1 #5, G3 #5 & 2 G7 #3
3'-0"
2 G9 #5
PICKUP FORCE
TYPICAL ELEVATION
AT END SEGMENT
L (TYP.)
90 10
Z
(TYP.)
6 G4 #5
6"
PRE-TENSIONING NOTES
PLAN LENGTH SHALL BE INCREASED AS NECESSARY TO COMPENSATE FOR
SHORTENING DUE TO PRESTRESS AND SHRINKAGE.
G3 #5
G1 #5
G8 #6
(TYP.)
G7 #3
(TYP.)
G5 #5
(TYP.)
G9 #5
(TYP.)
1" CHAMFER
(TYP.)
3"
1'-4"
#5
3'-4"
VIEW
SAWTEETH SHOWN
BY HATCHED AREA.
G8 #6
(TYP.)
G7 #3
(TYP.)
G5 #5 (TYP.)
FORM
HANGERS
6"
MIN.
G4 #5
(TYP.)
7"
GIRDER
SECTION
G2
3"
G3 #5
4'-2"
3. FOR END TYPES A, C, D AND E CUT ALL STRANDS FLUSH WITH THE GIRDER
ENDS AND PAINT WITH AN APPROVED EPOXY RESIN, EXCEPT FOR EXTENDED
STRANDS AS SHOWN. FOR END TYPE B CUT ALL STRANDS 1" BELOW
CONCRETE SURFACE AND GROUT WITH AN APPROVED EPOXY GROUT.
1.
G6 W12
TIES (TYP.)
2 G5 #5
ADJUST LOCATION TO
CLEAR P.T. DUCTS
EXTEND STRAIGHT
STRANDS (1) THROUGH (8)
GIR.
2'-0"
4"
5'-0"
1" CLR.
(TYP.)
1'-0"
1'-0"
3"
FIELD BENDING
REQUIRED TO OBTAIN
1" CONCRETE COVER
AT PAVEMENT SEAT.
7'-10"
1'-3"
3"
3"
4"
3"
5"
5.9-A3-4
SAWTEETH
6 G4 #5
E
2
3"
D
2
90 10
5"
1'-1"
SPA. @ 1'-0"
2 G2 #5, G3 #5 & 2 G7 #3
9"
PICKUP
FORCE
8"
INSERTS ON THE INTERIOR FACE
OF EXTERIOR GIRDERS (TYP.)
INTERMEDIATE
DIAPHRAGM
Y (TYP.)
X (TYP.)
3"
E
2
ELEVATION
MID-SEGMENT REINFORCING
C.G. TOTAL
STRAIGHT STRANDS
9"
5"
GIRDER ELEVATION
MID-SEGMENT
6 SPA. @
3"= 1'-6"
INTER.
DIAPHR.
GIRDER &
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
3'-9"
PICKUP FORCE
11"
EXTEND STRAIGHT STRANDS
(9) THROUGH (16) .
Z
(TYP.)
2 G5 #5 - ADJUST
LOCATION TO CLEAR
P.T. DUCTS (TYP.)
JOB NO.
SHEET
03/03/2015
SR
1" MIN.
1" MAX. (TYP.)
SECTION
BEARING
SKEW
ANGLE
GROUT PAD
NOTES:
GIRDER STOP
ELASTOMERIC BEARING
PAD (SEE DETAIL)
BEARING
G
IN ER
AR PI
BE NG
O
AL
9"
MIN.
90
1" AT BEARING
LEVEL
" RECESS AT
BEARING
BEARING
BEARING
SKEW ANGLE
I NG R
AR PIE
BE NG
O
AL
"
RECESS
5.9-A4-1
14 GAGE (0.0747")
SHIM (TYP.)
SECTION
IN
IN
UNLOADED HEIGHT
LOADED HEIGHT (DL)
165 PSI
KIPS
SHEAR MODULUS
KIPS
" INNER
LAYER (TYP.)
" OUTER
LAYER (TYP.)
5.9-A4-2
SHEET
JOB NO.
SR
E1
BRG.
3"
TRAPEZOIDAL TUB
SPLICED GIRDER
END OF
PRECAST
SEGMENTS
4" HEAT
SHRINK SLEEVE
1'-6"
1'-0"
1'-0"
1'-0"
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
CLOSURE
L/2 **
DUCTS
DIMENSION SHOWN
ON POST-TENSIONING
PROFILE
C.G. OF STRANDS
6"
WEB
SPAN
STRAND
DIAMETER
IN.
JACKING
AFTER
SEATING
PRESSING LOAD
PER WEB TOTAL KIPS
PRESTRESS
LOSS KSI
(TD+ES+FR+AS)
E (IN.)
1
2"
E (IN.)
2
E (IN.)
3
G3 #4
SEE "DUCT
SPLICE DETAIL"
G5 #5
1'-10" LAP
SPLICE (TYP.)
G4 #6 - 1'-10"
LAP SPLICE (TYP.)
POST-TENSIONING NOTES
GIRDER
DETAIL
2'-0" CLOSURE
SEE GENERAL NOTES
FOR CONC. STRENGTH
EXTENDED STRANDS
(1) THRU (8)
2"
POST-TENSIONING TABLE
3"
R="
PRECAST MID-SEGEMENT
PARABOLIC CURVE
BETWEEN CONTROL POINTS
1. THE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE IN DECK SLAB SHALL BE CLASS 4000D. THE MINIMUM
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF THE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE AT THE WET JOINT
AT THE TIME OF POST-TENSIONING SHALL BE ??? ksi.
2. THE MINIUM PRESTRESSING LOAD AFTER SEATING AND THE MINIMUM NUMBER OF
PRESTRESSING STRANDS FOR EACH GIRDER SHALL BE AS SHOWN
IN POST-TENSIONING TABLE.
3. THE DESIGN IS BASED ON ?? INCH DIAMETER LOW RELAXATION STRANDS
WITH A JACKING LOAD FOR EACH GIRDER AS SHOWN IN POST-TENSIONING TABLE,
AN ANCHOR SET OF INCH OF CURVATURE FRICTION COEFFICIENT, = 0.20 AND
A WOBBLE FRICTION COEFFICIENT, k = 0.0002/ft. THE ACTUAL ANCHOR SET USED
BY THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE SPECIFIED IN THE SHOP PLANS AND
INCLUDED IN THE TRANSFER FORCE CALCULATIONS.
4. THE DESIGN IS BASED ON THE ESTIMATED PRESTRESS LOSS OF
POST-TENSIONING STRANDS SHOWN IN POST-TENSIONING TABLE DUE TO
STEEL RELAXATION, ELASTIC SHORTENING CREEP AND SHRINKAGE OF CONCRETE.
OF
DUCTS
* L2 /2
6"
WEB
3"
BOTTOM SLAB
DRAIN HOLE
ALT. 2
E2
CIRCULAR DRIP
GROOVE
ALT. 1
P1 OR
P2
* L1
BOT.
SLAB
1"
END OF PRECAST
SEGMENT
VARIES
6"
5"
5"
MIN. MIN.
6"
MIN.
E3
5.9-A4-3
SHEET
JOB NO.
SR
9"+B2
1"
CLR.
EXTEND
G3 #4 BARS
SAWTEETH
AREA OUTSIDE
OF P.T. DUCTS.
6" 6"
6 SPA. @
3"= 1'-6"
4 SPA. @ 9"
= 3'-0"
9"
SECTION
SPA. @ 1'-6"
G1 #5, G2 #5 & G7 #4
B = 9010
G5 #5
6 SPA. @ 6"
= 3'-0"
GIR.
G5 #5 - ADJUST LOCATION
TO CLEAR P.T. DUCTS
EXTEND G4 #6 BARS
1'-9"
SAWTEETH AREA
OUTSIDE
OF PT. DUCTS.
EXTEND G4 #6
1'-9"
1"
CLR.
2"
10"
(TYP.)
EXTEND STRAIGHT
STRANDS
(1) THROUGH (8) .
6" 6"
10"
7"
PICKUP FORCE
PICKUP FORCE
G5 #5 @ 6"
1'-0"
G3 #4 @
1'-0" MAX.
(TYP.)
***
G7 #4
6"
1" CLR.
(TYP.)
VIEW
G7 #4
6"
G3 #4 @
1'-0" MAX.
(TYP.)
***
G6 W12 (TYP.)
G2 #5
G1 #5
G4 #6 (TYP.)
SECTION
2"
G7 #4
6"
VIEW
***
G6 W12 (TYP.)
G2 #5
G1 #5
G4 #6 (TYP.)
G3 #4 @
1'-0" MAX.
(TYP.)
2"
10"
(TYP.)
2"
2"
10"
(TYP.)
7. THE TOP SURFACE OF THE GIRDER FLANGE SHALL BE ROUGHENED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
SECTION 6-02.3(25)H.
8. FORMS FOR BEARING PAD RECESSES SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED AND FASTENED IN SUCH A
MANNER AS NOT TO CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE GIRDER DURING STRAND RELEASE OPERATION.
6. EXTRA CAUTION MUST BE EXERCISED IN HANDLING AND PLACING ALL GIRDERS. ALL GIRDERS
SHALL BE CHECKED TO ENSURE THAT THEY ARE BRACED ADEQUATELY TO PREVENT TIPPING
AND TO CONTROL LATERAL BENDING DURING SHIPPING.
5. LIFTING BARS SHALL BE 1 " DIAMETER HIGH STRENGTH THREADED BARS (AASHTO M275,
GRADE 150 MINIMUM). LIFTING HARDWARE THAT CONNECTS TO THREADED BARS SHALL BE
DESIGNED AND DETAILED BY THE CONTRACTOR. LIFTING FORCES ON THREAD BARS SHALL BE
VERTICAL ONLY AND WITHIN 10 DEGREES OF PERPENDICULAR TO A LINE BETWEEN PICK
POINTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT CALCULATIONS FOR APPROVAL BY THE ENGINEER
IF LIFTING FORCES ARE TO BE OTHERWISE.
3. FOR END TYPES A, C AND D, CUT ALL STRANDS FLUSH WITH THE
GIRDER ENDS AND PAINT WITH AN APPROVED EPOXY RESIN,
EXCEPT FOR EXTENDED STRANDS AS SHOWN. FOR END TYPES B
AND E CUT ALL STRANDS 1" BELOW CONCRETE SURFACE AND
GROUT WITH AN APPROVED EPOXY GROUT.
G6 W12 (TYP.)
G2 #5
G1 #5
G4 #6 (TYP.)
G3 #4
PRE-TENSIONING NOTES:
1. PLAN LENGTH SHALL BE INCREASED AS NECESSARY TO COMPENSATE FOR SHORTENING
DUE TO PRESTRESS AND SHRINKAGE.
2"
G5 #5 - ADJUST
LOCATION TO CLEAR
P.T. DUCTS
9"+B2
6"
6"
G5 #5 @ 6"
1'-0"
5.9-A4-4
SHEET
JOB NO.
SR
3"
3"
END 1
"
BEARING
BEARING
"
PLAN
3"
BEARING
BEARING
BOTTOM OF TUB
ELEVATION
BEARING
END 2
P2
TRANSVERSE REINFORCING
AT SKEWED ENDS
6'-1"
SPLAY G1 , G2 ,
& G7 BARS
EXPANDED
POLYSTYRENE BLOCK
1"
SAWTOOTH DETAILS
90
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
MARK
SIZE U
SAWTEETH (SEE
SAWTOOTH DETAILS
THIS SHEET)
G1
LOCATION
BENDING DIAGRAM
TUB
GIRDER
END
" EXPANDED
POLYSTYRENE FOR
SKEWS EQUAL OR
LESS THAN 15
P1
BOTTOM OF TUB
SECTION
" CHAMFER ON
WEB FOR SKEWS
GREATER THAN 15
" EXPANDED
POLYSTYRENE FOR
SKEWS GREATER THAN 15
"
GIR.
P1
TRAPEZOIDAL
TUB GIRDER
.)
1"
YP
(T
X + "A"
ROUGHENED
SURFACE (TYP.)
90
2"
W
2'-0"
G2
1'-6"
G6
1'-0"
G7
3"
FIELD BEND
ALT. SIDES
NOTE:
FOR DIMENSION "A", SEE
"GIRDER SCHEDULE"
* = VARIES FOR
SKEWED SPANS
P.C. SECTION
9" EXTENSION
STR.
STR.
STR.
#4 MAY BE SUBSTITUTED FOR W12,
FIELD BENDING IS OPTIONAL
X + "A"
2'-0"
6"
AHEAD
ON STATIONING
1"
5.9-A4-5
1'-9"
4"
4"
1'-1"
2'-7"
9"
SPA. @ 1'-6"
G7 #4 & G1 #5, G2 #5
9"
6 SPA. @
3"= 1'-6"
8"
PICKUP FORCE
EXTEND STRAIGHT
STRANDS
(9) THROUGH (16) .
C.G. TOTAL
STRAIGHT STRANDS
EXTEND STRAIGHT
STRANDS
(9) THROUGH (16) .
6 SPA. @
3"= 1'-6"
3" CLR
PICKUP FORCE
B=90 10
6"
1'-9"
SAWTEETH AREA
OUTSIDE OF PT. DUCTS.
A
2
1"
CLR.
D
2
EXTEND G4 #6
1'-9"
1'-9"
INTER.
DIAPHR.
7"
GIRDER &
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
11"
1'-9"
SAWTEETH AREA
OUTSIDE OF PT. DUCTS.
EXTEND G4 #6
1'-9"
1"
CLR.
D
2
1'-9"
G3 #4 (TYP.)
INTERMEDIATE
DIAPHRAGM
1'-9"
G5 #5 - ADJUST
LOCATION TO CLEAR
P.T. DUCTS (TYP.)
5.9-A4-6
SHEET
JOB NO.
SR
WEB
SPAN
6"
2"
2"
END 2 TYPE
END 1 TYPE
@ FINAL
F'C (KSI)
GIRDER
17
P1
(ALONG
GIRDER GRADE)
NO. OF
STRANDS
(KIPS)
JACKING
FORCE
STRAIGHT
C.G.
STRANDS
Ld
1
(DEG.)
2
(DEG.)
7 23
22 6 20
16 30 14 28 12 26 10 24
6"
18
48 34 50 36 52 38 54 40 56 42 58 44 60 46 62
DRAIN HOLE
TRAPEZOIDAL TUB
SPLICED GIRDER
STRAND PATTERN
25 11 27 13 29 15
21
(ALONG
GIRDER GRADE)
PLAN
LENGTH
6"
WEB
(KIPS)
JACKING
FORCE
STRAIGHT
NO. OF
STRANDS
MID-SEGMENT
NOTE:
Dimensions shall be shown in Imperial
units to the nearest th inch.
END 1 TYPE
19
55 39 53 37 51 35 49 33 47
ODD STRAND
(MAY BE ADJUSTED
TO EITHER SIDE OF WEB)
2
(DEG.)
1
(DEG.)
PLAN
LENGTH
END SEGMENT 1
END 2 TYPE
1. This strand extension detail is to be used for continuous spans at moment resisting
diaphragms only.This detail is not applicable to continuous spans using hinge diaphragms.
2. Designer shall calculate the exact number of extended straight strands needed to develop
the required moment capacity at the end of the girder. This calculation shall be based on
the tensile strength of the strands, the stresses imposed on the anchor, and concrete
bearing against the projected area of the anchor.
The total number of extended strands shall not be less than:
3. Nps = 12(Mc + Vc X h - M
) X Nc X
K
SIDL
where:
(0.9 Aps x fps x d)
Ng
Mc, Vc = The lesser of Elastic or Plastic hinging moment &
END OF PRECAST SEGMENT
shear capacity of column Ft-kips, kips respectively,
PVC TUBE TO
h = distance from top of column to c.g. of superstructure, Ft
PREVENT STRAND BOND
Nc = number of columns
Ng = number of girders
Aps = area of each extended strand, in
fps = ultimate strength of strands, ksi
1'-9"
6-0"
d = distance from top of slab to c.g. of extended strands, in
M
= Moment due to SIDL (Traffic barrier, sidewalk, etc.)
K = 0.5 for L1 = L2
0.67 for L1 = 2L2
61 45 59 43 57 41
NOTES TO DESIGNER:
@ RELEASE
F'CI (KSI)
MINIMUM CONCRETE
COMPR. STRENGTH
C.G.
STRANDS
Ld
2
(DEG.)
P2
(ALONG
GIRDER GRADE)
NO. OF
STRANDS
(KIPS)
JACKING
FORCE
STRAIGHT
1'-5"
(DEG.)
C.G.
STRANDS
ALTERNATE # 2
ALTERNATE # 1
GIRDER END
1'-5"
GIRDER END
PLAN
LENGTH
END SEGMENT 2
GIR.
GIR.
END 2 TYPE
END 1 TYPE
Ld
5.9-A4-7
SHEET
JOB NO.
SR
SEE DETAIL A
6
MISCELLANEOUS
DIAPHRAGM DETAILS SHEET
WEB
4 EQUAL SPACES
OPEN
JOINT
ABUTMENT
ELEVATION
BUTYL RUBBER @ DIAPHRAGM
BEARING
"
(TYP.)
WEB
BEARING
SEE JOINT
FILLER DETAIL
3. END DIAPHRAGM MAY BE CAST ON GRADE. IF SO, THE UPPER LEG OF THE JOINT
FILLER SHALL FORM THE BOTTOM FACE FULL WIDTH.
4. JOINT FILLER TYPE 1 SHALL BE USED TO COVER ALL VERTICAL END DIAPHRAGM JOINTS.
EITHER JOINT FILLER TYPE 1 OR JOINT FILLER TYPE 2 SHALL BE USED TO COVER
ALL HORIZONTAL END DIAPHRAGM JOINTS.
PLAN VIEW
BUTYL RUBBER @ VERTICAL JOINTS
WALL
OPEN
JOINT
" RECESS
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
W/ ROUGHENED SURFACE
2" CHAMFER
BACK OF
PAVEMENT SEAT
2
#4 FULL WIDTH
(2'-0" SPLICE WHEN REQUIRED)
2
#6 FULL WIDTH
(2'-2" SPLICE WHEN REQUIRED)
&
#4 FULL WIDTH
DIAPHRAGM
#4 FULL WIDTH
CONSTRUCTION JOINT W/
ROUGHENED SURFACE (TYP.)
PARALLEL
BEARING
GIRDER
NOTE:
4"
DIAPHRAGM
# NOTE TO DESIGNER
1'-0"
3"
MIN.
BRG.
#4 (TYP.)
#4 (TYP.)
2" CHAMFER
#4 TIES @ 1'-3"
#6
2" CHAMFER
PIER WALL
GIRDER SEAT
& RECESS - LEVEL
" RECESS
10"
6"
MAX.
2'-2"
L200
200<L300
300<L400
L>400
BRIDGE LENGTH
** OPEN JOINT
PIER WALL
GIRDER SEAT
& RECESS - LEVEL
BEARING PAD
- GRADE
TOP OF GIRDER
"A" DIM. @
GIRDER
** = 1.5 IN.
** = 2.0 IN.
** = 2.5 IN.
SPECIAL DESIGN
JOINT
45 FILLET
TOP OF GIRDER
SLAB REINF.(TYP.)
PIER WALL
BEARING
10" 10"
2'-4"
3"
MIN.
SEE JOINT
FILLER DETAIL
BRG.
SECTION
BACK OF
PAVEMENT SEAT
CONSTRUCTION
JOINT WITH
ROUGHENED SURFACE
+ GRADE
TOP OF GIRDER
"A" DIM. @
GIRDER
#6
#4 STIRRUP @ 1'-3"
#4 STIRRUP @ 1'-3"
#4 STIRRUP @ 1'-3"
BEARING PAD
1'-0"
** OPEN JOINT
10" 10"
2'-4"
6"
MAX.
2'-2"
10"
1'-1"
1'-0"
2"
4'-2"
BEND IN FIELD
135(TYP.)
1'-1"
2
#6 FULL WIDTH
(2'-7" SPLICE WHEN
REQUIRED)
1'-0"
#4 TIES,
#4 STIRRUPS @ 1'-3"
#4,
#4 STIRRUPS @ 1'-3"
4'-2"
3"
1'-0"
5.9-A4-8
SHEET
JOB NO.
SR
1'-6"
(TYP.)
EB
PIER
SKEWED
TEMPORARY
SUPPORT (TYP.)
1"
(TYP.)
6"
(TYP.)
OR
TEMPORARY FALSEWORK
SUPPORT (TYP.)
EDGE OF CROSSBEAM
CONSTRUCTION JOINT W/
ROUGHENED SURFACE
PRESTRESSED TRAPEZOIDAL
TUB GIRDER
TEMPORARY
FALSEWORK
SUPPORT (TYP.)
BRG. ~ PIER
H3 #5
VARIES
7"
(TYP.)
45
1"
MIN.
COMPLETE DIAPHRAGM
2
3
TOP OF
CROSSBEAM
REINFORCING
COLUMN
REINF. (TYP.)
2'-6"
MIN.
PIER
SECTION
2'-6"
MIN.
1" CLR.
H4 #5
1" CLR.
H3 #5
H2 #6
CONSTR. JT. W/
ROUGHENED
SURFACE
3" GAP
IN SPIRAL
CONTINUITY
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
WITH ROUGHENED
SURFACE
H1 #5 @ 1'-0" MAX.
SECTION
BOTTOM OF
CROSSBEAM
REINFORCING
H1 #5
TOP OF
CROSSBEAM
REINFORCING
COLUMN
REINF. (TYP.)
BOTTOM OF
CROSSBEAM
REINFORCING
1'-6"
SEE DETAIL
END OF TRAPEZOIDAL
TUB GIRDER
"A"
DIMENSION
CONSTRUCTION
SEQUENCE
DETAIL
FACE OF CROSSBEAM
TOP OF
TRAPEZOIDAL
TUB GIRDER
PIER
EDGE OF WEB
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
W/ ROUGHENED SURFACE
TOP OF BRIDGE DECK
NO SKEW
WIDTH OF
BOTTOM FLANGE
EXTERIOR WEB
2'-6"
MIN.
INTERIOR WEB
ELEVATION
STRAIGHT STRANDS
HARPED
STRANDS
H1 #5 (TYP.)
PLAN
H2 #5 (TYP.)
H1 #5 (TYP.)
H3 #5
ELASTOMERIC
BEARING PAD
EDGE OF WEB
IN
RI
TE
1"
(TYP.)
SUPERSTRUCTURE
SUBSTRUCTURE
CLASS 4000D
CONCRETE
CLASS
4000 CONC.
EB
6" MIN.
(TYP.)
1'-6"
VARIES
OR
RI
TE
EX
**
VARIES
5.9-A5-1
E1
6"
WEB
ALT. 2
END OF
PRECAST
SEGMENTS
4" HEAT
SHRINK SLEEVE
1'-6"
3"
1'-0"
L/2 **
1'-0"
1'-0"
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
CLOSURE
SPAN
6"
WEB
SPAN
STRAND
DIAMETER
IN.
JACKING
AFTER
SEATING
TOTAL
PRESTRESS
LOSS KSI
(DT+ES+FR+AS)
E (IN.)
1
E (IN.)
2
E (IN.)
3
SEE "DUCT
SPLICE DETAIL"
G5 #5
1'-10" LAP
SPLICE (TYP.)
G4 #6 - 1'-10"
LAP SPLICE (TYP.)
2"
POST-TENSIONING NOTES
GIRDER
DETAIL
2'-0" CLOSURE
SEE GENERAL NOTES
FOR CONC. STRENGTH
G3 #4
2"
POST-TENSIONING TABLE
1. THE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE IN DECK SLAB SHALL BE CLASS 4000D. THE MINIMUM
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF THE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE AT THE WET JOINT
AT THE TIME OF POST-TENSIONING SHALL BE ??? ksi.
2. THE MINIUM PRESTRESSING LOAD AFTER SEATING AND THE MINIMUM NUMBER OF
PRESTRESSING STRANDS FOR EACH GIRDER SHALL BE AS SHOWN
IN POST-TENSIONING TABLE.
3. THE DESIGN IS BASED ON ?? INCH DIAMETER LOW RELAXATION STRANDS
WITH A JACKING LOAD FOR EACH GIRDER AS SHOWN IN POST-TENSIONING TABLE,
AN ANCHOR SET OF INCH OF CURVATURE FRICTION COEFFICIENT, = 0.20 AND
A WOBBLE FRICTION COEFFICIENT, k = 0.0002/ft. THE ACTUAL ANCHOR SET USED
BY THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE SPECIFIED IN THE SHOP PLANS AND
INCLUDED IN THE TRANSFER FORCE CALCULATIONS.
4. THE DESIGN IS BASED ON THE ESTIMATED PRESTRESS LOSS OF
POST-TENSIONING STRANDS SHOWN IN POST-TENSIONING TABLE DUE TO
STEEL RELAXATION, ELASTIC SHORTENING CREEP AND SHRINKAGE OF CONCRETE.
DUCTS
3"
R="
PARABOLIC CURVE
BETWEEN CONTROL POINTS
PRECAST MID-SEGEMENT
DIMENSION SHOWN
ON POST-TENSIONING
PROFILE
C.G. OF STRANDS
OF
DUCTS
* L2 /2
E2
STRAND PATTERN @
TRAPEZOIDAL TUB
SPLICED GIRDER
3"
BOTTOM SLAB
DRAIN HOLE
CIRCULAR DRIP
GROOVE
ALT. 1
BRG.
BOT.
SLAB
P1 OR
P2
* L1
5"
MIN.
5"
MIN.
6"
MIN.
1"
END OF PRECAST
SEGMENT
VARIES
6"
E3
5.9-A5-2
6" 6"
7"
6 SPA. @
3"= 1'-6"
4 SPA. @ 9"
= 3'-0"
9"
SECTION
SPA. @ 1'-6"
B = 9010
EXTEND STRAIGHT
STRANDS
(1) THROUGH (8) .
1'-9"
SAWTEETH AREA
OUTSIDE
OF PT. DUCTS.
EXTEND G4 #6
1'-9"
6 SPA. @
3"= 1'-6"
1"
CLR.
10"
(TYP.)
G5 #5
6 SPA. @ 6"
= 3'-0"
1"
CLR.
EXTEND
G3 #4 BARS
SAWTEETH
AREA OUTSIDE
OF P.T. DUCTS.
G5 #5 - ADJUST LOCATION
TO CLEAR P.T. DUCTS
EXTEND G4 #6 BARS
10"
9"+B2
GIR.
PICKUP FORCE
PICKUP FORCE
G5 #5 @ 6"
1'-0"
***
G3 #4 @
1'-0" MAX.
(TYP.)
VIEW
G8 #4
G3 #4 @
1'-0" MAX.
(TYP.)
SECTION
G7 #4
6"
***
G6 W12 (TYP.)
G2 #5
G4 #6 (TYP.)
G8 #4
***
VIEW
G7 #4
6"
G6 W12 (TYP.)
G2 #5
G4 #6 (TYP.)
G3 #4 @
1'-0" MAX.
(TYP.)
G7 #4
6"
G1 #5
1" CLR.
(TYP.)
10"
(TYP.)
10"
(TYP.)
7. THE TOP SURFACE OF THE GIRDER FLANGE SHALL BE ROUGHENED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
SECTION 6-02.3(25)H.
8. FORMS FOR BEARING PAD RECESSES SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED AND FASTENED IN SUCH A
MANNER AS NOT TO CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE GIRDER DURING STRAND RELEASE OPERATION.
6. EXTRA CAUTION MUST BE EXERCISED IN HANDLING AND PLACING ALL GIRDERS. ALL GIRDERS
SHALL BE CHECKED TO ENSURE THAT THEY ARE BRACED ADEQUATELY TO PREVENT TIPPING
AND TO CONTROL LATERAL BENDING DURING SHIPPING.
5. LIFTING BARS SHALL BE 1 " DIAMETER HIGH STRENGTH THREADED BARS (AASHTO M275,
GRADE 150 MINIMUM). LIFTING HARDWARE THAT CONNECTS TO THREADED BARS SHALL BE
DESIGNED AND DETAILED BY THE CONTRACTOR. LIFTING FORCES ON THREAD BARS SHALL BE
VERTICAL ONLY AND WITHIN 10 DEGREES OF PERPENDICULAR TO A LINE BETWEEN PICK
POINTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT CALCULATIONS FOR APPROVAL BY THE ENGINEER
IF LIFTING FORCES ARE TO BE OTHERWISE.
3. FOR END TYPES A, C AND D, CUT ALL STRANDS FLUSH WITH THE
GIRDER ENDS AND PAINT WITH AN APPROVED EPOXY RESIN,
EXCEPT FOR EXTENDED STRANDS AS SHOWN. FOR END TYPES B
AND E CUT ALL STRANDS 1" BELOW CONCRETE SURFACE AND
GROUT WITH AN APPROVED EPOXY GROUT.
G6 W12 (TYP.)
G2 #5
G1 #5
PRE-TENSIONING NOTES:
1. PLAN LENGTH SHALL BE INCREASED AS NECESSARY TO COMPENSATE FOR SHORTENING
DUE TO PRESTRESS AND SHRINKAGE.
G4 #6 (TYP.)
G8 #4
G3 #4
G5 #5 - ADJUST
LOCATION TO CLEAR
P.T. DUCTS
9"+B2
6"
6"
G1 #5
G5 #5 @ 6"
1'-0"
5.9-A5-3
3"
END 1
P1
"
BEARING
BEARING
"
PLAN
P2
END 2
3"
BEARING
BEARING
BOTTOM OF TUB
ELEVATION
BEARING
TRANSVERSE REINFORCING
AT SKEWED ENDS
6'-1"
SPLAY G1 , G2 ,
& G7 BARS
EXPANDED
POLYSTYRENE BLOCK
SECTION
" CHAMFER ON
WEB FOR SKEWS
GREATER THAN 15
" EXPANDED
POLYSTYRENE FOR
SKEWS GREATER THAN 15
"
GIR.
3"
TRAPEZOIDAL
TUB GIRDER
1"
SAWTOOTH DETAILS
TUB
GIRDER
END
90
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
G8
MARK
SIZE U
8"
(TYP.)
G1
LOCATION
BENDING DIAGRAM
SAWTEETH (SEE
SAWTOOTH DETAILS
THIS SHEET)
1"
X + "A"
BOTTOM OF TUB
2'-6"
(TYP.)
90
2"
P1
1'-6"
G7
3"
3"
G6
1'-0"
1'-5"
G8
FIELD BEND
ALT. SIDES
FIELD BEND
NOTE:
FOR DIMENSION "A", SEE
"GIRDER SCHEDULE"
2'-0"
G2
5"
3"
10"
4"
*
1'-6"
4"
*
* = VARIES FOR
SKEWED SPANS
P.C. SECTION
9" EXTENSION
STR.
STR.
STR.
#4 MAY BE SUBSTITUTED FOR W12,
FIELD BENDING IS OPTIONAL
X + "A"
.)
2"
YP
(T
1"
AHEAD
ON STATIONING
2'-0"
6"
1" 4"
5.9-A5-4
1'-9"
4"
4"
1'-1"
2'-7"
SPA. @ 1'-6"
9"
1'-9"
INTERMEDIATE
DIAPHRAGM
1'-9"
EXTEND G4 #6
1'-9"
1"
CLR.
D
2
8"
PICKUP FORCE
6 SPA. @
3"= 1'-6"
EXTEND STRAIGHT
STRANDS
(9) THROUGH (16) .
9"
C.G. TOTAL
STRAIGHT STRANDS
3" CLR
EXTEND STRAIGHT
STRANDS
(9) THROUGH (16) .
6 SPA. @
3"= 1'-6"
PICKUP FORCE
B=90 10
6"
SAWTEETH AREA
OUTSIDE OF PT. DUCTS.
A
2
EXTEND G4 #6
1'-9"
1"
CLR.
D
2
1'-9"
1'-9"
INTER.
DIAPHR.
7"
GIRDER &
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
11"
1'-9"
G3 #4
SAWTEETH AREA
OUTSIDE OF PT. DUCTS.
G5 #5 - ADJUST
LOCATION TO CLEAR
P.T. DUCTS (TYP.)
5.9-A5-5
SHEET
JOB NO.
SR
GIRDER
6"
@ FINAL
F'C (KSI)
17
(ALONG
GIRDER GRADE)
NO. OF
STRANDS
19
7 23
(KIPS)
JACKING
FORCE
E
C.G.
STRANDS
Ld
END 1 TYPE
2
(DEG.)
(ALONG
GIRDER GRADE)
6"
22 6 20
STRAND SPA. @ 2"
SECTION NEAR MIDSPAN
18
36 52 38 54 40 56 42 58 44 60 46 62
16 30 14 28 12 26 10 24
50
48 34
DRAIN HOLE
TRAPEZOIDAL TUB
SPLICED GIRDER
NO. OF
STRANDS
6"
(KIPS)
JACKING
FORCE
STRAIGHT
NOTE:
Dimensions shall be shown in Imperial
units to the nearest th inch.
(DEG.)
PLAN
LENGTH
MID-SEGMENT
STRAND PATTERN
25 11 27 13 29 15
21
55 39 53 37 51 35 49 33 47
ODD STRAND
(MAY BE ADJUSTED
TO EITHER SIDE OF WEB)
P1
STRAIGHT
END 2 TYPE
1. This strand extension detail is to be used for continuous spans at moment resisting
diaphragms only.This detail is not applicable to continuous spans using hinge diaphragms.
2. Designer shall calculate the exact number of extended straight strands needed to develop
the required moment capacity at the end of the girder. This calculation shall be based on
the tensile strength of the strands, the stresses imposed on the anchor, and concrete
bearing against the projected area of the anchor.
The total number of extended strands shall not be less than:
3. Nps = 12(Mc + Vc X h - M
) X Nc X
K
SIDL
where:
(0.9 Aps x fps x d)
Ng
Mc, Vc = The lesser of Elastic or Plastic hinging moment &
shear capacity of column Ft-kips, kips respectively,
h = distance from top of column to c.g. of superstructure, Ft
Nc = number of columns
END OF PRECAST SEGMENT
Ng = number of girders
PVC TUBE TO
Aps = area of each extended strand, in
PREVENT STRAND BOND
fps = ultimate strength of strands, ksi
d = distance from top of slab to c.g. of extended strands, in
M
= Moment due to SIDL (Traffic barrier, sidewalk, etc.)
1'-9"
6-0"
K = 0.5 for L1 = L2
0.67 for L1 = 2L2
END 1 TYPE
2
(DEG.)
1
(DEG.)
PLAN
LENGTH
END SEGMENT 1
NOTES TO DESIGNER:
END 2 TYPE
61 45 59 43 57 41
@ RELEASE
F'CI (KSI)
MINIMUM CONCRETE
COMPR. STRENGTH
WEB
SPAN
2"
2"
WEB
C.G.
STRANDS
Ld
2
P2
(ALONG
GIRDER GRADE)
NO. OF
STRANDS
(KIPS)
JACKING
FORCE
STRAIGHT
1'-5"
1'-5"
ALTERNATE # 2
GIRDER END
Ld
ALTERNATE # 1
C.G.
STRANDS
(DEG.)
GIRDER END
(DEG.)
PLAN
LENGTH
END SEGMENT 2
GIR.
GIR.
END 2 TYPE
END 1 TYPE
5.9-A5-6
SEE DETAIL A
6
MISCELLANEOUS
DIAPHRAGM DETAILS SHEET
WEB
4 EQUAL SPACES
OPEN
JOINT
ABUTMENT
ELEVATION
BUTYL RUBBER @ DIAPHRAGM
BEARING
"
(TYP.)
WEB
SEE JOINT
FILLER DETAIL
" RECESS
3. END DIAPHRAGM MAY BE CAST ON GRADE. IF SO, THE UPPER LEG OF THE JOINT
FILLER SHALL FORM THE BOTTOM FACE FULL WIDTH.
4. JOINT FILLER TYPE 1 SHALL BE USED TO COVER ALL VERTICAL END DIAPHRAGM JOINTS.
EITHER JOINT FILLER TYPE 1 OR JOINT FILLER TYPE 2 SHALL BE USED TO COVER
ALL HORIZONTAL END DIAPHRAGM JOINTS.
PLAN VIEW
BUTYL RUBBER @ VERTICAL JOINTS
WALL
DIAPHRAGM
OPEN
JOINT
2" CHAMFER
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
W/ ROUGHENED SURFACE
2
#6 FULL WIDTH
(2'-2" SPLICE WHEN REQUIRED)
&
#4 FULL WIDTH
BEARING
BACK OF
PAVEMENT SEAT
2
#4 FULL WIDTH
(2'-0" SPLICE WHEN REQUIRED)
#4 FULL WIDTH
CONSTRUCTION JOINT W/
ROUGHENED SURFACE (TYP.)
PARALLEL
BEARING
GIRDER
NOTE:
4"
DIAPHRAGM
# NOTE TO DESIGNER
1'-0"
3"
MIN.
6"
MAX.
BRG.
#4 (TYP.)
#4 (TYP.)
2" CHAMFER
#4 TIES @ 1'-3"
#6
2" CHAMFER
PIER WALL
GIRDER SEAT
& RECESS - LEVEL
" RECESS
10"
6"
MAX.
2'-2"
3"
MIN.
BEARING
L200
200<L300
300<L400
L>400
** = 1.5 IN.
** = 2.0 IN.
** = 2.5 IN.
SPECIAL DESIGN
JOINT
BRIDGE LENGTH
BEARING PAD
- GRADE
TOP OF GIRDER
"A" DIM. @
GIRDER
PIER WALL
GIRDER SEAT
& RECESS - LEVEL
** OPEN JOINT
10" 10"
2'-4"
45 FILLET
TOP OF GIRDER
PIER WALL
SEE JOINT
FILLER DETAIL
BRG.
SECTION
BACK OF
PAVEMENT SEAT
CONSTRUCTION
JOINT WITH
ROUGHENED SURFACE
+ GRADE
TOP OF GIRDER
"A" DIM. @
GIRDER
#6
#4 STIRRUP @ 1'-3"
#4 STIRRUP @ 1'-3"
#4 STIRRUP @ 1'-3"
BEARING PAD
1'-0"
** OPEN JOINT
10" 10"
2'-4"
2'-2"
10"
1'-1"
1'-0"
2"
4'-2"
BEND IN FIELD
135(TYP.)
1'-0"
2
#6 FULL WIDTH
(2'-7" SPLICE WHEN
REQUIRED)
1'-1"
#4 TIES,
#4 STIRRUPS @ 1'-3"
#4,
#4 STIRRUPS @ 1'-3"
4'-2"
3"
1'-0"
5.9-A5-7
ELASTOMERIC
BEARING PAD
EDGE OF WEB
H3 #5
EB
PIER
SKEWED
OR
TEMPORARY FALSEWORK
SUPPORT (TYP.)
EDGE OF CROSSBEAM
CONSTRUCTION JOINT W/
ROUGHENED SURFACE
PRESTRESSED TRAPEZOIDAL
TUB GIRDER
TEMPORARY
FALSEWORK
SUPPORT (TYP.)
BRG. ~ PIER
45
EXTERIOR WEB
H3 #5
1"
MIN.
END OF TRAPEZOIDAL
TUB GIRDER
4
5
6
2
3
CONSTRUCTION
SEQUENCE
DETAIL
PIER
EDGE OF WEB
7"
(TYP.)
FACE OF CROSSBEAM
TOP OF
TRAPEZOIDAL
TUB GIRDER
VARIES
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
W/ ROUGHENED SURFACE
NO SKEW
WIDTH OF
BOTTOM FLANGE
INTERIOR WEB
ELEVATION
STRAIGHT STRANDS
HARPED
STRANDS
H1 #5 (TYP.)
PLAN
H2 #5 (TYP.)
H1 #5 (TYP.)
TEMPORARY
SUPPORT (TYP.)
1"
(TYP.)
6"
(TYP.)
IN
RI
TE
1"
(TYP.)
1'-6"
(TYP.)
2'-6"
MIN.
"A"
DIMENSION
SUPERSTRUCTURE
SUBSTRUCTURE
CLASS 4000D
CONCRETE
TOP OF
CROSSBEAM
REINFORCING
COLUMN
REINF. (TYP.)
H2 #6
1" CLR.
H4 #5
1" CLR.
H3 #5
CONSTR. JT. W/
ROUGHENED SURFACE
2'-6"
MIN.
PIER
SECTION
2'-6"
MIN.
3" GAP
IN SPIRAL
CONTINUITY
CONSTR. JOINT
W/ROUGHENED
SURFACE
H1 #5 @ 1'-0" MAX.
SECTION
BOTTOM OF
CROSSBEAM
REINFORCING
H1 #5
TOP OF
CROSSBEAM
REINFORCING
COLUMN
REINF. (TYP.)
BOTTOM OF
CROSSBEAM
REINFORCING
1'-6"
SEE DETAIL
CLASS
4000 CONC.
EB
6" MIN.
(TYP.)
1'-6"
VARIES
OR
RI
TE
EX
**
VARIES
Appendix 5-B1
A Dimension for
Precast Girder Bridges
Introduction
The slab haunch is the distance between the top of a girder and the bottom of
the roadway slab. Thehaunch varies in depth along the length of the girder
accommodating the girder camber and geometric effects of the roadway surface
including super elevations, vertical curves and horizontal curves.
The basic concept in determining the required A dimension is to provide a haunch
over the girder such that the top of the girder is not less than the fillet depth (typically
) below the bottom of the slab at the center of the span. This provides that the actual
girder camber could exceed the calculated value by 1 before the top of the girder
would interfere with the bottom mat of slab reinforcement.
It is desirable to have points of horizontal and vertical curvature and super elevation
transitions off the bridge structure as this greatly simplifies the geometric requirements
on the slab haunch. However, as new bridges are squeezed into the existing
infrastructure it is becoming more common to have geometric transitions on the
bridgestructure.
Each geometric effect is considered independently of the others. The total geometric
effect is the algebraic sum of each individual effect.
Fillet Effect
The distance between the top of the girder and the top of the roadway surface, must be
at least the thickness of the roadway slab plus the fillet depth.
Page 5-B1-1
The girder haunch must be thickened to accommodate any camber that remains in the
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
ExcessiveThe girder haunch must be thickened to accommodate any camber that remains in the
Camber Effect
girder after slab casting. This is the difference between the D and C dimensions from
The girder haunch must be thickened to accommodate any camber that remains in the
the Girder Schedule Table. Use a value of 2
between
at the preliminary
design
to
girder after slab casting. This is the difference
the D and
C stage
dimensions
determine
vertical
clearance.
from the Girder Schedule Table. Use a value of 2 at the preliminary design stage to
determine vertical clearance.
Profile Effect
Profile Effect
The
Theprofile
profileeffect
effectaccounts
accountsfor
forchanges
changesininthe
theroadway
roadwayprofile
profilealong
alongthe
thelength
lengthofofthe
girder.
Profile
changes
include
gradegrade
changes,
vertical
curvecurve
effects,
and offset
deviations
the girder.
Profile
changes
include
changes,
vertical
effects,
and offset
between the centerline of girder
and
the
alignment
caused by flared girders and/or
deviations between the centerline of girder and the alignment caused by flared girders
curvature
in the alignment.
and/or curvature
in the alignment.
Whenallallofofthe
thegirders
girdersinina aspan
spanare
areparallel
paralleland
andthe
thespan
spanisiscontained
containedentirely
entirelywithin
withinthe
When
the limits
of a vertical
and/or
horizontal
curve,
the profile
is simply
the sum
limits
of a vertical
and/or
horizontal
curve,
the profile
effecteffect
is simply
the sum
of theof
the
Vertical
Curve
Effect
and
the
Horizontal
Curve
Effect.
Vertical Curve Effect and the Horizontal Curve Effect.
5-B1.1
5-B1.1
The horizontal curve effect is, assuming a constant super elevation rate along the
length of the span,
5-B1.2
5-B1.2
(5-B1.2)
Where:
S = The length of curve infeet
5-B1.3
5-B1.3
5-B1.4
5-B1.4
4
4
5-B1.5
5-B1.5
5-B1.6
5-B1.6
5-B1.7
5-B1.7
5-B1.8
(5-B1.1)
Page 5-B1-2
2
2
2
2
2 4
2
1
2
1
2
13
2
3
1
2
3
24
3
4
2
3
4
35
4
5
3
4
5
46
5
6
4
5
6
57
6
7
5
6
7
68
7
8
6
7
8
79
8
9
7
8
9
8
10
9
10
8
9
10
90a
10
0a
9
10
The horizontal curve effect is, assuming a constant super elevation rate along the length
1.5S 2 m
of the5 span, horizontal curve effect =
where S is the length of curve in feet, RConcrete
is the Structures
Chapter
R
radius of the curve in feet, and m is the crown slope. The horizontal curve effect is in
inches.
4
2
42
2
2
2 2 4
2
2
2 4
2
2
2 4
2
2
2
2 2
2
4
2 2
2
4
2
4
2
00
2
2
00
2
2
2 4
00
WSDOT Bridge Design
Manual
M 23-50.14
April 2015
00
(5-B1.3)
(5-B1.4)
(5-B1.5)
(5-B1.6)
(5-B1.7)
(5-B1.8)
(5-B1.9)
Page 5-B1-3
tan
5-B1.6
2
2
2H
Chapter
5
S
5-B1.9
5-B1.7
2
2
2
2
2
2 S 4 S
S S
S
5-B1.7
H =vertical
tan curve
effect
= is =
The
2
2
2
4
R
8
R
5-B1.10
00
S2
1.5S2
in
5-B1.10
5-B1.8
(5-B1.10)
=
inches
m12
m (
)
horizontal
curve effect
2
ft =
8R
R 2 00
2
2 4
5-B1.8
Where:
2
2
2 4
5-B1.10a
G = The algebraic difference inprofile1tangent
(%)
.5GL2g grades
The vertical
curve effect is vertical
=
where G is the algebraic difference
5-B1.10a
curve
effect
5-B1.9
2100
infeet
L =
The vertical
curve
length
00
5-B1.9
2
length
in profile tangent
grades
= g2-
g1)
(%),
Lgis
the girder
(feet), and L is the
(G
crown
curves.
curves and negative for crown curves.
5-B1.10b
5-B1.10
00
5-B1.10
00
00
5-B1.11
00
2
5-B1.11
5-B1.10a
2
5-B1.10a
5-B1.12
2
2
40,000 2 400
00
00
5-B1.12
5-B1.10b
2
2
2 400
40,000
00
2
5-B1.10b
Concrete Structures
tan5-B1.9
5-B1.11
5-B1.11
5-B1.12
5-B1.12
00
00
2K=100G
2
2
40,000
00 2
(5-B1.11)
2 L 400
2 2
2
2
Lg
1.5GL g
G Lg
vertical curve effect = K
12 inft =
12 =
2 L 400
L
40,000
100
(5-B1.12)
transitions
If one
or more
of the
following
roadway
geometry
occur
along
2
2
2 400
40,000
00along the span,
of computation is required:
Ifmore
one detailed
or moremethod
of the following
roadway
geometry
transitions occur
change
in the method
super elevation
rate
thena more
detailed
of computation
is required:
grade break
Change
in the super elevation rate
point of horizontal curvature
Grade break
point of vertical curvature
Point
of horizontal
flared
girders curvature
Page 5-B1-4
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
The exact value of the profile effect may be determined by solving a complex
optimization problem. However it is much easier
and sufficiently
accurate
to use a
The exact value of the profile effect may be determined
by solving
a complex
numerical
approach.
optimization problem. However it is much easier and sufficiently accurate to use a
numerical approach.
The figure below, while highly exaggerated, illustrates that the profile effect is the
The figure below, while highly exaggerated, illustrates
effectignoring
is the all
distance the girder must be placed below the profile
gradethat
so the
thatprofile
the girder,
distance
the
girder
must
be
placed
below
the
profile
grade
so
that
the
girder,
ignoring
other geometric effects, just touches the lowest profile point between the bearings.
all other geometric effects, just touches the lowest profile point between the bearings.
In the case of a crown curve the haunch depth may reduced. In the case of a sag curve
Inthe
thehaunch
case ofmust
a crown
curve the at
haunch
depth
maygirder.
reduced. In the case of a sag curve the
be thickened
the ends
of the
haunch must be thickened at the ends of the girder.
To compute the profile effect:
5-B1.13
5-B1.14
5-B1.15
5-B1.16
(5-B1.13)
(
)
xe,ze) ya ( xs, z s
yc (xi ) = ya (xs , z s ) + ( xi xs )
xe xs
Where:
xi = Station where the elevation of the chord line is being computed
where
xs
= Station
at the start of the girder
Station where the elevation of the chord line is being computed
xi =
xe
=
Station
at
of of
thethe
girder
theend
start
girder
xs = Station atthe
zs = Normal offset from alignment to centerline of the girder at the start
xe = Station at the end of the girder
of the girder atstationxs
Normaloffset
offset
from
to the
centerline
of ofthe
zs == Normal
ze
from
thealignment
alignment to
centerline
thegirder
girderatatthe
start
of
the
girder
at
station
x
line
station
xi station xs and offset zs
yyca(x(xi) s,zs) == Elevation
, chord
at
profile
of
Elevation
ofthe
at
the
,
roadway
5-B1.16a
5-B1.16b
Page 5-B1-5
Concrete Structures
5-B1.13
5-B1.14
5-B1.15
5-B1.13
5-B1.16
5-B1.14
5-B1.16a
5-B1.15
Chapter 5
= centerline
the zline
directlyyaabove
girder,
offset
Elevation of the roadway
stationxe and of
(xe,ze)
a profile
i i at
e
(xi).chord
The line
difference
in elevation
is the profile
paralleling
the
the girder,ofycthe
= ofElevation
at station
xi
yc(x
i) top
effect at station xi,
the span, compute
the elevation of the roadway surface
2. At 10th points along
(5-B1.14)
,
directly above the centerline of the girder, ya(xi,zi), and the elevation of the line
paralleling the top of the girder, yc(xi). The difference in elevation is the profile
Girder Orientation
Effect
effect at station xi, profile effect @ i = ya ( xi , zi ) yc ( xi ) .
between the roadway
The girder orientation
effect accounts
for the difference in slope
2oriented with their Y axis
surface and the top of the girder. Girders such
as
I-beams
are
, ,
Girder
Orientation
Effect
plumb. Other
with their Y
, as
beam, and slabs are oriented
girders
box
such
U-beam,
The
girder
orientation
effect
accounts
for
the difference in slope between the roadway
surface
the topand
of
the
girder. Girders
such as I-beams are oriented with their Y axis
, in the roadway
roadwayand
surface,
changes
surface
along
the length of the girder
plumb. Other girders such as U-beam, box beam, and slabs are oriented with their Y axis
(super elevation transitions) define the Girder Orientation Effect.
normal to the roadway
surface.
The orientation
the , girder
with respect to the roadway
of
If the super
constantsurface
over the
entire
the Y-axis
surface,
and elevation
changes inrate
theisroadway
along
the length
length of the span
girderand
(super
of the girder
is plumb,
the girder
orientation
effect
simplifies
to
the
Top
Width
Effect,
elevation
transitions)
define
the Girder
Effect.
Orientation
(5-B1.15)
of the span and the Y-axis
If the super elevation
rate is constant
the entire
of
over
length
2
the girder is plumb, the girder orientation
effect
simplifies
to
the
Top
Width
Effect,
,equation.
.
girder orientatioatn effect
top widthusing
=this
m
computed
10th= points
effect
2 ,
,
5-B1.16b
5-B1.16
5-B1.16c
5-B1.16a
5-B1.16d
5-B1.16b
5-B1.17
5-B1.16c
5-B1.18
5-B1.16d
If there
there is
is aa change
changeininsuper
superelevation
elevationrate
rateand/or
and/orthe
theY-axis of the girder is not plumb,
Y-axis of the girder is not plumb,
then once
once again
againaamore
morecomplex
complexcomputation
computationisisrequired.
required.
then
5-B1.19
5-B1.17
5-B1.21
5-B1.18
5-B1.ADimWkSht1
5-B1.19
5-B1.ADimWkSht2
Page
5-B1.21
5-B1-6
April 2015
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
, ,
, ,
,
, ,
, ,
,
,
5-B1.13
,
,
5-B1.13
,
, ,
5-B1.14
2
the
the
5-B1.13
To
compute
orientation
point
along
girder,
when
To
compute
the
girder
orientation
effect
the
,
girder
, effect
2 at each
girder
,plumb:
the
cross
, slope,
m, of the roadway surface at station xi. If there is a
1. isDetermine
not
5-B1.14
girder
5-B1.15
crown
point
over
the
the
as
1. Determine
the cross slope,
m, of the roadway surface at station
xi. If there is a
2
, y x,z, left y x , z right
a
i
i
a
i
i
crown
point
over
the
girder
the
cross
slope
is
taken
as
5-B1.14
,
(x
right
i,z
i ) =
left
2
z i z i
5-B1.15
,
,
, ,
where
5-B1.16
,
(5-B1.16)
5-B1.15
, Where:
x
,
of
, girder
xi
=
The
station
where
the
cross
slope
is
being
computed
=
Normal
offset
from
the
alignment
to
the
centerline
the
z
5-B1.16
,
5-B1.16a
zi
= atNormal
the alignment
the endoffset
ofthefrom
girder
at station to
xi the centerline of the girder
left
at
thefrom
end of
thealignment
girder at station
, ,
girder
i left edge of the
= Offset
the
to the xtop
zi
5-B1.16
right = = Offset
Offset from the alignment to the top left edge of the girder
left
left
= = Roadway
surface
elevation at station xi and
normal offset
z
(xi ,,z i) 5-B1.16a
Offset from
the alignment to the top right
edge of the girder iright
ya
right
5-B1.16b
,
5-B1.16c
5-B1.16d
elevation
ya(xi,zi ) = Roadway surface
5-B1.16b
elevation
= Roadway surface
,
,
, 5-B1.16b
,
,
,
April 2015
Page 5-B1-7
5-B1.16b
5-B1.16c
Concrete Structures
5-B1.16d
5-B1.16c
5-B1.16d
5-B1.17
5-B1.16d
5-B1.17
A Dimension
Chapter 5
,
station
orientation
,effect
at
5-B1.18
5-B1.17
these
of all
The A dimension
is the sum
effects.
5-B1.18
(5-B1.17)
(5-B1.18)
5-B1.19
5-B1.18
5-B1.19
.
Round A to the
nearest
5-B1.21
5-B1.19
5-B1.21
5-B1.ADimWkSht1
5-B1.21
5-B1.ADimWkSht1
5-B1.ADimWkSht2
5-B1.ADimWkSht1
5-B1.ADimWkSht2
5-B1.ADimWkSht2
Page 5-B1-8
(5-B1.19)
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Limitations
These computations are for a single girder line. The required haunch should be
determined for each girder line in the structure. Use the greatest A dimension.
These computations are also limited to a single span. A different haunch may be
needed for each span or each pier. For example, if there is a long span adjacent to a
short span, the long span may have considerably more camber and will require a larger
haunch. There is no need to have the shorter spans carry all the extra concrete needed
to match the longer span haunch requirements. With the WF series girders, the volume
of concrete in the haunches can add up quickly. The shorter span could have a different
haunch at each end as illustrated below.
For bridges on crown vertical curves, the haunch depth can become excessive to the point
where the girder and diaphragm stirrups are too short to bend into the proper position.
Similarly the length of leveling bolts in precast deck panels may need adjustment.
Stirrup lengths are described as a function of A on the standard girder sheets. For
example, the G1 and G2 bars of a WF74G girder are 6-5+ A in length. For this
reason, the stirrups are always long enough at the ends of the girders. Problems occur
when the haunch depth increases along the length of the girder to accommodate crown
vertical curves and super elevation transitions.
If the haunch depth along the girder exceeds A by more than 2 inches, an adjustment
must be made. The haunch depth at any section can be compute
as A profile effect excess camber .
Page 5-B1-9
Chapter 5
5-B1.17
Stirrup lengths
described
as
a function of A on the standard girder sheets. For
are
example, the G1and G2
bars
of
a WF74G girder are 6-5+ A in length. For this
5-B1.18
5-B1.19
Concrete Structures
5-B1.16d
reason, the stirrups are always long enough at the ends of the girders. Problems occur
when the haunch depth increases along the length of the girder to accommodate crown
vertical curves andsuper
transitions.
elevation
If the haunch depth along the girder exceeds A by more than 2, an adjustment must
be made. Thehaunch depth at any section can be compute as
5-B1.21
(5-B1.20)
Effect
Fillet
5-B1.ADimWkSht2
5-B1.ADimWkSht3
5-B1.ADimWkSht3
mWkSht3
.ADimWkSht3
5-B1.ADimWkSht3
5-B1.ADimWkSht3
5-B1.ADimWkSht4
5-B1.ADimWkSht4
5-B1.ADimWkSht3
mWkSht4
.ADimWkSht4
5-B1.ADimWkSht4
5-B1.ADimWkSht4
5-B1.ADimWkSht5
5-B1.ADimWkSht5
5-B1.ADimWkSht4
mWkSht5
.ADimWkSht5
5-B1.ADimWkSht5
5-B1.ADimWkSht5
5-B1.ADimWkSht6
5-B1.ADimWkSht6
5-B1.ADimWkSht5
mWkSht6
.ADimWkSht6
5-B1.ADimWkSht6
5-B1.ADimWkSht6
5-B1.ADimWkSht7
5-B1.ADimWkSht7
5-B1.ADimWkSht6
mWkSht7
.ADimWkSht7
5-B1.ADimWkSht7
5-B1.ADimWkSht7
5-B1.ADimWkSht8
5-B1.ADimWkSht8
5-B1.ADimWkSht7
mWkSht8
.ADimWkSht8
5-B1.ADimWkSht8
5-B1.ADimWkSht8
5-B1.ADimWkSht9
5-B1.ADimWkSht9
5-B1.ADimWkSht8
mWkSht9
.ADimWkSht9
5-B1.ADimWkSht9
5-B1.ADimWkSht9
5-B1.Example1
5-B1.Example1Page 5-B1-10
5-B1.ADimWkSht9
xample1
Effect
Excess Camber
1.5
D Dimension from GirderSchedule (120
days)
= ______ in
1.5
C
Dimension from
Girder
Schedule
= ______ in
1.5
=
______ in
1.5
1.5 1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
100
1.5
= ______ in
Horizontal
Curve Effect,
100
100
1.5
1.5
1.5
Vertical Curve
Effect,
= ______ in
100
100
100
1.5
(+ for sag, for crown)
100
Profile Effect
= ______ in
Girder
must be
plumb.
0 for U-beams inclined
parallel to the slab
A Dimension
2
2
= ______ in
Round
to nearest
= ______ in
= ______ in
Minimum A Dimension,
Dimension
A
= ______
in
WSDOT Bridge
Design Manual M 23-50.14
April 2015
1.5
100
1.5
100
100
Concrete
Structures
5-B1.ADimWkSht5
5-B1.ADimWkSht4
5-B1.ADimWkSht5
5-B1.ADimWkSht5
Chapter 5
5-B1.ADimWkSht5
5-B1.ADimWkSht6
5-B1.ADimWkSht5
5-B1.ADimWkSht6
Example
0 Thickness
for U-beams inclined
parallel to the slab
Slab:
= 7.5, Fillet
= 0.75
5-B1.ADimWkSht6
0 for U-beams inclined
parallel to the slab
WF74G
Girder:
Wtop = 49
5-B1.ADimWkSht7
5-B1.ADimWkSht6
0
for U-beams inclined
parallel to the slab
Span Length = 144.4 ft
5-B1.ADimWkSht7
2
Crown
Slope = 0.04ft/ft
5-B1.ADimWkSht7
5-B1.ADimWkSht8
5-B1.ADimWkSht7
Camber:
D = 7.55,
C =
2
5-B1.ADimWkSht8
2.57
2
5-B1.ADimWkSht8
Horizontal
Curve
Radius
=
9500
ft through
centerline
of bridge
5-B1.ADimWkSht8
L = 800 ft
Vertical Curve Data: g1 = 2.4%, g2 = -3.2%,
5-B1.ADimWkSht9
5-B1.ADimWkSht8
5-B1.ADimWkSht9
Fillet
Effect
5-B1.ADimWkSht9
7.5
Slab Thickness (tslab) =
5-B1.ADimWkSht9
Size
) =
Fillet
(tfillet
0.75
5-B1.Example1
5-B1.ADimWkSht9
5-B1.Example1
5-B1.Example1
8.25
=
5-B1.Example1
Excess
Camber Effect
5-B1.Example2
5-B1.Example1
5-B1.Example2 D Dimension from Girder Schedule (120
days)
= 7.55
5-B1.Example2
C
Dimension from Girder Schedule
5-B1.Example2
= 2.57
5-B1.Example3
144.4
2
144.4
29500
0.87 4.98
=
5-B1.Example2
5-B1.Example3
144.4 2
144.4
29500
0.87
0.87
5-B1.Example3
144.4 2
144.4
29500
Profile
Effect
144.4 2 144.4 29500 0.87
5-B1.Example3
144.4
2
144.4
29500
Horizontal
Curve Effect
5-B1.Example4
95000.87
144.4
144.4
2
144.4
29500
0.87
2 180
29500 0.87
5-B1.Example3
Chord
Length
144.4
144.4
180
5-B1.Example4
95000.87
144.4
5-B1.Example4
0.87
180 95000.87
180 144.4
144.4
180
180
180
180
5-B1.Example4
Curve
Length
95000.87
1.5
1.5144.4
0.04 180 144.4
180
5-B1.Example5
0.1
95000.87
144.4
5-B1.Example4
1.5
1.5144.4
0.04
95000.87
144.4
180
5-B1.Example5 180
9500
180
180
1.5
1.5144.4
0.04 0.1
5-B1.Example5
1.5
1.5144.4
0.04
9500
0.1
0.1
9500
1.5
1.5144.4
0.04
9500
5-B1.Example5
0.1
1.5
1.55.144.4
1.5
1.5144.4 0.04
9500
1.5144.4
1.5
5-B1.Example6
0.04
2.19
1.5
1.55.144.4
100
0.1
5-B1.Example5
0.1
100800
5-B1.Example6 Vertical
9500
Effect
Curve
1.5 1.55.144.4
9500 2.19
1.55.144.4
5-B1.Example6 1.5
100
100800
2.19
2.19
100
100
(+ forsag, for
crown)
1.5100800
1.55.144.4
100800
5-B1.Example6
2.19
1.5
1.55.144.4
100
100800
1.5
1.55.144.4
5-B1.Example7
0.1
2.19
2.0
2.19
5-B1.Example6
2.19
5-B1.Example7
100
100800
0.1 2.19
2.0
100
100800
2.0 49
5-B1.Example7
0.1
2.19
Girder
Orientation
Effect
5-B1.Example8
0.1
2.19
2.0
49 4
49
2
2
5-B1.Example8
49
5-B1.Example8
5-B1.Example7
0.1
2.19
4
9
5-B1.Example8
4
29 2
2
2
0.1 2.19
2 2.0
2
5-B1.Example7
0.1 2.19 2.0
A Dimension
95000.87
2 49
2
49
2
49
22
99
2
2
49
2
9
2
5-B1.Example9
5-B1.Example9
5-B1.Example10
5-B1.Example9
5-B1.Example9
Round 5-B1.Example10
to nearest = 12.25
2 9 92
92
Minimum
22
99
92
A
Dimension,
2
9
92
5-B1.Example10
5-B1.Example10
A Dimension = 12
Page 5-B1-11
Concrete Structures
Page 5-B1-12
Chapter 5
Appendix 5-B2
Vacant
Page 5-B2-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5-B2-2
Chapter 5
Appendix 5-B3
Page 5-B3-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5-B3-2
Chapter 5
Post-tensioned
Appendix 5-B4
Box Girder Bridges
Page 5-B4-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5-B4-2
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5-B4-3
Concrete Structures
Page 5-B4-4
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5-B4-5
Concrete Structures
Page 5-B4-6
Chapter 5
Appendix
Appendix 5-B5
References
ORIGIN := 1
Design Outline
Page 5-B5-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
1. Material Properties
1.1 Concrete - Prestressed Girder
wc := 0.165kcf
wcE := 0.155kcf
K1 := 1.0
1.5
f'c
wcE
Ec := 33000 K1
ksi if f' c 15ksi = 5871 ksi
ksi
kcf
"error" otherwise
1.5
f'ci
wcE
Eci := 33000 K1
ksi = 5515 ksi
ksi
kcf
f'c
fr := 0.24
ksi = 0.700 ksi
ksi
f' ci
frL := 0.24
ksi = 0.657 ksi
ksi
f'c
fr.Mcr.min := 0.37
ksi = 1.079 ksi
ksi
f'cs := 4 ksi
wcs := 0.155kcf
wcsE := 0.150kcf
1.5
f'cs
wcsE
Ecs := 33000 K1
ksi if f'c 15ksi = 3834 ksi
ksi
kcf
"error" otherwise
1 :=
= 0.85
f'cs 4ksi
1ksi
otherwise
Page 5-B5-2
Chapter 5
dia( bar) :=
Concrete Structures
0.375 in if bar = 3
area( bar ) :=
0.500 in if bar = 4
0.110 in
0.197 in
0.625 in if bar = 5
0.750 in if bar = 6
0.309 in
0.875in if bar = 7
0.445 in
1.000in if bar = 8
0.600 in
1.128in if bar = 9
1.270in if bar = 10
0.786 in
1.410in if bar = 11
1.003 in
1.693in if bar = 14
1.270 in
2.257in if bar = 18
1.561 in
"ERROR" otherwise
2.251 in
3.998 in
if bar = 3
if bar = 4
if bar = 5
if bar = 6
if bar = 7
if bar = 8
if bar = 9
if bar = 10
if bar = 11
if bar = 14
if bar = 18
"ERROR" otherwise
fy := 60 ksi
Es := 29000 ksi
Ep := 28500 ksi
db := 0.6 in
Ap :=
0.153in
0.217in
if d b = 0.5in
= 0.217 in
if d b = 0.6in
lt := 60 db = 36.0 in
Page 5-B5-3
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
2. Structure Definition
2.1 Bridge Geometry
girder := "interior"
BW := 38 ft
S := 6.5 ft
Nb := 6
sk := 30 deg
L := 130ft
P2 := 1.973ft = 23.68 in
GL := L + 2 P2 = 133.946 ft
cw := 10.5 in
overhang :=
oe := 7in
of := 12in
BW Nb 1 S
+ cw = 3.625 ft
ts := 7 in
twear := 0.5in
tdia := 8in
hdia := 48in
2.4 Prestressing
Nh := 12
Ns := 26
Nt := 6
xh := 0.4 GL = 53.58 ft
sbottom := 2in
Page 5-B5-4
H := 75%
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
girdertype := "WF74G"
dg := BDMTable5.6.1
in = 74.0 in
row , 2
Ag := BDMTable5.6.1
in = 923.5 in
row , 3
Ig := BDMTable5.6.1
in = 734356 in
row , 4
Ybg := BDMTable5.6.1
in = 35.660 in
row , 5
VSr := BDMTable5.6.1
in = 3.190 in
row , 7
kip
wg := Ag wc = 1.058
ft
bw := 6.125in
bf := 49in
bf.bot := 38.375in
Iy := 72018.4in
L1 := 5ft
LL := 10ft
LT := 10ft
) )1 = 12.0
2
4
3
3
Page 5-B5-5
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
barv := 5
VR
:= 1.5in
VR
:= VR
VR
:= VR
VR
:= VR
VR
:= 20in
VR
:= VR
VR
:= 2.5in
VR
:= VR
VR
:= 72in
VR
:= VR
VR
:= 6in
VR
:= VR
VR
:= 120in
VR
:= VR
VR
:= 12in
VR
:= VR
VR
:= 120in
VR
:= VR
VR
:= 12in
VR
:= VR
1, 1
1, 2
2, 1
2, 2
3, 1
3, 2
4, 1
4, 2
5, 1
5, 2
1, 1
11 , 1
11 , 2
10 , 1
10 , 2
9, 1
9, 2
8, 1
8, 2
7, 1
7, 2
VR
6, 1
:= GL
6, 2
Page 5-B5-6
2, 1
2, 2
3, 1
3, 2
4, 1
4, 2
5, 1
5, 2
VR
i, 1
VR
i, 1
i=7
:= 18in
VR =
1, 2
11
i=1
VR
1, 1
in
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
rows( VR)
chk
:= if
VR = GL , "OK" , "NG" = "OK"
3, 1
i, 1
i=1
Afi := 0.75in
AEx := 2.5in
Super := 0.02
SH := 0ft
RH := 0ft
LVC := 1000ft
g1 := 0
g2 := 0
AHC :=
)2
1.5 SH ft Super
RH ft
GL
1.5 g2 g1
ft
AVC :=
in = 0.000 in
100
LVC
in = 0.000 in
ft
bf
AOrient := Super
= 0.490 in
2
1
AP1 := Ceil ts2 + Afi + AEx + AHC + AVC + AOrient , in = 11.25 in
4
Page 5-B5-7
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
chk
3, 2
chk
bi := S = 78.00 in
be :=
3, 3
b i if girder = "interior"
= 78.00 in
b ex if girder = "exterior"
Ecs
n :=
be.trans := be n = 50.94 in
Ec
= 0.65
Yb :=
Yt := dg Yb = 26.69 in
Yts := ts + Yt = 33.69 in
Igc := Ag Yb Ybg
Sb := Ic Yb = 25069 in
St := Ic Yt = 44450 in
Aslab + Ag
= 47.31 in
+ Islab = 326347 in
4
+ Ig = 859801 in
4
Ic 1
= 53919 in3
Sts :=
Yts n
Page 5-B5-8
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
axlewidth := 6ft
floor
NL :=
if BW > 24 ft = 3.0
12 ft
BW
2 if 24 ft BW 20 ft
1 otherwise
mp :=
return 1.20 if NL = 1
= 0.85
return 1.00 if NL = 2
return 0.85 if NL = 3
return 0.65 otherwise
LLserIII := 0.8
f := 1.0
dt
Page 5-B5-9
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
c := 0.75
v := 0.90
( (
) ) ))
DC := 1.25
DW := 1.5
LL := 1.75
D := 1.00
R := 1.00
I := 1.00
Page 5-B5-10
LLfat := 1.5
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
0ft
0.000
P2 + 0.1L
14.973
P2 + 0.2L
27.973
P2 + 0.3L
40.973
P2 + 0.4L
53.973
SE := P2 + 0.5L SE = 66.973 ft
P2 + 0.6L
79.973
P2 + 0.7L
92.973
P2 + 0.8L
105.973
P2 + 0.9L
118.973
GL
133.946
SE :=
Sections SE
ADD P2 GL P2 0.4GL 0.6GL P2 + d est GL P2 d est lt GL lt L1 GL L1 LL GL LT
1, j
1, j
if Match
return Sections
SE := sort( SE)
rp := match lt , SE 1 = 3.0
( )
rc := match( P2 + dest , SE) 1 = 5.0
SE =
ft
Page 5-B5-11
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
(
)
rl2 := match( GL L1 , SE) 1 = 20.0
rbL := match( LL , SE) 1 = 6.0
rbR := match( GL LT , SE) 1 = 18.0
i := 1 .. rows( SE)
M uniform( w , L , x) :=
Vuniform( w , L , x) :=
M point( P , a , L , x) :=
w x
2
( L x)
Vpoint( P , a , L , x) :=
if 0ft a x
if x < a L
P a
L
if 0ft a < x
P ( L a)
L
if x a L
Page 5-B5-12
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
M cant( w , a , b , L , x) :=
return
w x
2
if x a
2
a+L+b
w x
return
( a + L + b )
b ( x a)
2
2
L
return
w ( a + L + b x)
if a < x < a + L
if a + L x
1
M :=
Mom
11
M
:=
Mom
1
V :=
ndia :=
= 3.0
DiaSpacing :=
DiaL :=
DiaWt :=
L
n dia + 1
S bw
cos sk
( )
= 32.5 ft
= 82.99 in
Page 5-B5-13
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
2
M :=
for j 1 .. n dia
a a + DiaSpacing
Mom Mom + M point DiaWt , a , L , SE P2
i
i
i
Mom
2
V :=
for j 1 .. n dia
a a + DiaSpacing
v v + Vpoint DiaWt , a , L , SE P2
i
i
i
tpu := A t s2 = 3.75 in
kip
wpu := t pu b f wcs = 0.198
ft
3
M := for i rsL .. rsR
Mom
3
V :=
ws :=
S
ts2 + +
2 2
oe + o f
2
overhang
= 0.630
kip
ft
bf
2
Page 5-B5-14
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
4
M :=
Mom
4
V :=
tb := 0.460 kip ft
wb :=
2 tb
Nb
tb
if Nb < 6
= 0.153
kip
ft
otherwise
5
M :=
5
V :=
Mom
for i rsL .. rsR
v Vuniform wb , L , SE P2
i
i
wo :=
= 0.152
kip
S
2in + overhang cw 0.140kcf if girder = "exterior"
2
ft
6
M :=
Mom
Page 5-B5-15
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
6
V :=
8kip
HL93TruckM( x , L) :=
Axles 32kip
32kip
0ft
Locations 14ft
28ft
rows
for i 1 .. rows
M M point Axles , Loc , L , x
i
i
i
M , Moment
Moment max
Loc Locations
xLx
while Loc
rows
for i 1 .. rows
M M point Axles , Loc , L , x
i
i
i
Moment max
M , Moment
Moment
Page 5-B5-16
z := 0ft , 10ft .. L
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
3000
2000
HL93TruckM( z , L)
kip ft
1000
50
100
z
7
M :=
Mom
8kip
HL93TruckVP( x , L) := Axles 32kip
32kip
0ft
Loc 14ft
28ft
rows rows( Loc)
Shear 0kip
while Loc
rows
for i 1 .. rows
V Vpoint Axles , Loc , L , x
i
i
i
Shear max
V , Shear
Shear
Page 5-B5-17
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
32kip
HL93TruckVN( x , L) := Axles 32kip
8kip
0ft
Loc 14ft
28ft
rows rows( Loc)
Shear 0kip
while Loc
rows
for i 1 .. rows
V Vpoint Axles , Loc , L , x
i
i
i
Shear min
V, Shear
Shear
Shear Envelope Along Span - HL93 Truck
100
50
HL93TruckVP( z , L)
kip
HL93TruckVN( z , L)
kip
50
100
50
100
z
7
V :=
GL
2
, HL93TruckVP SE P2 , L , HL93TruckVN SE P2 , L
Page 5-B5-18
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
HL93TandemM( x , L) :=
25kip
25kip
0ft
Locations
4 ft
Axles
rows
for i 1 .. rows
M M point Axles , Locations , L , x
i
i
i
Moment max
M , Moment
Moment
Maximum Bending Moments Along Span - HL93 Tandem
Maximum Moment (kip ft)
2000
1500
HL93TandemM ( z , L)
kip ft
1000
500
0
50
100
z
8
M :=
Mom
Page 5-B5-19
Concrete Structures
HL93TandemVP ( x , L) :=
Chapter 5
25kip
25kip
0ft
Locations
4 ft
Axles
rows
for i 1 .. rows
V Vpoint Axles , Locations , L , x
i
i
i
V , Shear
Shear max
Shear
HL93TandemVN( x , L) :=
25kip
25kip
0ft
Locations
4 ft
Axles
rows
for i 1 .. rows
V Vpoint Axles , Locations , L , x
i
i
i
V , Shear
Shear min
Shear
Page 5-B5-20
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
60
40
HL93TandemVP ( z , L)
20
kip
HL93TandemVN( z , L)
20
kip
40
60
50
100
z
8
V :=
GL
, HL93TandemVP SE P2 , L , HL93TandemVN SE P2 , L
Mom
9
V :=
w
wlane ( SE P2)
L ( SE P2)
GL lane
i
i
v if SE
,
,
i
2 L
2 L
i 2
5.10 Maximum Live Load including Dynamic Load Allowance, per lane
IM := 33 %
Page 5-B5-21
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
10
M
:=
i, 7
,M
) (1 + IM) + Mi, 9
i, 8
Mom
10
V
:=
GL
2
, max V
i, 7
,V
i, 8
rows( SE) , 1
:= 0kip
8kip
HL93TruckMFat( x , L) :=
Axles 32kip
32kip
0ft
Locations 14ft
44ft
rows
for i 1 .. rows
M M point Axles , Loc , L , x
i
i
i
Moment max
M , Moment
Loc Locations
xLx
while Loc
rows
for i 1 .. rows
M M point Axles , Loc , L , x
i
i
i
Page 5-B5-22
)
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.14
April 2015
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
point
Moment max
M , Moment
Moment
Maximum Bending Moments Along Span - HL93 Truck
Maximum Moment (kip ft)
2000
1500
HL93TruckMFat ( z , L)
1000
kip ft
500
0
50
100
z
M FAT :=
Mom HL93TruckMFat SE P2 , L
Mom
M FAT
rows( SE)
:= 0kip ft
IMFAT := 15 %
M FAT =
kip ft
Page 5-B5-23
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
rsL = 2.0
rsR = 22.0
rp = 3.0
rc = 5.0
rh = 10.0
rm = 12.0
rl1 = 4.0
rl2 = 20.0
rbL = 6.0
rbR = 18.0
M=
Page 5-B5-24
kip ft
Chapter 5
V=
Concrete Structures
kip
chk
(
)
chk
:= if ( Nb 4 , "OK" , "NG" ) = "OK"
5, 2
5, 1
Page 5-B5-25
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
chk
chk
chk
chk
5, 3
5, 4
5, 5
4 4
5, 6
6 4
0.6
0.2
Kg
S
S
DFi := 0.075 +
9.5 ft L L t 3
s
0.4
0.3
K
S
S g
0.06 +
14 ft L L t 3
s
0.1
if NL > 1
= 0.604
0.1
if NL = 1
curbmin.sp := 2ft
x S + d bar curbmin.sp
Numerator 0ft
UseAxleWidth 1
while x > 0ft
Numerator Numerator + x
if UseAxleWidth
x x axlewidth
UseAxleWidth 0
otherwise
x x ( 12 ft axlewidth)
UseAxleWidth 1
DFlever :=
DFe :=
Numerator
= 0.654
2 S
= 0.654
otherwise
Page 5-B5-26
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
chk
chk
chk
chk
c1 :=
5, 7
5, 8
5, 9
5 , 10
Kg
0.25
L t 3
s
0.25
= 0.090
0.5
DF :=
( ( (
otherwise
) ))1.5 = 0.961
= 0.580
0.4
0.3
K
S
S g
0.06 +
L 3
14 ft L t
s
DFiFAT :=
1.2
DFeFAT :=
DFFAT :=
= 0.352
0.1
= 0.654
otherwise
= 0.338
S
S
S
DFvi := max0.36 +
, 0.2 +
25
ft
12
ft
35
ft
2.0
= 0.707
Page 5-B5-27
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
DFve :=
= 0.707
otherwise
chk
3
L t s
SKv := 1.0 + 0.20
K tan( sk) = 1.065
g
DFv :=
5 , 11
0.3
= 0.753
Page 5-B5-28
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
rsL = 2.0
rsR = 22.0
rp = 3.0
rc = 5.0
rh = 10.0
rm = 12.0
rl1 = 4.0
rl2 = 20.0
rbL = 6.0
rbR = 18.0
Sts = 53919 in
3
Stg = 19154 in
Sbg = 20593 in
St = 44450 in
Sb = 25069 in
Page 5-B5-29
Concrete Structures
ST :=
Chapter 5
SB :=
for j 1 .. 4
for i 1 .. rows( SE)
M
Stress
i, j
i, j
Stress
i, j
Stg
i, j
Stress
i, j
St
i, j
M
Stress
i, j
i, j
Sb
Stress
i, j
Sts
for j 7 .. 10
M
i, j
Stress
i, j
DF
Sb
M
Stress
i , 11
Stg
i, j
DF
Sts
i , 11
i, j
Stress
ST =
DF
i , 11
St
0ksi
for j 5 .. 6
for j 7 .. 10
M
Stress
i, j
Sbg
i, j
Stress
i, j
for j 7 .. 10
Stress
for j 5 .. 6
i, j
for j 1 .. 4
for j 5 .. 6
Stress
SS :=
for j 1 .. 4
i , 11
0ksi
Stress
i , 11
Sbg
Stress
Page 5-B5-30
ksi
Chapter 5
SB =
SS =
Concrete Structures
ksi
ksi
Page 5-B5-31
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Page 5-B5-32
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
ft.PCT.lim := 0ksi
Page 5-B5-33
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Np := Ns + Nh = 38
Aps := Ap Np = 8.246 in
Atemp := Ap Nt = 1.302 in
Apstemp := Ap Nt + Np = 9.548 in
E :=
2
2
4 in if Ns 2
2 4 in + Ns 2 2 in
Ns
4 2 in + Ns 4 4 in
Ns
4 4 in + Ns 4 2 in
Ns
if 3 Ns 6
if 7 Ns 8
if 9 Ns 20
16 2in + Ns 16 4 in
Ns
if 21 Ns 32
16 2in + 16 4 in + Ns 32 6 in
Ns
if 33 Ns 42
16 2in + 16 4 in + 10 6in + Ns 42 8 in
Ns
if 43 Ns 46
"error" otherwise
E = 2.769 in
es := Ybg E = 32.891 in
Page 5-B5-34
FCL := 4in
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
FCL.lim :=
4in if 1 Nh 12
12 4in + Nh 12 6 in
Nh
if 13 Nh 24
12 4in + 12 6 in + Nh 24 8 in
if 25 Nh 36
Nh
"error" otherwise
FCL.lim = 4.000 in
chk
7, 1
Fo := 9in
Fo.lim :=
increment 1
= 9.000 in
e 2in
for i 1 .. Nh
if increment
increment 0
e e + 2in
increment 1 otherwise
Product Product + e
return
chk
7, 2
Product
Nh
dg Fo FCL
slopeh :=
maxslopeh :=
slopelim :=
= 0.094877
xh
d g Fo FCL + Fo.lim 4in
xh
1
6
1
8
if d b = 0.5in
= 0.1250
= 0.1027
if d b = 0.6in
"error" otherwise
chk
7, 3
Page 5-B5-35
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
EC :=
)) = 49.8 kip
EC
Ybg FCL if xh SE GL xh
i
EC
EC
EC
i, 1
i, 1
i, 1
(
(
es Ns + EC
i, 2
Nh
i, 1
Np
EC
i, 3
Np + etemp Nt
i, 2
Np + Nt
EC
EC =
in
to := 1day
24.0 to
log
Page 5-B5-36
fpR0 :=
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Given
Eci Ag
Ig
Ig
Eci Ag
Ig
Ig
Pps
pEST
Ep
fpED1 :=
Ec
Ep M rm , 5 Yb Ybg + ECrm , 2
fpED2 :=
Ec
Ic
Ig
) = 0.702 ksi
Page 5-B5-37
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
chk
st :=
7, 4
= 0.588
1 + f'ci ksi
fpbt Aps
fpLTH := 3
h st + 3 h st + 0.6 ksi = 5.278 ksi
ksi Ag
fpbt Aps
fpLT := 10.0
h st + 12.0 h st + 2.4 ksi = 19.111 ksi
ksi Ag
Ptr etemp EC
Ptr
rm , 2
fptr :=
+
= 0.129 ksi
Ag
Ig
Ep
fptr :=
f = 0.626 ksi
Ec ptr
chk
7, 5
Page 5-B5-38
Chapter 5
TRAN :=
Concrete Structures
if SE < l t
i
lt
TR 1 if l t SE GL lt
i
i
GL SE
TR
i
lt
if GL lt < SE
TR
TRAN =
Page 5-B5-39
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
PS1 =
PS1 :=
Pp Pp ECi , 2 Pt Pt etemp
PS
i, 1
Ag
Ag
Stg
Stg
Pp Pp ECi , 2 Pt Pt etemp
+
+
+
PS
i, 2
Ag
Ag
Sbg
Sbg
PS
STRESS1 :=
Page 5-B5-40
i, 1
i, 2
PS1
+ ST
PS1
+ SB
i, 1
i, 2
i , 11
i , 11
STRESS1 =
ksi
ksi
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
chk
(
)
chk
:= if ( max( STRESS1) ft.TL.lim , "OK" , "NG" ) = "OK"
8, 2
8, 1
PS2 =
PS2 :=
Pp Pp ECi , 2
PS
i, 1
Ag
Stg
EC
Pp
p
i, 2
+
PS
i, 2
Ag
Sbg
PS
ksi
Page 5-B5-41
Concrete Structures
STRESS2 :=
Chapter 5
STRESS2 =
i, 1
i, 2
PS2
+ ST
PS2
+ SB
i, 1
i, 2
i, 1
i, 1
STR
chk
ksi
(
)
chk
:= if ( max( STRESS2) ft.SP.lim , "OK" , "NG" ) = "OK"
8, 4
8, 3
PS3 :=
Pp Pp ECi , 2
PS
i, 1
Ag
Stg
PS3 =
PS
Page 5-B5-42
PS
i, 2
Pp Pp ECi , 2
+
Ag
Sbg
ksi
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
STRESS3 :=
PS3
i, 1
i, 2
PS3
i, 2
i, j
j =1
STRESS3 =
STR
chk
i, j
SB
j =1
STR
ST
i, 1
ksi
(
)
chk
:= if ( max( STRESS3) ft.PCT.lim , "OK" , "NG" ) = "OK"
8, 6
8, 5
fpeP4 := fpj + fpR0 + fpES + fpLT + fptr + fpED1 + fpED2 = 173.4 ksi
Page 5-B5-43
Concrete Structures
PS4 :=
Chapter 5
Pp Pp ECi , 2
PS
i, 1
Ag
Stg
EC
Pp
p
i, 2
PS
+
i, 2
Ag
Sbg
PS
STRESS4 :=
PS4
i, 1
i, 2
PS4
i, 2
i, j
PS4 =
ksi
STRESS4 =
i, j
j =1
STR
Page 5-B5-44
SS
i, 3
j =1
STR
i, j
SB
j =1
STR
ST
i, 1
ksi
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
chk
chk
8, 7
1
2
:= if min STRESS4 , STRESS4
fc.PP.lim , "OK" , "NG" = "OK"
8, 8
1
2
:= if max STRESS4 , STRESS4
ft.PCT.lim , "OK" , "NG" = "OK"
8.5 Service I for Final with Live Load - Bridge Site 3 - Compressive Stresses
PS5 =
PS5 :=
Pp Pp ECi , 2
PS
i, 1
Ag
Stg
Pp Pp ECi , 2
PS
+
i, 2
Ag
Sbg
PS
ksi
Page 5-B5-45
Concrete Structures
STRESS5 :=
Chapter 5
STRESS5 =
STR
i, 1
PS5
i, 1
ST
i, j
+ ST
i , 10
j =1
6
STR
i, 2
PS5
i, 2
SB
i, j
j =1
6
STR
i, 3
SS
i, j
+ SS
i , 10
j =1
STR
8.6 Fatigue I for Final with Live Load - Bridge Site 3 - Compressive Stresses
SFATLL :=
i, 1
i, 2
Stress
Page 5-B5-46
St
SFATLL =
Stress
Stress
ksi
Sb
ksi
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
STRESS6 :=
PS5
i, 1
STR
i, 1
ST
i, j
j =1
+ SFATLL
i, 1
2
6
PS5
i, 2
STR
i, 2
STRESS6 =
j =1
SB
i, j
STR
chk
8 , 10
ksi
8.7 Service III for Final with Live Load - Bridge Site 3 - Tensile Stresses
STRESS7 :=
STR
i, 1
PS5
i, 1
+ LLserIII ST
i, j
i , 10
ST
j =1
6
STR
i, 2
PS5
i, 2
j =1
STR
SB
+ LLserIII SB
i, j
i , 10
STRESS7 =
ksi
Page 5-B5-47
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Page 5-B5-48
8 , 11
1
2
:= if max STRESS7 , STRESS7
ft.PCT.lim , "OK" , "NG" = "OK"
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
M u :=
M + DW M + LL DF M
UM DC
i
i, j
i, 6
i , 10
j
=
1
UM
Mu =
kip ft
chk
k := 2 1.04
hf := ts = 7.0 in
9, 1
fpy
fpu
= 0.28
Page 5-B5-49
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
dp := hf + Ytg + EC
i, 2
i
cfI :=
i
crI :=
cI :=
fpu
c cfI otherwise
i
i
c
dp =
cfI =
crI =
cI =
in
cI
i
fpsI := fpu 1 k
i
dp
i
Page 5-B5-50
in
in
in
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
fpsI =
ksi
fpsIrm 2 f
pe
ld :=
d = 129.51 in
3 ksi b
ksi
fps :=
f
f if lt < SE ld
FPS fpe +
i
i
l d lt psIi pe
fps =
FPS fpe +
i
GL lt SE
i
ld lt
ksi
Page 5-B5-51
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
cf :=
i
0.85 f'cs 1 b w
Aps fps
i
cr :=
c :=
a := 1 c
i
i
0.85 f'cs 1 b e
for i 1 .. rows( SE)
c cr if 1 cr h f
i
i
i
c cf otherwise
i
i
c
cf =
cr =
c=
a=
in
in
in
in
M n :=
MN Aps fps dp
i
i i
MN Aps fps dp
i
i i
ai h
+ 0.85 f'cs ( b e b w) h f f if h f < ai
2
2 2
a
i
otherwise
2
MN
Page 5-B5-52
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
dt := h f + d g sbottom = 79.000 in
:= if c > 0 , p dt , c , 1.0
i
i
i
M r := M n
) )
Mn =
Mr =
kip ft
kip ft
15000
Mu
kip ft
Mr
10000
5000
kip ft
50
100
SEi
Page 5-B5-53
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
chk
9, 2
CH "OK"
:=
= "OK"
fcpe := PS5
i, 2
i
M dnc :=
Sc := Sb = 25069 in
i, j
j =1
3
1 := 1.56
2 := 1.1
3 := 1.0
Sc
M dnc =
Page 5-B5-54
kip ft
M cr.mod =
kip ft
Mr =
kip ft
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
chk
9, 3
:=
CH "OK"
= "OK"
CH
Page 5-B5-55
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Vu :=
Vu =
V + DW V + LL DFv V
UV DC
i
i, j
i, 6
i , 10
j =1
UV
kip
de := d p
i
i
chk
10 , 1
:= if
Mn
dvI :=
h := d g + t s = 81.0 in
Aps fps
i
Page 5-B5-56
Chapter 5
de =
Concrete Structures
dv =
in
dvI =
in
in
dc := dv
= 4.8600 ft
rs
chk
10 , 2
Ph := fpe TRAN Ap Nh
i
i
Vp :=
i
Ph sin harp
i
otherwise
Nu := 0.0 kip
Page 5-B5-57
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Ph =
Vp =
kip
kip
h
Apsv := if ts + Ytg + EC , Np Ap , Ns Ap
i
,
1
2
i
RF :=
fps
i
fpsI
i
2
As := 0.0 in
M uv := max M u , Vu Vp d v
i
i
i
i
i
Muvi
i
i
i
i
s := min max
, 0 , .006
i
Es As + Ep Apsv RF
i
i
s :=
i
rc
if SE SE
i
rc
if SE SE
i
s otherwise
i
Apsv =
RF =
s =
M uv =
Page 5-B5-58
in
kip ft
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
:= 29 + 3500 s deg
i
i
4.8
:=
i
1 + 750 s
i
deg
bv := bw = 6.125 in
Page 5-B5-59
Concrete Structures
s :=
i
return VR
return VR
Chapter 5
2, 2
if SE VR
i
1, 1
if SE GL VR
rows( VR) 1 , 2
rows( VR) , 1
return VR
k, 2
if SE
i
VR
j, 1
j =1
s=
in
f'c
Vc := 0.0316
ksi b v dv
i
i
i
ksi
Av fy d v cot
i
i
( )
Vs :=
i
Vc + Vs + Vp
i
i
i
Vn := min
0.25 f'c b v d v + Vp
i
i
i
Vc =
kip v Vn =
Page 5-B5-60
kip
Vs =
kip Vn =
kip
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
chk
10 , 3
:=
CH "OK"
= "OK"
Shear (kip)
Vu
600
kip
v Vn
kip
400
i
200
0
50
100
SEi
b v s
f' c
i
Av.min := 0.0316
ksi
ksi
fy
i
Av.min =
chk
10 , 4
:=
CH "OK"
= "OK"
in
Page 5-B5-61
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
vu :=
i
Vu v Vp
i
i
v bv d v
i
smax :=
i
vu =
smax =
chk
10 , 5
:=
CH "OK"
= "OK"
ksi
in
cN := c = 0.75
Aps.req :=
i
a 0in
if SE = 0ft SE = GL
i
V
Mui
V
Nu
u i V 0.5 min V , u i cot 1 if SE SE GL SE
+ 0.5
+
pi
rc
i
rc
si ( i) fps
cN v
dv i
v
i
V
V
Page 5-B5-62
Chapter 5
chk
10 , 6
Concrete Structures
:=
CH "OK"
Aps.req =
= "OK"
in
ts
3
Qslab := Aslab Yt + = 10763.3 in
2
kip
Pc := wcs ts b e = 0.588
ft
avf :=
Av
s
Vu Qslab
i
Vui :=
i
cvi := 0.28ksi
:= 1.0
K1vi := 0.3
K2 := 1.8ksi
Ic
Vri := v Vni
i
i
Page 5-B5-63
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
chk
10 , 7
CH "OK"
:=
= "OK"
chk
10 , 8
CH "OK"
:=
= "OK"
CH
avf.min :=
i
return 0
in
if
ft
Vui
i
bf
< 0.210ksi
0.05 bf
1 1.33 Vuii
2
1
in otherwise
min
, max
cvi bf Pc , 0
f
ft
fy
v
y
ksi
chk
10 , 9
:=
CH "OK"
= "OK"
Vui =
Vri =
avf =
avf.min =
Page 5-B5-64
kip
ft
kip
ft
in
ft
in
ft
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
dg
lsplit :=
= 18.50 in
4
As.burst :=
= 4.326 in
x i if lsplit >
VR
j,1
j =1
for i 1 .. x + 1
VRi , 1
if i x
AV AV + Av ceil
VR
i, 2
i 1
VR
j,1
split
j
=
1
otherwise
AV AV + Av floor
VR
i, 2
AV
fs := 20ksi
chk
10 , 10
Page 5-B5-65
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Straight( P , e , E , I , x , L) :=
x ( x L) otherwise
Harp P , e1 , e2 , E , I , x , L , b :=
return
return
return
P e x
(2
6 E I b
P e
x + 3 b 3 b L +
(
6 E I
3x + b 3 L x +
P e ( L x)
6 E I b
P e2
2 E I
P e2
2 E I
x ( x L) if x b
x ( x L) if b < x < L b
( L x) + 3 b 3 b L +
2
P e2
2 E I
x ( x L) if L b x
)
)
Page 5-B5-66
H := Harp fpeP1 Nh Ap , EC
, EC
, E , I , SE P2 , L , xh P2
i
rm , 1
rs L , 1 ci g
i
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
S =
T =
TR =
H =
in
in
in
in
POINT( P , a , x , L , E , I) :=
P ( L a) x
6 E I L
2
return
return
L ( L a) x if x < a
2
P a ( L a)
3 E I L
P a ( L x)
6 E I L
if x = a
L a ( L x)
2
otherwise
Page 5-B5-67
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
UNIFORM ( w , x , L , E , I) :=
L 2 L x + x
otherwise
G := UNIFORM wg , SE P2 , L , Eci , Ig
i
i
SL := UNIFORM wpu + ws , SE P2 , L , Ec , Ig
i
i
BAR := UNIFORM wb , SE P2 , L , Ec , Ic
i
i
DIA :=
for j 1 .. n dia
a a + DiaSpacing
POINT DiaWt , a , SE P2 , L , Ec , Ig
i
rows( SE)
0in
G =
in SL =
BAR =
in DIA =
in
in
Page 5-B5-68
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
VSr
H
khc := 1.56 0.008 = 0.960
%
kf ( f ) :=
1+
f
ksi
t
ktd( t , f ) :=
day
61 4
+ day
ksi
ti
cr( t , ti , f ) := 1.9 ks khc kf ( f ) ktd( t , f )
day
0.118
(
(
)
)
(
)
30.90 := cr( 30day, 90day, f'c) = 0.308
CR1min := 10.7 S + H + T + G
i
i
i
i
i
CR1max := 90.7 S + H + T + G
i
i
i
i
i
Page 5-B5-69
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
)(
)(
CR1min =
in CR1max =
in CR2min =
inCR2max =
C := SL + BAR
i
EXCESS120 := D120 C
i
i
i
Page 5-B5-70
in
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
D40 =
D120 =
C=
EXCESS120 =
in
in
0.5 D40
D120
chk
rm
rm
rm
in
= 1.067 in
= 2.282 in
= 1.375 in
11 , 1
:= if EXCESS120
rm
L
LL.lim :=
= 1.950 in
800
Ybs = 77.500 in
Page 5-B5-71
in
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Yb2 :=
= 47.48 in
Aslab2 + Nb Ag
+ Islab2 = 1974622 in
4
+ Nb Ig = 5179723 in
4
8kip
HL93Truck( x , L) := Axles 32kip
32kip
0ft
Locations 14ft
28ft
rows rows( Locations )
Loc Locations
Deflection 0in
while Loc
rows
for i 1 .. rows
POINT Axles , Loc , x, L , Ec , Ic2
i
i
i
Deflection max
, Deflection
Loc Locations
xLx
while Loc
rows
for i 1 .. rows
POINT Axles , Loc , x, L , Ec , Ic2
i
i
i
Deflection max
, Deflection
Deflection
Page 5-B5-72
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Deflection
TRUCK := HL93Truck SE P2 , L
TRUCK =
LANE =
SUPER =
in
chk
11 , 2
in
in
Page 5-B5-73
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
M Lift
STLift :=
i
Stg
SBLift :=
M Lift
i
Sbg
M Lift =
SBLift =
STLift =
kip ft
ksi
ksi
Page 5-B5-74
Chapter 5
PSLift :=
Concrete Structures
PSLift =
Pp Pp ECi , 2 Pt Pt etemp
PS
i, 1
Ag
Ag
Stg
Stg
Pp Pp ECi , 2 Pt Pt etemp
+
+
+
PS
i, 2
Ag
Ag
Sbg
Sbg
PS
STRESSLift :=
STR
PS Lift
+ STLift
i, 1
i, 1
i
STR
PS Lift
+ SBLift
i, 2
i, 2
i
STRESSLift =
STR
chk
12 , 1
ksi
ksi
( (
Page 5-B5-75
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
chk
12 , 2
elift := 0.25in
esweep :=
0.125in
10ft 2
GL = 0.837 in
LLift 1
FoL :=
= 0.523
GL 3
wg L1 LLift
16 Eci Ig
= 1.377 in
= 2.769 in
rm
+ Harp fpeP1 Nh Ap , EC
, EC , Eci , Ig , SE , GL , xh
rm , 1
1, 1
rm
ei
i :=
= 0.018 rad
yr
wg
1
6
5
2
3
4
5
zo :=
LLift L1 LLift + 3 L1 LLift + L1
12 Eci Iy GL 10
5
zo = 8.243 in
Page 5-B5-76
2Iy
2Iy
i
i , 1 b f
i , 2 b f.bot
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Mlatrl
Mlati
return min
, if SE < SE < SE
rl1
i
rl2
MLift 2
i
Mlatrl
return min
, if SE SE
i
rl2
MLift rl 2
2
i
zo
FScr.l :=
+
i
yr maxi
M lat =
max =
FScr.l =
kip ft
rad
chk
'max :=
yr 'max
FSf :=
= 2.385
z'o 'max + ei
12 , 3
( (
ei
2.5 zo
= 0.1827 rad
( (
Page 5-B5-77
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
chk
12 , 4
Wg := wg GL = 141.7 kip
chk
12 , 5
LS := GL LL LT = 113.95 ft
M Ship := M cant wg , LL , LT , LS , SE
i
i
M Ship
STShip :=
i
Stg
SBShip :=
i
M Ship
Sbg
M Ship =
STShip =
SBShip =
kip ft
ksi
ksi
Page 5-B5-78
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
PSShip :=
i, 1
Pp
Ag
Pp EC
i, 2
Stg
Pp Pp ECi , 2
PS
+
i, 2
Ag
Sbg
Pt
Pt etemp
Pt
Pt etemp
+
+
Ag
Sbg
Ag
Stg
PS
PSShip =
ksi
IMSH := 20%
Page 5-B5-79
Concrete Structures
STRESSShip1 :=
Chapter 5
i, 1
i, 2
PS Ship + STShip
i
i, 1
i, 3
i, 5
PS Ship + SBShip
i, 2
i
i, 6
(
)
STR PS Ship + SBShip ( 1 IMSH)
i, 4
i, 2
i
STR
STR
STR
STRESSShip1 =
chk
ksi
( (
)
)
chk
:= if ( max( STRESSShip1 ) ft.SP.lim , "OK" , "NG" ) = "OK"
12 , 7
12 , 6
Page 5-B5-80
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
se := 6%
Wg
kip in
kip in
kip in
K := max 28000
, 4000
ceil
= 32000
rad
rad
rad
18kip
K
r :=
eship := 1in
es.ship :=
Wg
= 225.77 in
0.125in
10ft
GL = 1.674 in
LS 1
FoLship :=
= 0.390
GL 3
hr := 24in
zmax :=
72in
2
= 36.0 in
5
5
5
LS
6 LT
6 LL
4
2
3
2
2
3
2
4
zo.ship :=
2LL LS + LL LS 2 LL LS LT + LS LT
2 LS LT
5
24 Ec Iy GL 5
5
wg
zo.ship = 4.779 in
r + ei.ship
eq :=
= 0.1119 rad
r y zo.ship
M latINCL := M Ship eq
i
i
Page 5-B5-81
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
STRESSShip2 :=
bf
PS Ship + STShip M latINCL
i, 1
i
i 2Iy
i, 1
STR
bf
PS Ship + STShip + M latINCL
i, 2
i
i 2Iy
i, 1
STR
b f.bot
PS Ship + SBShip M latINCL
i, 3
i
i 2Iy
i, 2
STR
b f.bot
PS Ship + SBShip + M latINCL
i, 4
i
i 2Iy
i, 2
STR
M latINCL =
STRESSShip2 =
kip ft
chk
Page 5-B5-82
( (
)
)
chk
:= if ( max( STRESSShip2 ) ft.SI.lim , "OK" , "NG" ) = "OK"
12 , 9
12 , 8
ksi
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
i
i , 2 b f
i , 5 b f.bot
MlatShrb
MlatShi
return min
, if SE
< SE < SE
rbL
i
rbR
MShip 2
i
MlatShrb
return min
,
if SE SE
i
rbR
2
MShiprb
R
r maxSh
FScr.2 :=
i
zo.ship maxSh + ei.ship + y maxSh
i
i
M latSh =
maxSh =
FScr.2 =
kip ft
rad
chk
'maxS :=
12 , 10
( (
zmax h r
r
+ = 0.2130 rad
Page 5-B5-83
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
r 'maxS
FSfS :=
= 1.616
z'oS 'maxS + ei.ship + y 'maxS
chk
Page 5-B5-84
12 , 11
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
chk =
NumberNG :=
= 0.0
i, j
= "NG"
Num
Page 5-B5-85
Concrete Structures
Page 5-B5-86
Chapter 5
Appendix
5-B6
Design Example
- Cast-in-Place Slab Design
Cast-in-Place Slab
Design Example
1 Structure
Design span
L := 120 ft
Roadway width
BW := 43 ft
Girder spacing
S := 9 ft
Skew angle
:= 0 deg
No. of girder
Nb := 5
cw := 10.5 in
overhang :=
BW ( Nb 1 ) S
+ cw
whma = 0.023
overhang = 4.375 ft
kip
ft
(3.6.1.3.3)
The design truck or tandem shall be positioned transversely such that the center of any
wheel load is not closer than (3.6.1.3.1)
for the design of the deck overhang - 1 ft from the face of the curb or railing , and
for the design of all other components - 2 ft from the edge of the design lane.
(3.6.1.3.4) For deck overhang design with a cantilever, not exceeding 6.0 ft from the
centerline of the exterior girder to the face of a continuous concrete railing, the wheel loads
may be replaced with a uniformly distributed line load of 1.0 klf intensity, located 1 ft from
the face of the railing.
if ( overhang cw 6 ft , "OK" , "NG" ) = "OK"
Horizontal loads on the overhang resulting from vehicle collision with barriers shall be considered
in accordance with the yield line analysis.
2.2 Dynamic Load Allowance (impact)
IM := 0.33
(3.6.2.1)
ts1 := 7 in
ts2 := 7.5 in
min. depth
Page 5-B6-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
top concrete cover = 1.5 in. (up to #11 bar) (5.12.4 & Table 5.12.3-1)
use 2.5 in. (Office Practice)
bottom concrete cover = 1 in. (up to #11 bar)
sacrificial thickness = 0.5 in. (2.5.2.4)
2.4 Skew Deck (9.7.1.3 and BDM 5.7.2 )
The primary reinforcement shall be placed perpendicular to the main supporting components.
3 Material Properties
3.1 Concrete
f'c := 4 ksi
fr2 := 0.37
ksi
(5.4.2.6)
wc := 0.160 kcf
1.5
f'c
wc
Ec := 33000
ksi
ksi
kcf
Ec = 4224.0 ksi
(5.4.2.4)
Es := 29000 ksi
4 Methods of Analysis
Concrete deck slabs may be analyzed by using
Approximate elastic methods of analysis, or
Refined methods of analysis, or
Empirical design.
Per office practice, concrete deck slab shall be designed and detailed for both empirical and
traditional design methods.
5 Empirical Design (9.7.2)
5.1 Limit States (9.5.1)
For other than the deck overhang, where empirical design is used, a concrete deck maybe
assumed to satisfy service, fatigue and fracture and strength limit states requirements.
Empirical design shall not be applied to overhangs (9.7.2.2).
5.2 Design Conditions (9.7.2.4)
For the purpose of empirical design method, the effective length S eff shall be taken as (9.7.2.3),
Page 5-B6-2
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
web thickness
bw := 6.125 in
bf := 49 in
Seff := S bf +
bf b w
Seff = 6.7 ft
The design depth of the slab shall exclude the loss that is expected to occur as a result of grinding,
grooving, or wear.
Seff
ts1
if 18.0
core depth
Seff
ts1
= 11.491
overhang = 52.5 in
3 ts1 = 21 in
Seff = 6.703 ft
Seff + 10 ft
t , "OK" , "NG" = "OK"
if max
30
s2
0.54
ft
Seff + 10 ft
= 6.7 in
max
30
0.54 ft
2 1 ft
0.31 in
14 in
= 0.27 in
per ft
Page 5-B6-3
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
2 1 ft
0.2 in
12 in
per ft
= 0.2 in
6 Traditional Design
6.1 Design Assumptions for Approx. Method of Analysis (4.6.2)
Deck shall be subdivided into strips perpendicular to the supporting components (4.6.2.1.1).
Continuous beam with span length as center to center of supporting elements (4.6.2.1.6).
Wheel load may be modeled as concentrated load or load based on tire contact area.
Strips should be analyzed by classical beam theory.
6.2 Width of Equivalent Interior Strip (4.6.2.1.3)
Strip width calculations are not needed since live load moments from Table A4-1 are used.
Spacing in secondary direction (spacing between diaphragms):
Ld :=
L
4
Ld = 30.0 ft
Since
Ld
1.50 , "OK" , "NG" = "OK"
S
if
, where
Ld
S
= 3.33
(4.6.2.1.5)
Therefore, all the wheel load shall be applied to primary strip. Otherwise, the wheels shall
be distributed between intersecting strips based on the stiffness ratio of the strip to sum of
the strip stiffnesses of intersecting strips.
6.3 Limit States (5.5.1)
Where traditional design based on flexure is used, the requirements for strength and service
limit states shall be satisfied.
Extreme event limit state shall apply for the force effect transmitted from the bridge railing to
bridge deck (13.6.2).
Fatigue need not be investigated for concrete deck slabs in multi-girder applications (5.5.3.1).
6.4 Strength Limit States
Resistance factors (5.5.4.2.1)
f := 0.90
v := 0.90
Load Modifier
Page 5-B6-4
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
D := 1.00
R := 1.00
I := 1.00
D R I
0.95
:= max
(1.3.2)
=1
dw := 1.50
L := 1.75
for LL
1 truck
M 2 := 1.00
2 trucks
M 3 := 0.85
3 trucks
bw = 6.13 in
bf = 49 in
Design critical section for negative moment and shear shall be at dc, (4.6.2.1.6)
bf
15 in
3
dc := min
dc = 15 in
Page 5-B6-5
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
M LLp := 6.29
M LLn := 3.51
kip ft
ft
kip ft
ft
ts2 wc S
M DCp :=
M DCp = 0.81
10
kip ft
M DWp :=
whma S
M DWp = 0.189
10
M DCn := M DCp
M DCn = 0.81
M DWn := M DWp
(max. +M DC)
ft
kip ft
(max. +M Dw)
ft
kip ft
ft
M DWn = 0.189
kip ft
ft
per ft
M up = 12.3
kip ft
ft
M un = 7.44
kip ft
ft
1.0 ksi
1 :=
1 if 1 0.65
0.65 otherwise
(5.7.2.2)
barp := 5
0.5 in if bar = 4
0.625 in if bar = 5
0.75 in if bar = 6
dp := ts1 1 in
As :=
0.85 f'c ft
fy
dia( barp)
dp = 5.7 in
2
2
dp dp
use (bottom-transverse) #
Page 5-B6-6
0.85 f f'c ft
2 M up ft
barp = 5
As = 0.52 in
sp := 7.5 in
per ft
(max. spa. 12 in. per BDM
memo)
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Ab( bar ) :=
0.20 in
0.31 in
0.44 in
Asp := Ab( barp)
if bar = 4
if bar = 5
if bar = 6
1 ft
per ft
Asp = 0.5 in
sp
M up ft = 12.30 kip ft
barn := 5
dn := ts1 2.0 in
As :=
0.85 f'c ft
fy
dia( bar n)
dn = 4.69 in
dn dn
0.85 f f'c ft
2 M un ft
barn = 5
1 ft
sn := 7.5 in
2
Asn = 0.5 in
sn
per ft
As = 0.37 in
M un ft = 7.438 kip ft
dn dn
2
= 0.42 in
0.85 f f'c ft
2 1.2 M cr
Say OK
Page 5-B6-7
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
dw := 1.00
L := 1.00
for LL
M sp = 7.29
M sn = 4.51
en := 0.75
h := ts1
kip ft
ft
kip ft
ft
h = 7 in
Asp
p :=
d p 12 in
Es
n :=
n = 6.866
Ec
Asn
n :=
d n 12 in
( n)2 + 2 n n
j( ) := 1
fsa :=
for
if sp
Page 5-B6-8
sp = 7.5 in
dia( barp)
ksi
dc = 1.3 in
0.7( h d c)
700 ep in
( )
Asp j p d p
dc
fsa
( )
j p = 0.909
barp = 5
s := 1 +
k( )
M sp ft
dc := ( 1 in) +
( )
k p = 0.272
s = 1.33
where
sp = 7.5 in
700 ep in
s
fsa
2 dc = 9.0 in
ksi
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
( )
( )
k n = 0.295
fsa :=
for
s := 1 +
( )
Asn j n d n
sn = 7.5 in
dia( barn)
dc = 2.31 in
2
dc
fsa
s = 1.705
0.7( h d c)
700 en in
s
M sn ft
barn = 5
dc := 2in +
if sn
j n = 0.902
where
ksi
700 en in
sn = 7.5 in
say OK
fsa
2 dc = 7.3 in
ksi
Atem := 0.11
Ag := ts2 1 ft
Ag ksi
Atem = 0.17 in
fy
bar := 4
s := 12 in
As := Ab( bar )
1 ft
s
per ft
As = 0.2 in
per ft
OK
220
67
S
eff
ft
percent = 67
ts2 = 7.5 in
Page 5-B6-9
Concrete Structures
As :=
Chapter 5
percent
100
use bar #
Asp
bar := 4
per ft
As = 0.33 in
s := 7.5 in
As := Ab( bar )
1 ft
s
As = 0.32 in
per ft
OK
R := 1.00
I := 1.00
D R I
0.95
:= max
=1
(1.3.2)
Page 5-B6-10
dc := 1.25
dw := 1.50
L := 1.75
for LL
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
(1.3.3)
R := 1.00
(1.3.4)
I := 1.00
(1.3.5)
D R I
0.95
e := max
e = 1
(1.3.2)
dw := 1.50
CT := 1.00
The transverse and longitudinal loads need not be applied in conjunction with vertical loads (A13.2).
Design forces for railing test level TL-4 (LRFD Table A13.2-1),
transverse
Ft := 54 kip
longitudinal
FL := 18 kip
vertical (down)
Fv := 18 kip
Effective Distances:
transverse
Lt := 3.50 ft
longitudinal
LL := 3.50 ft
vertical
Lv := 18 ft
32 in.
use
H := 32 in
Page 5-B6-11
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
kip ft
ft
Critical wall length, over which the yield mechanism occurs, Lc , shall be taken as:
2
8 H ( M b + M w)
Lt
Lc :=
+ +
Mc
2
2
Lt
Lc = 9.1 ft
For impact within a barrier segment, the total transverse resistance of the railing may be taken as:
2
M c Lc
2
Rw :=
8 Mb + 8 Mw + H
2 Lc Lt
Rw = 131.11 kip
:= 1.0
min( ( Rw 1.2 Ft ) ) H
M s = 11.97
Lc + 2 H
kip ft
ft
M DCa := 0.45
kip ft
ft
cw = 0.875 ft
design moment
M u := e dc M DCa + CT M s
Page 5-B6-12
M u = 12.5
kip ft
ft
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
min( ( Rw 1.2 Ft ) ) ft
per ft
T = 4.49 kip
Lc + 2 H
A = 8.25 in
A := ts2 + 0.75 in
baro := 5
A 7 in
overhang 0.5 b f
cw 2.5 in
dia( baro)
ds = 4.7 in
0.85 f'c ft
fy
d s ds
T
+
0.85 f'c ft fy
2 M u ft
As = 0.67 in
per ft
(1)
de := d s
de = 4.7 in
As fy T
c :=
c = 1 in
0.85 1 f'c 1 ft
if
de
c
de
= 0.221
bf
15 in
3
dc := min
dc = 15 in
At the inside face of the parapet, the collision forces are distributed over a distance Lc
for the moment and Lc + 2H for the axial force. Similarly, assume the distribution
length is increased in a 30 degree angle from the base of the parapet,
Collision moment at design section,
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.14
April 2015
Page 5-B6-13
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
M se :=
M s Lc
M se = 9.31
Lc + 2 0.577 ( overhang cw d c)
kip ft
ft
dead load moment @ dc from CL of exterior girder (see deck.gts STRUDL output)
overhang d c = 3.125 ft
M DCb := 1.96
kip ft
ft
kip ft
ft
design moment
M u := e dc M DCb + dw M DWb + CT M se
M u = 11.85
kip ft
ft
min( ( Rw 1.2 Ft ) ) ft
T = 3.81 kip
Lc + 2 H + 2 0.577 ( overhang cw d c)
per ft
ds := A 2.5 in
ds = 5.4 in
d s ds
T
2
+ = 0.53 in
0.85 f'c ft fy
2 M u ft
per ft
(doesn't control)
(2)
kip ft
ft
Collision moment at at dc from the exterior girder, (see deck.gts output, barrierM factor for 1 kip-ft of Ms),
M si := M s 0.824
M si = 9.87
kip ft
ft
M si Lc
Lc + 2 0.577 ( overhang cw + d c)
Page 5-B6-14
M si = 6.16
kip ft
ft
dc = 1.25 ft
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
M DCi := 2.11
kip ft
M DWi := 0.03
ft
kip ft
ft
design moment
M u := e dc M DCi + dw M DWi + CT M si
M u = 8.84
kip ft
ft
ds := ts1 2.0 in
ds = 4.69 in
Case 2
d s ds
2
= 0.4 in
0.85 f'c ft
2 M u ft
(3)
Case 3
Check DL + LL
f := 0.9
For deck overhangs, where applicable, the 3.6.1.3.4 may be used in lieu of the equivalent strip
method (4.6.2.1.3).
a. at design section in the overhang
moment arm for 1.0 kip/ft live load (3.6.1.3.4)
x := overhang cw 1 ft dc
x = 15 in
kip
ft
M LL := M 1 wL x
M LL = 1.5
kip ft
ft
factored moment
M u := dc M DCb + dw M DWb + L M LL ( 1.0 + IM)
M u = 6.03
kip ft
ft
dia( baro)
2
ds = 5.44 in
Page 5-B6-15
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
2
= 0.26 in
0.85 f f'c ft
2 M u ft
d s ds
per ft
(doesn't control)
(4)
ts1 = 7 in
use the same D.L. + L.L moment as in previous for design (approximately)
factored moment
M u = 6.03
kip ft
ft
dia( baro)
ds = 4.7 in
d s ds
2
= 0.3 in
0.85 f f'c ft
2 M u ft
baro = 5 @
s := 22.5 in
barn = 5
sn = 7.5 in
As := Ab( bar o)
1 ft
s
+ Ab( barn)
(doesn't control)
(5)
per ft
1 ft
sn
As = 0.66 in
say OK
Determine the point in the first bay of the deck where the additional bars are no longer needed,
As := Ab( bar n)
1 ft
As = 0.5 in
sn
As fy
c :=
c = 0.9 in
0.85 1 f'c 1 ft
de := ts1 2.0 in
a := 1 c
dia( barn)
2
de = 4.7 in
a = 0.7 in
Page 5-B6-16
per ft
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
per ft
By inspection of (1) to (5), no additional bar is required beyond design section of the first bay.
Cut off length requirement (5.11.1.2)
15 dia( baro) = 0.781 ft
(controls by inspection)
8 Reinforcing Details
8.1 Development of Reinforcement (5.11.2.1.1)
basic development length for #11 bar and smaller,
1.0 ft
1.25 Ab fy ksi
Ldb( d b , Ab) := max in ksi f'c
fy
0.4 d b ksi
2
(
) = 15 in
(0.75in , 0.44in2) = 18 in
For #5 bars,
For #6 bars,
Ldb
(5.11.2.1.3)
bars spaced laterally not less than 6 in. center-to-center, with not less than 3. in clear
cover measured in the direction of spacing.
For bundled bars..... times 1.2 for a three-bar bundle
(5.11.2.3)
Page 5-B6-17
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Page 5-B6-18
Precast Concrete
Appendix
5-B7
(SIP) Deck Panel
Precast Concrete
Stay-In-Place (SIP) Stay-in-place
Deck Panel
Design Criteria
Loading: HL-93
Concrete:
SIP Panel,
(f'ci + 1 ksi)
CIP slab,
f'cs := 4 ksi
fy := 60 ksi
Es := 29000 ksi
Prestressing Steel:
AASHTO M-203, uncoated 7 wire, low-relaxation strands (5.4.4.1)
Nominal strand diameter, db := 0.375 in
Ap := 0.085 in
(Trends now are toward the use of 3/8 in. diameter strand, per PCI J., 33(2), pp.67-109)
fpu := 270 ksi
fpy := 0.90 fpu
Ep := 28500 ksi
L := 89.07 ft
Roadway width
BW := 53.0 ft
Girder spacing
S := 6.75 ft
Skew angle
:= 14.65 deg
no. of girder
Nb := 8
cw := 10.5 in
overhang :=
BW ( Nb 1 ) S
2
+ cw
overhang = 3.75 ft
ts1 := 8.0 in
Page 5-B7-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
ts2 := 8.5 in
Wsip := 8.0 ft
Lsip := 6.34 ft
tsip := 3.5 in
tcs1 = 4.5 in
tcs2 = 5 in
(actual thickness)
wc := 0.160 kcf
wdw := 0.140kcf 2 in
wdw = 0.023
kip
ft
top cover for epoxy-coated main reinforcing steel = 1.5 in. (up to #11 bar)
= 2.0 in. (#14 & #18 bars) (5.12.4 & Table 5.12.3-1)
bottom concrete cover (unprotected main reinforcing) = 1 in. (up to #11 bar)
= 2 in. (#14 & #18 bars)
sacrificial thickness = 0.5 in. (2.5.2.4)
Optional deflection criteria for span-to-depth ratio (LRFD Table 2.5.2.6.3-1)
Min. Depth (continuous span) where S = 6.75 ft
S + 10 ft
0.54
ft
S + 10 ft
= 6.7 in
30
max
0.54 ft
Loads
it true, the primary reinforcement may be placed in the direction of the skew;
otherwise, it shall be placed perpendicular to the main supporting components.
The precast SIP panels support their own weight, any construction loads, and the weight of the
CIP slabs. For superimposed dead and live loads, the precast panels are analyzed assuming that
they act compositely with the CIP concrete.
Dead load
per foot
SIP panel
wsip := tsip wc
wsip = 0.047
kip
ft
CIP slab
wcs := tcs2 wc
wcs = 0.067
kip
ft
Page 5-B7-2
tb := 0.52
kip
ft
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
tside := 0.52
kip
ft
wdw = 0.023
kip
ft
construction load
(applied to deck panel only)
wcon := 0.050
kip
(9.7.4.1)
ft
M1 := 1.2
IM := 0.33
M2 := 1.0
(3.6.1.1.1.2)
(3.6.2.1)
for S = 6.75 ft
(include the effect of multiple presence factors and the dynamic load allowance)
applicability
M LLp := 5.10
kip ft
ft
(3.6.1.3.4) For deck overhang design with a cantilever, not exceeding 6.0 ft from the
centerline of the exterior girder to the face of a continuous concrete railing, the wheel loads
may be replaced with a uniformly distributed line load of 1.0 KLF intensity, located 1 ft from
the face of the railing.
if ( overhang cw 6 ft , "OK" , "NG" ) = "OK"
Load combination
Where traditional design based on flexure is used, the requirements for strength and service
limit states shall be satisfied.
Extreme event limit state shall apply for the force effect transmitted from the bridge railing to
bridge deck (13.6.2).
Fatigue need not be investigated for concrete deck slabs in multi-girder applications (5.5.3.1).
Page 5-B7-3
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
R := 1.00
I := 1.00
D R I
0.95
:= max
(1.3.2)
=1
dw := 1.50
for DW
L := 1.75
for LL
Section Properties
per foot
Non-composite section
Asip := tsip 12 in
Isip :=
Ybp :=
12 in tsip
Asip = 42 in
3
4
Isip = 42.875 in
12
tsip
Ybp = 1.75 in
Isip
Stp :=
Sbp :=
Ytp = 1.75 in
Stp = 24.5 in
Ytp
3
Isip
Ybp
3
Sbp = 24.5 in
1.5
f'c
wc
Ec := 33000
ksi
ksi
kcf
Ec = 4722.6 ksi
(5.4.2.4)
1.5
f'ci
wc
Eci := 33000
ksi
ksi
kcf
f' cs
wc
Ecs := 33000
ksi
ksi
kcf
Page 5-B7-4
(5.4.2.4)
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
modular ratio,
f'c
n :=
n = 1.118
f'cs
b := 12 in
b
Aslab :=
tcs1
tcs1
Ybs := tsip +
Area
Yb
2
CIP slab
Aslab = 48.3 in
SIP panel
Asip = 42 in
A Yb
3
Ybs = 5.75 in
Ybp = 1.75 in
Yb = 3.89 in
@ bottom of panel
Yt := tsip Yb
Yt = 0.39 in
@ top of panel
Yts = 4.11 in
@ top of slab
Yb :=
Aslab + Asip
b t 3
cs1
n
Islabc := Aslab Yts
+
2
12
tcs1
Islabc = 248.7 in
Ipc = 235.1 in
Ic := Islabc + Ipc
Ic = 483.8 in
St :=
Ic
Ic
@ top of panel
@ top of slab
St = 1242.1 in
Yt
Sts := n
@ bottom of panel
Sb = 124.4 in
Yb
Ic
Sts = 131.6 in
Yts
Required Prestress
Assume the span length conservatively as the panel length,
M sip :=
M cip :=
wsip Lsip
8
wcs Lsip
8
M sip = 0.234
M cip = 0.335
Lsip = 6.34 ft
ft kip
ft
ft kip
ft
Page 5-B7-5
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
For the superimposed dead and live loads, the force effects should be calculated based on analyzing the strip as a
continuous beam supported by infinitely rigid supports (4.6.2.1.6)
ft kip
M DW := 0.10
M b := 0.19
fb :=
ft
kip ft
ft
(Msip + Mcip) ft
(MDW + Mb + MLLp) ft
Sbp
fb = 0.799 ksi
Sb
0 ksi
f'c
ksi
(5.9.4.2.2)
If P se is the total effective prestress force after all losses, and the center of gravity of stands is concentric with the
center of gravity of the SIP panel:
Pse := fcreq Wsip tsip
per panel
Try
Nreq :=
Pse
p se Ap
Nreq = 18.35
Np := ceil( Nreq)
Np := 19
Prestress Losses
Loss of Prestress (5.9.5)
f pT = f pES + fpLT
where, fpLT = long-term prestress loss due to creep of concrete, shrinkage of concrete, and relaxation of
steel.
Page 5-B7-6
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
fpR0 :=
log( 24.0 t)
40.0
t := 0.75 day
fpj
0.55 fpj
fpy
Given:
Ap = 0.085 in
straight strands
Np = 19
Aps := Ap Np
Apsip := Aps
per panel
Aps = 1.615 in
ft
Apsip = 0.202 in
Wsip
per ft
ep := 0 in
Given
fcgp :=
( p si Apsip)
Asip
ep = 0 in)
psi ( Apsip)
Asip
Normal-weight concrete
Concrete is either steam or moist cured
Prestressing is by low relaxation strands
Are sited in average exposure condition and temperatures
Page 5-B7-7
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
H := 75
h := 1.7 0.01H
h = 0.95
st :=
1+
st = 1
f'ci
ksi
Then,
fpLT := 10.0
fpi Apsip
Asip
h st + ( 12.0ksi) h st + fpR
Np Ap fpe
Pe = 34.57
Wsip
kip
per foot
ft
Allowable tension with bonded reinforcement which is sufficient to resist 120% of the tension
force in the cracked concrete computed on the basis of an uncracked section (5.9.4.1.2).
0.24
f'ci
ksi
ksi
0.0948
min
= 0.19 ksi
ksi
0.200 ksi
(Controls)
Because the strand group is concentric with the precast concrete panel, the midspan section is the
critical section that should be checked.
Page 5-B7-8
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Stress at Midspan
Effective stress after transfer,
Psi :=
Np Ap p si
Psi = 39.244
Wsip
kip
ft
kip ft
ft
Msip ft Psi ft
S
= 1.05 ksi
Asip
tp
OK
Msip ft Psi ft
S
= 0.82 ksi
Asip
bp
OK
kip
ft
Modulous of rupture,
fr := 0.24
f'c
ksi
ksi
fr = 0.54 ksi
ft kip
ft
Page 5-B7-9
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
M cip = 0.33
ft kip
ft
M const := 0.050
kip Lsip
ft
M const = 0.25
ft kip
ft
= 1.23 ksi
Stp
Asip
OK
= 0.42 ksi
Sbp
Asip
OK
48
if
= 0.02 in
Lsip
L
sip
0.75 in otherwise
min
240
min
Page 5-B7-10
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Tension:
0.0948
0 ksi
f'c
ksi
(5.9.4.2.2)
(MDW + Mb) ft
Sts
= 0.026 ksi
OK
(MDW + Mb + MLLp) ft
Sts
= 0.49 ksi
< allowable
OK
Pe ft
Asip
Stp
St
= 1.1 ksi
OK
Pe ft
Asip
Stp
St
< allowable
= 1.15 ksi
Stresses due to live load + one-half the sum of effective prestress and permanent loads,
= 0.6 ksi
Stp
St
Asip
0.5
OK
Pe ft
Asip
(Msip + Mcip) ft
(MDW + Mb + MLLp) ft
Sbp
Sb
= 0.02 ksi
< allowable
0.0948
0 ksi
f'c
ksi
OK
(BDM)
Page 5-B7-11
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
p := 1.00
v := 0.90
M DC = 0.76
kip ft
ft
kip ft
ft
kip ft
ft
M u := dc M DC + dw M DW + L M LLp
M u = 10.02
kip ft
ft
fpy
fpu
k := 2 1.04
k = 0.28
As := 0 in
A's := 0 in
(conservatively)
dp, distance from extreme compression fiber to the centroid of the prestressing tendons,
dp := ts1 0.5 tsip
Wsip = 96 in
dp = 6.25 in
1.0 ksi
1 = 0.85
Page 5-B7-12
1 :=
1 if 1 0.65
0.65 otherwise
(5.7.2.2)
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.14
April 2015
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
c :=
c = 1.47 in
fpu
dp
dp
ld = 3.17 ft
fpsld :=
1.6 d b
ksi +
2
3
fpe
a = 1.25 in
M n := Aps fps d p
per panel
Aps = 1.615 in
M n = 134.4 kip ft
M r := p M n
M r :=
per panel
M r = 134.4 kip ft
Mr
M r = 16.81
Wsip
OK
Mu Mr = 1
kip ft
per ft
ft
where
M u = 10.02
kip ft
ft
Limits of Reinforcement
Minimum Reinforcement (5.7.3.3.2)
Compressive stress in concrete due to effective prestress force (after all losses) at midspan
fpeA :=
Pe ft
Asip
(compression)
Page 5-B7-13
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
M dnc = 0.57
ft
fr = 0.54 ksi
M cr := ( fr + fpeA)
kip ft
Sb
ft
M r 1.2 M cr = 1
Sb
M dnc
Sbp
1.2 M cr = 14.13
where
OK
M r = 16.81
kip ft
ft
kip ft
ft
L
1.0
Ld = 89.07 ft
Since
Ld
S
1.50 = 1
, where
Ld
S
(4.6.2.1.5)
= 13.2
therefore, all the wheel load shall be applied to primary strip. Otherwise, the wheels shall
be distributed between intersecting strips based on the stiffness ratio of the strip to sum of
the strip stiffnesses of intersecting strips.
Critical Section
The design section for negative moments and shear forces may be taken as follows:
Prestressed girder - shall be at 1/3 of flange width < 15 in.
Steel girder - 1/4 of flange width from the centerline of support.
Concrete box beams - at the face of the web.
top flange width
bf := 15.06 in
Design critical section for negative moment and shear shall be at d c, (4.6.2.1.6)
1
dc := min bf 15 in
3
Page 5-B7-14
dc = 5 in
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
for S = 6.75 ft
M LLn := 4.00
kip ft
ft
kip ft
M DWn := 0.10
ft
dc
S
= 0.062
kip ft
ft
M sn = 4.28
kip ft
ft
M un = 7.38
kip ft
ft
Design of Section
Normal flexural resistance of a rectangular section may be determined by using equations for
a flanged section in which case b w shall be taken as b (5.7.3.2.3).
1.0 ksi
1 = 0.85
(5.7.2.2)
assume bar #
dia( bar) :=
1 :=
1 if 1 0.65
0.65 otherwise
barn := 5
0.5 in if bar = 4
0.625 in if bar = 5
0.75 in if bar = 6
0.875 in if bar = 7
dn := ts2 2.5 in
dia( bar n)
dn = 5.69 in
Page 5-B7-15
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
0.85 f'cs ft
As :=
dn dn
fy
Ab( bar ) :=
barn = 5
2
0.20 in
0.31 in
0.44 in
0.60 in
Asn := Ab( barn)
0.85 f f'cs ft
2 M un ft
As = 0.3 in
per ft
sn := 9 in
if bar = 4
if bar = 5
if bar = 6
if bar = 7
1 ft
per ft
Asn = 0.41 in
sn
de := d n
c :=
Asn fy
c = 0.72 in
0.85 1 f'cs 1 ft
if
de
c
de
= 0.126
frs := 0.24
n :=
Es
Ecs
f'cs
ksi
ksi
n = 6.866
n=7
( n 1 )Asn = 2.48 in
Agc := ts2 ft
Agc = 102 in
Yts :=
Page 5-B7-16
ds = 3.5 in
Yts = 4.23 in
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
ft ts2
Icg :=
12
M cr :=
frs Icg
M cr = 5.817 kip ft
Yts
Icg = 615.49 in
e := 0.75
h = 8 in
dc
s := 1 +
0.7( h d c)
M sn = 4.28
n :=
dc = 2.31 in
Es
kip ft
ft
n = 6.866
Ecs
s = 1.581
n := ceil( ( n 0.495) )
Asn
= 6.056 10
ft d n
k( ) :=
( n)2 + 2 n n
j( ) := 1
fsa :=
k( ) = 0.252
k( )
j( ) = 0.916
M sn ft
Asn j( ) d n
if sn
700 e in
s
fsa
ksi
where
sn = 9 in
700 e in
s
fsa
2 d c = 9.3 in
ksi
Page 5-B7-17
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Atem := 0.11
Ag := ts2 1 ft
Ag ksi
per ft
Atem = 0.19 in
fy
bar := 4
s := 12 in
As := Ab( bar )
1 ft
s
or 18 in.
2
per ft
As = 0.2 in
OK
bw := 7 in
bf = 15.06 in
Seff := S bf +
bf b w
Seff = 5.83 ft
220
67
S
eff
ft
percent = 67
100 Wsip fy
use bar #
bar := 5
s := 6.0 in
As = 0.55
in
per ft
ft
As := Ab( bar )
1 ft
s
As = 0.62 in
per ft
OK
OK
Page 5-B7-18
Appendix 5-B8
:=
:=
:=
Precast Concrete
:=
:=
:=
:=
:=
:=
Rupture Modulus
:=
:=
:=
Page 5-B8-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
:=
Section depth
:=
Gross area (used for dead weight calculations)
:=
Section Properties
:=
:=
:=
:=
:=
:=
Page 5-B8-2
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
:=
HL-93 loading is travelling in 2 traffic lanes; for the maximum force effect taken at midspan:
:= +
this includes a 33% dynamic load allowance and a multiple presence factor of 1.0
Live Load Distribution Factor (design for interior beam):
Number of lanes
:=
From AASHTO Table 4.6.2.2.2b-1
:=
:= +
:= +
Page 5-B8-3
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
:=
:=
:= +
:=
:=
Conservatively, the design moment will be the maximum dead and live load moments at midspan
Service I
:= + +
Service III
:= + +
Strength I
:= + +
Page 5-B8-4
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
+ ( )
>
:=
( ) <
( )
<
( ) <
)
(
<
Distance to the prestressing steel C.G. measured from the bottom of the girder at midspan:
:=
:=
:= +
:= +
:=
Page 5-B8-5
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
:=
:=
:=
Page 5-B8-6
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Jacking PS force:
:=
:=
:=
:=
:=
Page 5-B8-7
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
:= +
Release PS force
:=
:=
( )
Effective PS force
:=
Allowable stresses:
Compression:
=
Tension:
, =
:=
Page 5-B8-8
OK
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
:=
+
OK
:=
OK
:=
+
OK
+ +
:=
:=
+ + +
+
:=
OK
OK
OK
Page 5-B8-9
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
:=
+
OK
( + + )
:=
:= +
OK
:=
( )
:=
:=
:=
Page 5-B8-10
:=
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
:=
+
OK
Maximum RF
( )
OK
Mimumum RF
+
:=
:= +
Mn must be greater than the lesser of 1.2 Mcr and 1.33 Mu (LRFD 5.7.3.3.2)
=
=
=
OK
Self-Weight Effect:
Page 5-B8-11
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
:=
Prestress Effect:
:=
:=
( )
:=
Superimposed Loads
+
:=
Final Camber
:= +
Page 5-B8-12
Appendix 5-B9
Specification
General Input
AASHTO LRFD Specifications
Reference
Prelim.Plan, Sh 1
Girder type:
18 Prestressed Precast Flat Slab
BDM 5.6.2-A
Span Length:
L = 58.00 ft
C.L. to C.L. Bearing
BDM fig. 5-A-XX
Lg = 58.83 ft
End to End
Girder Length:
Prelim.Plan, Sh 1
Bridge Width:
W = 42.75 ft
Deck Width
"
Number of Lanes
2
"
qskew =
0.00
degrees
Skew Angle:
Girder Section Properties
BDM fig. 5-A-XX
Girder Width:
b=
4.00
ft
=
48.00 in
"
Girder Depth:
d = 18.00 in
=
1.50
ft
Height
h=
23.00 in
ttf =
4.50 in (from top of void to bottom of slab).
Top Flange Thickness
"
Bottom Flange Thickness tbf =
4.50 in (from bottom of void to bottom of girder).
"
hf = td + ttf =
9.50
beachV =
9.00 in
Width of each Void
"
2
bw =
Net Width of Girder
21.00 in
Aactual = 5.25
in
"
Adesign= 5.50
Nv =
3
Number of Voids
in2
2
Aeach v =
Area of Each Void
63.62 in
"
2
"
Av = 190.85 in
Void Area:
Void Perimeter each=
28.27 in
2
Ag = 673.15 in
Area of Girder
"
2
Ad = 240.00 in
Area of Deck + Leg
2
Acomp = 913.15 in
Area of Comp. Sect.
Prelim.Plan, Sh 2
Ng =
10
W/b =
10.69
Number of girders
wTB = 0.50
k/ft
Wt of barrier
td =
5.00
in
Thickness of deck
w
=
for calculating Ec
Wt of Concrete
0.155 kcp
BDM 5.1.1-D
c
w
=
Wt of Concrete
0.160 kcp
for dead load calculations
cd
BDM 3.1.1
Strength of Concrete
BDM 5.1.1-A.1
fc' =
4.0
ksi
Deck
BDM 5.1.1-A.2
fci' =
fc' =
8.5
ksi
Transfer
7.0
ksi
Final
*Modulus of Elasticity (girder),
= 33000 w
ci
5871.1
ksi
f ' = 4027.6
c
ksi
f ' =
c
1 .5
c
1 .5
ci
rMcr min
= 0 .24 f ' =
c
= 0 . 37
0.700
f ' = 1.08
c
m=
BDM 5.1.1-D
LRFD 5.4.2.4-1
' = 5328.0
Modulus of Rupture,
Poisson's ratio =
= 33000 w
= 33000 w
1.46
1 .5
c
0.2
LRFD 5.7.1
ksi
LRFD 5.4.2.6
ksi
"
LRFD 5.4.2.5
Page 5-B9-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Reference
LRFD 5.4.3
BDM 5.1.2
LRFD 5.4.3.2
BDM 5.1.3-A
0.60
in
Area = 0.217 in2
LRFD Table 5.4.4.1-1
fpu = 270.00 ksi
fpy = .9 fpu = 243.00 ksi
"
LRFD Table 5.9.3fpbt = 0.75 fpu = 202.50 ksi
Prior to Transfer
1
"
fpe = 0.8 fpy =
194.40 ksi
Effective Stress Limit
LRFD 5.4.4.2
Ep = 28500 ksi.
Modulus of elasticity,
BDM fig. 5-A-XX
Number of Bonded Strands ~2 in from Bottom
14
"
Number of Bonded Strands ~4 in from Bottom
6
Eccentricity (E)
"
Number of Bonded Strands ~6 in from Bottom
0
E = 4.71
in
"
Number of Debonded Strands ~2 in from Bottom
4
OK
OK
"
Number of Debonded Strands ~4 in from Bottom
0
OK
Total Number of Bottom Strands
24
50
OK
Page 5-B9-2
db =
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Table of Contents
Content
1 Structure:
Single Span Bridge
2 Live load
HL-93
3 Material Properties
Concrete
4 Allowable Concrete Stresses at Service Limit State
Tensile stress limit
Compressive stress limits after all losses
5 Computation of Section Properties
Girder and Composite Section Properties (Table 5-1)
Transformed Section Properties (Table 5-2)
6 Limit State
Service limit state
Load combinations and load factors
7 Vehicular Live Load
Design vehicular live load
Maximum live load force effect
Dynamic load allowance (Impact, IM)
Distribution of Live Load, Dfi (Beam Slab Bridges)
Shear Distribution Factor
Table 7-2: Summary of Live Load Distribution Factors:
Table 7-3: Distributed Live Loads
8 Computation of Stresses
Stresses Due to Weight of Girder (Table 8-1 thru 8-5)
Concrete Stresses Due to Traffic Barrier (Table 8-6 thru 8-8)
Concrete Stresses Due to Concrete Deck and Legs (Table 8-9 thru 8-11)
Concrete Stresses Due to LL+IM (Composite Section) (Table 8-12)
Summary of Stresses at dv (Table 8-13)
Summary of Stresses at Mid-Span (Table 8-14)
9 Approximate Evaluation of Pre-Stress Losses
Time Dependent Losses
Loss due to Strand Relaxation
Loss due to elastic shortening
10 Stresses at Service Limit State
Stresses After Elastic Shortening and Relaxation (Table 10-1)
Stresses After Losses (Noncomposite) (Table 10-2)
Summary of Stresses at Service Limit State (Table 10-3)
Tensile Stress Limit in Areas Without Bonded Reinforcement (at dv)
Compressive Stress Limit at Service - I Load Combination
Tensile Stress Limit at Service - III Load Combination
Stresses at transfer
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.14
April 2015
Page 5-B9-3
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
OK for deflection
Page 5-B9-4
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Specification
Reference
1 Structure:
58.00
58.83
42.75
4.00
10
ft
ft
ft
ft
Prelim Plan, Sh 1
"
BDM fig. 5-A-XX
Prelim Plan, Sh 1
2 Live load
BDM 3.1.2-A
LRFD 3.6.1
HL-93
Vehicular live load designated as " HL-93 " shall consist of a combination of :
Design truck or design tandem, plus
Design lane load
Design truck is equivalent to AASHTO HS20-44 truck.
LRFD 3.6.1.2.1
The design lane shall consist of a 0.64 klf, uniformly distributed in the longitudinal
direction. Design lane load shall be assumed to be uniformly distributed over 10 ft width
in the transverse direction.
LRFD 3.6.1.2.4
Design tandem shall consist of a pair of 25.0 kip axles spaced at 4'-0" apart
LRFD 3.6.1.2.3
LRFD 3.6.1.1.1
LRFD 3.6.1.2.2
Lanes
3 Material Properties
Concrete
LRFD Specifications allows a concrete compressive strength with a range of
2.4 to 10.0 ksi at 28 days. Compressive strength for prestressed concrete
and decks shall not be less than 4.0 ksi.
LRFD 5.4.2.1
LRFD 5.9.4
f t = 0 . 19
= 0 . 19
LRFD 5.9.4.2.2
BDM 5.2.3-B
ci
'
Shipping
"
Page 5-B9-5
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
"
LRFD 5.9.4.2
BDM 5.2.3-B
"
"
9.00 in
12.02 in
Composite
d
(in)
3.0
0.0
-8.5
Ytg =
Ytgc =
Ytsc =
Ad2
(in4)
Ix
(in4)
28171.2
0.0
17748.3
45919.5
6149.6
0.0
17248.3
9.0 in
6.0 in
11.0 in
in4
LRFD C4.6.2.2.1-3
(Bottom)
Sb =
(Top)
St =
(Bottom)
Sb =
(Top girder)
(Top slab)
Ig
2446.8
in3
2446.8
in3
3819.5
in3
7682.1
in3
4183.06
in3
y bg
Ig
y tg
I comp
St =
St =
ybc
I comp
y tgc
I comp
y tsc
b/nc =
32.93 in
Legs
Alege =
Yblege =
Ixlege =
Page 5-B9-6
0.00 in2
0.00 in
0.0 in4
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Composite
9.00 in
11.26 in
(Bottom)
(Top girder)
(Top slab)
Ytgt =
Ytgct =
Ytsct =
S bt =
S ttg =
S tts =
I compt
ytgct
I compt
9.0 in
6.7 in
11.7 in
3553.9
in3
5937.1
in3
3408.52
in3
y bct
I compt
Ix
(in4)
25459.6
0.0
14556.6
40016.2
ytsct
6 Limit State
Each component and connection shall satisfy the following equation for each
limit state :
iQ i R n = R r
Where:
for loads&
which
a max. value
of gi is appropriate
Load Modifier for Ductility, Redundancy,
Operational
Importance
hi = 0 .95
i
hi =
D R I
hD =
hR =
hI =
hi =
Ductility factor
Redundancy factor
Operational Importance factor
1.00
for any ordinary structure
LRFD Eqn.
1.3.2.1-1
LRFD 1.3.2.1-2
LRFD 1.3.2.1-3
LRFD 1.3.3
LRFD 1.3.4
LRFD 1.3.5
Qi Rn = Rr
Where:
gi =
Qi =
f=
Rn =
Rr =
LRFD 1.3.2.1
"
"
"
"
Page 5-B9-7
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
LRFD 1.3.2.2
Q =
iQ
LFRD 3.4.1-1
i
Where:
gi = Load Factors specified in Tables 1 & 2
Qi = Force Effects from loads specified in LRFD
Strength-I load combination relating to the normal vehicle use of the bridge without
wind.
Service-I load combination relating to the normal operational use of the bridge.
Service-III load combination relating only to tension in prestressed concrete
structures with the objective of crack control.
Q Strength I = DC DC + DW DW + 1 .75( LL + IM )
LRFD 3.4.1
"
"
"
"
"
BDM 5.6.2
LRFD 3.6.1.2
LRFD 3.6.1.2.1
LRFD 3.6.1.2.2
"
LRFD 3.6.1.2.3
"
LRFD 3.6.1.2.4
LRFD5.8.2.9
Max Shear, Vmax, occurs at the horizontal distance of dv from the face of support where
dv is the effective depth between the tensile and compressive resultant forces in the
member and is Max [.72 h or .9de].
LRFD5.8.3.2,
& BDM 5.2.4-6
Max Moment, Mmax, occurs near midspan (CL) underneath the nearest concentrated
load (P1) when that load is the same distance to midspan as the center of gravity (+ CG)
is to midspan. Use the Truck or Tandem (Near Midspan) and the Lane (At Midspan)
maximum moments together to be conservative.
Page 5-B9-8
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
So the
ft-kips
Corresponding V@Mmax =
25.10 kips
kips
Corresponding M@Vmax =
82.35 ft-kips
ft-kips
Corresponding V@dv =
17.66 kips
ft-kips
Corresponding V@CL =
0.00 Kips
Design Truck LL
IM =
M(LL+IM)=
V(LL+IM)=
At dv
134.9
95.7
LRFD 3.6.2.1
3'
279.0
92.0
LRFD 5.8.3.2
6'
522.5
85.2
9'
730.5
78.3
At CL
1294.2 k-ft
32.5 kips
LRFD 4.6.2.2
For Multibeam deck bridges with conditions as follows, the approximate method of live
load distribution applies with the following conditions :
Width of deck is constant
Number of Beams,
Beams are parallel Nb 4
Beams have approximately the same stiffness
Roadway overhang, d e 3 .0 ft
Curvature in plane is less than 12 degree
X-section is one consistent with one listed in LRFD Table 4.6.2.2.1-1
The multiple presence factor shall not be applied in conjunction with approximate
load distribution except for exterior beams.
g
The typical x-section
applies to voided and solid slabs w P.T.
the composite deck makes the section significantly connected to act as a unit.
Distribution Factor for Moment Interior Girder, DFMInt
For Multibeam deck bridges within the range of applicability and conditions as
follows, the approximate method of live load distribution applies :
Range of applicability: Width of beam (b), 35
Span length (L), 20
Number of Beams (Nb), 5
48
58.00
10.00
1.58
0.301
0.6
0.2
0.06
60 in
120 ft
20
LRFD 4.6.2.2.1
"
"
"
"
"
"
LRFD 3.6.1.1.2
LRFD 4.6.2.2.2b
"
"
"
"
Page 5-B9-9
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
0.00
60o
LRFD 4.6.2.2.2e-1
"
"
"
LRFD 4.6.2.2.2d
LRFD 4.6.2.2.1
DFMExt = e x DFMInt
Where Skew Reduction Factor is included in DFMInt and Correction Factor
e = 1.04 +
de
1 .0
25
barrier footprint =
de =
e=
"
18.50 in
2.00
ft
1.12
LRFD 4.6.2.2.2d
LRFD 4.6.2.2.3a
"
"
"
"
DFVInt
b
=
130 L
0 .15
Ic
J
0 . 05
0.447
0.456
"
DFVInt
b
=
156
Page 5-B9-10
0.4
0.1
b Ic
12 .0 L J
0.05
=
48
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
RF = 1 .0 +
0.00
58.00
18
48
10
60o
120 ft
60 in
60 in
20
12 .0 L
tan = 1.000
90 d
"
"
"
"
"
Range of applicability:
2.00
48.00
2.0 ft
60
LRFD 4.6.2.2.3b
LRFD 4.6.2.2.1
"
e = 1 . 25 +
de
1 .0 =
20
1.06
"
DFVExt = e x DFVInt
"
d + b / 12 2
e =1+ e
40
1.0
"
0 .5
1 . 0 = 1.32
"
"
Shear
0.456
0.600
Page 5-B9-11
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Interior Girder
Exterior Girder
40.63
45.51
Moment, ft-kips
3'
6'
9'
84.01
157.34
219.98
94.09
176.22
246.38
dv
43.63
57.43
3'
41.96
55.23
8 Computation of Stresses
6'
38.83
51.11
9'
35.70
46.98
Sign convention:
VG = wG x =
6.00
16.67
2
9.00
14.49
mid-span = 29.00
0.00
Table 8-2
MG (ft-kips)
x (ft)
28.31
dv =
1.38
59.78
3.00
w x
M G = G (L x ) =
113.03
6.00
2
159.77
9.00
304.68
mid-span =
29
At Transfer Using Full Length of the Girder
Table 8-3
VG (kips)
x (ft)
dv = 1.80
20.01
3.00
19.14
L
VG = wG x =
6.00
16.97
2
9.00
14.79
mid-span = 29.42
0.00
Table 8-4
MG (ft-kips)
x (ft)
37.13
dv =
1.80
60.68
3.00
w x
M G = G (L x ) =
114.84
6.00
2
162.48
9.00
313.50
mid-span = 29.4167
Page 5-B9-12
389.72
436.49
Shear, kips
Simple span
Interior Girder
Exterior Girder
0.5 L
0.5 L
14.80
19.49
+ Tensile stress
- Compressive stress
LRFD 3.3.2
LRFD 5.11.4.1
"
"
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
9 ft
-0.784
0.784
-0.797
0.797
6 ft
-0.554
0.554
-0.563
0.563
0.5 L
-1.494
1.494
-1.537
1.537
TB
Weight of Traffic Barrier over three girders, wTB3G =
3
Table 8-6
x (ft) VTB (kips)
dv =
1.38
4.60
L
3.00
4.33
VTB = wTB x =
6.00
3.83
2
9.00
3.33
mid-span = 29.00
0.00
Table 8-7
MTB (ft-kips)
x (ft)
6.51
dv =
1.38
13.75
3.00
w x
26.00
6.00
M TB = TB L x =
2
36.75
9.00
70.08
mid-span = 29.00
0.17
k/ft
BDM 5.6.2-B.2.d
Top of slab
Top of girder
Bottom of girder
ksi
ksi
ksi
-0.019
-0.010
0.020
3 ft
-0.039
-0.021
0.043
Comp.
6 ft
-0.075
-0.041
0.082
9 ft
-0.105
-0.057
0.115
0.5 L
-0.201
-0.109
0.220
VD+L
6.75
= w D + L x = 6.00
2
5.87
9.00
0.00
mid-span = 29.00
in2
in2
in2
k/ft
Page 5-B9-13
Concrete Structures
M D+L
Chapter 5
Table 8-10
x (ft)
1.38
dv =
3.00
w
x
= D + L (L x ) = 6.00
2
9.00
mid-span = 29.00
MSIDL (ft-kips)
11.46
24.20
45.76
64.68
123.35
6 ft
-0.224
0.224
9 ft
-0.317
0.317
-0.605
0.605
-1.252
-0.682
1.371
0.5 L
3 ft
-0.270
-0.147
0.296
6 ft
-0.506
-0.275
0.554
9 ft
-0.707
-0.385
0.774
Top of
girder
-0.139
--0.056
---
Bottom of
girder
0.139
-0.056
---
Top of
slab
Top of Bottom of
girder girder
Bottom of
girder
1.494
-0.605
---
Top of
slab
dv
Top of Slab
Top of Girder
Bottom of Girder
ksi
ksi
ksi
0.5 L
Summary of stresses at dv
Table 8-13:
Stresses, ksi
Weight of Girder
Weight Traffic Barrier
Weight of Deck
Live Load plus Impact Service - I
Live Load plus Impact Service - III
-0.019
-0.010
0.020
-0.131
-0.104
-0.071
-0.057
0.143
0.114
Top of
girder
-1.494
--0.605
---
Top of Bottom of
girder girder
-0.201
-0.109
0.220
-1.252
-1.002
-0.682
-0.545
1.371
1.097
LRFD 5.9.5
For Prestress losses in members constructed and prestressed in a single stage, relative to
the stress immediately before transfer, in pretensioned members, with low relaxation
strands, the Total Lump Sum Losses may be taken as:
fpT = fpES + fpLT
Page 5-B9-14
LRFD 5.9.5.1
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
LRFD 5.9.5.3
For normal weight concrete pretensioned by low-relaxation strands, approximate lumpsum time dependent losses resulting from creep and shrinkage of concrete and relaxation
of prestressing steel may be used as follows:
FpiAps
f pLT = 10
hst +12h st + fpR =
Ag
19.53
ksi
h = 1.7-.01H = 0.9
st = 5/(1+fci)= 0.625
LRFD 5.9.5.3-1
LRFD 5.9.5.3-2
LRFD 5.9.5.3-3
2.50
LRFD 5.9.5.3
1148.4
Pi Pi e 2
f ps =
= -2.86
Ag I g
fg =
M ge
Ig
fcgp = fg + fps =
kips
LRFD 5.9.5.2.3a
BDM 5.1.4-A
ksi
= 0.78
ksi
-2.08
ksi
BDM 5.1.4-3
11.14
ksi
LRFD 5.9.5.2.3a-1
E
f pES = p
E ci
f cgp =
LRFD 5.9.5.1-1
Page 5-B9-15
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
40.98
kips
Total
force
819.66
0.00
81.97
81.97
163.93
984
984
984
1066
1148
Eccent. Moment
in.
in-kip
6.40
5246
7.00
0
7.00
574
7.00
574
-6.00
-984
Mp(in-k) = 4262
Mp(in-k) = 4262
Mp(in-k) = 4262
Mp(in-k) = 4836
Mp(in-k) = 5410
Table 10-1:
Bottom Strands
Debonded Strands @ 3'
Debonded Strands @ 6'
Debonded Strands @ 9'
Top Strands
Ac
St
P M ps ksi -3.20
-3.20
=
Ac
Sb
Stresses after Losses (noncomposite section)
f p ( bottom ) =
-3.20
Ac
f p ( bottom )
Page 5-B9-16
St
P M ps ksi
=
=
Ac
Sb
-2.91
-2.91
9.00
0.39
mid-span
29.00
0.51
-3.56
-3.916
BDM 5.1.4-A.1
Eccent. Moment
in.
in-kip
6.40
4773
7.00
0
7.00
522
7.00
522
-6.00
-895
Mp(in-k) = 3878
Mp(in-k) = 3878
Mp(in-k) = 3878
Mp(in-k) = 4400
Mp(in-k) = 4922
6.00
0.26
9
0.36
mid-span
0.46
-2.91
-3.24
-3.563
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Ac
Sb
Summary of Stresses at Service Limit States
Table 10-3:
dv
3'
6'
9'
mid-span
girder + ps
Prestressing stress + self wt of girder (using full length of girder)
fg(topDL+PS) (ksi) = 0.10
-0.02
-0.28
-0.40
-1.03
fg(botDL+PS) (ksi) = -3.02
-2.91
-2.64
-2.76
-2.38
Construction stress at top & bottom of girder (noncomposite) gir + ps + deck
fg(topDL+PS) = 0.06
-0.16
-0.52
-0.74
-1.64
fg(botDL+PS) = -2.72
-2.50
-2.14
-2.14
-1.46
Stresses due to all loads plus prestressing :
gir+ps+deck+barr+(LL+im)
fg(topDL+LL+PS) = -0.02
-0.32
-0.84
-1.19
-2.43
fg(botDL+LL+PS) = -2.56
-2.16
-1.50
-1.25
0.13
Stresses due to Transient loads and one-half of permanent loads plus prestressing:
.5(gir+ps+deck+barr)+(LL+im)
fg[topLL+(1/2DL+PS)] = -0.05
-0.24
-0.56
fg[botLL+(1/2(DL+PS))] = -1.21
-0.93
-0.47
Stresses due at service III load combination:
fg[bot.8*LL+(DL+PS)] = -2.58
-2.22
-1.61
-0.78
-1.56
-0.24
0.75
gir+ps+deck+barr+.8(LL+im)
-1.40
-0.15
ksi >
0.099
ksi
BDM 5.2.3-B
ksi >
-3.02
ksi
"
BDM 5.2.3-B;
"
"
"
0.00
ksi >
-0.146
ksi
"
Stresses at transfer
The prestressing force may be assumed to vary linearly from zero at free end to a
maximum at transfer length, lt.
lt = 60 x dstrand/12 =
3.00
ft
36.00 in.
LRFD 5.5.4.1
Page 5-B9-17
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Resistance factors
=
=
=
=
0.90
1.00
0.90
0.75
LRFD Eqn.
1.3.2.1-1
LRFD 5.5.4.2.1
"
"
"
Flexural forces
Strength - I load combination is to be considered for normal vehicular load
without wind.
Load factors :
Components and attachments (Girder + TB + Deck)
DC = 1.25
DW = 1.50
Wearing surface (SIDL or ACP)
LL = 1.75
Vehicular load (LL + Impact)
Flexural moment = 1.0 [ 1.25 DC + 1.5 DW + 1.75 (LL+IM)]
Mu = 1386.5 ft.-kips
Checked using QConBridge program,
Mu = 200.0
ft.-kips
NG Mu No Check
Flexural resistance
LRFD 3.4.1
"
"
QConBridge 101145MuChk.qcb
Report p 4of 5
LRFD 5.7.3
For practical design an equivalent rectangular compressive stress distribution of 0.85 f'c
overall depth of a = b1c may be considered.
for f'c = 8.5
1 =
ksi
0.65
The average stress in prestressing strands, fps, may be taken as:
"
LRFD 5.7.3
c
f ps = f pu 1 k
d p
f py
k = 2 1 . 04
f pu
LRFD 5.7.2.2
LRFD 5.7.3.1.1-1
0.28
=
LRFD 5.7.3.1.1-2
c=
Page 5-B9-18
As = A's =
Aps =
dp =
0.00
6.08
18.71
in.2
in.2
in.
c1 =
9.156
in
LRFD 5.7.3.1.1-4
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
9.50
in
21.00
9.50
6.67
in
in
in
c=
a = 1 c =
9.156
5.95
in
in < tf
LRFD 5.7.3.1.1-3
9.50
in.
LRFD 5.7.3.2.2
c
f ps = f pu 1 k
=
d
p
233.0
ksi.
LRFD 5.7.3.1.1-1
270.0
ksi
LRFD 5.7.3.2
M n = A ps f ps d p = 1857
2
Rectangular:
ft.-kips
LRFD 5.7.3.2.2-1
T-shaped:
Mn =
Flexural resistance, Mr = Mn =
1857
1583
1857
> Mu =
"
ft.-kips
ft.-kips
1386
ft.-kips
LRFD 5.7.3.2.1-1
Minimum reinforcement
LRFD 5.7.3.3.2
"
Flexural resistance,
Mr = Mn The Lesser of :
1.2Mcr =
1.33Mu =
M cr* = Sc ( f r + f pe ) M d / nc c 1 Sc fr =
Sb
fpe =
Mcr =
Mr =
-3.56
511
1857
613.4
1844.0
ft-kips
ft-kips
222.71 ft-kips
governs
LRFD 5.7.3.3.2-1
LRFD 5.4.2.6
LRFD 5.7.3.3.2
Page 5-B9-19
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
l d K f ps f pe d b
3
fps = 233.01
fpe = 171.83
db =
0.60
5.92
ft
ld
ld =
5.92
K=
1.0
5.11.4.2
LRFD 5.11.4.2-1
ksi
ksi
in.
L/2 =
29.00
OK developed
12 Shear Design
Design procedure
The shear design of prestressed members shall be based on the general procedure of
AASHTO - LRFD Bridge Design Specifications article 5.8.3.4.2 using the Modified
Compression Field Theory.
WSDOT Design
Memo LRFD
Shear Design,
3/19/02
Shear design for prestressed girder will follow the (replacement) flow chart for LRFD
Figure C.5.8.3.4.2-5. This procedure eliminates the need for q angle and b factor
iterations.
WSDOT Design
Memo, Shear
Design 6/18/01
dv =
16.8
or
1.40
LRFD 5.8.2.9
"
"
"
"
"
"
ft
LRFD 5.8.3.3
The prestressing in PCPS Slabs are horizontal only, there is no vertical component
Vp = 0.00
kips
Page 5-B9-20
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
vu =
V u V p
bv d v
vu
'
c
0.444
ksi
LRFD 5.8.2.9-1
0.0522
Where the
LRFD 3.4.1-1
"
"
"
Girder, Vg =
20.0
kips
Traffic Barrier, Vtb =
4.6
kips
Deck + Legs, VD+L =
8.1
kips
VDC =
32.7
kips
VLL+IM x DFVExt =
57.4
kips
Shear force effect,
Vu = 1.00(1.25 VDC + 1.5 VDW + 1.75 VLL+IM)
Vu =
141.36 kips
fpo
If the (critical) section (for shear) is within the transfer length of any (prestress) strands,
calculate the effective value of fpo, the parameter taken as modulus of elasticity of
prestressing tendons multiplied by the locked in difference in strain between the
prestressing tendons and the surrounding concrete.
fpo = 0.70fpu
x + dv
f po =
0.70 f pu
lt
LRFD 5.8.3.4.2
"
Where the distance between the edge of girder (or beginning of prestress) and the CL of
Bearing (BRG)
x = 5.00
in.
accounting for bridge skew gives a long. distance from the face of girder as,
x = 5.00
in.
fpo =
114.68
ksi
Page 5-B9-21
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Factored Moment
Factored moment is not to be taken less than Vudv
Mu = ( i i Mi )
Ultimate moment at dv from support, Mu
Girder, Mg =
28.8
ft-kips
Traffic Barrier, Mtb =
6.6
ft-kips
Deck + Legs, MD+L =
11.7
ft-kips
MDC =
47.0
ft-kips
MLL+IM x DFMExt =
45.5
ft-kips
Moment Force Effect,
Mu = 1.00(1.25MDC + 1.50MDW + 1.75MLL+IM)
Mu =
138.5
ft-kips = 1661.5 in - kips
Where:
LRFD 5.8.3.4.2
LRFD 1.3.2.1-1
WSDOT Design
Memo Shear
Design, 6/18/2001
& LRFD 5.8.3.4.21
Mu
+ 0 .5 N u + V u V p A ps f po
dv
0 .002
=
2 ( E s As + E p A ps )
Page 5-B9-22
LRFD 5.8.3.4.2-1
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
If the value of ex from LRFD Equations 5.8.3.4.2-1 or 2 is negative, the strain shall be
taken as:
M u
+ 0 . 5 N u + (V u V p ) A ps f po
x = v
2 ( E c A c + E s A s + E p A ps )
WSDOT Design
Memo Shear
Design, 6/18/2001
& LRFD Eqn.
5.8.3.4.2-3
Where:
ex =
-0.0000760
Determination of
and
=
=
0.052
-0.076
Is a value just
Is a value just
21.00
4.10
deg.
0.075
-0.05
LRFD Table
5.8.3.4.2-1 & See
Theta and Beta
Worksheet
Shear strength
LRFD 5.8.3.3
Vr = fVn
Nominal shear strength shall be taken as:
Vn = Vc + Vs + Vp
Shear resistance provided by concrete :
Vc = 0 .0316
LRFD 1.3.2.1-1
LRFD 5.8.3.3-1
LRFD 5.8.3.3-3
f c' bv d v
LRFD 5.5.4.2
LRFD 5.8.3.3
221.4
kips
Vn = 0.25f'cbvdv + Vp =
751.6
kips
governs
LRFD 5.8.3.3-1
LRFD 5.8.3.3-2
Page 5-B9-23
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Av f y d v cot
Vs i =
s gov
= 87.75
kips
LRFD C5.8.3.3-1
133.6
kips
LRFD 5.8.3.3-3
23.5
kips
LRFD 5.8.3.3-1
Vc = 0.0316 f c' bv d v =
Shear taken by shear reinforcement:
Vsreq = Vu/ - Vc - Vp =
Spacing of shear reinforcements :
Try
2
legs of #
4
A v f y d v cot
s req ' d =
Required Spacing,
Av =
Vs
0.40
= 44.87
in.2
in.
LRFD C5.8.3.3-1
Vs =
A v f y d v cot
s gov
= 81.00
kips
LRFD 5.8.2.7-1
LRFD 5.8.2.7-2
LRFD C5.8.3.3-1
0.5f(Vc+Vp) < Vu
Shear reinforcement is required if :
0.5f(Vc+Vp) =
60.1
< Vu =
141.4 kips
Yes, Shear/Transverse Reinf. Is Required
LRFD 5.8.2.4-1
LRFD 5.8.2.5
bv s go v
Use Spacing:
fy
12.00 in
OK
13.0 in
LRFD 5.8.2.5-1
where :
s=
12.0
in.
Required Area of Steel,
f c'
0 . 0316
0.40
Page 5-B9-24
>
b v s gov
0.39
in.2
fy
0.39
in.2
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Longitudinal reinforcement
LRFD 5.8.3.5
d
As f y + Ap s f p s v
lt
M
0.5Nu Vu
T = u +
+
0.5Vs Vp cot
d v
As =
fy =
Aps =
0.80
60.00
4.34
in2
ksi
in2
fps =
233.01
ksi
dv =
16.84
lt =
3.00
Mu =
198.4
f=
1.00
f=
0.90
f=
0.75
Nu =
0.00
Vu =
141.36
Vs =
81.00
Vp =
0.00
q=
21.00
by substitution:
521.135
LRFD 5.8.3.5-1
in.
ft =
ft-kips
36.00 in
Flexural in prestressed concrete
Shear
Axial Compression
LRFD 5.5.4.2
"
"
kips
kips
kips
degree
445.0
kips
LRFD 5.7.3.6.2
ps bot. = ps bb + ps db
ps bb + ps db = (Pbb e bb + k db Pdb e db )
L2
8 E ci I c
Force and eccentricity due to the bonded bottom prestress strands are:
Pbb =
819.66
kips
ebb =
6.40
in
Page 5-B9-25
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
k db =
L 2 l db
=
L
0.847
Dpsbot. =
Pdb =
-2.786 in.
0.00 kips
upward
edb =
7.00
in
ps top =
Pt e t L2
8 E ci I c
in.
-2.263
in.
upward
in.
downward
downward
"
downward
"
5 w g L4
384 E ci I c
1.66
5 w tb ( 3 G ) L 4
384 E c I c
=0.18
in.
5wSIDL L4
=0.58
384E c I c
in.
Creep Coefficients
CF = -[(ps+g)((t,ti)+1)]
Creep Coefficient :
Page 5-B9-26
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
LRFD 5.4.2.3.2-1
LRFD 5.4.2.3.2-2
H=
80.00
LRFD 5.4.2.3.2-3
kf = 5/(1+f'ci)
LRFD 5.4.2.3.2-4
ktd = t/(61-4*f'ci+t)
LRFD 5.4.2.3.2-5
V/S =
Table 13-1:
(7,30)
(30,40)
(7,40)
(7,90)
(90,120)
(7,120)
4.03 in
ti
kvs
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
7.00
30.00
7.00
7.00
90.00
7.00
t
30.00
40.00
40.00
90.00
120.00
120.00
khc
0.92
0.92
0.92
0.92
0.92
0.92
15 in.
ktd
0.48
0.55
0.55
0.73
0.78
0.78
kf
0.63
0.63
0.63
0.63
0.63
0.63
LRFD 5.4.2.3.2
(t,ti)
0.41
0.40
0.48
0.64
0.50
0.68
Assume 1 Day of accelerated cure by radiant heat or steam. 1 Day accelerated cure = 7
normal Days of cure. Age of Concrete when load is initially applied,
LRFD 5.4.2.3.2
-0.28
in
D40 =psbot+pstop+g+cr.min =
-0.88
in
cr.max = (7,120)*(psbot+pstop+g) =
-0.41
in
D120 =psbot+pstop+g+cr.max =
-1.01
in
0.76 in
Page 5-B9-27
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
40.00
-0.13 in
-0.25 in
5.13
in.
in.
1.00
0.90
0.80
0.70
0.60
0.50
0.40
0.30
0.20
0.10
0.00
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
Time (days)
Page 5-B9-28
Appendix 5-B10
Positive EQ Reinforcement at
Interior Pier of a Prestressed Girder
Design Specifications:
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications 4th Edition dated 2007 and interims
through 2008.
For girders made continuous for live load, extended bottom prestress strands are used to carry
Design Specifications:
Strands used
for this
must
beother
developed
in the
short from
distance
between
the
positive
EQpurpose
load, creep,
and
restrained
moments
one span
to another.
twogirder ends. The strand end anchorage device used, per WSDOT Standard Plan,
Strands used for this purpose must be developed in the short distance between the two girder ends
ifications:
isa 2'-0" strand
extension
with strand
chuck
anchor
plate.
Strand for Positive EQ Moment:
The strand
end anchorage
device
used,and
persteel
WSDOT
Standard Plan, is a 2'-0" strand extension with
strand
chuck
and
steel
anchor plate.
The number
ofload,
strands
to be
extended
cannot exceed the number of straight strands
For girders made continuous
for live
extended bottom prestress strands are used to carry
EQ load, creep,
and other
restrained
from
span than
to another.
available
inThe number of strands to be extended cannot exceed the number of straight strands available in th
the girdermoments
and shall
notone
be less
four.
Positive positive
EQ Moment:
ers madeStrands used for this purpose must be developed in the short distance between the two girder ends.
continuous for live load,
Theextended bottom prestress strands are used to carry
designgirder and shall not be less than four.
moment at the center of gravity of superstructure is calculated using
strand
anchorage
device
used,
per WSDOT
EQ load,The
creep,
andend
other
restrained
moments
from
one
spanStandard Plan, is a 2'-0" strand extension with
to
The
moment
at another.
the center of gravity of superstructure is calculated using the following:
thefollowing: design
strand chuck and steel anchor plate.
used for this purpose must be developed in the short distance between the two girder ends.
Base
The number of strands to be extended cannot exceed the number of straight strands available in the
nd end anchorage
device used, per WSDOT Standard Plan, is a 2'-0" strand extension with
M top
po + M po
CG
top
M
h
=
+
M
huck andgirder and shall not be less than four.
steel anchor plate.
po
po
Lc
The design moment at the center of gravity of superstructure is calculated using the following:
mber of strands to be extended cannot exceed the number of straight strands available in the
nd shall not be less than four. Where: where:
(
+ =
top top
Base
top
M CG
po = M po
where:
(M
+
top
po
+M
Lc
) h=
Base
po
h
plastic overstrength
moment at top of column, kip-ft.
Base
c
ML
po =
h =
h = distance
from top
of column
to c.g. used
of superstructure,
ft.
clear kip-ft.
height
to determine overstrength
shear associated with the
plastic overstrength moment
at topcolumn
of column,
Lc = clear
Lc = column
height
used
to
determine
overstrength
shear
associated
overstrength
moments,
ft.
Base
M po
=
plastic overstrength moment at base of column, kip-ft.
with the overstrength moments, ft.
top
po =
plastic overstrength
moment
topof
ofcolumn
column,tokip-ft.
distance
fromattop
superstructure,
h =
This moment
is resisted
by c.g.
the of
bent
cap throughft.torsion forces. The torsion in the
Base
This moment is resisted by the bent cap through torsion forces. The torsion in the bent cap is
=
plastic overstrength moment at base of column, kip-ft.
bent cap
isdistributed into the superstructure based on the relative flexibility of the superstructure and the ben
distributed
the superstructure
on the relative
flexibility of the
po
column
clear
height
used tointo
determine
overstrength based
shear associated
with the
Lc =
superstructure
and
the
bentcap.
moments,
ft.
distance from topoverstrength
of column to
c.g. of superstructure,
ft.
h =
cap.
Hence,
superstructure
does shear
notdoes
resist
overstrength
moments
uniformly
column clear height
used tothe
determine
overstrength
associated
the overstrength
Hence,
the
superstructure
notcolumn
resistwith
column
moments
uniformly across the width
Lc =
overstrength
moments,
ft.
across
the
width.
To
account
for
this,
an
effective
width
approximation
is
used,
where resistance per u
To
account
for
this,
an
effective
width
approximation
is
used,
where
the
maximum
This moment is resisted by the bent cap through torsion forces. The torsion in the bent cap is
the
maximum
resistance
per
unit
of
superstructure
width
of
the
actual
structure
is
of superstructure width of the actual structure is distributed over an equivalent effective width to
distributed into the superstructure based on the relative flexibility of the superstructure and the bent
equivalent effective
resistance.width toprovide an equivalent resistance.
distributedprovide
over ananequivalent
cap.
ment is resisted by the bent cap through torsion forces. The torsion in the bent cap is
Hence, the superstructure does notIt has been suggested that for concrete bridges, with the exception of box girders and solid
resist column overstrength moments uniformly across the width.
ed into the superstructure based on the relative flexibility of the superstructure and the bent
superstructure, this effective width should be calculated as follows:
To account for this, an effective width
approximation is used, where the maximum resistance per unit
of superstructure width of the actual structure is distributed over an equivalent effective width to
he superstructure does not resist column overstrength moments uniformly across the width.
provide an equivalent resistance.
Beff = Dc + Ds
unt for this, an effective width approximation is used, where the maximum resistance
per unit
structureIt has been suggested that for concrete bridges, with the exception of box girders and solid
width of the actual structure is distributed over an equivalent effective width to
where:
superstructure, this effective width should be calculated as follows:
an equivalent
resistance.
Dc =
diameter of column
en suggested that for concrete bridges, with the exception of box girders and solid
top
po
Beff = DDc =
+ Ds
ucture, this effective width should be calculated as follows:
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M
23-50.14
s
where:
April 2015
Page 5-B10-1
Based on the structural testing conducted at the University of California at San Diego La Jolla,
Beff = Dc + Ds
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
It has been suggested that for concrete bridges, with the exception of box girders and
solid superstructure, this effective width should be calculated as follows:
Beff = Dc + Ds
Where:
Dc = diameter of column
Ds = depth of superstructure including cap beam
Based on the effective width, the moment per girder line is calculated as follows:
Based on the effective width, the moment per girder line is calculated as follows:
adjacent girders (encompassed by the effective width):
adjacent girders (encompassed by the effective width):
non-adjacent girders:
non-adjacent girders:
adjacent girders (encompassed by the
non-adjacent girders:
ve width, the moment per girder line is calculated as follows:
adjacent girders (encompassed by the effective width):
adjacent girders (encompassed by the effective width):
effective
width):
CG non-adjacent girders:
CG non-adjacent girders:
CG
CG
2
M
2
M
M
M
po
po
po Int
po
compassed by the effective width):
non-adjacent girders:
Ext
Int
h, the moment per girder line is calculated as follows:
M sei
=
M sei =
M sei
=
M Ext =
int CG
int CG
extCGsei
extCG
2M
2M
M
M
N
Int 3CG
Ext 3 N g po Ext 3 N g po
g po Int 3 N g po
non-adjacent girders:
M
=
M
=
M
=
M
=
M
sei
sei
sei
sei
int
int
ext
po
po
Ext
3N g
3N g
3N g
3 N gext
M
=
sei
CG 3 N ext
3N gint
MSeismic
g
po
Ext
Moment:
Seismic Moment:
Seismic Moment:
M sei =
Int
Int
Int
Ext Int
Ext
3 NifgextSeismic Moment:
M sei = M sei
M sei = M sei
M sei
ifM sei
M sei M sei
Seismic Moment:
Int
Int
Int
Ext Int
Ext
M sei = M sei
M sei = M sei
MIntsei
if M sei
M sei M sei
if
Int
Ext
M ifsei = MIntsei if Ext Int
M sei M sei
M CG
M CG
Ext
po
po
M
<
M
M
<
M
M CGext= int CGext
sei
sei
sei
seiM sei =
Int
int Msei
Ext
Int
Mwhere:
N g + Npog N g +MNpog
M sei
if where:
if Ext Int < M Ext
sei = M sei
CG < M M
MMsei
M
=
M sei ext= int
sei
sei
sei
sei
int
Int
Ext
int
N
+ N g N g + N gext
M sei
< M sei
NMgint where:
Npo
where:
where:
=
Number of girder encompassed by the effective width.
=
Number of girder encompassed by the effective width.
=
g
g
sei
int
ext
CG
N +Number of girder encompassed by the effective width.
Nintg Number
=
of girder encompassed by the effective width.
Ext
N gintM
N
=
Number of girder encompassed by the effective width.
= = po g Number of girder outside the effective width.
Number of girder outside the effective width.
ext
ext g =
M sei
N
N
M
=
g
g
sei
ext
Number of girder encompassed by the effective width.
NNgintext +Number of extended straight strands needed to develop
= N g Number of girder outside the effective width.
=
Number of girder outside the effective width.
Number of extended straight strands needed to develop
requiredwidth.
moment
capacity
at thecapacity
end of at the end of
the required
moment
N= ext Number of girder outside thetheeffective
g
g
girder is based on the yield strength of the strands.
girder is based on the yield strength of the strands.
Number of girder outside the effective width.
Number of extended straight strands needed to develop
Number of extended straight strands needed to develop
the required
capacity
moment
at thecapacity
end
of at the end of
er of girder encompassed by the effective width.
Number
of extended straight strands neededthe
torequired
developmoment
the
required
moment
capacity
girder is based on the yield strength of the strands.
ed straight strands needed to develop
the required
capacity
the end
of
at thegirder is based on the yield strength of the strands.
end
of girdermoment
is based
on theatyield
strength
er of girder outside the effective width.
1of the strands.
1
the yield strength of the strands. N = 12 M
=K
K M SIDL
N
12
M
M
ps
sei
ps
sei
SIDL
ht strands needed to develop the required moment capacity at the end of 0 .9A 1f 0
d.91 A ps1f py d
=M
12[MseiKK- M
MSIDL
N
ps ]py0.9A
ps
=
N ps =112 M
N sei
K
12
M
d strength of the strands.
ps
sei
SIDL
SIDL
psfpyd
0 .9A ps f py0d.9A ps f py d
]
M Where:
ps = 12 [M sei K
where: SIDL
where:
0
.
9
A
f
d
1ps = area
ps ofpyeach extended strand, in^2
A psyield
where:
]A ps = Afwhere:
2 [M sei K M SIDL
area
of=each
extended
strand,
in^2 steel
area of
extended
strand,
in^2 in LRFD Table 5.4.4.1-1
=
strength
of each
prestressing
specified
py f d
0
.
9
A
f A = =d ps =
fpy
Adistance
slab
to
c.g. strand,
of extended
area
extended
areatop
of of
each
strand,
extended
in^2
in^2 strands, in.
yield strength of prestressing steel specified in LRFD Table 5.4.4.1-1
= of= eachfrom
yield strength of prestressing steel specified in LRFD Table 5.4.4.1-1
py ps
py ps
py
= resistance
flexural resistanceAssume
factor EI is constant
have fixed-fixed supports for both spans.
Assumeofand
EI(K1
isGirders
constant
and Girders have fixed-fixed supports for both spans.
moment distribution factor
use maximum
and K2)
Assume EI
andisGirders
constanthave fixed-fixed supports for both spans.
and Girders have fixed-fixed supports for both spans.
al resistance factor Assume EI is constant
tant and Girders have fixed-fixed supports for both spans.
K
K
K
K
Girders
1
Page 5-B10-2
K
have fixed-fixed supports for both spans.
K2
K1
L
K2
K1
L1 + L12
K2 =
L1 + LL12 + L2
K2 =
L +LL2
Chapter
Deleted: Nu
strands needed
<sp>where:
moment capac
1
2
<sp>= area of each extended strand,
based on the y
Assume EI is constant and Girders have fixed-fixed supports for both spans.
1
2
in^2
<sp>
1
2
= yield strength of prestressing steel
L2
L1
1
2
specified in LRFD Table 5.4.4.1-1
1
2
L
L
K =
K = for both spans.
Assume EI is constant and Girders have fixed-fixed
supports
L +L
L +L
K =
L
L +L
K =
L
L +L
d
h
References:
References:
Holombo, J., M.J.N. Priestley, and F. Seible, "Continuity of Precast Prestressed Spliced-Girder
Holombo, J., M.J.N. Priestley, and F. Seible, "Continuity of Precast Prestressed
Bridge Under Seismic Loads", PCI Journal, 45(2), 40-63, March-April, 2000.
Spliced-Girder Bridge Under Seismic Loads", PCI Journal, 45(2), 40-63, March-April,
References:
2000.
Given:
Holombo, J., M.J.N. Priestley, and F. Seible, "Continuity of Precast Prestressed Spliced-Girder
Ds c =
D
cap beam
D s
=
5.00
ft.
diameter
of
column
c5 +
12.93
=
17.93
ft.
Bf eff = = 4.00 Dksi,
specified compressive strength of deck concrete, Class 4000D.
=
ft. depth of superstructure including cap beam
ksi,12.93
specified
compressive strength of deck concrete, Class 4000D.
f'dc = = 0.6 '' D s4.00
nominal strand diameter =0.217 in^2
b
B eff strand
nominal
diameter
dfb = = 270 ksi0.6''
=
5 +prestressing
12.93 ==0.217
17.93
ft.in^2
specified tensile strength of
strands.
=
270 ksi specified
tensilecompressive
strength of
prestressing
strands.
LRFD
fpu
4.00 ksi, specified
strength
of deck concrete,
Class
4000D.
f =
LRFD Table 5.4.4.1-1
f
Table5.4.4.1-1
= for low0.6 ''
nominal strand diameter =0.217 in^2
d b ksi
relaxation
ksi
ksi
for
lowstrand
relaxation
strand
fpy = = 243 ksif243
=
270
ksi
specified
tensile
of prestressing
strands.
resistance
factor (LRFD
1.3.2.1,strength
forCextreme
event
state) event limit state)
= = 1.00 1.00
resistance
factorC (LRFD
1.3.2.1,
forlimit
extreme
int
LRFD Table 5.4.4.1-1
N g = = 3
3number of girders encompassed by the effective width
number of girders encompassed by the effective width
f =
ext
ksi for lowgirder depth
relaxation strand
=
W83G
H = 243
82.625 ''
GTYPE
N g = = 2
2number of prestressed girders in the pier
number
ofksiprestressed
girders in the pier
=
1.00
resistance
factor
(LRFD C 1.3.2.1, for extreme event limit state)
A =
9.50 ''
"A" Dimension including 1/2" Integral W.S.
GTYP =
W83G H = 82.625'' girder depth
int
N9.50
3 Dimension
number of girders encompassed by the effective width
7.50 ''
tA
= effective slab thickness (not including 1/2" Integral W.S.)
including 1/2" Integral W.S.
g = '' "A"
s =
ext
N
= c.g. of superstructure to top of slab (see PGSuper output)
7.50
slab thickness (not including 1/2" Integral W.S.)
ts
2
number of prestressed girders in the pier
36.86 ''
Yt slab =
g = '' effective
b =
=
36.86
''
c.g.
of
superstructure
top of
slab (see PGSuper output)
Y t slab 81.00 ''
effective flange width (PGSuper Output &toLRFD
4.6.2.6.1)
b
=
81.00
'' effective flange width (PGSuper Output & LRFD 4.6.2.6.1)
h =
116.64 ''
distance from top of column to c.g. of superstructure
h
=
116.64
'' distance from top ofFactor
column
to c.g.
of superstructure
176.63 ft.
Span length of span 1.
=
1.33
L1 =
=
176.63 ft. Span length of span 1. Factor = 1.33
L1
180.00 ft.
Span length of span 2.
Factor =
1.00
L2 =
=
180.00 ft. Span length of span 2. Factor = 1.00
L2
'
c
pu
'
c
py
pu
py
3EI
L1
L1
4EI
L2
L2
FarFarEnd
EndCondition
Condition
Pin
Pin
1.33
Fixed
1.00
Fixed
1.33
1.00
Lc =
25.00 ft. column clear height used to determine overstrength shear associated
with the overstrength
moments, ft.
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual
M 23-50.14
April 2015
top =
16000.0plastic overstrength moment at top of column, kip-ft
M po
Base
Page 5-B10-3
L
L L1
LL1 1 1 1
L1
L1
L1
L2
1.33
Condition
Pin Pin Far End
1.33
Pin
1.33
Pin
1.33
Pin
1.33
Fixed
1.00
Pin
Fixed
1.00
Fixed
1.00 1.33
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Fixed
1.00
Fixed
1.00
Fixed
1.00
L
25.00
ft. column
height
to determine
overstrength
shear
associated
c =
L
25.00
column
clearclear
height
usedused
determine
overstrength
shear
associated
ft.ft. column
clear
height
used
totodetermine
overstrength
shear
associated
LcL c c ==Lc = = 25.00
25.00
column
clear
height
to
determine
theft.
overstrength
moments,
ft. toused
25.00
ft.
column
clear
height
used
determine
overstrengthoverstrength
shear associatedshear
withwith
the
overstrength
moments,
ft.
Lc = with
the overstrength
moments,
ft. used to determine overstrength shear associated
25.00
ft. column
clear height
L
with
overstrength
moments,
ft. to
associated
with
the
overstrength
moments,
ft. shear associated
25.00the
column
clear
height
used
determine
overstrength
c =
top
= 16000.0
16000.0
plastic
overstrength
moment
at of
top
of column,
kip-ft
with
theft.
overstrength
moments,
ft.
top
M
=
plastic
overstrength
moment
attop
top
column,
kip-ft
top
po
=
16000.0
plastic
overstrength
moment
at
of
column,
kip-ft
with
the
overstrength
moments,
ft.
MMpopo top= =
16000.0
plastic
overstrength
moment
at topkip-ft
of column, kip-ft
16000.0pplastic
overstrength
moment at
top of column,
MBase
top
16500.0
lastic overstrength moment at base of column, kip-ft.
po =
= 16500.0
16000.0
plastic
overstrength moment at top of column, kip-ft
Base
M
16500.0
lastic overstrength moment at base of column, kip-ft.
M = po=
Base
pplastic overstrength moment at base of column, kip-ft.
top
po =
=
16000.0
plastic
overstrength
moment
at
top
of
column,
kip-ft
16500.0
plastic
overstrength
moment
at
base
of column, kip-ft.
MMpo
po M
Base
16500.0
pmoment
lastic overstrength moment at base of column, kip-ft.
po =
MM
517.0
due
to SIDL
(traffic
barrier, sidewalk, etc.) per girder,
Base =
= 517.0
16500.0
plastic overstrength moment at base of column, kip-ft.
po
SIDL
=
517.0
moment
due
to
SIDL
(traffic
barrier, sidewalk, etc.) per girder,
M
MM
=
moment
due
to
SIDL
(traffic
barrier, sidewalk, etc.) per girder,
SIDL
Base
po
= =
517.0
moment
due to SIDL
(traffic barrier, sidewalk, etc.) per girder,
MSIDL
16500.0
pmoment
lastic overstrength moment at base of column, kip-ft.
SIDL
MMSIDL
=
517.0 (see
due to SIDL
(traffic barrier, sidewalk, etc.) per girder,
po
kip-ft
QconBridge
Output)
M SIDL
= kip-ft
517.0
moment
due
to SIDL
(traffic
barrier, sidewalk, etc.) per girder,
kip-ft
(see
QconBridge
Output)
kip-ft
(see
QconBridge
Output)
(see
QconBridge
Output)
M SIDL =
517.0 (see
moment
due to SIDL
(traffic barrier, sidewalk, etc.) per girder,
kip-ft
QconBridge
Output)
p
= 0.900.90
0.90 (see QconBridge Output)
kip-ft
P =
p p ==
kip-ft
p = 0.90
0.90 (see QconBridge Output)
Design
Steps:
p
=
0.90
Design
Steps:
Design
Steps:
p
=
Design
Steps: 0.90
Design
Steps:
Step
1:
Calculate
the design
moment
at center
the centergravity
of gravity
of superstructure
Design
StepSteps:
Calculatethe
thedesign
design
moment
the
superstructure
Step
1:1:
Calculate
moment
atatthe
center ofofgravity
ofofsuperstructure
Design
Steps:
Step
1:
Calculate
the
design
moment
at
the
center
of
gravity
of superstructure
Step
Step1:1:
Calculate the design moment at the center of gravity of superstructure
StepCG
1:
Calculate the design moment at the center of gravity of superstructure
CG
M po =
16000
+ ( 16000
+ 16500
/*25
* 116.64
/ =12gravity
= 28636
MMCG
Calculate
the
at25)*the
center
ofkip-ft
superstructure
16000
16000
+16500
16500
116.64
12of
28636
kip-ft
16000
++design
( (16000
+moment
) )/ /25
116.64
/ /12
= 28636
kip-ft
popo ==
M CG
CG =
16000
+
(
16000
+
16500
)
/
25
*
116.64
/
12
=
28636
kip-ft
po
M CG
16000 ++( (16000
+ 16500
) / 25 *) 116.64
12 = 28636
16000
+ 16500
/ 25 *// 116.64
/ 12kip-ft
= 28636 kip-ft
M popo == = 16000
16000 + ( 16000
+ 16500
) / 25 * 116.64
12 = 28636
kip-ft
Step
2:
Calculate
the
design
moment
per
girder.
Step2:2:
Calculatethe
thedesign
designmoment
moment per
pergirder.
girder.
Step
Calculate
Step
Step2:2:
Calculate the design moment per girder.
Step 2:
Calculate the design moment per girder.
Step
2:
Calculate the design moment per girder.
Int
Int
M
Int
MM seiCalculate
the28636
design
perkip-ft
girder.
sei =
* 28636moment
/ 6363.56
3 = 6363.56
2/3**2/3
kip-ft
sei ==Int
2/3
28636 / /33==6363.56
kip-ft
M sei
Int =
2/3
*
28636
/
3
=
6363.56
kip-ft
M sei
2/3** 28636
28636 / 3 =
kip-ft kip-ft
= = 2/3
3 6363.56
= 6363.56
M seiInt
2/3 * 28636 / 3/ =
6363.56
kip-ft
Ext =
Ext
M
Ext
= 1/3 *1/3
* 28636
/ 4772.67
2 = 4772.67
kip-ft
Mseisei =sei
M
28636
/
2
=
kip-ft
Ext
=
1/3
*
28636
/
2
=
4772.67
kip-ft
**28636
/ =2 4772.67
= 4772.67
M seiExt = = 1/3
1/3
28636
/
2
kip-ft kip-ft
M sei
Ext =
1/3 * 28636 / 2 = 4772.67 kip-ft
M sei
Avg =
1/3 * 28636
4772.67
kip-ft
/ (3+ +2/ 2)=
2=)=
5727.2
kip-ft
=6363.56
6363.56
kip-ft.
MMAvgAvgM sei = = 28636
28636
5727.2
kip-ft
= 6363.56
kip-ft.
sei =Avg
28636
/(3(3+/+2(3
2)=
)=5727.2
5727.2
kip-ft
kip-ft.
sei
28636
/
kip-ft
==
6363.56 kip-ft.
M=sei
Avg =
28636
/
(3
+
2
)=
5727.2
kip-ft
=
6363.56
kip-ft.
M sei
Avg = = 234.92
= 180
/ (234.92 + 180 ) = 0.434
L
28636 / ft.
(3 +(Modified)
2 )= 5727.2 kip-ft =K 6363.56
kip-ft.
M1sei
=
28636 / (3 + 2 )= 5727.2 kip-ft = 1 6363.56 kip-ft.
=
234.92
ft.
(Modified)
=
180
/
(234.92
180
) = 0.434
L
= 1 = 234.92
234.92
(Modified)
= 180
(234.92
180
)==0.434
0.434
180.00
(Modified)
234.92
/+)(234.92
+ 180 ) = 0.566
LL1 L
1180=
ft.ft. ft. (Modified)
=K
/ /(234.92
++180
1 =
KK1K
2L
1 2
=
234.92
ft.
(Modified)
=
180
/
(234.92
+
180
) = 0.434
K
234.92 ft.
(Modified)
1 = 180 / (234.92 + 180 ) = 0.434
L11 =
K
234.92 ft.
(Modified)
L1 = = 0.566
K
K 1 = 180 / (234.92 + 180 ) = 0.434
L2
LL2 2 22
L2
L2
L2
Step 3:
Page 5-B10-4
cs
assume
fpy = 243 ksi
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Step 4:
cs
where:
Aps = area of prestressing steel, in^2. =10 * 0.217 = 2.17 in^2
dp = distance from extreme compression fiber to the centroid of prestressing
tendons (in.)
dp = 9.5 - 0.5 + 82.625 - 3 = 88.625''
c=
Aps f py
0.85 f ce' 1b
1 = 0.85 0.05
for
f ce' - 4000
0.65 for
1000
1 = 0.85
f ce' ksi
fc = = 4.00
ksi
= 1.3 * 4= = 5.2
4.00
ksi
1.3 =* 0.79
4 = 5.2 ksi = 0.79
f
1
c = = 2.17
*
243/0.85
*
5.2
*
0.79
*
81 = 1.864 ''
2.17 * 243 / 0.85 * 5.2 * 0.79 * 81 = 1.864 ''
'
c
c
* 1.864 = 1.473'' depth
of the equivalent stress block (in.)
0.79 * 1.864 = 1.473 ''
depth of the equivalent stress block (in.)
aa = = 0.79
1.473/2
)/12 == 3862.04
3862.04kip-ft.
kip-ft.
=n = 2.17
2.17**243
243 ** (( 88.625
88.625 --1.473
/ 2 )/12
MM
n
* 3862.04 = 3862.04 kip-ft. > = 3137.61
ft-kips OK
> = 3137.61 ft-kips
OK
M M=
r = 11 * 3862.04 = 3862.04 kip-ft.
r
Page 5-B10-5
Concrete Structures
Page 5-B10-6
Chapter 5
LRFD Wingwall Design
LRFD
Wingwall
Design
Vehicle
Collision
Appendix 5-B11
Vehicle Collision
Problem Description: A wingwall with traffic barrier is to be checked for moment capacity at a
vertical section at the abutment for a vehicular impact.
AASHTO LRFD Specifications Extreme Event-II Limit State (Test Level TL-4)
L := 15ft
Wingwall Length
h := 2.5ft
S := 2ft
Traffic surcharge (given in height of soil above road). See LRFD Tables
3.11.6.4-1 and 3.11.6.4-2.
GroundSlope := 2
to 1
W := 45
lbf
ft ft
Ft := 54kip
Lt := 3.5ft
CT := 1
EH := 1.35
LS := 0.5
Lt
2
MomentArm = 13.25 ft
H := h +
GroundSlope
H = 10.00 ft
EH
FlexuralMoment
H
M u = 83.69
kip ft
ft
Page 5-B11-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Problem Description: A wingwall with traffic barrier is to be checked for moment capacity at a
vertical section at the abutment for a vehicular impact.
AASHTO LRFD Specifications Extreme Event-II Limit State (Test Level TL-4)
L := 15ft
Wingwall Length
h := 2.5ft
S := 2ft
Traffic surcharge (given in height of soil above road). See LRFD Tables
3.11.6.4-1 and 3.11.6.4-2.
GroundSlope := 2
to 1
W := 45
lbf
ft ft
Ft := 54kip
Lt := 3.5ft
CT := 1
EH := 1.35
LS := 0.5
Lt
2
MomentArm = 13.25 ft
H := h +
GroundSlope
H = 10.00 ft
EH
FlexuralMoment
Page 5-B11-2
M u = 83.69
kip ft
ft
Chapter 5
Define Units
Concrete Structures
MPa Pa 10
kcf kip ft
N 1 newton
kN 1000 N
Page 5-B11-3
Concrete Structures
Page 5-B11-4
Chapter 5
Flexural
FLEXURAL STRENGTH CALCULATIONS
forStrength
COMPOSITECalculations
T-BEAMS
Appendix 5-B12
for Composite T-Beams
Find the flexural strength of a W83G girder made composite with a 7.50 in. thick
cast-in-place deck, of which the top 0.50 in. is considered to be a sacrificial wearing
surface. The girder spacing is 6.0 ft. To simplify the calculations, ignore the contribution
of any non-prestressed reinforcing steel and the girder top flange. The girder
Figure 1 with 70-0.6 in.
configuration is shown in
diameter strands, and concrete strengths of 6000 psi in the deck and 15000 psi in the
girder.
Figure 1
Bare W83G Bridge Girder Data
Depth of girder
h = 82.68 in.
bw = 6.10 in.
Ep = 28,600 ksi
Page 5-B12-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
f c = 15000 psi
H = 89.68 in.
b = 72.00 in.
t = 7.50 in.
hf = 7.00 in.
dp = 85.45 in.
f c = 6000 psi
f pe
= 0.003 85.45 1 + 148.00
1 +
30.75 28,600
c
Ep
27,613
f si = ps 887 +
1
7.36 7.36
1 + (112.4 ps )
dp
ps = 0.003
27,613
= (0.010511)887 +
1 + (112.4(0.010511))7.36
si Fsi
1( ave ) =
( f c Ac 1 ) j
j
cj
7.36
( f c Ac ) j
j
hf
ahf
+ 0.85 f c( girder) a h f bw d p h f
M n = 0.85 f c( deck ) h f b d p
2
2
(22.1 7 )
7
2
2
dt
87.68
1
d t = H 2 = 89.68 2 = 0.5 + 0.3 1 = 0.5 + 0.3
30.75
c
Page 5-B12-2
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
dp
f pe
= 0.003 85.45 1 + 148.00
1 +
M n = 1.00(293,931) ps = 0.003
32.87 28,600
c
Ep
f si
27,613
= ps 887 +
1 + 112.4 ps 7.36
( (
) )
7.36
27,613
= (0.009974 )887 +
1 + (112.4(0.009974 ))7.36
7.36
A F = A f = (15.19)(242.83) a = c = (0.65)(32.87)
Fcj = 0.85 f c(deck ) h f b + 0.85 f c( girder ) (a h f )bw
si
si
ps
si
hf
ahf
+ 0.85 f c( girder) a h f bw d p h f
M n = 0.85 f c( deck ) h f b d p
2
2
(21.37 7 )
7
2
2
dt
87.68
1
d t = H 2 = 89.68 2 = 0.5 + 0.3 1 = 0.5 + 0.3
32.87
c
M n = 1.00(290,323)
Page 5-B12-3
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
web. Example calculations for the stresses in the slice at the top of the deck, at the
interface between the deck and girder, and the prestressing steel are as follows:
For the deck concrete,
Ec =
(40,000
f c + 1,000,000
1000
) = (40,000
6000 + 1,000,000
1000
= 4098 ksi
n = 0 .8 +
f c
6000
= 0 .8 +
= 3.20
2500
2500
k = 0.67 +
f c
6000
= 0.67 +
= 1.337
9000
9000
c 1000 =
f c n
6000 3.2
=
= 2.129
E c n 1 4098 3.2 1
y=
7
= 0.167 in.
21(2 )
cf =
0.003
(c y ) = 0.003 (34.42 0.167 ) = 0.002985
c
34.42
f c = ( f c )
n cf c
n 1 + cf c
)nk
= (6 )
3.2(0.002985 0.002129)
7
C1 = (4.18ksi )(72in ) in = 100.32kip
21
For bottom slice of deck,
y=
7
(20) + 7 = 6.833 in.
21
21(2 )
cf =
0.003
(c y ) = 0.003 (34.42 6.833) = 0.002404
c
34.42
f c = ( f c )
= 5.59
Page 5-B12-4
n cf c
n 1 + cf c
nk
= (6 )
3.2(0.002404 0.002129)
ksi
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.14
April 2015
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
(40,000
Ec =
=
f c + 1,000,000
1000
n = 0 .8 +
f c
15000
= 0 .8 +
= 6.80
2500
2500
k = 0.67 +
f c
15000
= 0.67 +
= 2.337
9000
9000
f c n
15000 6.8
=
= 2.981
E c n 1 5899 6.8 1
c 1000 =
cf =
27.42
= 7.174 in.
79(2 )
0.003
(c y ) = 0.003 (34.42 7.174) = 0.002375
c
34.42
n cf c
n 1 + cf c
= 13.51
)nk
= (15)
6.8(0.002375 0.002981)
ksi
f pe
= 0.003 85.45 1 + 148 = 0.00964
1 +
34.42 28500
c
Ep
dp
ps = 0.003
Page 5-B12-5
Concrete Structures
f ps
f ps
Chapter 5
27,613
270 ksi
= ps 887 +
1
7.36 7.36
1 + (112.4 ps )
27,613
= 239.93ksi
= (0.00964 ) 887 +
1
7.36 7.36
1 + (112.4 0.00964 )
To calculate ,
Assume the lowest row of prestressing strands is located 2 from the bottom of the
girder. The depth to the extreme strands is
d t = H 2 = 89.68 2 = 87.68 in.
dt
87.68
1 = 0.5 + 0.3
1 = 0.96
34.42
c
= 0.5 + 0.3
M n = 0.96(283,170)
273,034 kip-in.
Page 5-B12-6
Appendix 5-B13
Page 5-B13-1
Concrete Structures
Page 5-B13-2
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5-B13-3
Concrete Structures
Page 5-B13-4
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5-B13-5
Concrete Structures
Page 5-B13-6
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5-B13-7
Concrete Structures
Page 5-B13-8
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5-B13-9
Concrete Structures
Page 5-B13-10
Chapter 5
Shear and Torsion Capacity
Shear and Torsion Capacity of a Reinforced Concrete Beam
Appendix 5-B14
of a Reinforced Concrete Beam
Define Units:
ksi 1000 psi
kcf kip ft
klf kip ft
Problem Description:
Find the torsion and shear capacity of a reinforced concrete beam of width 37in and height
90in. Clear cover for all sides equals 1.625in. Shear and torsion reinforcement consists of #6
stirrups spaced at 5in. Longitudinal moment steel consists of 4 #18 bars in one row in the top
and in the bottom. Factored loads are Vu = 450 kips and Tu = 500 kip-ft.
Concrete Properties:
f'c := 4 ksi
Reinforcement Properties:
Bar Diameters:
Bar Areas:
dia ( bar) :=
A b ( bar) :=
0.375 in if bar = 3
0.500 in if bar = 4
0.625 in if bar = 5
0.750 in if bar = 6
0.11 in
0.20 in
0.31 in
0.875in if bar = 7
0.44 in
1.000in if bar = 8
0.60 in
1.128in if bar = 9
1.270in if bar = 10
2
2
0.79 in
1.410in if bar = 11
1.00 in
1.693in if bar = 14
1.27 in
2.257in if bar = 18
2
2
1.56 in
2.25 in
fy := 40 ksi
E s := 29000ksi
LRFD 5.4.3.2
E p := 28500ksi
barLT := 18
Longitudinal - Top
barLB := 18
Longitudinal - Bottom
barT := 6
Transverse
s := 5 in
4.00 in
if bar = 3
if bar = 4
if bar = 5
if bar = 6
if bar = 7
if bar = 8
if bar = 9
if bar = 10
if bar = 11
if bar = 14
if bar = 18
Page 5-B14-1
Concrete Structures
( )
dLB := dia ( barLB)
dT := dia ( barT)
dLT := dia barLT
Chapter 5
dLT = 2.257 in
dLB = 2.257 in
dT = 0.75 in
( )
A LB := A b ( barLB)
A T := A b ( barT)
A LT := Ab barLT
A LT = 4 in
A LB = 4 in
A T = 0.44 in
Width of Beam
h := 90in
Height of Beam
bottomcover := 1.625 in
sidecover := 1.625 in
topcover := 1.625 in
Factored Loads:
V u := 450 kip
Tu := 500 kip ft
Mu := 0 kip ft
Nu := 0 kip
Torsional Resistance Investigation Requirement:
Torsion shall be investigated where:
LRFD 5.8.2.1
A cp := b h
A cp = 3330 in
pc := ( b + h) 2
pc = 254 in
LRFD 5.5.4.2
fpc := 0 ksi
2
A
fpc
cp
2
ksi
f'c in
Tcr := 0.125
1+
kip in
ksi pc
f'c
0.125
ksi
in
Page 5-B14-2
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
LRFD 5.8.2.9
bv := b
bv = 37 in
A v := 2AT
A v = 0.88 in
A vmin := 0.0316
A v Avmin = 1
f'c
ksi
ksi
bv s
LRFD 5.8.3.3
2
A vmin = 0.29 in
fy
OK
LRFD 5.8.2.1
dT
+ h topcover bottomcover dT
ph := 2 b 2 sidecover +
2
ph = 238 in
A oh := b 2 sidecover +
dT
2
A oh = 2838 in
A o := 0.85 Aoh
A o = 2412.3 in
LRFD C5.8.2.1
LRFD 5.8.2.1-6
V ust :=
0.9 ph Tu
Vu +
2 Ao
Page 5-B14-3
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Determination of and :
LRFD 5.8.3.4
dLB
de = 86.5 in
LRFD 5.8.2.9
dv = 77.85 in
LRFD 5.8.2.9
V p := 0 kip
No Prestress Strands
de := h bottomcover dT
A ps := 0 in
No Prestress Strands
A s := 4 ALB
A s = 16 in
fpo := 0 ksi
Assume to begin iterations (then vary until
convergence below)
:= 30.5 deg
M
u + 0.5 N + 0.5 V V cot ( ) A f
u
ust
p
ps po
dv
x :=
2 ( Es As + Ep Aps)
LRFD 5.8.3.4.2-1
x 1000 = 0.478
v u :=
Vust Vp
bv dv
vu
f'c
v u = 0.202 ksi
LRFD 5.8.2.9-1
= 0.05
:= 2.59
Page 5-B14-4
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Torsional Resistance:
The factored Torsional Resistance shall be:
LRFD 5.8.2.1
Tr = Tn
2
A t := A T
Tn :=
2 A o At fy cot ( )
s
A t = 0.44 in
LRFD 5.8.3.6.2
Tn = 28831 kip in
LRFD 5.8.3.6.2-1
Tn = 2403 kip ft
Tr := Tn
Tr = 25948 kip in
LRFD 5.8.2.1
Tr = 2162 kip ft
OK
Tr Tu = 1
Shear Resistance:
The factored Shear Resistance shall be:
LRFD 5.8.2.1
V r = Vn
V c := 0.0316
f'c
ksi
bv dv ksi
V c = 471.5 kip
LRFD 5.8.3.3
V s = 930.4 kip
LRFD 5.8.3.3
:= 90 deg
V s :=
V n = 1402 kip
V r := Vn
V r = 1262 kip
Vr Vu = 1
OK
Page 5-B14-5
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
LRFD 5.8.3.6.3
X1 = 640 kip
X2 :=
Mu
dv
2
Vu
+ cot ( )
Vp 0.5 Vs +
0.5 Nu
0.45 ph Tu
2 Ao
X2 = 258 kip
X1 X2 = 1
OK
LRFD 5.8.2.7
))
s max := if v u < 0.125 f'c , min 0.8 dv , 24in , min 0.4 dv , 12in
s max = 24 in
Page 5-B14-6
Sound Wall Design
Precast
Panel
on
Shaft
Appendix 5-B15
Type D-2k
This design is based upon:
AASHTO Guide Specifications for Structural Design of Sound Barriers - 1989 (including 2002
interim)
AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges 17th Ed. - 2002
USS Steel Sheet Piling Design Manual - July 1984
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual
Caltrans Trenching and Shoring Manual - June 1995
This design doesn't account for the loads of a combined retaining wall / noisewall. A maximum of 2
ft of retained fill above the final ground line is suggested.
MathCAD file written by Brian Aldrich, July 15, 2004.
Define Units:
plf lbf ft
psf lbf ft
kcf kip ft
klf kip ft
pcf lbf ft
Concrete Properties:
BDM 4.1.1
wc := 160 pcf
f'c := 4000 psi
wc
Ec :=
pcf
1.5
33
f'c
psi
psi
Ec = 4.224 10 psi
fr := 7.5
f'c
psi
psi
fr = 474.3 psi
Page 5-B15-1
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Reinforcement Properties:
Diameters: dia ( bar) :=
0.375 in if bar = 3
0.500 in if bar = 4
0.625 in if bar = 5
0.750 in if bar = 6
0.11 in
0.20 in
0.31 in
0.44 in
1.000 in if bar = 8
0.60 in
1.270 in if bar = 10
2
2
0.79 in
1.410 in if bar = 11
1.00 in
1.693 in if bar = 14
1.27 in
2.257 in if bar = 18
2
2
1.56 in
fy := 60000 psi
Page 5-B15-2
Ab ( bar) :=
0.875 in if bar = 7
1.128 in if bar = 9
Es := 29000000 psi
Areas:
2.25 in
Std. Spec. 8.7.2
4.00 in
if bar = 3
if bar = 4
if bar = 5
if bar = 6
if bar = 7
if bar = 8
if bar = 9
if bar = 10
if bar = 11
if bar = 14
if bar = 18
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Wall Geometry:
Wall Height:
H := 24 ft
H should be <= 28 ft
h := H 0.5
h = 12 ft
Shaft Diameter:
b := 2.50 ft
Shaft Spacing:
L := 12 ft
WindVel := 90 mph
Wind Pressure:
otherwise
Pw = 25 psf
A := 0.35
BDM 4.4-A2
DL Coefficient, Wall
f := 0.75
App = 5.44 ft
App wc
EQ := 1.3 EQD 2 h L
EQ = 7134 lbf
P = 9360 lbf
Page 5-B15-3
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
:= 38 deg
:= 125 pcf
y := 2.0 ft
do := 0.5 ft
deg b
,
Iso = 3.00
Factor of Safety:
FS := 1.00
:=
Page 5-B15-4
2
3
= 25.333 deg
HC := cos ( )
HC = 0.904
fa := 1.00
( Active )
fp := 0.90
( Passive)
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
Page 5-B15-5
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Side 1:
Backfill Slope Angle:
s1 := atan
s1 = 26.5651 deg
s1
= 0.70
Using the USS Steel Sheet Piling Design Manual, Figure 5(a):
For = 38 deg and s = 0 deg:
Ka1 := 0.190
Kp1 := 3.060
Rp1 := 0.773
Active Pressure:
P a1 := Ka1 HC fa
P a1 = 21
psf
ft
Passive Pressure:
K p1 Rp1 HC Iso fp
P p1 :=
FS
P p1 = 722
psf
ft
Side 2:
s2 := atan
s2 = 26.5651 deg
Ka2 := 0.190
Kp2 := 3.060
Rp2 := 0.773
s2
= 0.70
Active Pressure:
P a2 := Ka2 HC fa
P a2 = 21
psf
ft
Passive Pressure:
K p2 Rp2 HC Iso fp
P p2 :=
FS
P p2 = 722
psf
ft
psf
R1 = 700
ft
psf
R2 = 700
ft
Side 1
Side 2
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.14
April 2015
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
d 0 ft
Msum 100 lbf ft
while Msum 0.001 lbf ft
d d + 0.00001 ft
2
2
R2 do
R2 d
P
z
d ( R1 + R2) 2
b
2
R2 z ( d z)
R1 d + R2 ( d z)
P1 R2 do d do z
)(
2 1
P2 R2 d do z
2
1
P3 R2 ( d z) x
2
1
P4 R1 d ( z x )
2
X1
X2
z + d do
2
2 z + d do
3
X3 z
X4
1
3
x
3
( z x)
Msum P ( h + y + d) + b ( P1 X1 P2 X2 P3 X3 + P4 X4)
d
Page 5-B15-7
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Check for 2 load cases. Case 1 has load P acting as shown on Figure A. Case 2 has load
P acting in the opposite direction.
Case 1:
dc1 := ShaftD do , P , R1 , R2 , b , h , y
dc1 = 11.18 ft
2
2
R2 do
R2 dc1
P
zc1 :=
dc1 ( R1 + R2)
b
2
2
xc1 :=
zc1 = 5.102 ft
xc1 = 1.797 ft
2 psf
1
P4c1 := R1 dc1 zc1 xc1
2
P4c1 = 12935 ft
ft
Case 2:
dc2 := ShaftD do , P , R2 , R1 , b , h , y
dc2 = 11.18 ft
2
2
R1 do
R1 dc2
P
zc2 :=
dc2 ( R1 + R2)
b
2
2
xc2 :=
zc2 = 5.102 ft
xc2 = 1.797 ft
2 psf
1
P4c2 := R2 dc2 zc2 xc2
2
P4c2 = 12935 ft
ft
Determine Shaft Lateral Pressures and Moment Arms for Controlling Case:
d := max dc1 , dc2
d = 11.18 ft
Ra := if dc2 dc1 , R1 , R2
psf
Ra = 700
ft
2
2
Ra do
Ra d
P
z :=
z = 5.102 ft
d ( Ra + Rb) 2
b
2
P1 := Ra do d do z
)(
2 1
P2 := Ra d do z
2
1
P3 := Ra ( d z) x
2
1
P4 := Rb d ( z x )
2
P1 = 1953
lbf
ft
P2 = 10901
P3 = 3825
lbf
ft
lbf
ft
lbf
P4 = 12935
ft
Rb := if dc2 dc1 , R2 , R1
x :=
Ra z ( d z)
Rb d + Ra ( d z)
X1 :=
X2 :=
z + d do
2
2 z + d do
3
X3 := z
X4 :=
Msum := P ( h + y + d) + b ( P1 X1 P2 X2 P3 X3 + P4 X4)
Page 5-B15-8
1
3
x
3
( z x)
psf
Rb = 700
ft
x = 1.797 ft
X1 = 7.892 ft
X2 = 6.962 ft
X3 = 4.503 ft
X4 = 1.102 ft
Msum = 0.13163 lbf ft
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
The Maximum Moment in the shaft will occur where the shear = 0.
Assume that the point where shear = 0 occurs in areas 1 and 2 on Figure A.
Check for Case 1:
sc1 := do +
2P
2
do +
R2 b
sc1 = 2.808 ft
2 1
3 1
Mshaftc1 := P h + y + do + s c1 R2 do b s c1 R2 b s c1
2
6
Check that the point where shear = 0 occurs in areas 1 and 2 on Figure A:
Check1 := if sc1 dc1 do zc1 , "OK" , "NG"
Check1 = "OK"
2P
2
do +
R1 b
sc2 = 2.808 ft
2 1
3 1
Mshaftc2 := P h + y + do + s c2 R1 do b s c2 R1 b s c2
2
6
Check that the point where shear = 0 occurs in areas 1 and 2 on Figure A:
Check2 := if sc2 dc2 do zc2 , "OK" , "NG"
)
Mshaft := max ( Mshaftc1 , Mshaftc2)
Check2 = "OK"
Mshaft = 152094 lbf ft
Mbolt := P ( h + y)
Page 5-B15-9
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Mpanel := 1.3
wpanel L
Mpanel = 585
lbf ft
ft
hpa := 17in
Depth of Post
bpa := 10in
Width of Post
barA := 10
f := 0.90
dpa := hpa Clpa dia ( 3)
As := 2 A b barA
a :=
dia barA
dpa = 14.99 in
Effective depth
As = 2.54 in
As fy
a = 4.482 in
Mn := As fy dpa
2
Mn = 161910 lbf ft
f Mn = 145719 lbf ft
Check3 := if f Mn Mbolt , "OK" , "NG"
Check3 = "OK"
fy
87000 psi
87000 psi + fy
b = 0.029
As
:=
= 0.01694
bpa dpa
Check4 = "OK"
Sa :=
bpa hpa
Sa = 481.7 in
Mcra := f r Sa
Check5 = "OK"
Check Shear (Std. Spec. 8.16.6) - Note: Shear Capacity of stirrups neglected:
v := 0.85
Page 5-B15-10
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
f'c
Vca := 2
psi
Check6 = "OK"
hpb := 17.5in
barB := 9
As := 2 A b barB
As = 2 in
a :=
As fy
a = 3.922 in
Mn := As fy dpb
2
Mn = 147892 lbf ft
f Mn = 133103 lbf ft
Check7 := if f Mn Mbolt , "OK" , "NG"
Check7 = "OK"
fy
87000 psi
87000 psi + fy
b = 0.029
As
:=
= 0.01327
bpb dpb
Check8 = "OK"
Sb :=
bpb hpb
Sb = 459.4 in
Mcrb := fr Sb
Check9 = "OK"
Check Shear (Std. Spec. 8.16.6) - Note: Shear Capacity of stirrups neglected:
v = 0.85
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.14
April 2015
Concrete Structures
Vcb := 2
f'c
psi
Chapter 5
Check10 = "OK"
psi
f'c
psi in
psi
max
lbasic ( bar) :=
0.085 fy
f'c
psi
psi
0.11 fy
f'c
psi
in if bar = 14
in if bar = 18
psi
"error"
otherwise
lbasicA = 4.016 ft
lbasicB = 3.162 ft
(
(
ldA = 5.623 ft
ldB = 4.427 ft
LapSplice = 9.558 ft
Note: Lap Splices are not allowed for bar sizes greater than 11 per AASHTO Std. Spec. 8.32.1.1.
Check11 := if barA 11 barB 11 , "OK" , "NG"
Page 5-B15-12
Check11 = "OK"
WSDOT Bridge Design Manual M 23-50.14
April 2015
Chapter 5
Concrete Structures
dbolt := 1.0 in
Abolt :=
dbolt
2
2
Abolt = 0.785 in
Ft := 30 ksi
Fv := 18 ksi
PanelAxialLoad := 4in
fa :=
fv :=
L
2
PanelAxialLoad
4 Abolt
Vbolt
4 Abolt
ft :=
Mbolt
13.5in 2 Abolt
fa
2
fv
fv
Ft1 := if
0.33 , Ft , Ft 1
Fv
Fv
fa = 3.807 ksi
Axial Compressive
Stress
fv = 2.98 ksi
Shear Stress
Check12 = "OK"
ft = 70.35 ksi
Tensile Stress
Ft1 = 30 ksi
Check13 = "NG"
Page 5-B15-13
Concrete Structures
Chapter 5
Design Summary:
Wall Height:
H = 24 ft
d = 11.18 ft
Check1 = "OK"
Check2 = "OK"
Bar A:
barA = 10
Check3 = "OK"
Check4 = "OK"
Check5 = "OK"
Check6 = "OK"
Bar B:
barB = 9
Check7 = "OK"
Check8 = "OK"
Check9 = "OK"
Check10 = "OK"
LapSplice = 9.558 ft
Check11 = "OK"
Bolt Diameter:
Anchor Bolt Shear Stress Check:
dbolt = 1 in
Check12 = "OK"
Check13 = "NG"
Page 5-B15-14